DCM Config Guide10 [PDF]

Zitiervorschau

4011746 Rev AG

Digital Content Manager (DCM) Configuration Guide Software Package Release 10.10

For Your Safety

For Your Safety Explanation of Warning and Caution Icons Avoid personal injury and product damage! Do not proceed beyond any symbol until you fully understand the indicated conditions. The following warning and caution icons alert you to important information about the safe operation of this product: You may find this symbol in the document that accompanies this product. This symbol indicates important operating or maintenance instructions. You may find this symbol affixed to the product. This symbol indicates a live terminal where a dangerous voltage may be present; the tip of the flash points to the terminal device. You may find this symbol affixed to the product. This symbol indicates a protective ground terminal. You may find this symbol affixed to the product. This symbol indicates a chassis terminal (normally used for equipotential bonding). You may find this symbol affixed to the product. This symbol warns of a potentially hot surface. You may find this symbol affixed to the product and in this document. This symbol indicates an infrared laser that transmits intensity-modulated light and emits invisible laser radiation or an LED that transmits intensitymodulated light.

Important Please read this entire guide. If this guide provides installation or operation instructions, give particular attention to all safety statements included in this guide.

4011746 Rev AG

iii

Notices

Notices Trademark Acknowledgments Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. A listing of Cisco's trademarks can be found at www.cisco.com/go/trademarks. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby is a registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Other third party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1009R)

Publication Disclaimer Cisco Systems, Inc., assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions that may appear in this publication. We reserve the right to change this publication at any time without notice. This document is not to be construed as conferring by implication, estoppel, or otherwise any license or right under any copyright or patent, whether or not the use of any information in this document employs an invention claimed in any existing or later issued patent.

Copyright © 2012 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, by photocopy, microfilm, xerography, or any other means, or incorporated into any information retrieval system, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express permission of Cisco Systems, Inc.

AVC/H.264 Products With respect to each AVC/H.264 product, we are obligated to provide the following notice: AVC VIDEO LICENSE THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD ("AVC VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR 4011746 Rev AG

v

Notices

WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE . http://www.mpegla.com Accordingly, please be advised that service providers, content providers, and broadcasters are required to obtain a separate use license from MPEG LA prior to any use of AVC/H.264 encoders and/or decoders.

Open Source Licenses and Notices The document containing information about licenses and notices for open source software used in Digital Content Manager (DCM) with software package version 10.10 can be accessed via the Open Source Licensing and Notices link on the About box of the graphical user interface of the device.

vi

4011746 Rev AG

Safe Operations

Safe Operations The software described in this guide is used to monitor and / or manage Cisco equipment. Certain safety precautions should be observed when operating equipment of this nature. For product specific safety requirements refer to the appropriate section of the documentation accompanying your product.

4011746 Rev AG

vii

Contents

Contents For Your Safety

iii

Notices

v

Safe Operations Chapter 1 Introduction

vii 1

Introducing the Digital Content Manager ............................................................... 2 General ............................................................................................................ 2 Modular Concept ........................................................................................... 3 Principle .......................................................................................................... 9 Introducing the User Interface ................................................................................ 11 About the User Interface ............................................................................. 11 Using the Context Sensitive Online Help ................................................. 12 Accessing the Embedded DCM Publications .......................................... 12 Browsing through a Tree ............................................................................ 12 Using Shortcut Menus ................................................................................. 13 Using the Apply and Reload Button ......................................................... 13 About the Info Icon ...................................................................................... 14 Image Legend ............................................................................................... 14 Using Popup Windows ............................................................................... 14 Browse History ............................................................................................. 15 About Web Browser Toolbars .................................................................... 15 Displaying the About Window .................................................................. 15 Showing Contact Information .................................................................... 16 Device Security .......................................................................................................... 17 Introduction .................................................................................................. 17 GUI Accounts ............................................................................................... 19 Operating System Accounts ....................................................................... 21 Changing the Password Policy Rules of the DCM .................................. 23 Logging On or Off the User Interface ....................................................... 24 Login Page Information .............................................................................. 26 Changing the Session Timeout .................................................................. 27 Licensing .................................................................................................................... 28 Introduction .................................................................................................. 28 DCM Licenses............................................................................................... 28 Upgrading a License File ............................................................................ 36 Downgrading a License File ....................................................................... 36 4011746 Rev AG

ix

Contents

Installing a License File ............................................................................... 37 Checking the License Overview ................................................................ 38 License File Related Alarms ....................................................................... 39 Checking the Version Information ......................................................................... 41 Importing and Exporting Settings .......................................................................... 42 Introduction .................................................................................................. 42 Exporting Configuration Settings.............................................................. 42 Importing Configuration Settings ............................................................. 42 Using the Identify Me Utility .................................................................................. 45

Chapter 2 Configuration

47

Section A Device Configuration ......................................................................................... 49 Changing the Device Name..................................................................................... 50 Introduction .................................................................................................. 50 To Change the Device Name ...................................................................... 50 Modifying Network Settings of the Management Ports ..................................... 52 Introduction .................................................................................................. 52 To Change IPv4 Network Settings of the Management Ports ............... 53 Assigning a Routable IPv6 Address to a Management Port.................. 55 Checking the Network Settings of the Management Ports .................... 56 Adding or Removing SNMP Trap Destinations................................................... 57 Introduction .................................................................................................. 57 Defining SNMP Trap Destinations............................................................ 57 Changing the SNMP Trap Format............................................................. 58 Removing Trap Destinations...................................................................... 58 Changing the Read and Write Community Strings ................................ 59 Activating or Deactivating the DCM ..................................................................... 60 Introduction .................................................................................................. 60 Setting the Device Clock .......................................................................................... 62 Introduction .................................................................................................. 62 Changing the Device Time ......................................................................... 62 Synchronizing with a NTP Server ............................................................. 63 Checking NTP Statistics .............................................................................. 64 Synchronizing using an SI Table ............................................................... 66 Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports ....................... 68 Introduction .................................................................................................. 68 Changing the IP Alias Mode ...................................................................... 68 Adding an IPv4 Alias .................................................................................. 69 Adding an IPv6 Alias .................................................................................. 69 Removing IP Aliases.................................................................................... 70 Modifying the Static Route Table for the Management Ports ............................ 72 Introduction .................................................................................................. 72 Adding Static Route Entries ....................................................................... 72 Removing Static Routes Entries ................................................................. 73 Configuring IP Security ........................................................................................... 75 Introducing IP Security ............................................................................... 75 x

4011746 Rev AG

Contents

Key Exchange ............................................................................................... 75 IPsec Packets ................................................................................................. 75 Adding IPsec Peers ...................................................................................... 76 Deleting IPsec Peers..................................................................................... 76 Changing the IPsec Filter ............................................................................ 77 Bypassing IPsec by using the Hardware Key .......................................... 78 Configuring the GPIO Contacts .............................................................................. 80 Introduction .................................................................................................. 80 To Configure the GPIO Contacts ............................................................... 81 Assigning a GPIO Contact for Rebooting the DCM ............................... 82 Network Connections and Statistics ...................................................................... 83 External IP Services ..................................................................................... 83 Checking the Network Statistics ................................................................ 83 Section B Card Configuration ............................................................................................. 87 Changing the Name of an Interface Card.............................................................. 88 Introduction .................................................................................................. 88 To Rename a Card ....................................................................................... 88 Configuring a Co-Processor Card .......................................................................... 89 Changing Card Settings of a Co-Processor Card .................................... 89 Checking the Co-Processor Card Capacity .............................................. 95 Configuring a Transcoder Card ............................................................................ 100 Changing the Transcoder Card Calibration ........................................... 100 Configuring the Resource Setup of a Transcoder Card........................ 100 Changing Card Settings of an MFP Card ............................................................ 104 Enabling or Disabling Audio Processing ............................................... 104 Configuring the Resource Setup of a MFP Card ................................... 105 Configuring an IP Video Gateway Card ............................................................. 107 Changing Card Settings of an IP Video Gateway Card ....................... 107 Shutting Down the IP Video Gateway Card .......................................... 110 Section C Port Configuration ............................................................................................ 113 ASI Port Configuration .......................................................................................... 114 Introduction ................................................................................................ 114 To Configure an ASI Input Port............................................................... 115 To Configure an ASI Output Port ........................................................... 117 To Configure a Mirror Port ...................................................................... 118 Checking the ASI Port Parameters .......................................................... 119 GbE Port Configuration ......................................................................................... 121 Configuring the Interface Parameters of a GbE Port ............................ 121 Adding or Deleting Static ARP Table Entries ........................................ 134 Adapting the Static Route Table .............................................................. 136 Configuring VLAN .................................................................................... 138 Joining or Leaving GbE Ports to IGMP Multicast Groups ................... 142 Checking the Routes to Destination Devices ......................................... 147 Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature ....................................................... 148 Checking the GbE Statistics ...................................................................... 151 8-VSB RF Port Configuration ................................................................................ 156 Introduction ................................................................................................ 156 4011746 Rev AG

xi

Contents

Configuring the Input Settings of an 8-VSB RF Port ............................ 156 Configuring the Alarm Threshold Levels .............................................. 157 Checking the Interface Parameters of an 8-VSB RF Port ...................... 159 Checking the 8-VSB Statistics ................................................................... 160 DVB S2 RF Port Configuration.............................................................................. 162 Introduction ................................................................................................ 162 Configuring the DVB-S2 Interfaces ......................................................... 164 Checking the Port Status ........................................................................... 168 Checking the DVB-S2 Statistics ................................................................ 170 SDI Port Configuration .......................................................................................... 172 Introduction ................................................................................................ 172 Configuring an SDI Port ........................................................................... 173 Using SDI Generators ................................................................................ 173 Section D General Configuration ...................................................................................... 177 Changing the Display Mode ................................................................................. 178 Introduction ................................................................................................ 178 To Change the Display Mode of ON IDs, TS IDs, SIDs, and/or PIDs.............................................................................................................. 178

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

181

Introducing the Services Trees .............................................................................. 182 About the Tree ............................................................................................ 182 Top Node .................................................................................................... 184 Card Branch ................................................................................................ 185 Port Branch ................................................................................................. 186 CI-CAM branch .......................................................................................... 189 BISS Branch ................................................................................................. 190 Transport Stream Branch .......................................................................... 190 SDI Branch .................................................................................................. 193 3D Video Pair Branch ................................................................................ 195 Statmux Pools Branch................................................................................ 196 Statmux Pool Branch ................................................................................. 196 Encoder Branch .......................................................................................... 197 MFP Engine Branch ................................................................................... 198 Service Branch ............................................................................................ 199 VSE Branch ................................................................................................. 202 Rate Control Branch .................................................................................. 204 Component Branch .................................................................................... 205 General Remarks ........................................................................................ 207 Introducing the Advanced Routing Tree ............................................................ 208 Introduction ................................................................................................ 208 Output Service Branch .............................................................................. 209 Sources for Program Switching Branch .................................................. 210 Main, Alternate, Merged, Backup Service Branch ................................ 211 Merged Components Branch ................................................................... 212 Component Merge Rule Branch .............................................................. 213 xii

4011746 Rev AG

Contents

Source for Splicing Branch........................................................................ 214 Changing Tree Settings .......................................................................................... 215 Introduction ................................................................................................ 215 To Change the Tree Settings ..................................................................... 217 Representation Mode of the Incoming Services ................................................. 219 Introduction ................................................................................................ 219 Card Representation Mode ...................................................................... 219 Port Representation Mode ........................................................................ 219 Transport Stream Representation Mode ................................................ 220 Service Representation Mode ................................................................... 220 Changing the Representation Mode ....................................................... 221 Finding Services or Transport Streams in a Tree ............................................... 223 Introduction ................................................................................................ 223 To Search a Service or Transport Stream................................................ 223 Locating a Passed Service in the Inputs Tree ......................................... 224 Locating a Passed Service in the Outputs Tree...................................... 225 Determining the Presence of a Transport Stream Node in the Inputs Tree ... 226 Introduction ................................................................................................ 226 To Determine the Presence of a Transport Stream Node in the Inputs Tree .................................................................................................. 226

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

229

Section A Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or Transport Streams ................ 231 Settings of Incoming Services................................................................................ 232 Introduction ................................................................................................ 232 Changing Service Settings on the Service Settings Table of a Particular Incoming Transport Stream ................................................... 232 Changing Service Settings on the Service Settings Table of a Particular Port ............................................................................................ 233 Settings of Incoming Transport Streams ............................................................. 235 Introduction ................................................................................................ 235 Changing Setting of a Single Transport Stream .................................... 238 Changing Setting of Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular Port ............................................................................................................... 239 Adding Preconfigured Transport Stream Entries ................................. 241 Changing the Default Value for Incoming Transport Stream Parameters .................................................................................................. 242 Section B Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams ............................. 245 Creating Outgoing Transport Streams................................................................. 246 Introduction ................................................................................................ 246 Creating Outgoing Transport Streams by Adding Individual Transport Streams to a Port ...................................................................... 249 Creating a Transport Stream by Passing an Incoming Transport Stream to a Port .......................................................................................... 251 Creating SPTSs by Passing Incoming Services to a GbE Port.............. 254 Passing a Transport Stream Transparently to an Output .................... 256 4011746 Rev AG

xiii

Contents

Changing the Standard Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams ................... 259 Introduction ................................................................................................ 259 To Change Transport Stream Settings for a Single Transport Stream .......................................................................................................... 261 To Change Settings for Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular GbE Port .................................................................................... 263 Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams ................ 265 Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams ................. 267 Introduction ................................................................................................ 267 Changing Advanced Parameters for a Single Transport Stream ........ 268 To Change the Advanced Settings for Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular Port ...................................................................... 270 Configuring Automatic Pass Rules ...................................................................... 273 Introduction ................................................................................................ 273 Assigning or Changing TS Auto Pass Rules .......................................... 273 Changing the Default Values for the Advanced Transport Stream Settings .................................................................................................................. 275 Delaying Transparent Passed Transport Streams .............................................. 278 Section C Forward Error Correction ................................................................................ 279 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 280 General ........................................................................................................ 280 FEC Profiles ................................................................................................ 280 FEC Schemes............................................................................................... 283 FEC Packet Transportation ....................................................................... 283 Sending Arrangements ............................................................................. 284 Overhead and Latencies ........................................................................... 284 Requirements.............................................................................................. 284 Configuring the FEC Settings for Incoming Transport Streams ...................... 285 To Configure the FEC Settings for a Single Incoming Transport Stream .......................................................................................................... 285 To Configure the FEC Settings for Multiple Incoming Transport Streams of a Particular Port ...................................................................... 286 To Configure the FEC Settings for a Preconfigured Incoming Transport Stream ....................................................................................... 288 Changing the Default FEC Settings for Incoming Transport Streams ........................................................................................................ 290 Checking the FEC Statistics ...................................................................... 292 Configuring the FEC Settings for Outgoing Transport Streams ...................... 294 To Configure FEC Setting for a Single Outgoing Transport Stream .......................................................................................................... 294 To Configure FEC Settings for Multiple Outgoing Transport Streams of a Particular Port ...................................................................... 295 Generating FEC Errors .............................................................................. 297 Changing the Default FEC Settings for Outgoing Transport Streams ........................................................................................................ 299 Section D Service Re-Multiplexing ................................................................................... 301 Passing Individual Services ................................................................................... 302 xiv

4011746 Rev AG

Contents

Introduction ................................................................................................ 302 Drag and Drop Method ............................................................................ 302 Muxing Method ......................................................................................... 303 Preconfiguring Services ......................................................................................... 304 Introduction ................................................................................................ 304 Adding Preconfigured Services ............................................................... 304 Removing Preconfigured Services .......................................................... 306 Service Auto Passing Rules ................................................................................... 308 Introduction ................................................................................................ 308 Switching On or Off Service Passing Rules............................................ 308 Changing the Default Service Auto Pass Rules ..................................... 309 Passing all Services of an Incoming Transport Stream...................................... 310 Introduction ................................................................................................ 310 Drag and Drop Method ............................................................................ 310 Muxing Method ......................................................................................... 311 Using Virtual Services ............................................................................................ 312 Introduction ................................................................................................ 312 Adding Virtual Services ............................................................................ 312 Removing Virtual Services ....................................................................... 313 Using Still Picture Services .................................................................................... 315 Introduction ................................................................................................ 315 Creating Clips ............................................................................................. 315 Uploading or Removing Clips ................................................................. 317 Assigning a Clip to a Service .................................................................... 318 Section E Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components ......................................... 321 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 322 Merging Components ............................................................................................ 324 Introduction ................................................................................................ 324 Merging an Incoming Service into an Outgoing Service ..................... 324 Merging Particular Components of an Incoming Service in an Outgoing Service........................................................................................ 330 Adding Dummy Component References into a PMT .......................... 336 Merging Unreferenced Components ...................................................... 338 Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Service Components ................................. 344 Introduction ................................................................................................ 344 Checking Service Component Settings ................................................... 347 Tracking Rules ............................................................................................ 350 EMM Components.................................................................................................. 358 Introduction ................................................................................................ 358 Passing EMM Components ...................................................................... 358 Checking the EMM Component Parameters ......................................... 360 Remapping EMM Components ............................................................... 362 Removing EMM Components from an Outgoing Transport Stream .......................................................................................................... 363 Private Data Components ...................................................................................... 365 Introduction ................................................................................................ 365 Passing Private Data Components .......................................................... 365 4011746 Rev AG

xv

Contents

Checking the Private Data Component Parameters ............................. 366 Remapping Private Data Components ................................................... 367 Removing Private Data Components ..................................................... 369 Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components .................................... 371 Passing Unreferenced Components ........................................................ 371 Remapping Unreferenced Components ................................................. 376 To Check the Settings of Unreferenced Components ........................... 378 Removing Components ............................................................................ 379 Overruling Elementary Stream Type ................................................................... 381 Introduction ................................................................................................ 381 Creating ES Stream Type Overrule Entries ............................................ 382 Changing ES Type Overrule Entries ....................................................... 382 Removing ES Type Overrule Entries ...................................................... 383 Adding and Modifying PMT Descriptors ........................................................... 385 Introduction ................................................................................................ 385 Adding Descriptors Manually ................................................................. 386 Importing Descriptors from a File ........................................................... 387 Removing Descriptors Manually............................................................. 388 Removing Descriptors Using PMT Rules ............................................... 389 Ordering Descriptors Using PMT Rules ................................................. 391 Removing PMT Rules................................................................................ 392 Changing the Default PMT Descriptor Rule Parameters ..................... 393 Section F PSI/SI/PSIP Information .................................................................................. 397 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 398 Program Specific Information .................................................................. 398 Service Information ................................................................................... 398 Program System Information Protocol ................................................... 400 PowerVu...................................................................................................... 401 Changing the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode.......................................... 402 Introduction ................................................................................................ 402 To Change the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode for a Single Transport Stream ....................................................................................... 402 To Change the PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode for Multiple Transport Streams on a Particular Port .................................................. 403 To Change the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode............. 404 Viewing PSI/SI/PSIP Information ....................................................................... 406 Introduction ................................................................................................ 406 To View the PSI/SI/PSIP Information of Incoming Transport Streams ........................................................................................................ 406 To View the PSI/SI Information of Outgoing Transport Streams ...... 409 Providing an Outgoing Transport Stream with PSI/SI/PSIP Information .... 411 Introduction ................................................................................................ 411 Transparently Passing PSI/SI/PSIP Information from an Incoming Transport Stream...................................................................... 415 Passing Sub Table Information to an outgoing Transport Stream...... 418 Changing the PSI/SI/PSIG Output Mode ............................................. 427 Changing the Table Playout Interval ................................................................... 434 xvi

4011746 Rev AG

Contents

Introduction ................................................................................................ 434 Changing the Table Playout Interval Parameters for a Particular Transport Stream ....................................................................................... 436 Changing the Table Playout Interval Parameters for all Transport Streams on a Particular Port ..................................................................... 437 Changing the Default Playout Interval Parameters .............................. 438 Remapping Tables .................................................................................................. 439 Introduction ................................................................................................ 439 Remapping PSI/SI/PSIP Tables .............................................................. 439 Using the CA Descriptor Insertion Feature for imported CATs ...................... 441 Introduction ................................................................................................ 441 Switching On or Off the CA Descriptor Insertion Feature .................. 441 Changing SI Information ....................................................................................... 443 Determining the Network PID Insertion into the PAT ........................ 443 Changing SDT Settings for a Particular Service .................................... 444 Adding or Removing Time Offset Descriptors to or from a TOT ....... 447 Changing PSIP Information .................................................................................. 449 Modifying the TVCT or CVCT................................................................. 449 Modifying the STT ..................................................................................... 453 Changing the Start PID of the EIT/ETT Tables ..................................... 454 Changing the Default PSI/SI/PSIP Settings for Newly Created Transport Streams................................................................................................ 456 Importing SI via the User Interface ...................................................................... 459 Introduction ................................................................................................ 459 Importing SI via the User Interface ......................................................... 459 Deleting Imported NIT Information ....................................................... 460 Exporting PSI/SI ..................................................................................................... 461 Introduction ................................................................................................ 461 To Export PSI/SI from Incoming Transport Streams ........................... 461 To Export PSI/SI from Outgoing Transport Streams ........................... 462 Section G Changing Service Parameters .......................................................................... 465 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 466 To Check the Service Routings for a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream .................................................................................................................... 467 To Change the Settings of Outgoing Services ..................................................... 468 Determining the PCR for an Outgoing Service .................................................. 470 Introduction ................................................................................................ 470 To Determine the PCR for an Outgoing Service.................................... 470 Adding a Dummy PCR to an Outgoing Service.................................... 471 Delaying Service Components .............................................................................. 473 Introduction ................................................................................................ 473 Example 1 .................................................................................................... 474 Example 2 .................................................................................................... 474 Adding PID Sync Delay Groups .............................................................. 475 Deleting PID Sync Delay Groups ............................................................ 477 Adjusting Audio Level ........................................................................................... 478 Introduction ................................................................................................ 478 4011746 Rev AG

xvii

Contents

Licensing ..................................................................................................... 479 Limitations .................................................................................................. 479 Creating Audio Leveling Entries ............................................................. 479 Removing Audio Leveling Entries .......................................................... 480 To Change Scrambling Settings of Outgoing Services ...................................... 482 To Change Descrambling Settings of Outgoing Services .................................. 484 Section H Activating or Stopping Streaming .................................................................. 487 Activating or Stopping Streaming of Outgoing Transport Streams ................ 488 Introduction ................................................................................................ 488 To Activate a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream ........................... 488 To Activate All Outgoing Transport Streams on a Port ....................... 488 To Stop a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream.................................. 489 To Stop all Outgoing Transport Streams on a Port ............................... 489 Activating or Stopping Streaming of Outgoing Services .................................. 491 Introduction ................................................................................................ 491 Activating or Stopping Streaming via the Outputs Tree ..................... 491 Activating or Stopping Streaming via the Service Settings Table ...... 491 Modifying the Default Value of the Streaming Parameter for Outgoing Services ...................................................................................... 492 Section I Removing Outgoing Services and Transport Streams .................................. 493 Removing Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream ................................. 494 Introduction ................................................................................................ 494 To Remove Individual Services ............................................................... 494 To Remove a Number of Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream .......................................................................................................... 494 To Remove all Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream ............. 495 Removing Outgoing Transport Streams.............................................................. 497 Removing a Particular Transport Stream ............................................... 497 Removing a Number of Transport Streams ........................................... 497 Section J Viewing Service Grooming ............................................................................... 499 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 500 To View Service Grooming.................................................................................... 504

Chapter 5 Transcoding

505

Introduction ............................................................................................................. 506 General ........................................................................................................ 506 Licensing ..................................................................................................... 508 Processing Possibilities ............................................................................. 509 Service Redundancy .................................................................................. 509 Using the Service Overview Page............................................................ 510 Routing a Service to the Output via a Processing Card .................................... 515 Introduction ................................................................................................ 515 Passing a Service to a Processing Card ................................................... 515 Passing a Transcoded Service or PIP Stream to the Output ................ 517 Merging Components from the Processing Card into an Outgoing Service........................................................................................ 518 xviii

4011746 Rev AG

Contents

Blocking Components of Services passed to an MFP Card ................. 521 Naming the Service in the Processing Tree ......................................................... 525 Introduction ................................................................................................ 525 To Name the Service .................................................................................. 525 Processing Video Components ............................................................................. 526 Configuring Video Components for Services on a Transcoder Card ............................................................................................................. 526 Configuring Video Components for Services on a MFP Card ............ 528 Configuring PIP Streams ....................................................................................... 534 Introduction ................................................................................................ 534 To Create a PIP Stream.............................................................................. 535 Setting Up the Closed Captions for a Transcoded Video Component ............ 537 Introduction ................................................................................................ 537 Configuring the Closed Caption Settings for a Transcoded Video Component ................................................................................................. 538 Transcoding Audio Components ......................................................................... 540 Introduction ................................................................................................ 540 To Configure the Transcoding Settings for Audio Components processed by a Transcoder Card.............................................................. 540 To Configure the Transcoding Settings for Audio Components Processed by an MFP Card ....................................................................... 543 Configuring the Service Related Transcode Settings of a Service.................... 557 Introduction ................................................................................................ 557 To Configure the Service Transcode Settings ........................................ 557 Removing Services or PIP Streams from a Processing Card ............................ 560 Introduction ................................................................................................ 560 Removing Services or PIP Streams using the Right-click Menu ......... 560 Removing PIP Streams using the Service Overview Table.................. 560 Removing Services using the Service Overview Table ........................ 561

Chapter 6 Rate Control

563

Introduction ............................................................................................................. 564 General ........................................................................................................ 564 Licensing ..................................................................................................... 564 Applications................................................................................................ 564 Bitrate Limiting .......................................................................................... 565 Statistical Re-multiplexing ........................................................................ 566 Card Settings .............................................................................................. 568 Working with Rate Control Groups ..................................................................... 569 Introduction ................................................................................................ 569 Creating Rate Control Groups ................................................................. 571 Changing Rate Control Group Settings .................................................. 574 Removing Rate Control Groups .............................................................. 577 Handling the Rate Control Group Population ................................................... 580 Introduction ................................................................................................ 580 Introduction ................................................................................................ 580 4011746 Rev AG

xix

Contents

Configuring the Population of a Rate Control Group ....................................... 584 Introduction ................................................................................................ 584 Configuring Services for an Selective Services or All Services Rate Control Group ................................................................................... 584 Configuring SPTSs for an Multiple SPTS Rate Control Group ........... 587 Checking the Rate Control Comparison .............................................................. 591 Introduction ................................................................................................ 591 To Check a Rate Control Comparison .................................................... 592 Rate Control Examples ........................................................................................... 594 Transport Stream with Multiple Rate Control Groups ........................ 594 Statistical Re-multiplexing of a SPTS Rate Control Group .................. 595 Statistical Multiplexing in Combination with Rate Limiting .............. 596

Chapter 7 Logo Insertion

599

Introduction ............................................................................................................. 600 General ........................................................................................................ 600 Licensing ..................................................................................................... 601 Using the Logo Insertion Overview Page .............................................. 601 Using Libraries ........................................................................................................ 605 Logo Library ............................................................................................... 605 Font Library ................................................................................................ 612 Banner Library............................................................................................ 614 Routing a Service to the Output via the Logo Inserter ...................................... 622 Introduction ................................................................................................ 622 Passing an Incoming Service to the Logo Inserter ................................ 622 Passing a Service from the Logo Inserter to the Output ...................... 622 Merging Components from the Logo Inserter into an Outgoing Service.......................................................................................................... 623 Using DCM's Logo Insertion Feature .................................................................. 627 Introduction ................................................................................................ 627 Logo Assignment ....................................................................................... 627 Starting and Stopping Logo Insertion ..................................................... 629 Using DCM's Banner Insertion Feature ............................................................... 631 Introduction ................................................................................................ 631 Configuring the Banner Insertion Settings............................................. 631 Performing a Banner Insertion ................................................................. 632 Stopping a Banner Insertion ..................................................................... 634 Using DCM's EAS Alert Insertion Feature .......................................................... 635 Introduction ................................................................................................ 635 About EAS Alert Insertion Controlled by an EAS System using the SCTE18 Protocol .................................................................................. 635 Steps to Take ............................................................................................... 636 Allowing EAS Alert Insertion for a Particular Service ......................... 637 Performing a Manual EAS Alert Insertion ............................................. 637 Using EAS Proxies ..................................................................................... 638

xx

4011746 Rev AG

Contents

Chapter 8 Digital Program Insertion and Program Switching

643

Section A Digital Program Insertion ................................................................................ 645 Introducing Digital Program Insertion ................................................................ 646 General ........................................................................................................ 646 Splicing Event Triggered by an AD Server ............................................ 650 Splicing Event Triggered by a Cue Insertion Device ............................ 652 Splicing Event Triggered by the DCM .................................................... 652 SCTE35 Cue Insertion Feature ................................................................. 653 Co-Processor Card Processing Load ....................................................... 653 Changing the Local Program Insertion Settings - Mode ...................... 654 Configuring Splicing Channels ............................................................................. 655 Introduction ................................................................................................ 655 Configuring Splicing Channels using the Output Service DPI Page of a Particular Transport Stream .................................................... 658 Configuring Splicing Channels using the Output Port DPI Page of all Transport Streams on a Particular Port......................................... 662 Configuring Splicing Channels using Advanced Routing .................. 667 Configuring Splicing Channels using the Drag and Drop Method of Advanced Routing ................................................................................ 669 Defining Custom DPI Mapping Entries ................................................. 672 Handling the ETV Components for Splicing Events Triggered by an AD Server .............................................................................................. 675 Disabling Splicing Channels .................................................................... 679 Checking the IP Address of the AD Servers ....................................................... 681 Triggering Splicing Events Manually .................................................................. 682 Introduction ................................................................................................ 682 To Trigger a Primary / Insertion Channel Substitution....................... 682 To Trigger a Insertion / Primary Channel Substitution....................... 682 Checking the Status of Splicing Channels ........................................................... 684 Introduction ................................................................................................ 684 To Check the Status of the Splicing Channels ....................................... 684 Section B Program Switching ............................................................................................ 687 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 688 General ........................................................................................................ 688 Seamless Program Switching ................................................................... 689 Configuring Alternate Services ............................................................................. 691 Adding or Deleting Alternate Services ................................................... 691 Switching On or Off Seamless Program Switching .............................. 698 Merging a Service into a Main, Alternate, or Virtual Service .............. 701 Merging Components into a Main, Alternate, or Virtual Service ....... 706 Adding a Backup Service to a Main, Merged, or Alternate Service ... 715 Configuring the Splicing Channel ........................................................... 721 Performing Program Switching ............................................................................ 728 Introduction ................................................................................................ 728 Activating the Service ............................................................................... 728

4011746 Rev AG

xxi

Contents

Chapter 9 Scrambling & Descrambling

729

Section A DVB Simulcrypt Scrambling............................................................................ 731 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 732 Introducing Conditional Access System.............................................................. 733 Introduction ................................................................................................ 733 Scrambling, Control Word, and Crypto Period..................................... 734 Access Criteria and Access Rights ........................................................... 734 Entitlement Control Messages ................................................................. 735 Entitlement Management Messages ....................................................... 737 Event Information Scheduler ................................................................... 738 PSI/SI Generator ........................................................................................ 739 Private Data Generator ............................................................................. 741 Scrambling Levels ...................................................................................... 741 Simulcrypt Scrambling.............................................................................. 743 Timing Parameters..................................................................................... 743 Steps To Take ........................................................................................................... 747 Changing the Scrambling Mode ........................................................................... 750 Introduction ................................................................................................ 750 Changing the Scrambling Settings for a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream ....................................................................................... 750 Changing the Default Scrambling Mode to DVB Simulcrypt ............. 751 Allowing Scrambling for Services ........................................................................ 753 Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters .............................................. 755 Entitlement Control Message Generators .............................................. 755 Entitlement Management Message Generators ..................................... 769 Event Information Schedulers.................................................................. 776 PSI/SI Generators ...................................................................................... 779 Control Word Generators ......................................................................... 782 Changing the Scrambler Properties ........................................................ 786 Configuring the Access Criteria ............................................................................ 788 Introduction ................................................................................................ 788 General Settings ......................................................................................... 789 Setting up the Transport Stream Model ................................................. 789 Defining Access Criteria ........................................................................... 802 Scrambling Control ................................................................................................. 811 Introduction ................................................................................................ 811 General Settings ......................................................................................... 815 Changing the ECM ID Mode.................................................................... 816 Checking the DCM Devices to which a Transport Stream Belongs ... 817 Enabling or Disabling Scrambling ........................................................... 818 Event logging.............................................................................................. 820 Advanced Settings ..................................................................................... 821 Section B DVB Simulcrypt Descrambling........................................................................ 825 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 826 General ........................................................................................................ 826 CI-CAM Backup ......................................................................................... 826 xxii

4011746 Rev AG

Contents

Licensing ..................................................................................................... 826 Descrambling Levels ................................................................................. 826 Steps to Take ............................................................................................................ 828 Configuring the CI-CAMs ..................................................................................... 829 Introduction ................................................................................................ 829 Changing CI-CAM Settings ...................................................................... 829 Changing the Backup Settings of CI-CAMs ........................................... 830 Setting Up the Processing Tree for Descrambling.............................................. 832 Passing Incoming EMM Components to a CI-CAM ............................. 832 Routing a Service to the Descrambler ..................................................... 832 Routing a Transport Stream to the Descrambler ................................... 833 Configuring the Descrambling Setting of Services ............................... 834 Routing a Service from the Descrambler to the Output ....................... 835 Routing a Transport Stream from the Descrambler to the Output ..... 836 Routing a Service from the Descrambler to a Logo Inserter, Transcoder, or MFP Card ......................................................................... 838 Removing EMMs, Services, or a Transport Stream from a CICAM............................................................................................................. 839 Starting and Stopping Descrambling ................................................................... 840 Checking the CI-CAM Status ................................................................................ 841 Introduction ................................................................................................ 841 To Check the Status of a CI-CAM............................................................ 841 Using the MMI Interface for Communicating with a CI-CAM ........................ 843 Introduction ................................................................................................ 843 Opening the MMI Interface ...................................................................... 843 Section C BISS Scrambling ................................................................................................. 845 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 846 General ........................................................................................................ 846 About Session Word and Control Word ................................................ 846 Operation Modes ....................................................................................... 846 Scrambling Services ................................................................................................ 847 Configuring the BISS Scrambling Parameters for an Outgoing Transport Stream ....................................................................................... 847 Starting or Stopping Scrambling of Outgoing Services ........................ 849 Section D BISS Descrambling ............................................................................................ 853 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 854 General ........................................................................................................ 854 Licensing ..................................................................................................... 854 Descrambling Services using an Interface Card with Co-Processor Card ...... 855 Configuring the BISS Descrambling Parameters for an Outgoing Transport Stream ....................................................................................... 855 Starting or Stopping Descrambling of BISS-1 Scrambled Services ..... 857 Descrambling Services using a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card .............................. 860 Introduction ................................................................................................ 860 Routing an Incoming Service to the BISS Descrambler ........................ 860 Routing an Incoming Transport Stream to the BISS Descrambler...... 861 Routing a Service from the Descrambler to the Output ....................... 861 4011746 Rev AG

xxiii

Contents

Routing a Transport Stream from the Descrambler to the Output ..... 862 Checking the Transport Stream References ........................................... 864 Configuring the Descrambling Settings for a Transport Stream ........ 864 Configuring the Descrambling Setting for Individual Services .......... 865 Removing Services or Transport Streams from the Descrambler ....... 866 To Start and to Stop Descrambling.......................................................... 866

Chapter 10 IP/ASI Video Gateway

869

Introduction ............................................................................................................. 870 General ........................................................................................................ 870 3D Video Support ...................................................................................... 871 Forward Error Correction ......................................................................... 871 Genlocking .................................................................................................. 872 Redundancy ................................................................................................ 872 Hitless Merge Feature ............................................................................... 873 Licensing ..................................................................................................... 873 Specifying Incoming RTP Streams ....................................................................... 874 Introduction ................................................................................................ 874 Adding RTP Stream Entries ..................................................................... 874 Removing RTP Stream Entries ................................................................. 876 Checking Incoming Video Signal Parameters .................................................... 877 Introduction ................................................................................................ 877 To Check Settings of Incoming Video Signals ....................................... 877 Configuring Incoming Streams ............................................................................. 878 Changing Settings of Incoming SDI or ASI Streams ............................. 878 Changing Settings of Incoming RTP Streams ........................................ 879 Routing Streams to the Output ............................................................................. 884 Routing an Incoming RTP Stream to an SDI Output Port ................... 884 Routing an Incoming ASI Stream to an SDI Output Port .................... 884 Routing an Incoming SDI Stream to the GbE Port ................................ 884 Routing an Incoming SDI Stream to an ASI Output Port .................... 885 Routing a Generated SDI Stream to an SDI Output Port ..................... 885 Routing an SDI Stream to the Monitor Port ........................................... 886 Viewing Routings ...................................................................................... 887 Configuring Outgoing Streams............................................................................. 890 Changing Settings of Outgoing SDI Streams ......................................... 890 Changing Settings of Outgoing ASI Streams ......................................... 891 Configuring Settings of Outgoing RTP Streams.................................... 894 Binding and Unbinding Video Streams ............................................................... 903 Binding 3D Video Pairs ............................................................................. 903 Unbinding 3D Video Pairs........................................................................ 904 Using the Hitless Merge Feature .......................................................................... 905 Introduction ................................................................................................ 905 Configuring the Hitless Merge Feature .................................................. 906 Checking the Hitless Merge Statistics ..................................................... 906 Activating or Stopping Streaming ........................................................................ 909 xxiv

4011746 Rev AG

Contents

Activating Streaming................................................................................. 909 Stopping Streaming ................................................................................... 909 Checking IP Video Gateway Statistics ................................................................. 910 Introduction ................................................................................................ 910 To Check the IP Video Gateway Statistics.............................................. 910 Reset the IP Video Gateway Statistics ..................................................... 911

Chapter 11 Backup Scenarios

913

GbE Port Backup ..................................................................................................... 914 Introduction ................................................................................................ 914 Changing the GbE Port Backup Parameters .......................................... 915 Transport Stream Backup ...................................................................................... 917 Introducing Transport Stream Backup ................................................... 917 Assigning Backup Transport Streams..................................................... 918 Performing a Manual Backup Transition ............................................... 925 Changing the Backup Switching Parameters......................................... 927 Transport Stream Redundancy using Hitless Switchover ................................ 928 Concept........................................................................................................ 928 Steps To Take.............................................................................................. 929 Checking the Application ......................................................................... 929 Transport Stream Backup Using Anycast ........................................................... 930 Introduction ................................................................................................ 930 Configuring the RIP Settings for a Transport Stream ........................... 931 Service Backup ........................................................................................................ 936 Introducing Service Backup ..................................................................... 936 Assigning Backup Services to Main and Merged Services .................. 938 Assigning Backup Services to a Service Processed by a Transcoder or MFP card ........................................................................... 941 Performing a Backup Transition .............................................................. 943 Changing the Backup Switching Parameters......................................... 944 Triggering a Backup Transition ............................................................... 945 SDI/RTP Service Backup ....................................................................................... 947 Introduction ................................................................................................ 947 Assigning a Backup Stream to an SDI Stream ....................................... 947 Assigning a Backup Stream to an RTP Stream ...................................... 948 Performing a Main-to-Backup or Backup-to-Main Transition ............ 949 DCM Device Backup Managed by ROSA Element Manager ........................... 950 Introduction ................................................................................................ 950 Steps to Take ............................................................................................... 953 Performing a Manual Restore Action after a Main-to-Backup Transition .................................................................................................... 955 Standalone Device Backup .................................................................................... 956 Introduction ................................................................................................ 956 Steps to Take ............................................................................................... 959 Special Cases............................................................................................... 961 Configuring the Device Backup Settings ................................................ 962 4011746 Rev AG

xxv

Contents

Performing a Manual Restore .................................................................. 964 Standalone Live-Live Device Backup .................................................................. 966 Introduction ................................................................................................ 966 Steps to Take ............................................................................................... 966 Configuring the Device Backup Settings ................................................ 966 IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager ............................. 969 Introduction ................................................................................................ 969

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

971

Alarm Overview ..................................................................................................... 972 Alarms ......................................................................................................... 972 Configuring the Alarms ......................................................................................... 993 Introduction ................................................................................................ 993 Enabling or Disabling Alarm Message Reporting for all Alarms ....... 993 Generating Test Messages ........................................................................ 994 Configuring the Settings of the Device Alarms ..................................... 994 Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms ................................. 995 Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers .............................................. 997 Configuring Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers.......................... 1005 Configuring the Advanced Alarm Settings for an Outgoing Transport Stream ..................................................................................... 1010 Configuring the Card Not Operational Alarm .................................... 1012 Configuring Device Operational Failure Alarm.................................. 1015 Checking the Alarms ............................................................................................ 1018 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1018 Checking the Alarm Summary Page ..................................................... 1019 Alarms related to Incoming Transport Streams .................................. 1020 Alarms Details related to Incoming Transport Streams ..................... 1021 Alarms related to Incoming Services .................................................... 1021 Alarms Details related to Incoming Services ....................................... 1023 Alarms related to Incoming SDI or RTP Streams ................................ 1023 Alarm Details related to incoming SDI or RTP Streams .................... 1024 Alarms related to the Transcoding Process.......................................... 1025 Alarm Details related to the Transcoding Process .............................. 1026 Alarms related to Outgoing Transport Streams .................................. 1026 Alarms Details related to Outgoing Transport Streams ..................... 1027 Alarms related to Outgoing Services .................................................... 1028 Alarms Details related to Outgoing Services ....................................... 1029 Alarms related to Outgoing SDI or RTP Streams................................ 1030 Alarm Details related to outgoing SDI or RTP Streams ..................... 1030 To Check the Device Status Overview Table ....................................... 1031 Downloading the Alarm History........................................................... 1032

xxvi

4011746 Rev AG

Contents

Chapter 13 Additional Features

1033

Section A Digital Transport Formatter .......................................................................... 1035 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 1036 General ...................................................................................................... 1036 Source Stream Combining ...................................................................... 1036 Scrambling ................................................................................................ 1036 ASI Interface Card Mode ........................................................................ 1037 Changing the ASI Interface Card Mode ............................................................ 1038 Configuring a DTF Transport Stream ................................................................ 1039 Configuring Scrambling....................................................................................... 1041 Providing DTF Keys ................................................................................ 1041 Entering the SWDK ................................................................................. 1042 Removing the DTF keys and SWDK from the Device ........................ 1043 Configuring the Scrambling Parameters of the DTF Transport Stream ........................................................................................................ 1043 Configuring the Scrambling Parameters for Transport Streams within a DTF ............................................................................................. 1043 Section B Integrating the DCM into Single Frequency Networks ............................. 1045 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 1046 About Single Frequency Networks ....................................................... 1046 About the Timing Information .............................................................. 1047 Integrating a DCM into a SFN Application ......................................... 1047 Steps to Take .......................................................................................................... 1048 Changing the ASI SFN Interface Card Settings ................................................ 1049 Changing Reference Clock Settings ................................................................... 1050 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1050 To Change Reference Clock Settings..................................................... 1050 Changing SFN Adaptation Settings ................................................................... 1052 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1052 To Change SFN Adaptation Settings .................................................... 1052 MIP Synchronization ............................................................................................ 1055 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1055 Configuring the MIP Synchronization Settings................................... 1055 Section C Deterministic Remote Re-multiplexing ........................................................ 1057 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 1058 About Deterministic Re-Multiplexing .................................................. 1058 Application Overview ............................................................................. 1058 Integrating the DCM Devices into an SFN Application with Deterministic Re-multiplexing......................................................................... 1060 Changing the ASI SFN Interface Card Settings ................................... 1060 Inserting Index Packets into the CYTSs ................................................ 1061 Transparently Passing and Delaying the CYTSs ................................. 1061 Transport Stream Muxing and RDCS Creation ................................... 1061 Creating the DTF Stream ........................................................................ 1062 Modifying the Deterministic Re-Multiplexing Settings .................................. 1063 Labeling the Packet Indexer ................................................................... 1063 4011746 Rev AG

xxvii

Contents

Configuring the Packet Indexer Settings for an Outgoing Transport Stream ..................................................................................... 1063 Changing the RDCS Settings ............................................................................... 1064 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1064 To Change the RDCS Settings ................................................................ 1065 Section D IP Statmux Controller ..................................................................................... 1067 DCM IP Statmux Concept ................................................................................... 1068 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1068 DCM IP Statistical Multiplexing ............................................................ 1070 IP Statmux Configuration .................................................................................... 1073 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1073 Configuring the DCM IP Statmux Controller Setting ........................ 1073 Setting Up ................................................................................................. 1074 To Set Up the Bitrate Budget .................................................................. 1077 To Set Up the Statistical Multiplexing Parameters.............................. 1079 Changing Statmux Pool Settings using the DCM GUI .................................... 1083 Changing Statmux Pool Settings ........................................................... 1083 Checking the Statmux Settings of the Encoders .................................. 1086 Checking the Video Bitrate Overview of a Statmux Pool .................. 1087 Section E D9036 Statmux Controller .............................................................................. 1091 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 1092 General ...................................................................................................... 1092 About StatMux Controlling System ...................................................... 1092 Bandwidth Management ........................................................................ 1093 About the Statmux Community ............................................................ 1094 Configuring the D9036 Statmux Application ................................................... 1095 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1095 To Configure the GbE Interface Card ................................................... 1095 Determining the GbE Port Pair used for Statmux Communication . 1096 Configuring the Statmux Community .................................................. 1097 Configuring the Statmux Pool IP Assignment Policies ...................... 1097 Changing the Quality of Service Settings ............................................. 1098 Modifying the Statmux Community Population ............................................. 1100 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1100 Adding Encoders to the Statmux Community .................................... 1100 Adding VSEs to the Statmux Community ........................................... 1101 Removing VSEs from the Statmux Community .................................. 1101 Removing Encoders from the Statmux Community .......................... 1102 Checking the Statmux Community Population .................................. 1102 Managing the D9036 Statmux Pools .................................................................. 1104 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1104 About the Pool Settings........................................................................... 1104 Adding D9036 Statmux Pools via Statmux Pools Overview ............. 1105 Changing D9036 Statmux Pool Settings ............................................... 1106 Checking the Bitrates of Statmux Pools ................................................ 1107 Removing D9036 Statmux Pools ............................................................ 1108 Handling VSEs ...................................................................................................... 1110 xxviii

4011746 Rev AG

Contents

Introduction .............................................................................................. 1110 Adding VSEs to a Statmux Pool ............................................................ 1111 Changing Statmux Settings of VSEs...................................................... 1112 Removing VSEs ........................................................................................ 1113 Checking the VSE Overview of the Statmux Pools ............................. 1114

Chapter 14 Checking Bitrates

1117

Checking the Bitrates in the Input and Output Tree ....................................... 1118 To Check the Bitrates in the Service Overview Trees ......................... 1118 Opening a Popup Window with Transport Stream Bitrates ............. 1119 Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables ............................................................. 1121 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1121 Checking the Input Bitrates .................................................................... 1122 Checking the Output Bitrates ................................................................. 1128 Checking the Bitrates of the Services in the Processing Tree ............ 1137 Restarting the Bitrate Measurement...................................................... 1138

Chapter 15 Software Upgrade

1141

Introduction ........................................................................................................... 1142 System Requirements .............................................................................. 1143 Upgrading the DCM Software using its User Interface .................................. 1144 Upgrading the DCM Software using Upgrade-It............................................. 1146 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1146 Opening the Upgrade-It Tool ................................................................. 1146 Selecting the Software Module .............................................................. 1147 Selecting the Device ................................................................................. 1148 Flashing the Software .............................................................................. 1149

Appendix A Customer Information

1151

Product Support .................................................................................................... 1152 Obtaining Support ................................................................................... 1152 Support Telephone Numbers ................................................................. 1152 Return Products for Repair.................................................................................. 1154 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1154 Obtaining an RMA Number and Shipping Address .......................... 1154 Packing and Shipping the Product ........................................................ 1155

Appendix B Extended Operations

1157

Viewing Trace Logs .............................................................................................. 1158 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1158 Determining the Trace Log Content...................................................... 1159 Opening a Trace Log in the User Interface........................................... 1160 Checking Troubleshooting Information ............................................... 1162 4011746 Rev AG

xxix

Contents

Downloading Trace Logs ........................................................................ 1163 Downloading MIBs from the DCM .................................................................... 1165 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1165 To Download MIB files ........................................................................... 1165 Capturing Live Network Data ............................................................................ 1167 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1167 To Capture Network Data ...................................................................... 1167 Restarting the System ........................................................................................... 1169 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1169 To Restart the DCM System ................................................................... 1171 Checking the CPU Load....................................................................................... 1174 Using DCM's Script Engine ................................................................................. 1175 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1175 Working with DCM's Script Library ..................................................... 1175 Starting and Stopping Scripts ................................................................ 1176 Downloading a Script Log file from the DCM .................................... 1177

Appendix C Additional Configuration

1179

Configuring IPsec on Windows .......................................................................... 1180 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1180 To Configure IPsec on a Computer Running Windows XP or Windows 2000 Server .............................................................................. 1180 To Configure IPsec on a Computer Running Windows Vista .......... 1196 To Configure IPsec on a Computer Running Windows 7.................. 1206 Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration ................................................... 1220 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1220 Removing the Old CA Certificate.......................................................... 1220 Connecting a PC to the DCM ................................................................. 1220 Installing the New CA Certificate ......................................................... 1223 Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration ...................................... 1231 Installing and Removing CA Certificates .......................................................... 1234 Introduction .............................................................................................. 1234 Installing the CA Certificate into Microsoft Internet Explorer .......... 1234 Installing CA Certificates into Mozilla Firefox .................................... 1238 Removing the DCM CA Certificate from the Microsoft Internet Explorer ..................................................................................................... 1242 Removing the DCM CA Certificate from the Mozilla Firefox Web Browser...................................................................................................... 1244

xxx

Glossary

1247

Index

1273

4011746 Rev AG

Safe Operations

Preface Introduction This configuration guide provides the necessary information to configure and to operate the Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900, the Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content Manager, the Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager, and the Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager using the user interface of the device. In this configuration guide these devices are further indicated by DCM.

Audience The audience of this configuration guide includes authorized and trained personnel who are responsible for the configuration and operation of the DCM.

Required Knowledge To use this configuration guide, the personnel should have a basic knowledge about the technology used in relation to this product.

Related Publication Refer to the following publications for more information concerning the DCM:  Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 - System Guide, part number 4011745. This guide is shipped with the DCM.  Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content Manager - System Guide, part number 4034565. This guide is shipped with the DCM.  Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager - System Guide, part number 4026665. This guide is shipped with the DCM.  Cisco DCM Series D9902 Digital Content Manager - System Guide, part number 4042778. This guide is shipped with the DCM.  Implementation Design Guide - DCM Integration into ROSA NMS, part number 4043022.  Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 - Data Sheet  Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content Manager - Data Sheet  Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager - Data Sheet  Cisco DCM Series D9902 Digital Content Manager - Data Sheet The data sheets can be found on our web site at the following location: 4011746 Rev AG

xxxi

Safe Operations http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/ps9230/products_data_sheets_list.html

 Digital Content Manager (DCM) IP Statmux Application Note, part number 4022070  ROSA Network Management System - User's Guide, part number 4014778  ROSA Element Manager - User's Guide  ROSA Element Manager - Installation and Operation Guide  IIOP Protocol Driver - User's Guide, part number: 6985041  SI Editor - User's Guide, part number: 6985061  Statmux Pool Manager - User's Guide, part number 4022297  Digital Headend Backup - User's Guide, part number 6985066

xxxii

4011746 Rev AG

1 Chapter 1 Introduction General This chapter provides an introduction to the Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900, the Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content Manager, Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager, and Cisco DCM Series D9902 Digital Content Manager and a description how to work with the user interface of these devices.

In This Chapter       

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Digital Content Manager ...........................................2 Introducing the User Interface ............................................................11 Device Security ......................................................................................17 Licensing ................................................................................................28 Checking the Version Information .....................................................41 Importing and Exporting Settings ......................................................42 Using the Identify Me Utility ..............................................................45

1

Chapter 1 Introduction

Introducing the Digital Content Manager General The Digital Content Manager (DCM) is a compact MPEG processing platform capable of supporting extremely high numbers of video stream processing. This platform provides a 1U system, called Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager (for short D9901), and three 2U system, called Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 (D9900), Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content Manager (D9900), and Cisco DCM Series D9902 Digital Content Manager (D9902). The following illustration depicts a Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager, a Cisco DCM Series D9902 Digital Content Manager, a Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content Manager, and a Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900.

The D9901 device provides two I/O slots and the D9900 and D9902 device four I/O slots. Each I/O slot can be populated with:

2

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Digital Content Manager

 an ASI Interface Card containing 10 ASI ports  an ASI SFN Interface Card containing eight ASI ports and two GPS reference signal inputs  a GbE Interface Card containing two pairs GbE ethernet ports  an 8-VSB Interface Card with four or eight 8-VSB RF input ports  a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card with 2 DVB S2 RF ports and 2 DVB CI slots or 4 DVB S2 RF ports and 4 DVB CI slots  a Transcoder Card  an MFP Card or  an IP Video Gateway Card (D9901 and D9902 device only). The IP Video Gateway Card exists in a GbE version and a 10GbE version containing 2 GbE or 2 10GbE ethernet ports, 6 SDI ports, a reference input port, and a monitoring output port. These devices provide hot swappable and redundant power supplies. A more detailed description of these devices together with technical specifications of the housing and equipment can be found on the data sheet of the corresponding device.

Modular Concept The DCM is a fully modular concept built around a 1 RU or 2 RU high housing. The flexible modular concept ensures easy system capacity upgrades. The following illustration represents the modular concept of the DCM.

4011746 Rev AG

3

Chapter 1 Introduction

 Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 / Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content Manager

 Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager

4

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Digital Content Manager

 Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager

The following DCM equipment is available:  DCM housing  100 - 240 V ac Power Supply Unit (PSU)

 - 48 - - 60 V dc PSU

4011746 Rev AG

5

Chapter 1 Introduction

 ASI Interface Card

 ASI SFN Interface Card

 GbE Interface Card

 8-VSB Interface Card

6

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Digital Content Manager

 DVB-S2/CI Interface Card

 Transcoder Card

 MFP Card

 Co-Processor Card (plug-on card for ASI, ASI SFN, and GbE Interface Card)

 FEC Card (plug-on card for GbE Interface Card)

4011746 Rev AG

7

Chapter 1 Introduction

 IP Video Gateway Card (Cisco DCM Series D9901/D9902 Digital Content Manager only)

 JPEG2000 Card (plug-on card for IP Video Gateway Card)

 PSU slot cover plate

 Interface card slot cover plate

When the DCM leaves our assembly line, the device is configured as ordered. When the device is not fully populated, the device can always be upgraded at a later date by adding interface cards and/or Co-Processor Cards.

8

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Digital Content Manager

Principle The following block diagrams depict the functional blocks of the DCM.  DCM Housing

 ASI Interface Card with Co-Processor Card

 GbE Interface Card with Co-Processor Card and FEC Card

4011746 Rev AG

9

Chapter 1 Introduction

 IP Video Gateway Card

 Transcoder Card

10

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the User Interface

Introducing the User Interface About the User Interface The user interface of the DCM is a pure HTML based Graphical User Interface (GUI) that can be opened using Microsoft Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox. By entering the IP address of the DCM in the address box of the internet explorer web browser, the user interface of the device will be opened. The following illustration shows the opening page (Login page) of the DCM GUI.

Notes:  It’s strongly recommended to set the date and time of the DCM correctly to assure an efficient communication between PC and DCM (browser caching).  The procedure to log on the user interface can be found in topic User Interface Security on page 17.  The Login page of the DCM can be provided with additional information. More information concerning the Login page information can be found in topic Login Page Information on page 26. Important: For using the user interface of the DCM, the communication between the DCM and the PC is by default done using HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure). Therefore the web browser of the PC needs a CA certificate from the DCM. During the initial security configuration, which is done using HTTPS, the CA certificate to establish the secure communication is installed in the web browser of the PC that is used to setup this configuration. If multiple PCs are used to configure 4011746 Rev AG

11

Chapter 1 Introduction

and/or to monitor the DCM via its user interface, the web browser of each PC must be provided with this CA certificate. The procedure to install this CA certificate is described in topic Installing and Removing CA Certificates on page 1234. The communication between the PC and the DCM can also be done using HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol), therefore the HTTPS external IP service must be disabled, see topic External IP Services on page 83.

Using the Context Sensitive Online Help The user interface of the DCM is provided with a context sensitive online help. This online help can be opened by pressing the Help link on the right-hand side of the header pane. Pressing the help ( ) button on a particular item on the user interface opens the online help with information for that item.

Accessing the Embedded DCM Publications Particular publications of the DCM can be opened via the user interface of the device. These publications apply to the software version installed on the DCM and are automatically updated after upgrading the software of the device. The table containing the links to these publications can be displayed by pointing to Manuals after clicking on the Help link. The following picture depicts an example of such table.

Browsing through a Tree The incoming and outgoing services of the DCM as well as the DCM configuration are represented using trees. You can browse through a tree by collapsing or expanding branches. A branch that can be expanded is indicated by a + sign and an expanded branch is indicated by a - sign. To expand a branch, point to the + sign in front of the branch.

12

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the User Interface

To collapse a branch, point to the - sign in front of the branch.

Using Shortcut Menus Particular branches in a tree are provided with a shortcut menu. A shortcut menu can be activated by right-clicking on the branch.

Some of the shortcut menu options carry out commands immediately, and other options display a page so that additional parameters can be entered or checked.

Using the Apply and Reload Button Particular pages of the user interface of the DCM can be provided with a Reload button and an Apply button.

When changes are made to settings on a certain page, clicking on Apply will send these new settings to the DCM. Note: When settings are changed on multiple pages, only the settings on the page for which Apply is pressed, are sent to the DCM. When settings are accidentally changed on a certain page, clicking on Reload restores these settings to the previous settings as long as the Apply button on this page is not pressed. The Reload button can also be used to update readouts on the page to which the button belongs to.

4011746 Rev AG

13

Chapter 1 Introduction

About the Info Icon Particular pages are provided with the information icon . Pausing the mouse pointer on such icon pops up additional information, for instance the reason why a button is not applicable or opens the online help with particular information, like alarm information.

Image Legend A description of the icons used by the user interface of the DCM can be found on the Legend page. The following procedure explains how to display the Legend page. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Legend link that appears after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Legend page is displayed.

Using Popup Windows Particular information is given by the DCM using popup windows. When popup blocking software is active on your PC, these popup windows might be blocked. In this case a message box is displayed. Deactivate this popup blocking software if you use the user interface of the DCM.

14

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the User Interface

Browse History The user interface of the DCM is provided with a navigation aid that keeps track of the accessed pages during navigation through the user interface. The seven last accessed pages are shown in the header of the user interface (see red rectangle in the picture below).

Hints:  Clinking on a history link in the header automatically opens the corresponding page.  Pausing the cursor on a page in the header displays a tool tip containing additional information about this page. For instance pausing the cursor on Output Service Settings displays a tool tip with identification information about the outgoing service.

About Web Browser Toolbars Some toolbars for web browsers (for example the Google Toolbar) offer an automated form fill in option. This option tries to fill in some fields in forms on web pages that were already visited once in the past (for example to automatically fill in name and address if possible). Because the embedded user interface of the DCM consists of pages with large forms this feature can slow down your page considerably. Therefore it is recommended to disable this option when you work with the DCM GUI.

Displaying the About Window The version of the software package installed on the DCM can be found on the About popup of the user interface. The following procedure explains how to open this popup. 1

4011746 Rev AG

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the About link that is located at the right hand side of the header pane.

15

Chapter 1 Introduction

Result: The about popup is displayed.

Hints:  The version information of the software, hardware, and firmware of the different DCM components can be found on the Version Info page of the user interface. More information concerning this Version Info page can be found in topic Checking the Version Information on page 41.  Clicking on the Open Source Licensing and Notices opens the Digital Content Manager (DCM) Open Source Licensing and Notices document for software package version 10.10.

Showing Contact Information The following procedure describes how to display Cisco's contact information for obtaining product support. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Contact link after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Contact page containing the contact information is displayed.

16

4011746 Rev AG

Device Security

Device Security Introduction General The DCM can be accessed using its user interface or using FTP, IIOP, and SNMP, or SSH and telnet for troubleshooting purposes. To protect the configuration of the DCM from inappropriate access by users or to protect the device from hackerattacks, the DCM is provided with a password security feature that confirms the identity of the user who is attempting to access the device.

About Security Accounts and Security Groups DCM's password security is set up by defining security accounts. A security account consists of a unique user name with password. By adding security accounts to security groups, particular access permissions and rights can be given to users. Security accounts can be defined to access the DCM via its user interface (further called GUI accounts) and accounts can be defined to access the DCM by external IP services (further called Operating System accounts or for short OS accounts). To access the DCM using its user interface, the following security groups are defined:  Administrators: GUI accounts with full access but without access to the DTF Key Configuration page  Guests: GUI accounts with read-only access but without access to particular security settings and to the DTF Key Configuration page  Users: GUI accounts with read-write access but without access to particular security settings and to the DTF Key Configuration page  DTF Administrator: read-write access to the DTF Key Configuration page Hint:  GUI and OS accounts are unrelated and user names need not be unique across both types of accounts.  After upgrading the DCM from software package version 8.2 to a software package version 8.5 or higher and the ROSA NMS external IP service was enabled for direct login from ROSA, two GUI accounts are automatically created: -

4011746 Rev AG

A GUI account that belongs to the Users security group with following account parameters: 

Account name: ROSA User



Password: RosaUser01! 17

Chapter 1 Introduction

-

A GUI account that belongs to the Guests security group with following account parameters: 

Account name: ROSA Guest



Password: RosaGuest02!

To access the DCM using FTP, IIOP, SSH, or telnet (further called OS options), OS accounts must be created with the desired OS option(s) enabled. Accessing the DCM using SNMP, only an OS account must be created. Remark that the following OS account names cannot be used: root, scriptengine, nobody, and sshd. Hint: After upgrading the DCM from a software package version lower than 8.5 to a software package version 8.5 or higher, two OS accounts are automatically created: -

-

An OS account for which the FTP and IIOP OS options are enabled with following account parameters: 

Account name: guest



Password: guest

An OS account for which the Troubleshooting OS option is enabled with following account parameters: 

Account name: engineering



Password: engineering

During the initial security setup, a GUI account belonging to the Administrator security group and an OS account will have to be created. Important: If the DCM participates into an application with ROSA NMS and/or ROSA VSM, the IIOP external IP service must be enabled, see topic External IP Services on page 83, and an OS account with IIOP option enabled must be created.

About DCM's Password Policy To prevent people from using weak passwords to access the DCM user interface or to use external IP services for accessing the DCM, the following password policy is used by default:  The password may not contain more than 80 characters.  The password must contain characters from at least three of the following classes: lower case letters, upper case letters, digits, and special characters.  No character in the password can be repeated more than three times consecutively.  The password cannot be the same as the associated username, and not be the username reversed.  The password cannot be cisco, ocsic, or any variant obtained by changing the capitalization of letters therein, or by substituting 1 | or ! for i, and/or 18

4011746 Rev AG

Device Security

substituting 0 for o, and/or substituting $ for s. Hint: With the exception of the maximum password length, all other rules can be disabled. The procedure to configure the rules can be found in topic Changing the Password Policy Rules of the DCM.

About Data Logging For security reason each action done to the DCM using the user interface and each command executed via SSH or Telnet will be logged into the Security Log or Action Log. More information concerning these logs can be found in topic Viewing Trace Logs on page 1158.

GUI Accounts Adding GUI Accounts Perform the following steps to add a GUI account. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Point to the GUI Accounts link after clicking on the Security link. Result: The GUI Accounts page is displayed.

3

4

Under the Add New GUI Account settings, complete the following steps:

a

In the User Name box, enter a name for the new account (max. 40 characters).

b

In the Security Group drop down box, select the security group to which the new account has to belong.

c

In the Password and Re-enter Password box, enter the password for the new account (max. 80 characters).

d

In the Ignore Password Policy drop down box, select False to apply the configured password policy rules or True to ignore these rules. The procedure to configure these rules can be found in topic Changing the Password Policy Rules of the DCM.

Press Add. Result: The new GUI account is added to the GUI Accounts table.

4011746 Rev AG

19

Chapter 1 Introduction

Changing GUI Account Settings Perform the following steps to change GUI account settings. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Point to the GUI Accounts link after clicking on the Security link. Result: The GUI Accounts page is displayed.

3

4

In the GUI Accounts table, adapt the following parameters of the GUI account for which settings should be changed:



When the name of the GUI account should be changed, enter the new name in the corresponding User Name box (max. 40 characters).



When the GUI account has to belong to another security group, select the desired group in the Security Group drop down box.



When the password should be changed, tick the corresponding check box and enter the new password in both password boxes (max. 80 characters).

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Hint: The rows in the GUI Accounts table can be re-ordered using a particular parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing the parameter header.

Deleting GUI Accounts The following procedure explains how to delete GUI accounts. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Point to the GUI Accounts link after clicking on the Security link. Result: The GUI Accounts page is displayed.

20

4011746 Rev AG

Device Security

3

In the GUI Accounts table, tick the check box(es) in front of the row(s) of the GUI account that must be removed.

Hints:

4



To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the GUI Accounts table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.



The rows in the GUI Accounts table can be re-ordered using a particular parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending order by clicking on the parameter header.

Press Remove Checked Items to confirm or Reload to abort the operation. Result: After pressing Remove Checked Items, the selected GUI accounts are removed from the GUI Accounts table.

Notes:  At least one GUI account belonging to the administrators security group must be present in the GUI Accounts table.  When a GUI account is deleted from a security group while a user is logged on to the DCM using this GUI account, the user has access to the DCM as long as he is logged on.

Operating System Accounts Adding Operating System Accounts Perform the following steps to add an OS account. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Point to the OS Accounts link after clicking on the Security link. Result: The OS Accounts page is displayed.

3

4011746 Rev AG

Under the Add New OS Account settings, complete the following steps:

21

Chapter 1 Introduction

4

a

In the Account Name box, enter a name for the new account (max. 40 characters).

b

In the Password and Re-enter Password box, enter the password for the new account (max. 80 characters).

c

In the Ignore Password Policy drop down box, select False to apply the configured password policy rules or True to ignore these rules. The procedure to configure these rules can be found in topic Changing the Password Policy Rules of the DCM.

d

Tick the Options check box of the external IP service(s) that must be enabled or clear the check box otherwise.

Press Add Account. Result: The new security account is added to the Operating System Accounts table.

Changing Operating System Accounts Perform the following steps to change OS account settings. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Point to the OS Accounts link after clicking on the Security link. Result: The OS Accounts page is displayed.

3

22

In the Operating System Accounts table, adapt the following parameters of the OS account for which settings should be changed:

4011746 Rev AG

Device Security

4



When the password should be changed, tick the corresponding check box and enter the new password in both password boxes (max. 80 characters).



When external IP services must be added or removed, tick or clear the check box(es) corresponding option(s).

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Hint: The rows in the Operating System Accounts table can be re-ordered using a particular parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing the parameter header.

Deleting Operating System Accounts The following procedure explains how to delete OS accounts. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Point to the OS Accounts link after clicking on the Security link. Result: The OS Accounts page is displayed.

3

In the Operating System Accounts table, tick the check box(es) in front of the row(s) of the account that must be removed.

Hints:



To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Operating System Accounts table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.



The rows in the Operating System Accounts table can be re-ordered using a particular parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending order by clicking on the parameter header.

Note: It is strongly advised to keep one OS account of which the Troubleshooting (covers SSH and telnet) option enabled. 4

Press Remove Checked Items to confirm or Reload to abort the operation. Result: After pressing Remove Checked Items , the selected accounts are removed from the Operating System Accounts table.

Changing the Password Policy Rules of the DCM The following steps describe how to change the password policy rules of the device.

4011746 Rev AG

23

Chapter 1 Introduction

1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Point to the Settings link after clicking on the Security link. Result: The Settings page containing the Password Policy Settings is displayed.

3

In the Password Policy Settings table, tick the Enabled check box to enable the rule or clear this box to disable the rule. A description of the rule is given beside the check box. Note: The password may not contain more than 80 characters setting cannot be disabled.

4

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Logging On or Off the User Interface When the user interface of the DCM is uploaded from the device after entering the IP address in the Address box of the web browser, the Login page of the user interface is displayed.

24

4011746 Rev AG

Device Security

Important: For using the user interface of the DCM, the communication between the DCM and the PC is by default done using HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure). To communicate over HTTPS without warnings, the web browser of the PC needs a CA certificate from the DCM. During the initial security configuration, which is done using HTTPS, the CA certificate to establish the secure communication is installed in the web browser of the PC that is used to setup this configuration. If multiple PCs are used to configure and/or to monitor the DCM via its user interface, the web browser of each PC must be provided with this CA certificate. The procedure to install this CA certificate is described in topic Installing and Removing CA Certificates on page 1234. The communication between the PC and the DCM can also be done using HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol), therefore the HTTPS external IP service must be disabled, see topic External IP Services on page 83. Perform the following steps to log on to the DCM user interface. 1

On the Login page of the DCM user interface, enter the user name in the User Name box and the password in the Password box. Note: Both parameters are case sensitive.

2

Press Login to confirm. Result: You are logged on to the user interface and the Tree View page is displayed. The user name of the security account that is logged on appears at the right-hand side of the user interface header.

The following step explains how to log off the DCM user interface. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Log Out link. Result: The user interface is logged off and the Login page is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

25

Chapter 1 Introduction

Login Page Information Introduction To inform the user about the DCM during logging on (maintenance, reconfiguration...), additional information can be added to the Login page of the DCM. The following picture shows a Login page with additional information.

Adding Login Page Information The following steps explain how to add information to the Login page. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Maintenance link after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Maintenance page is displayed.

2

In the Display Login screen info text box, enter the text that must be displayed on the Login page.

3

Press Enable.

Changing Login Information The procedure below describes how to change the information text on the Login page. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Maintenance link after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Maintenance page is displayed.

26

4011746 Rev AG

Device Security

2

In the Display Login screen info text box, modify the text that must be displayed on the Login page.

3

Press Change.

Disabling Login Information The following procedure explains how to disable the login information. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Maintenance link after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Maintenance page is displayed.

2

Press Disable.

Changing the Session Timeout When the inactivity of the user interface of the DCM reaches the time defined in the Timeout parameter, the user interface will be logged off. The following procedure describes how to change this Timeout parameter. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Display Settings link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Display Settings page is displayed.

2

Under the Session settings, select the desired timeout value in the Timeout drop down box.

3

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

27

Chapter 1 Introduction

Licensing Introduction The DCM supports a number of license key protected features that become available after installing a license file. When the DCM leaves the Cisco assembly line, it is equipped with all licensed features you ordered. If your DCM requires additional licensed features or more license quantities afterwards, you may upgrade the license file by purchasing one or more licenses or license packages. For more information about available licenses and license packages, please contact your Cisco sales representative. Cisco will provide you with a certificate for each purchased license or license package. This certificate contains a certificate key required to generate a license file using an on-line application tool. Notes:  A license package contains a number of individual licenses. For example, a transcoding license package may contain 10 SD_AVC_TRANSCODE and 10 HD AVC TRANSCODE EXTENSION keys.  Licenses are counted and applying the licensed feature to a service involves a license cost. For example, rate control and splicing applications require one or more licenses per service depending on the video format (SD or HD) of the video service.  Main and backup DCM devices have different license files identified by a main and backup license key. When purchasing licenses or license package, you must specify if your DCM is a main or backup device. Installing a backup license on a DCM configured as main device in a 1:1 main backup configuration will result in a Main Backup Device Role alarm. For more information see also License File Related Alarms.

DCM Licenses The following sub topics describe the DCM license keys.

8-VSB RF Signal Reception Licensing The DCM 8-VSB Interface Card allows demodulating eight off-air terrestrial RF signals and offers these demodulated transport streams to the mux engine of the DCM for further processing. DCM License Key

Description

8VSB_RECEPTION

Allows demodulating 8-VSB RF channels. Note: 1 license count per channel.

28

4011746 Rev AG

Licensing

Backup Licensing The DCM can participate into a 1 to 1 backup scenario in which the functionality of a failing DCM is taken over by a backup DCM. Information concerning DCM's backup capabilities can be found in chapter Backup on page 913. DCM License Key

Description

MAIN

Identifies the DCM as a main device

BACKUP

Identifies the DCM as a backup device

Digital Program Insertion (DPI) / Program Switching Licensing DCM's Digital Program Insertion (DPI) and program switching feature allows content replacement of services for digital video. The DPI feature can also be used to convert SCTE30 splice request into SCTE35 cue messages and to insert these messages into outgoing services. These features need a Co-Processor Card on the interface card that processes the corresponding outgoing service. Information about the DPI/program switching feature can be found in chapter Digital Program Insertion and Program Switching on page 643. DCM License Key

Description

SPLICING

Allows to splice SD/HD services Note: 1 license count per SD service, 2 license counts per HD service Allows to convert SCTE30 splice requests into SCTE35 cue messages and to insert these messages into outgoing services Note: 1 license count per service in which SCTE35 cue messages are inserted.

SD_AVC_SPLICING

Allows to splice SD services Note: 1 license count per SD service

HD_AVC_SPLICING_EXTENSION Allows to splice HD services Note: splicing a HD service requires one SD_AVC_SPLICING license count and one HD_AVC_SPLICNG_EXTENSION license count SEAMLESS_ALTERNATES

Allows to perform a seamless main-to-alternate, alternate-to-main, or alternate-to-alternate program switch Note: seamless main-to-alternate, alternate-to-main, or alternate-to-alternate program switching for an outgoing service needs one SEAMLESS_ALTERNATES license count

4011746 Rev AG

29

Chapter 1 Introduction

Digital Transport Formatter (DTF) Licensing DCM's Digital Transport Formatter (DTF) is able to encapsulate multiple MPTS or SPTS source streams as embedded private data inside an outgoing transport stream. Information about DCM's Digital Transport Formatter (DTF) can be found in section Digital Transport Formatter on page 1035. DCM License Key

Description

DTF_CONCENTRATOR

Allows ASI Interface Cards to participate in a DTF/MTR application Note: 1 license count per ASI Interface Card

DTF_SCRAMBLING

Allows ASI Interface Cards to participate in a DTF/MTR application with scrambling Note: 1 license count per ASI Interface Card

DVB S / DVB S2 Reception Licensing The DVB-S2/CI Interface Card is able to receive DVB S streams or DVB S2 streams containing a single or multi transport streams. DCM License Key

Description

DVB_S2_RECEPTION

Allows the DVB-S2/CI Interface Card to receive DVB S or DVB S2 streams. Note: 1 license count per enabled RF port.

DVB_S2_MULTISTREAM

Allows enabling an RF port for multi stream processing. Note: 1 license count per RF port.

Forward Error Correction Licensing Forward Error Correction (FEC) on incoming and outgoing IP encapsulated transport streams needs a FEC Card on the GbE Interface Card. For information concerning FEC, please refer to topic Forward Error Correction on page 279. DCM License Key

Description

FEC_COP3_CODEC

Allows to use Forward Error Correction Note: 1 license count per incoming or outgoing TS with FEC enabled

GPIO Contact Licensing The DCM is provided with 5 General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) pins. A number of these pins can be configured to...  trigger a Primary to Insertion Channel or an Insertion to Primary Channel 30

4011746 Rev AG

Licensing

substitution (digital program insertion)  trigger a service backup transition  reboot the DCM (Warm Restart) For more information concerning these GPIO pins, please refer to topic Configuring the GPIO Contacts on page 80. DCM License Key

Description

GPI_ENABLE

Allows to use the general purpose IO contacts

IP Video Gateway Licensing Information about the IP Video Gateway can be found in topic IP Video Gateway. DCM License Key

Description

GW_IP_STREAM

Allows SDI signal transport over IP or ASI with the DCM IP Video Gateway Card Note: 1 license count per SDI signal, 1 free license count per card (not included in the license count)

GW_HD_SDI

Allows HD-SDI signal transport over IP or ASI with the DCM IP Video Gateway Card Note: 1 license count per IP Video Gateway Card

GW_3G_HD_SDI

Allows 3G HD-SDI signal transport over IP with the DCM IP Video Gateway Card Note: 1 license count per IP Video Gateway Card

GW_10G_GBE

Allows to use the 10Gbps SFP+ transceivers in the DCM IP Video Gateway Card

GW_FEC

Allows to use the Forward Error Correction option on the IP Video Gateway Card Note: 1 license count per IP Video Gateway Card

MPEG Priority Bit Licensing The DCM allows modifying the priority bit in the header of the MPEG packets. For more information, please refer to topic Settings of Incoming Transport Streams on page 235. DCM License Key

Description

PRIORITY_BIT_ADAPTATION

Allows to modify the priority bit in MPEG2 packet headers

4011746 Rev AG

31

Chapter 1 Introduction

Logo Insertion Licensing The following table represents the DIGITAL_OVERLAY license consumption for logo insertion. DCM License Key

Number of Remarks licenses

Service is configured to use static logos.

1

There is no license limitation on the number of logos per service (max. four static logos).

Service is configured to use static logos combined with animated logos.

2

There is no license limitation on the number of static logos per service (max. four logos).

Service is configured to use a banner and a text message

1

Service is configured to use a banner and a text message combined with static logos

2

There is no license limitation on the number of static logos per service (max. four static logos).

Service is configured to use a banner and a text message combined with static logos and animated logos

3

There is no license limitation on the number of logos per service (max. four logos).

Information concerning DCM's logo insertion feature can be found in chapter Logo Insertion on page 599.

Audio Leveling DCM's audio leveling feature allows adjusting the audio volume of AC-3 and MPEG1 Layer II audio components. This feature needs a Co-Processor Card on the interface card that processes the corresponding outgoing service. DCM License Key

Description

AUDIO_LEVELING

Allows to adjust the audio volume of AC-3 and MPEG1 Layer II audio streams. Note: 1 license count per audio stream

Picture-In-Picture Creation Licensing DCM's picture-in-picture (PIP) feature allows generating real-time PIP streams by transcoding SD or HD video streams and downscaling the video resolution. Information about PIP stream generation can be found in topic Transcoding on page 505. DCM License Key

Description

PIP_TRANSCODE

Allows to create PIP streams. Note: 1 license count per PIP stream

32

4011746 Rev AG

Licensing

PID Sync Delay Licensing DCM's PID sync delay feature allows synchronizing of components within a particular outgoing service by automatically synchronizing components to the same time base and additionally delaying these components with a given value. More information about the PID sync delay feature can be found in topic Delaying Service Components on page 33. DCM License Key

Description

PID_SYNC

Allows enabling the PID sync delay feature Note: 1 license count per component with enabled PID sync delay

PSI/SI/PSIP Licensing Information about PSI/SI/PSIP can be found in topic PSI/SI/PSIP Information on page 397. DCM License Key

Description

EIT_FILTERING

Allows to pass EIT sub tables

EIT_FILTERING ADVANCED

Allows to pass EIT other p/f sub tables using the auto pass EIT other pf feature

Rate Control Licensing DCM's rate control feature allows rate shaping for bandwidth capacity optimization purposes, like re-compression to lower bitrates of individual services, open loop statistical re-multiplexing... The rate control feature needs a Co-Processor Card on the interface card that processes the corresponding outgoing service or an MFP Card. More information concerning this feature can be found in chapter Rate Control on page 563. The following table represents the licenses required for rate control. Process

Processing Card

License(s) Required / Service

MPEG-2 SD Transrating

Co-Processor Card

1 TRANSRATING

MFP Card

1 MFP_MP2_SD_TRANSRATE

Co-Processor Card

4 TRANSRATING

MFP Card

1 MFP_MP2_SD_TRANSRATE 1 MFP_MP2_HD_EXTENSION

AVC SD Transrating

MFP Card

1 MFP_AVC_SD_TRANSRATE

AVC HD Transrating

MFP Card

1 MFP_AVC_SD_TRANSRATE 1 MFP_AVC_HD_EXTENSION

MPEG-2 HD Transrating

Statistical re-multiplexing MFP Card 4011746 Rev AG

1 MFP_STATMUX 33

Chapter 1 Introduction

Important: Statistical re-multiplexing a service using an MFP card must be combined with transcoding or transrating and occupies the appropriate license(s).

Scrambling/Descrambling Licensing For scrambling or BISS mode 1 descrambling, the interface card that processes the outgoing service must be equipped with a Co-processor Card. For DVB Simulcrypt descrambling, the DCM must be populated with a DVB-S2/CI Interface card. For more information concerning the scrambling/descrambling feature of the DCM can be found in chapter Scrambling & Descrambling on page 729. DCM License Key

Description

DVB_SCRAMBLING

Allows DVB or BISS mode 1 scrambling of SD/HD services or service components Note: 1 license count per service that must be scrambled or per service that contains one or more components that must be scrambled

BISS_1_DESCRAMBLING

Allows to use the BISS mode 1 descrambling feature for SD/HD services or components Note: 1 license count per service that must be descrambled or per service that contains one or more components that must be descrambled.

DVB_S2_CAM

Allows descrambling DVB Simulcrypt scrambled services or service components. Note: 1 license count per CI-CAM that is enabled for descrambling.

Single Frequency Network Licensing Information concerning DCM's single frequency network (SFN) feature can be found in topic Integrating the DCM into Single Frequency Networks on page 1045. DCM License Key

Description

MIP_INSERTION

Allows to use the SFN feature on ASI SFN Interface Card Note: 1 license count per outgoing TS for which SFN is enabled

Important: To participate the DCM into an SFN application, one or more ASI SFN Interface Cards are required.

34

4011746 Rev AG

Licensing

Still Picture Service Feature Licensing DCM's still picture service (or slate service) feature allows creating an outgoing service with a still image video component by assigning a clip to an existing outgoing service or to a virtual service. Information concerning still picture services can be found in topic Using Still Picture Services on page 315. DCM License Key

Description

SLATE_GENERATION

Allows to use the DCM still picture service feature

Transcoding Licensing For transcoding video and audio components using a Trancoding or MFP Card, one or multiple licenses are required depending on the process. The following table gives an overview of the licenses required for video processing:

The licenses needed for audio transcoding using a Transcoder Card depend on the format of the audio component:  Each Layer II Audio to AAC audio conversion consumes one 4011746 Rev AG

35

Chapter 1 Introduction

LAYERII_AUDIO_TRANSCODE license.  Each AC-3 audio to AAC audio conversion consumes one LAYERII_AUDIO_TRANSCODE license and one AC3_AUDIO_TRANSCODE_EXTENSION license. The licenses required for audio transcoding or transrating using an MFP Card depend on the output format of the audio and are channel based, meaning each output channel occupies one license (2 licenses for stereo output). For example MPEG-L2 mono to AC-3 5.1 will consume 6 MFP_DOLBY_DIGITAL_AC3_ENCODING. The following table gives an overview of the licenses required to transcode audio components. Audio Component

License

AAC-LC, HE-AACv1, HE-AACv2 MFP_AAC_ENCODING MPEG-L2

MFP_MPEG1_LII_ENCODING

Dolby™ Digital (AC-3)

MFP_DOLBY_DIGITAL_AC3_ENCODING

Dolby Digital Plus

MFP_DOLBY_DIGITAL_PLUS_ENCODING

Upgrading a License File You may use the Cisco online License-IT application to retrieve an upgraded license file via the World Wide Web and a standard web browser. After submitting the equipment's Device Host ID, certificate key, and device validation key a license file is returned by e-mail. The Device Host ID can be found on the Licenses page of the user interface of the DCM. The procedure to open the Licenses page containing the Device Host ID of the DCM can be found in topic Checking the License Overview on page 38. The License-IT application is accessible by entering the following URL in your web browser: https://online.sciatl.com/license-it. For more information about the License-IT application, see the Application Note License Key Protected Options. After receiving the license file by e-mail, the corresponding licenses can be enabled by uploading this file. For more information, see also topic Install a New License File on page 37.

Downgrading a License File The DCM license downgrade possibility allows you to transfer unused licenses from one DCM to another.

36

4011746 Rev AG

Licensing

Example: A DCM transrating 100 TV services is relocated in the network and only requires transrating 50 TV services on this new location. This means that 50 license counts for rate control remain unused. Another DCM in the network may require extra rate control license counts. The license downgrading feature allows you to transfer the 50 unused rate control license counts to the other DCM. Notes:  When installing the downgraded license file, your DCM returns a validation key. This validation key is required to obtain the certificate key for upgrading the license file of the DCM that needs the extra license counts.  Downgrading of license files is only supported by software version 8.0 or higher. The following steps explain the procedure to transfer license counts between DCM devices. 1

Open the on-line Cisco License-IT application in your web browser. Note: The License-IT application is accessible by entering the following URL in your web browser: https://online.sciatl.com/license-it.

2

Start a new license transfer operation. For more information about starting a license transfer using License-IT, please refer to the License-IT user documentation. Result: A downgraded license file with increased version number is returned by e-mail.

3

Install the downgraded license file on your DCM. Result: A validation key is generated by the DCM.

4

Go back to the Cisco online License-IT application to complete the license transfer action. For more information about completing a license transfer using License-IT, please refer to the License-IT user documentation. Note: You will need the validation key generated by the downgraded DCM to complete the license transfer action. Result: A new certificate key is returned by e-mail.

5

Use the new certificate key to upgrade your DCM license file. For more information about upgrading a DCM license file, see Upgrading a License File. Result: The extra license counts are available now on your DCM.

Installing a License File The following procedure describes how to install a new license file using the user interface. Note: A license file can only be installed via the user interface if you are logged on to the user interface using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group. More information concerning security groups can be found in topic User Interface Security on page 17.

4011746 Rev AG

37

Chapter 1 Introduction

1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Licenses link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Licenses page is displayed.

3

Click on Browse.... Result: The File Upload or similar dialog is displayed.

4

Browse to the new license file and select this file. The following picture gives an example of a license file.

5

Click on Open. Result: The Choose File dialog is closed and the name of the new license file appears in the Update License File box.

6

Press Update. Result: A confirmation box is displayed.

7

Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation. Note: After pressing OK, it takes about 15 seconds before the new licenses become active.

Checking the License Overview The following procedure explains how to find license information on a DCM. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the License link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Licenses page is displayed with the following information:

38

4011746 Rev AG

Licensing





Device Host ID table –

Host ID: a unique identifier of the DCM that is used for creating new license files.

–

License Version: version of the license file. A license file can only be replaced by a license file with the same or higher version number.

–

Validation Key: key for validating the license file. This key is required to obtain an upgraded license file when transferring licenses from one DCM to another.

License Overview table –

Type: represents the license type, for instance TRANSRATING.

–

Installed: represents the installation status of the option to which the license belongs to.

–

Count: represents the total number of licenses for this license type.

–

Usage: represents the number of licenses in use per board and the total number of licenses is use for the corresponding license type.

–

Key: represents the license key for this license(s).

License File Related Alarms The following alarm messages are related to the license file:  License Installation Failure: This alarm is generated when the license file installation is aborted due to wrong license key(s), invalid license versions (version not equal for each license key in the license file), or installation of a new license file having a lower version number than the current license file.  Main Backup Device Role Conflict: This alarm is generated when the MAIN or BACKUP identification license key differs from the device role as defined in the 4011746 Rev AG

39

Chapter 1 Introduction

Device Backup Settings table. For example, installing a backup license file on a DCM configured as main device in a backup application will trigger this alarm. Note: The License Installation Failure alarm is cleared automatically after installing a correct license file.

40

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Version Information

Checking the Version Information The Version Info page of the user interface of the DCM represents the version numbers of the software, hardware, and firmware of the different DCM components. The following picture shows the Version Info page of a DCM populated with an ASI Interface Card and a GbE Interface Card populated with Co-Processor and FEC Card.

Note: By pointing to the parameter header in a version table, an ascending or descending order of the rows can be chosen. Perform the following steps to check the version information of the DCM. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Version Info link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Version Info page is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

41

Chapter 1 Introduction

Importing and Exporting Settings Introduction The user interface of the DCM allows exporting and importing of the device configuration setting file or the configuration settings of a particular IP Video Gateway Card. This feature is useful for backup or (re-)configuration purposes. Note: A configuration setting file can only be imported if you are logged on to the user interface using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group. More information concerning security groups can be found in topic User Interface Security on page 17.

Exporting Configuration Settings The following procedure explains how to export the configuration settings file of the DCM or of an IP Video Gateway Card. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Backup link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Backup page is displayed.

2

In the Export Device Settings to File drop down box, select Device to export the device configuration settings or select the IP Video Gateway Card for which the configuration settings should be exported.

3

Press Export.

Result: The File Download or similar dialog is displayed. 4

Click on Save. Result: The Save As dialog is displayed. Note: If the file should be saved in a different folder, locate and open the folder.

5

In the File Name box, enter a name for the file.

6

Click on Save to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation.

Importing Configuration Settings The procedure below describes how to import configuration settings. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

On the user interface, point to the Backup link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Backup page is displayed.

42

4011746 Rev AG

Importing and Exporting Settings

3

In the drop down box beside Browse, select Device to import device configuration settings or select the IP Video Gateway Card to import settings for the corresponding card.

4

Point to Browse. Result: The Choose file dialog is displayed.

5

Browse to the configuration file and select this file.

6

Tick the check boxes of the settings that must be excluded during the importing process.

4011746 Rev AG



Exclude All GbE Settings: all setting concerning the GbE ports (overrules IGMP settings and basic GbE settings).



Exclude 1:1 Device Backup Settings: all settings for standalone device backup. For more information concerning standalone device backup, please refer to topic Standalone Device Backup on page 956.



Exclude Scrambler Configurator Settings: the configuration settings for scrambling. More information about scrambling can be found in chapter Scrambling & Descrambling on page 729.

 

Exclude Settings Backup's Own Settings: all these exclude settings



Exclude IPsec Settings: the IPsec settings. More information about IPsec can be found in topic Configuring IP Security on page 75.



Exclude Static Routes for Mainboard Settings: the Static Route table. For more information about the Static Route table can be found in topic Adapting the Static Route Table on page 136.



Exclude Device Name and Board Names: the device name and interface card names

Exclude NTP's Drift File: the file containing the clock drift as measured by NTP. Since this file is interface card specific, excluding this file is recommended if the settings file must be imported by a device different from the source device.

43

Chapter 1 Introduction



Exclude IGMP Settings: all IGMP settings. This parameter is not applicable if the Exclude All GbE Settings is ticked.



Exclude Basic GbE Settings: with the exception of the IGMP and VLAN settings, all GbE settings will be excluded. This parameter is not applicable if the Exclude All GbE Settings is ticked.



Exclude Security Settings: the OS accounts, GUI accounts, external IP settings, and SNMP community strings

Note: After setting or clearing Import Device Settings check boxes and pressing Apply, these settings (called Settings Backup's Own Settings) are stored on the device. Each time configuration settings are imported into the DCM, these Settings Backup's Own Settings will be used to determine the imported configuration settings. To avoid overwriting the Settings Backup's Own Settings of the device by these of the configuration file during the importing process, the Settings Backup's Own Settings can be excluded by ticking the Exclude Settings Backup's Own Settings check box. 7

Click on Open. Result: The Choose file dialog is closed and the path and the file name appear in the Import Device Settings from File box.

8

Click on Import. Result: A confirmation popup is displayed.

9

Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation. Result: After pressing OK and a restart of the device is required, the following popup is displayed.

WARNING: During booting the DCM, the outgoing services will be interrupted.

Note: Booting the DCM can take some time depending on the configuration and the features of the device.

44

4011746 Rev AG

Using the Identify Me Utility

Using the Identify Me Utility When a headend is populated with multiple DCM devices, a particular DCM can be identified by means of the identify my utility of its user interface. This utility starts blinking the red front panel LEDs on the front of the device simultaneously for 30 seconds. The following steps describe how to use DCM's identify me utility. 1

On the user interface of the DCM that must be located, point to the Maintenance link that appears after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Maintenance page is displayed.

2

4011746 Rev AG

Click on Identify Me.

45

2 Chapter 2 Configuration Introduction This chapter covers the configuration of the DCM. This chapter provides the device configuration procedures, card configuration procedures as well as port configuration procedures.

In This Chapter    

4011746 Rev AG

Section A Section B Section C Section D

Device Configuration ........................................................49 Card Configuration ............................................................87 Port Configuration ...........................................................113 General Configuration.....................................................177

47

Section A Device Configuration Introduction This section covers the device related configuration settings of the DCM.

In this section Changing the Device Name...........................................................................................50 Modifying Network Settings of the Management Ports ...........................................52 Adding or Removing SNMP Trap Destinations ........................................................57 Activating or Deactivating the DCM ...........................................................................60 Setting the Device Clock ................................................................................................62 Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports .............................68 Modifying the Static Route Table for the Management Ports ..................................72 Configuring IP Security .................................................................................................75 Configuring the GPIO Contacts ....................................................................................80 Network Connections and Statistics ............................................................................83

4011746 Rev AG

49

Chapter 2 Configuration

Changing the Device Name Introduction To facilitate the identification of the DCM in an application, a name with maximum 40 characters can be given to the device. This name appears in the title bar of the web browser and in the header of the corresponding web browser tab page, see picture below.

Hints:  The picture above shows the interface page of a D9900 device, the interface pages of a D9901 and D9902 device are similar.  The hardware configuration of the DCM is depicted in the Hardware Configuration box.  Clicking on an interface card in the hardware configuration picture opens the interface page of the corresponding interface card.

To Change the Device Name The following procedure explains how to change the device name. 50

4011746 Rev AG

Changing the Device Name

1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

Under the System Settings, enter a name in the Name box.

3

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to reload the previous setting.

Note: The System Settings also contain the DCM model to which the user interface belongs.

4011746 Rev AG

51

Chapter 2 Configuration

Modifying Network Settings of the Management Ports Introduction The management ports of a DCM housing can be integrated into IPv4/IPv6 dualstack networks. During the initial setup of the DCM, IPV4 network settings are given to these ports. If modifications are needed to these settings, these can be done via the user interface of the DCM. Remarks:  Ethernet interfaces with conflicting IP addresses may cause serious network problems. Contact your network administrator for correct IP settings.  All management ports should be connected to a different subnet.  Only one default gateway address can be assigned to the ethernet ports.  If IPv6 is used for features over a management port, for instance standalone device backup, then an IPv6 address should be assigned to this management port. Accepted and Blocked IPv6 Addresses The following list gives an overview of the accepted and blocked IPv6 addresses.  The following addresses are blocked by the DCM -

IPv4-compatible addresses: ::/96

-

Teredo addresses: 2001::/32

-

OSI NSAP addresses: 0200::/7

-

IPv6 unspecified: ::

-

local address: ::1

 The following addresses are blocked by a D9900 device -

Unique-local: fc00::/7

 The following addresses are typically blocked (only allowed for specific features and will be listed where appropriate) -

Multicast: ff00::/12

-

Link-local: fe80::/10; only for incoming connections

 Following addresses are typically usable on the DCM. Some ranges are not routable or have special designations, but these will not be blocked by the DCM. -

52

All other global unicast addresses (with the exception of the excluded addresses listed above). 4011746 Rev AG

Modifying Network Settings of the Management Ports

-

IPv6 unique-local addresses: fc00::/7

-

NAT64 addresses: 64::ff9b::/96

-

6to4 addresses: 2002::/16

-

Benchmarking addresses: 2001:2::/48

-

ORCHID addresses: 2001:10::/28

-

Documentation addresses: 2001:db8::/32

-

Site-local addresses (deprecated in favor of unique-local addresses): fec0::/10

-

6bone testing ranges, returned to pool: 3ffe::/16 and 5f00::/8

-

IPv4-mapped addresses will silently be converted to the IPv6 address: ::ffff:0.0.0.0/96

Individual feature behavior:  Device Backup: Uses default behavior (see previous topic)  NTP -

Uses default behavior

-

Multicast addresses are blocked

 IPsec (D9902 only), PVu CWG, and ECMG -

Uses default behavior

-

Allows link-local address to be specified

 SNMP, Trap destinations: Accepts any IPv6 address  MIP Sync: Uses default behavior. Multicast addresses are blocked.  EAS -

Accepts any IPv6 address

-

Multicast IPv6 address when socket type configuration is set to UDP/Multicast.

 Remote Logo Insertion: Uses default behavior. Square brackets should be placed around the IPv6 address.  Static Routes, IP Aliasing, and address configuration: Uses default behavior

To Change IPv4 Network Settings of the Management Ports The following procedure describes how to change IPv4 network settings of the management ports. 1 4011746 Rev AG

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group. 53

Chapter 2 Configuration

2

On the user interface, point to the System link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

3

Select the IPv4 tab.

4

In the IPv4 Network Settings table, modify the following settings if required:

Hint: The picture shows the IPv4 Network Settings table for a D9900 and D9901 device, the table for a D9902 device provides three port entries. a

In the IP Address box of the management port(s) that must be changed, enter the new IP address(es).

b

In the Subnet Mask box of the management port(s) that must be changed, enter the new subnet mask(s).

c

Select the Default Gateway selection box of the management port for which the default gateway must be specified and enter the IP address in the corresponding box. Hint: The DCM accepts 0.0.0.0 as default gateway.

Note: The octets of the addresses must be separated by dots. 5

Click on Apply All to confirm or on Reload All to abort the operation.

Note: After changing the IP address of a management port, the user interface of the DCM will be restarted. During this upstart process the following message will be displayed.

Result: After restarting the user interface, the Management Port IP Addresses table will be displayed.

Hint: The picture shows the Management Port IP Addresses table for a D9900 and D9901 device, the table for a D9902 device provides three port entries. Click on the IP address of the management port that is connected to your PC. 54

4011746 Rev AG

Modifying Network Settings of the Management Ports

Result: The user interface of the DCM is opened in a new tab page of the web browser.

Assigning a Routable IPv6 Address to a Management Port As soon as a management port is connected to an IPv6 network, a link-local address is assigned to it. The following procedure describes how to assign a routable IPv6 address to a management port. Note: The link-local address of a management port cannot be modified and each management port can only have one routable IPv6 address. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

On the user interface, point to the System link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

3

Select the IPv6 tab.

4

In the Add New IPv6 Subnet settings, complete the following parameters:

5

a

In the Port drop down box, select the port to which an IPv6 address should be assigned to.

b

In the IPv6 Address box, enter the IP address for the port. Use a format as recommended by RFC 5952.

c

In the Prefix Length box, enter the prefix length for the IP address.

Press Add IP Address. Result: The IP address is added to the IPv6 Network Settings table.

6

Click on Apply All to confirm or Reload All to abort the operation.

Note: After assigning or changing the IP address of the management port that is connected to your PC, the user interface of the DCM will be restarted. During this upstart process the following message will be displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

55

Chapter 2 Configuration

Result: After restarting the user interface, the Management Port IP Addresses table will be displayed.

Click on the IP address of the management port that is connected to your PC. Result: The user interface of the DCM is opened in a new tab page of the web browser. Hint: An IP address assignment can be changed in the IPv6 Network Settings table or removed by ticking the check box and pointing to Remove Checked Rows.

Checking the Network Settings of the Management Ports After configuring the network settings of the management ports, an overview of these settings can be found in the Network Settings table. The following steps describe how to display this table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the System link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

Point to the General tab. Result: The General tab page appears containing the Network Settings table.

56

4011746 Rev AG

Adding or Removing SNMP Trap Destinations

Adding or Removing SNMP Trap Destinations Introduction The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol used to manage remote devices. This protocol was designed for managing all kinds of devices such as routers, switches, and also broadcast equipment. More information concerning SNMP can be found in RFC 1157. The DCM is able to generate SNMP traps, containing information about an error/informational condition, and to send these traps to particular trap destinations. The SNMP Trap Destinations Settings table on the SNMP page represents to which IP address(es) the traps are sent and the community string for these destinations. The DCM is also accessible using a standard MIB browser. To provide authentication, privacy, and authorization, the standard community-based security is used. A Read Community string (none by default) has to be used for retrieval SNMP operations and a Write Community string (none by default) for modification SNMP operations. These operations are not usable if the strings are empty. The procedure to change these community strings can be found in topic Changing the Read and Write Community Strings on page 59. The MIB files available on the DCM can be downloaded to the hard disk of a PC. These MIB files can then be used to create for instance an application-specific user interface. The procedure to download the MIBs from the DCM to the hard disk of a PC can be found in appendix Downloading MIBs on page 1165.

Defining SNMP Trap Destinations The following explains how to define a SNMP trap destination. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the SNMP link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The SNMP page is displayed.

2

In the IP Address box under the Add New SNMP Trap Destination settings, enter the IP address of the trap destination. Note:

 

4011746 Rev AG

For an IPv4 IP address the octets of the IP address must be separated by dots. For an IPv6 IP address, use a format as recommended by RFC 5952. The list with accepted and blocked IPv6 addresses can be found in topic Modifying Network Settings of the Management Ports.

57

Chapter 2 Configuration

3

In the Community String box, enter a community string for this trap destination.

4

Click on Add Row to confirm. Result: The new trap destination is added to the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table.

Hint: To sort the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. You can toggle between the ascending and descending order by clicking on the parameter header.

Changing the SNMP Trap Format The following procedure explains how to change the SNMP trap format. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the SNMP link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The SNMP page is displayed.

2

3

Under the SNMP Trap settings, select one of the following formats in the Format drop down box. -

Standard: standard SNMP handling (default)

-

Standard + Mystro: SNMP handling as defined by the mystro-videoport MIB

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Removing Trap Destinations Perform the following steps to remove trap destinations. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the SNMP link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The SNMP page is displayed.

58

4011746 Rev AG

Adding or Removing SNMP Trap Destinations

2

In the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table, set the check box(es) in front of the trap destination row(s) that should be removed.

Hint: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table, point to the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and point to the check box of the last row. 3

Press Remove Checked Items to confirm. Result: After pressing Remove Checked Items, the trap destinations are removed from the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table.

Changing the Read and Write Community Strings The following procedure explains how to change the Read Community and Write Community strings. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the SNMP link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The SNMP page is displayed.

2

In the Read Community box under the Community Strings settings, enter the community string for the retrieval of SNMP operations.

3

In the Write Community box, enter the community string for the modification SNMP operations.

4

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

59

Chapter 2 Configuration

Activating or Deactivating the DCM Introduction For reconfiguration purposes or for participating in for instance device backup applications, it can be useful to deactivate the DCM. Deactivating a DCM performs following actions:  When the Output Streaming parameter for ports is set to Auto, streaming through these ports is switched off.  When the Enable Hot Backup parameter is cleared, the connection with the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) will be lost. More information concerning this parameter can be found in topic Overruling the ECMG Channel Status Message Parameter Values on page 762.  When the IP Alias - Mode parameter for ports is set to Auto, the IP aliasing feature becomes inactive. More information about the IP aliasing feature can be found in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page 148 or in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports on page 68. Activating a DCM performs the following actions:  When the Output Streaming parameter for ports is set to Auto, streaming through these ports is switched on.  When the Enable Hot Backup parameter is cleared, the connection with the Entitlement Control Message Generator is established.  When the IP Alias - Mode parameter for ports is set to Auto, the IP aliasing feature becomes active. More information about the IP aliasing feature can be found in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page 148 or in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports on page 68. The following procedure describes how to deactivate or activate a DCM. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the System link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

60

In the Power Up Activation drop down box under the System Settings, select Active to activate or select Inactive to deactivate the DCM after a reboot action of the DCM.

4011746 Rev AG

Activating or Deactivating the DCM

3

In the Current Activation drop down box, select Active to activate or select Inactive to deactivate the DCM. Hint: The Current Activation state is shown in the lower right corner of the user interface.

4

4011746 Rev AG

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

61

Chapter 2 Configuration

Setting the Device Clock Introduction The internal clock of the DCM can be set manually or can be synchronized at regular time...  with an external device (for instance with a time server...) by using the Network Time Protocol (NTP).  by using the TOT or TDT (DVB), or by using the STT (ATSC). When the settings on the Clock page of the DCM are properly configured and after pressing Apply, the synchronization cycles are started by executing a time synchronization action. Note: For applications that require accurate clock synchronization, such as DPI, make sure that the following conditions are met:  Use an accurate time server. The lower the jitter of the clock of the time server, the higher the accuracy of the clock of the DCM will be.  Make sure that the DCM is in a temperature-controlled environment.  The network between DCM and time server must be symmetric; the average time required for a network packet to travel from DCM to time server must be the same as the average time required for a network packet to travel from time server to DCM.  Avoid persistent high loads on the network between DCM and time server, such as a network backup of a server. Since the timestamps in the TDT, TOT, or STT are not accurate enough, we advise against synchronizing the clock of the DCM using SI tables for applications that require accurate clock synchronization.

Changing the Device Time Perform the following steps to change the current time of the DCM. Hint: The current device time is shown at the right-hand side of the user interface header. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Clock link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Clock page is displayed. Hint: The Clock page is also displayed after clicking on the current device time at the right hand side of the user interface header.

2 62

In the Synchronization Type drop down box, select Disabled. 4011746 Rev AG

Setting the Device Clock

Result: The User Time setting is displayed.

3

In the User Time box, enter the time and date using the following notation: YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss with: –

YYYY: year

–

MM: month

–

DD: day

–

hh: hour

–

mm: minutes

–

ss: seconds

4

In the Time Zone Selection drop down box, select the desired time zone.

5

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to reload the previous setting.

Synchronizing with a NTP Server The following steps explain how to synchronize the DCM with a time server using NTP. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Clock link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Clock page is displayed. Hint: The Clock page is also displayed after clicking on the current device time at the right hand side of the user interface header.

2

In the Synchronization Type drop down box under Synchronization, select NTP.

Result: The NTP Server Configuration settings are displayed. 3

In the Time Zone Selection drop down box under NTP Server Configuration, select the desired time zone.

4

In the NTP Server IP Address box under the Add NTP Server settings, enter the IP address of the time server and press Add Server To List. Notes:



4011746 Rev AG

For an IPv4 IP address the octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.

63

Chapter 2 Configuration



For an IPv6 IP address, use a format as recommended by RFC 5952. The list with accepted and blocked IPv6 addresses can be found in topic Modifying Network Settings of the Management Ports.

Result: The IP address of the time server is added to the NTP Servers table.

Repeat this step for all time servers that should be used for time synchronization. 5

6 7

In the Alarm Threshold (ms) parameter under the NTP Alarm settings, enter the maximum time difference between the DCM and a NTP server. When this threshold is exceeded after a time synchronization action, an NTP Offset alarm will be generated.

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to reload the previous setting.

Note: Time servers can be removed from the NTP Servers table by ticking the check box(es) in front of the corresponding IP address(es) and pressing Removed Checked Items. To tick the check boxes of consecutive rows in the NTP Servers table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.

Checking NTP Statistics The NTP Statistics table gives the list of NTP servers each accompanied by their current states. Each row in the NTP Statistics table also provides a summary of the remote peer associated with the NTP server. The following procedure explains how to check the NTP statistics. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Clock link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Clock page is displayed. Hint: The Clock page is also displayed after clicking on the current device time at the right hand side of the user interface header.

2

Click on NTP Statistics. Result: The NTP Statistics page is displayed.

64

4011746 Rev AG

Setting the Device Clock

The following parameters are displayed in the NTP Statistics table:

 

4011746 Rev AG

IP Address: represents the IP address of the NTP server Tally: represents the status of the NTP server selection for time synchronization. The following values are used: –

space: the NTP server is not reachable.

–

x : the NTP server is a false ticker.

–

. : the NTP server is not a member of the ten closest NTP servers.

–

- : the NTP server is an outlier

–

+ : the NTP server is a candidate for time synchronization.

–

# : the NTP server is almost used for time synchronization.

–

* : the NTP server is used for time synchronization.



Ref ID: identifies the time source to which the NTP server is synchronized. .INIT. means that no response has been received so far.



Stratum: represents the level defining the distance from the reference clock. A stratum 1 NTP server is directly linked to the reference clock. A stratum 2 NTP server is linked to a stratum 2 NTP server. A stratum 3 NTP server is linked to a stratum 3 NTP server... If a NTP server is not responding, the value 16 is displayed.



Ref Type: represents the NTP server type. The following values are used: –

l : local

–

u : unicast

–

m : multicast

–

b : broadcast



Last Poll: represents the time that elapsed since the last poll attempt, expressed in seconds.

 

Poll Int: represents the polling interval, expressed in seconds.

 

Delay (ms): represents the packet roundtrip delay, expressed in milliseconds.

Reach: represents the reachability status of the NTP server. This is an 8-bit octal number representing whether the NTP server responded during the last eight poll attempts. When the value differs from 377, check the IP network. Offset (ms): the time offset expressed in milliseconds between the clock of the DCM and the NTP server.

65

Chapter 2 Configuration



Jitter (ms): represents the time variation expressed in milliseconds between the NTP servers and the DCM.

Synchronizing using an SI Table The following steps explain how to synchronize the DCM by using the TOT or TDT (DVB) or by using the STT (ATSC). 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Clock link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Clock page is displayed. Hint: The Clock page is also displayed after clicking on the current device time at the right hand side of the user interface header.

2

In the Synchronization Type drop down box, select Time Table. Result: The Time Sync using SI Table settings are displayed.

3

In the Time Zone Selection drop down box, select the desired time zone.

4

In the Time Table drop down box, select the table that must be used to synchronize the device: TDT, TOT, or STT.

5

Point to

beside Input TS.

Result: The Input TS popup is displayed.

66

4011746 Rev AG

Setting the Device Clock

Hint: The settings in the Input TS popup depend on the chosen card. The picture above shows the settings for a GbE Interface Card. a

In the Card drop down box, select the interface card that receives the transport stream to which the table belongs to.

b

In the Port drop down box, select the port that receives this transport stream.

c

In the Type drop down box (GbE Interface Card only), select one of the following settings:

d

–

Unicast: for a GbE unicast input port

–

Multicast: for a GbE multicast input port When a router is used between the streaming device and the DCM, the GbE port receiving the stream must join the multicast group.

In the IP box (GbE Interface Card only), enter the multicast IP address to which the source device of this transport stream streams. Note: The IP box is only applicable if the Type drop down box is set to Multicast.

e

In the UDP box (GbE Interface Card only), enter the UDP port number of the input port receiving this transport stream.

f

For a transport stream belonging to a multiple input stream (DVB S2/CI Interface Card only), tick the ISI check box and enter the input stream identifier of this transport stream in the corresponding box.

g

Click on OK to confirm and to close the Input TS popup.

6

In the Sync Interval drop down box, select the time between two consecutive synchronization actions: Every Hour, Every 6 Hours, Every 12 Hours, Every Day, Every 7 Days, Every 14 Days, or Every 31 Days.

7

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Hint: A synchronization action can be started at any time by pressing Sync now.

4011746 Rev AG

67

Chapter 2 Configuration

Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports Introduction To eliminate additional clients to feed backup DCM devices in a backup application or to avoid the need for additional client licenses, the DCM supports IP address takeover by using IP aliasing. The IP aliasing feature of the DCM for IPv4 works as follows: When a client has to send IP packets to a port of the main DCM and the client's ARP table is not yet or no longer populated with ARP entries for this port, the client broadcasts an ARP request message containing the IP address of these packets. When IP aliasing is active on a network interface of the main DCM, the DCM responds with an ARP reply message containing IP address and MAC address of the port. When the client receives the ARP reply, it adds an ARP entry to the ARP table containing the mapping between IP address and MAC address for this port and starts sending IP packets to this port. When the backup DCM is activated, it broadcasts several gratuitous ARP messages containing the alias IP address and the MAC address of the corresponding backup DCM port. When the client receives such message it replaces the ARP entry of the IP address matching the Alias IP address. Now the IP packets with destination IP address matching the alias IP address for the main DCM port will be sent to the corresponding backup DCM port. DCM's IP aliasing feature for IPv6 is based on the Destination Unreadability Detection part of the Neighbor Discovery protocol. Three modes can be used for IP aliasing:  Inactive: the IP aliasing feature is not active.  Active: the IP aliasing feature is active.  Auto: the IP aliasing feature matches the DCM status, meaning the IP alias Mode is active when the DCM status is active and vice versa. The following procedures describe how to change the IP alias mode for a management port and how to add or remove IP aliases to or from a management port. The GbE ports of a GbE Interface Card also support IP Aliasing. The procedures to change the IP alias mode for a GbE port of an interface card and how to add or remove IP aliases to or from such port is described in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page 148. Note: IP Aliasing can only be used for Advertising Servers.

Changing the IP Alias Mode The following procedure describes how to change the IP alias mode of a management port. 68

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports

1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

Select the IPv4.

3

In the Mode drop down box in the IP Alias table of the port for which the IP alias mode must be changed, select Inactive, Active, or Auto.

Hint: An IP Alias table is foreseen for each individual management port. The picture above shows the IP Alias tables for a D9900 and D9901 device. For a D9902 device, the user interface provides three tables. 4

Press Apply All to confirm or Reload All to abort the operation.

Adding an IPv4 Alias The following steps explain how to add a new IPv4 alias to a management port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

Select the IPv4 tab.

3

In the Port drop down box under the Add New IPv4 Alias settings, select the port to which an IP alias must be added.

4

In the IP Address box, enter the IP address for the alias.

5

Press Add Row to confirm. Result: The IP alias is added to the corresponding IP Alias table.

Hint: The picture above shows the IP Alias tables for a D9900 and D9901 device. For a D9902 device, the user interface provides three such tables. 6

Press Apply All to confirm or Reload All to abort the operation.

Adding an IPv6 Alias The following steps explain how to add a new IPv6 alias to a management port. 1 4011746 Rev AG

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. 69

Chapter 2 Configuration

Result: The System Settings page is displayed. 2

Select the IPv6 tab.

3

In the Port drop down box under the Add New IPv6 Alias settings, select the port to which an IP alias must be added.

4

In the IP Address box, enter the IP address for the alias.

5

Press Add Row to confirm. Result: The IP alias is added to the corresponding IP Alias table.

Hint: The picture above shows the IP Alias tables for a D9900 and D9901 device. For a D9902 device, the user interface provides three such tables. 6

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Removing IP Aliases Perform the following procedure to remove an IP Alias from a management port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

Select the tab IPv4 tab to remove an IPv4 alias or the IPv6 tab to remove an IPv6 alias.

3

In the IP Alias table of the management port in question, set the check box in the row of the IP alias that must be removed.

Hint: The picture above shows the IP Alias tables for a D9900 and D9901 device. For a D9902 device, the user interface provides three such tables. 4 70

Press Remove Checked Rows. 4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports

Result: The IP alias is removed from the corresponding table.

4011746 Rev AG

71

Chapter 2 Configuration

Modifying the Static Route Table for the Management Ports Introduction During the IP settings configuration of the management ports, only one default gateway for the ports can be defined. If the networks connected to the management ports consist of more than one subnet, then additional routes (called static routes) must be configured on the device. Hint: The IP settings of the management ports can be checked in the Network Settings table on the System Settings page.

Adding Static Route Entries The following procedure describes how to add static route entries for a management port. 1

On the user interface DCM, point to the Routes link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Routes page is displayed.

2

Under the Add New Static Route settings, complete the following parameters:

Hint: The picture shows the Network Settings table for a D9900 and D9901 device, the table for a D9902 device provides three GbE ports.

72

a

In the Port selection box, select the selection button of the management port in question.

b

In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the destination network or destination host.

4011746 Rev AG

Modifying the Static Route Table for the Management Ports

Notes:

c

d

–

Using an IPv4 address in the range from 169.254.0.0 up to 169.254.255.255 is not allowed.

–

For an IPv6 address, use a format as recommended by RFC 5952. The accepted and blocked IPv6 addresses can be found in topic Modifying Network Settings of the Management Ports.

In the Subnet Mask/Prefix Length box: –

For IPv4 static route settings: enter the Subnet Mask of the destination network (this parameter is not relevant when a host IP address is entered). The octets of the Subnet Mask must be separated by dots.

–

For IPv6 static route settings: enter the length of the prefix of the IP address.

In the Gateway box, enter the IP address of the port of the router to the destination port. The octets of the gateway must be separated by dots. Notes:

e

–

Using the default gateway is not allowed.

–

The gateway must be in the same subnet of the selected interface.

–

The gateway cannot be the same as the IP address of a port or any alias of a port.

Press Add. Result: The new static route is added to the Static Route Settings table.

Removing Static Routes Entries The procedure below explains how to delete static route entries. 1

On the user interface DCM, point to the Routes link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Routes page is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

73

Chapter 2 Configuration

2

In the Static Route Settings table, tick the check boxes preceding each static route entry that must be removed and press Remove Checked Rows.

Hint: To tick the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Static Route Settings table, tick the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the last row that must be removed.

74

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IP Security

Configuring IP Security Introducing IP Security IP security (IPsec) ensures secure communication by providing authentication and encryption mechanisms for network traffic between two peers. IPsec can use several different encryption and authentication mechanisms to accommodate various implementations and security needs. To ensure that two peers use the same protocols when communicating with each other, a policy is set up that defines a set of security parameters and encryption algorithms that can be configured in each of both peers. The DCM allows setting up IPsec for each individual management port. Note:  Setting up IPsec for third party equipment (for instance a CA system) is not part of this User's Guide. Please refer to the documentation that is shipped with the equipment.  When the communication between the DCM and the computer running the user interface of the DCM must be secured by using IPsec, IPsec must also be configured for this computer. The procedures to setup IPsec for a computer running Windows can be found in appendix Configuring IPsec on Windows on page 1180. Important: For a D9900 and D9901 device, IPsec cannot be combined with IPv6.

Key Exchange To establish an IPsec session, the peers need to exchange encryption keys in a secure way. The DCM uses Internet Key Exchange (IKE) for this purpose. IKE is configured to use preshared keys that can be set by the user. IKE will use 3DES encryption and MD5/SHA1 hashing.

IPsec Packets After a key is exchanged, the peers negotiate the structure of the IP packets. IPsec modifies IP packets between the two peers by adding optional headers and encrypting the data. Potentially, two headers can be used for this purpose: the Authentication Header (AH) and the Encapsulated Security Payload Header (ESP). To meet current requirements, however, the DCM uses only ESP; AH is not used. When using ESP, two options ensure data integrity: the encryption algorithm (for instance 3DES) and the hashing algorithm (for instance MD5). The DCM is configured to accept a number of ESP proposals, that is, a number of combinations of encryption and hashing algorithms. Any combination of the following encryption protocols with the MD5 and SHA1 authentication protocol is accepted: AES 256, AES 4011746 Rev AG

75

Chapter 2 Configuration

128, 3DES, and NULL. Note: To establish an IPsec session, the computer communicating with the DCM must support at least one of the above combinations.

Adding IPsec Peers The following steps describe how to add peers to the IPsec peer list of the DCM. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

On the user interface, point to the System link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

3

Under the Add New IPsec settings, complete the following parameters:

a

In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the new IPsec peer. Notes: –

For an IPv4 IP address the octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.

–

For an IPv6 IP address, use a format as recommended by RFC 5952. The list with accepted and blocked IPv6 addresses can be found in topic Modifying Network Settings of the Management Ports.

b

In the Pre Shared key and Retype Pre Shared Key box, enter the pre shared key for the new IPsec peer.

c

Press Add. Result: The new IPsec peer is added to the IPsec Settings table.

4

Continue adding IPsec peers by repeating step a up to c.

Deleting IPsec Peers The following steps describe how to remove peers from the IPsec peer list of the DCM. 1

76

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group. 4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IP Security

2

On the user interface, point to the System link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

3

In the IPsec Settings table, tick the check boxes preceding each IPsec peer that must be removed and press Remove Checked Rows.

Hint: To tick the check boxes of consecutive rows in the IPsec Settings table, tick the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the last row that must be removed. Result: All selected IPsec peers are removed from the IPsec Settings table. Note: If IPsec is enabled, at least one IPsec peer must be present in the IPsec Settings table. When all IPsec peers are ticked and the IPsec mode is set to IPsec Traffic Only, the following message appears in the Invalid User Input table on top of the System Settings page. Remove Checked Rows - Removing all IPsec settings when IPsec Traffic Only is active is not allowed. To deal with this, set the IPsec parameter to Allow All Traffic before removing all peers.

Changing the IPsec Filter The IPsec filter determines if non-IPsec traffic on a management port is allowed or not. The settings of this filter are:  Allow All Traffic: the traffic on the corresponding port is not filtered  IPsec Traffic Only: only IPsec traffic matching the settings of an IPsec peer is allowed.

4011746 Rev AG

77

Chapter 2 Configuration WARNING: When the IPsec mode is set to IPsec Traffic Only for the management port that is used by the computer running the user interface, and no valid IPsec peer for this computer is added to the IPsec Settings table, the DCM becomes inaccessible for this computer. This can be fixed by opening the user interface on a computer with valid IPsec peer or IPsec can be bypassed by using the DCM hardware key. The procedure to bypass IPsec by using the hardware key can be found in following topic.

Perform the following procedure to change the IPsec mode. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

On the user interface, point to the System link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

3

Point to the General tab. Result: The General tab page containing the IPsec Filter Settings table appears.

Hint: The picture shows the IPsec Filter Settings table for a D9900 and D9901 device, the table for a D9902 device provides three port entries. 4

In the row of the corresponding management port, select one of the following settings in the IPsec drop down box.

 

IPsec Traffic Only Allow All Traffic

Note: The IPsec drop down box is only applicable when IPsec peers are added to the IPsec Settings table. 5

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Bypassing IPsec by using the Hardware Key When the DCM becomes inaccessible due to wrong IPsec peer entries in the IPsec Settings table, the IP security can be bypassed by:  plugging in the DCM hardware key into the I/O connector at the rear panel of the DCM (D9900 and D9901 device). or connecting a PC directly to the DCM using the rear USB port and enabling IP bypass using a serial terminal emulator program (D9902 device). and 78

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IP Security

 unassigning IPsec on the computer running the user interface as described in topic To Unassign IPSec on page 1195. Note: The DCM hardware key can be made by connecting pin 1 to pin 6 of the mating field-wiring connector for this I/O connector. The illustration below shows the I/O connector of a D9900 device with mating field-wiring connector.

The illustration below shows the I/O connector of the D9901 device with mating field-wiring connector.

When IPsec is bypassed, the user interface becomes accessible as a device without IPsec and the IPsec configuration can be fixed. During this IPsec bypassing process, a No IP SEC warning icon is displayed in the user interface header, see picture below.

Note: When the DCM hardware key is plugged in:  The Hardware Key Inserted alarm is active and a ROSA message can be generated.  The SSH and FTP external IP services are enabled if they were disabled.

4011746 Rev AG

79

Chapter 2 Configuration

Configuring the GPIO Contacts Introduction A D9900 and D9901 device is equipped with 5 General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) pins and a D9902 device with 13 GPIO pins. With the exception of the first GPIO pin of a D9900 and D9901 device, which can be used to bypass IPsec (Security Overrule), the GPIO pins can be configured to...  trigger a Primary to Insertion Channel or an Insertion to Primary Channel substitution (digital program insertion)  trigger a service backup transition  reboot the DCM (Warm Restart) The following illustrations depict the GPIO contact location with mating field-wiring connector.  D9900 device

 D9901 device

80

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the GPIO Contacts

 D9902 device

To facilitate the DCM configuration, the GPIO contacts can be renamed (for example DPI, Service Backup, Reboot...). This name will then be used in the user interface. The assert level of a pin can be set to High or Low. High means that for input functions the action will be executed at a high level (or floating level because the presence of an internal pull up resistor) and for output functions the pin will be put in a high state. Low means that for an input function the action will be done when the pin is shortened to ground and for output functions the pin will be put in a low state. The pin layout and signal specifications of the GPIO contacts can be found in the system guide that is shipped with the DCM. Notes:  Bypassing IPsec on a D9902 device should be done by connecting a PC directly to the DCM using the rear USB port and enabling IP bypass using a serial terminal emulator program. More information can be found in the system guide of the device.  Using GPIO contacts is license based. Each configured contact consumes one GPI_ENABLED license. More information concerning licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 28.  DCM with software package version 10.10 only supports applications with input functions, configuring contacts for output functions is not possible.

To Configure the GPIO Contacts The following steps describe how to configure the GPIO contacts. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the GPIO link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The GPIO page is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

81

Chapter 2 Configuration

Hint: The picture above depicts the GPIO Settings table for a D9900 and D9901 device, the table for a D9902 device provides 13 entries. A D9902 device with software package version 10.10, only pin 2 up to 5 can be configured. 2

Tick the Enable check box of the GPIO pin that must be configured. Result: The GPIO settings of the corresponding pin are configurable.

3

In the Name box, enter a unique name for the GPIO pin.

4

In the Active drop down box, select the assert level of the GPIO pin, High or Low.

5

Click on Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Note: The GPIO page is only accessible if GPI_ENABLED licenses are installed.

Assigning a GPIO Contact for Rebooting the DCM The following procedure describes how to assign a GPIO contact for rebooting the DCM. 1

On the user interface, point to the Maintenance link that appears after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Maintenance page is displayed.

2

Under the Reboot settings, select the GPIO pin that has to trigger a reboot in the Triggered by GPIO drop down box.

3

Click on Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Hint: For more information concerning rebooting the DCM, please refer to topic Restarting the System on page 1169.

82

4011746 Rev AG

Network Connections and Statistics

Network Connections and Statistics External IP Services For configuration and troubleshooting purposes, the DCM can be accessed using the Telnet, FTP, SSH... protocol. For security reasons and with the exception of HTTPS, all the external IP services are disabled by default. The following procedure describes how to enable or disable a particular external IP service. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Point to the Settings link after clicking on the Security link. Result: The Settings page is displayed.

3

In the External IP Services table, tick the check box of the service that must be enabled or clear this check box otherwise.

4

Click on Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Important: Disabling IIOP might affect ROSA NMS. Hints:  A disabled SSH or FTP service can be bypassed by using the DCM Hardware Key. More information about this hardware key can be found in topic Bypassing IPsec by using the Hardware Key on page 78.  Enabling IPConfig can be useful for applications where the IP addresses of the management ports of a DCM are frequently changed. The IPConfig tool is able to retrieve the IP addresses from a DCM. More information concerning this tool can be found in the system guide shipped with the DCM.

Checking the Network Statistics To configure a firewall in a network it can be useful to know which ports are used by the DCM to communicate with external devices. The following table gives an overview of the possible open ports and corresponding services.

4011746 Rev AG

83

Chapter 2 Configuration Management Ports Port

Service

TCP port 20

For upgrading purposes (FTP-data during FTP session)

TCP port 21

For upgrading purposes (FTP)

TCP port 22

Troubleshooting (SSH)

TCP port 23

Troubleshooting (Telnet)

TCP port 80

Management (HTTP, GUI)

UDP port 123

Time synchronization (NTP)

UDP port 161

Management (SNMP)

TCP port 443

Management (HTTPS, GUI)

UDP port 500

IPsec key exchange & communication (ISAKMP, IPsec)

TCP port 5003-5023

Management systems (ROSA) (IIOP)

TCP port 6021

DPI (SCTE-30)

UDP port 32753

IP configuration retrieval (IPCFGServer)

GbE Data Ports Port

Service

Port 520

Used for RIP protocol in anycast backup application

The following procedure describes how to display information of the external network connections of the DCM. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Netstat link that appears after clicking on the Status link. Result: The Netstat page containing the IP Services table is displayed.

84

4011746 Rev AG

Network Connections and Statistics

This table reflects the following information:

4011746 Rev AG



Type: This parameter shows the transport layer protocol (TCP, UDP, TCPv6, or UDPv6).

  

Name: This parameter shows the name of the interface.



Remote IP: This parameter displays the IP address of the remote device to which the DCM is connected to.



Remote Port: This parameter shows the TCP or UDP port number of the remote device to which the DCM is connected to.



Protocol: This parameter indicates the application layer protocol used to communicate (whenever applicable).



Process: This parameter represents the name of the application used by the socket.



Blocked: this parameter indicates if the connection is blocked by the firewall of the DCM or not.



Description: this parameter gives additional information about the connection.

Local IP: This parameter shows the IP address of the DCM. Local Port: This parameter represents the TCP or UDP port number of the DCM.

85

Section B Card Configuration Introduction This section provides the procedures to change card related settings.

In this section Changing the Name of an Interface Card....................................................................88 Configuring a Co-Processor Card ................................................................................89 Configuring a Transcoder Card ..................................................................................100 Changing Card Settings of an MFP Card ..................................................................104 Configuring an IP Video Gateway Card ...................................................................107

4011746 Rev AG

87

Chapter 2 Configuration

Changing the Name of an Interface Card Introduction Each card of the DCM can be labeled with a name. A logical card name will facilitate the identification of the card in the user interface.

To Rename a Card Perform the following procedure to change the name of a card. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the card that must be renamed. Result: The interface configuration page of the card is displayed.

3

Enter a name in the Name box under the Card Settings.

Hint: The picture above depicts the Card Settings of a GbE Interface Card. The Card Settings of the other cards are similar. 4

88

Click on Apply to confirm or Reload to reload the previous setting.

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring a Co-Processor Card

Configuring a Co-Processor Card Changing Card Settings of a Co-Processor Card Introduction The Co-Processor Card of the DCM platform supports advanced video processing functions like rate control, digital program insertion, scrambling... Before a CoProcessor Card can participate into such application, the DCM needs the knowledge of particular information. This information is: Rate Control - Delay Settings  Video Quality Algorithm Optimization For rate control with a Co-Processor Card, the DCM allows using three rate control algorithms: an algorithm for performance optimization and two algorithms for quality optimization (Quality and Extended GOP). The Extended GOP algorithm can be used to eliminate the breathing effect that arises when the GOP length is more than 0.5 seconds. Compared to the Performance algorithm, the Quality and Extended GOP gives better video quality but slightly decreases the number of services that can be controlled by a Co-Processor Card. Note: When the Local Program Insertion Settings - Mode is set to AVC, the Video Quality Algorithm Optimization parameter is not applicable. More information about the Local Program Insertion Settings - Mode can be found in topic Changing the Local Program Insertion Settings - Mode on page 654.  Coarse Delay This parameter determines the delay that arises during the rate control process and is by default 1400 ms (Standard Coarse Delay mode). Due to this small delay, black frames might occur during splicing events. These black frames can be eliminated by using a rate control delay of 1800 ms (Extended Coarse Delay mode). For transport stream re-synchronization purposes the Predefined Coarse Delay mode can be used. When the coarse delay mode is set to Predefined, a delay will be given to all outgoing transport streams of the corresponding interface card. Note: This Predefined Coarse Delay mode can only be used for IP statmux application. The delay use by this mode is determined by the following parameters:

4011746 Rev AG

-

Frame Rate Delay parameter: frame rate of the incoming video, 25 Hz or 30 Hz

-

Input Board Type Delay parameter: interface card receiving the video, ASI or GbE

-

Fine Delay parameter: Low, Normal, or High 89

Chapter 2 Configuration

The table below shows the rate control delay values for the given parameter combinations. Coarse Delay Mode

Frame Rate Delay

Input Board Type Fine Delay Delay

Delay

Standard

n.a.

n.a.

n.a.

1400 ms

Extended

n.a.

n.a.

n.a.

1800 ms

Predefined

25 Hz

ASI

Low

755 ms

Predefined

25 Hz

ASI

Normal

1040 ms

Predefined

25 Hz

ASI

High

2040 ms

Predefined

30 Hz

ASI

Low

748 ms

Predefined

30 Hz

ASI

Normal

1033 ms

Predefined

30 Hz

ASI

High

2033 ms

Predefined

25 Hz

GbE

Low

645 ms

Predefined

25 Hz

GbE

Normal

930 ms

Predefined

25 Hz

GbE

High

1930 ms

Predefined

30 Hz

GbE

Low

638 ms

Predefined

30 Hz

GbE

Normal

923 ms

Predefined

30 Hz

GbE

High

1923 ms

 TS Delay (ms) This parameter determines the time (expressed in milliseconds) used to delay transparent passed transport streams for which the TS delay feature is switched on. This parameter can be set between 5 ms and 100 ms in steps of 1 ms and the default value is 50 ms. More information about this feature can be found in topic Delaying Transparent Passed Transport Streams on page 278. This parameter is only applicable if the Course Delay parameter is set to TS Delay. Detailed information concerning rate control can be found in chapter Rate Control on page 563. PCR Continuity setting During for instance a service or transport stream backup transition, a PCR discontinuity at the output of the DCM might occur. Some downstream equipment uses the PCR for dejittering purposes and doesn't tolerate a PCR discontinuity. To deal with this the PCR continuity feature can be enabled to keep the PCR continuous. The corresponding service must be member of a rate control group and Component tracking rules are required to keep the PCR values constant. 90

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring a Co-Processor Card

Important: The PCR continuity feature only works for services that are spliceable, statmuxed or rate-limited). This feature does not work for the passthrough services that are part of a rate control group. Local Program Insertion Settings  Mode Before channels can be configured for DPI purposes, the DCM needs to know the nature of the video component of the channels, MPEG2 or AVC. This parameter is by default set to MPEG2. This setting only applies to the outgoing services belonging to the interface card to which this Co-Processor Card belongs to. Important: Depending on the chosen value, the advanced processes that can be done by the Co-Processor Card are limited. -

-

When the Local Program Insertion Settings - Mode is set to MPEG2, the following advanced processes are allowed: 

MPEG2 rate control



MPEG2 splicing



Delaying service components



PCR continuity feature



Still picture services



Audio leveling

When the Local Program Insertion Settings - Mode is set to AVC, only AVC splicing is allowed.

When the Local Program Insertion Settings - Mode parameter is set to AVC, processes like delaying service components, audio leveling, rate control... are no longer possible.  Splice Window Accuracy A DCM, which is integrated into a SCTE30 based DPI application, receives the advertising stream from the AD server a certain time before the in-point of the splicing event. If the stream arrives too early the DCM is not able to buffer the stream and if the stream arrives too late the DCM is not able to process the stream.

4011746 Rev AG

-

When the Splice Window Accuracy parameter is set to Default, the DCM will use a best effort approach. The splicing event will be executed as long as the DCM is able to do this and alarms are created only if the splicing event is aborted.

-

When the Splice Window Accuracy parameter is set to Strict, the DCM will use error handling as specified in the SCTE30/35 Industry Standard. If the stream arrives outside the window as specified by the standard (600 - 300 ms before in-point), the splicing even will be aborted. The DCM will return a 126 91

Chapter 2 Configuration

(Insertion Channel Early) error to the AD server if the stream arrives more than 600 ms before the in-point and a 110 (No Insertion Channel Found) error if the stream arrives less than 300 ms before the in-point. Hint: It's strongly recommended to set the pre-roll setting of the AD server(s) to 450 ms if the Splice Window Accuracy parameter is set to Strict. More information concerning local program insertion can be found in chapter Digital Program Insertion and Program Switching on page 643. Scrambling Settings  Mode This parameter determines the process that must be done on the outgoing services by the scrambling/descrambling engine of the Co-Processor Card, scrambling or descrambling. This setting only applies to the outgoing services belonging to the interface card to which this Co-Processor Card belongs to. More information about scrambling and descrambling can be found in topic Scrambling on page 729. Algorithm In applications using the Cisco's PowerVu CA system, services or service components can be scrambled using the common scrambling algorithm (CSA) or using the data encryption standard (DES) scrambling algorithm. This parameter determines which algorithm will be used to scrambled service or service components.

To Change Co-Processor Card Settings The following procedure describes how to change card settings of a Co-Processor Card. WARNING:



Changing particular card parameters reboots the corresponding Co-Processor Card resulting in service loss.



All rate control and PID sync settings must be removed before changing the Local Program Insertion Settings - Mode. There may be no services that have a clip assigned when changing this setting.

1

If the Scrambling Settings - Mode parameter must be changed, log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Click on the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

3

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card populated with the Co-Processor Card for which card parameters must be changed. Result: The interface configuration page of the card containing the Coprocessor Board Settings is displayed.

92

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring a Co-Processor Card

4

Under the Transrating - Delay Settings, modify the following parameters: a

In the Video Quality Algorithm Optimization drop down box, select the desired rate control algorithm, Quality, Performance or Extended GOP. Result: The following confirmation box is displayed.

b

In the Coarse Delay drop down box, select the desired mode, Standard, Extended, Predefined, or TS Delay. Result: The following confirmation box is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

93

Chapter 2 Configuration

Important:

c



Before changing the Coarse Delay parameter to Predefined, all rate control groups of the corresponding interface card must be removed.



If the Co-Processor Card processes services for DPI, rate control, PID sync delay, slate insertion..., the Coarse Delay parameter cannot be set to TS Delay.



If the Co-Processor Card processes services for which the TS delay feature is enabled (see topic Delaying Transparent Passed Transport Streams on page 278), the Coarse Delay parameter cannot be changed from TS Delay to another value.

If the Coarse Delay parameter is set to Predefined, modify the following parameters if required. i

In the Rate Control - Delay Settings - Frame Rate Delay drop down box, select the frame rate of the incoming video 25 Hz or 30 Hz.

ii In the Rate Control - Delay Settings - Input Board Type Delay drop down box, select the interface card: ASI or GbE. iii In the Rate Control - Delay Settings - Fine Delay drop down box, select the desired value: Low, Normal, or High. d 5

If the Coarse Delay parameter is set to TS Delay, enter the delay in the TS Delay (ms) box.

In the PCR Continuity drop down box, select enabled or disabled. Result: The following confirmation box is displayed.

6

Under the Local Program Insertion Settings, modify the following parameters: a

In the Splice Window Accuracy drop down box, select the desired value: Default or Strict.

b

In the Mode drop down box, select the video format of the splice channels that must be processed by the Co-Processor Card. Result: The following confirmation box is displayed.

94

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring a Co-Processor Card

Note: The Mode parameter is not applicable if the PCR Continuity parameter is set to Enabled. 7

Under the Scrambling Settings, configure the following parameters. a

In the Mode drop down box, select Scrambling or Descrambling. Result: The following confirmation box is displayed.

b 8

In the Algorithm drop down box, select CSA or DES.

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Checking the Co-Processor Card Capacity Introduction General The Co-Processor Card of the DCM is able to perform a huge number of video content processes like DPI, rate control, delaying service components... Each process done by the Co-Processor Card consumes a part of the total Co-Processor Card processing power and the amount of processing power that is taken by a particular process depends on the process itself, the bitrate of the video stream, the number of frames in the video stream (NTSC or PAL), the number of audio streams in the service, the algorithm used for a particular process... Particular processes like rate control take processing power continuously from a CoProcessor Card and other processes like splicing take processing power the moment they are executed. During the configuration of the DCM, it can be useful to know the remaining processing power of a Co-Processor Card. The user interface of the DCM 4011746 Rev AG

95

Chapter 2 Configuration

is able to display the following theoretical calculated processing load figures:  Current processing load: the current processing load of the Co-Processor Card  Maximum processing load: the maximum processing load of the Co-Processor Card since reset  Worst Case processing load: the processing load of the Co-Processor Card as if all configured DPI channels for this card are splicing simultaneously. Remark: The processing load figures are only updated after reloading the page (pressing Reload or Apply). Disclaimer: DCM with software package version 10.10 only takes the processing load of rate control and DPI processes into account. Processing Load Limits During configuring the DCM, the user can be protected against exceeding the total processing load of the Co-Processor Card by setting up limits. When this function is switched on, particular pages where modifications can be done that influence the processing load depict the load figures. The following picture shows an example of such figures.

The limits used by this function are:  Warning Level: When the user exceeds this limit during configuring the device, he will be informed after applying the modifications by: -

Showing a popup indicating that the warning level is exceeded.

Pressing OK confirms the operation and Cancel aborts the operation. -

96

Coloring the font red of the card identification in the branch of the corresponding card in the Inputs, Outputs and Configuration.

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring a Co-Processor Card

-

Adding a warning on top of each page where modifications can be done that influence the processing load.

 Maximum Level: When a modification is done to the configuration of the DCM that exceeds the maximum level, the user will be informed after applying the modifications by: -

Coloring the background red of the branch of the corresponding card in the Inputs, Outputs and Configuration tree.

-

Adding an error on top of each page where modifications can be done that influence the processing load. The following picture shows an example of such error

Once the maximum level is exceeded, modifications done to the configuration of the DCM that increase the processing load will not be applied and the user will be informed with an error popup message. The following picture shows an example of such error popup message.

Important: The worst case processing load is taken into account to determine limit exceeding. Hint: For particular application, for instance where a lot of preconfigured services are used, the maximum limit can be disabled.

Configuring the Parameters for Capacity Checking The procedure below describes how to configure the parameters for capacity checking of a Co-Processor Card. Important: To have accurate processing load figures, these parameters must be configured as correct as possible. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

97

Chapter 2 Configuration

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card populated with the Co-Processor Card for which the parameters for capacity checking must be configured. Result: The interface configuration page of the card containing the Coprocessor Board Settings is displayed.

3

98

Under the Coprocessor Board Settings, modify the following parameters if required:

a

In the Video Format drop down box, select the format of the video streams processed by the Co-Processor Card, PAL or NTSC.

b

In the Max Input SD Rate (Mbps) box, enter the maximum input bitrate of the SD video streams processed by the Co-Processor Card. A value can be given between 0 and 15 Mbps.

c

In the Max Input HD Rate (Mbps) box, enter the maximum input bitrate of the HD video streams processed by the Co-Processor Card. This parameter can be set between 0 and 80 Mbps.

d

In the Max Input Audio Rate (Kbps) box, enter the maximum input bitrate of the audio components processed by the Co-Processor Card. This parameter can be set between 0 and 640 Kbps.

e

In the Max Number Of Audio box, enter the maximum number of audio components within a service processed by the Co-Processor Card. A value can be entered between 0 and 4.

f

Clear the Don't take not streaming TS and Services into account check box if the load of services and transport streams, for which streaming is not activated, must be added to the figures. 4011746 Rev AG

Configuring a Co-Processor Card

g

4

Tick the Deny Splice Request If Insufficient Resources check box if a splice must not be executed if the Co-Processor Card has not enough processing power to do this or clear this check box otherwise.

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation. Result: The processing load figures are shown.

Configuring the Processing Load Limits The following procedure describes how to configure the processing load limits for all Co-Processor Cards of a DCM. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Display Settings link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Display Settings page is displayed.

2

3

4011746 Rev AG

Under the Worst Case Coprocessor Load settings, complete the following settings.

a

Tick the Load Checking check box to enable the function or clear this box otherwise.

b

In the Warning Level (%) box, enter the processing load expressed in percent for the warning level limit.

c

Tick the Maximum Level (%) check box to enable this limit or clear this check box otherwise. If this function is enabled, enter the maximum level limit expressed in percent in the corresponding box.

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

99

Chapter 2 Configuration

Configuring a Transcoder Card Changing the Transcoder Card Calibration Introduction A Transcoder Card can be calibrated in such a way that it can participate into transcoding applications or in logo insertion applications. When a card is calibrated for transcoding, it cannot longer participate in logo insertion applications and vice verso. Hint: Information about transcoding can be found in chapter Transcoding on page 505 and information about logo insertion in chapter Logo Insertion on page 599.

To Change the Transcoder Card Calibration The following procedure describes how to change the Transcoder Card calibration. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the Transcoder Card for which the Transcoder Card calibration must be changed. Result: The TC Interface Configuration page of the corresponding Transcoder Card is displayed.

3

In the Type drop down box, select the Transcoder or Logo Inserter.

4

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Important: The Transcoder Card mode cannot be changed if services are routed to the card. In this case the following message will be displayed after pressing Apply: Switching card type is not allowed because the card still has services.

Configuring the Resource Setup of a Transcoder Card Introduction A Transcoder Card that is calibrated to Transcoder is capable to process the following video/audio component combinations.

100

HD Video

SD Video

Audio

SD PIP (192x192)

0

0

32

0

0

2

24

2

0

2

28

0 4011746 Rev AG

Configuring a Transcoder Card HD Video

SD Video

Audio

SD PIP (192x192)

0

4

16

4

0

4

20

2

0

4

24

0

0

6

8

6

0

6

12

4

0

6

16

2

0

6

20

0

0

8

0

8

0

8

4

6

0

8

8

4

0

8

12

2

0

8

16

0

0

10

0

6

0

10

4

4

0

10

8

2

0

10

12

0

0

12

0

4

0

12

4

2

0

12

8

0

0

14

0

2

0

14

4

0

0

16

0

0

1

0

24

0

1

2

16

2

1

2

20

0

1

4

8

4

1

4

12

2

1

4

16

0

1

6

0

6

1

6

4

4

1

6

8

2

1

6

12

0

1

8

0

4

1

8

4

2

1

8

8

0

1

10

0

2

1

10

4

0

1

12

0

0

2

0

16

0

4011746 Rev AG

101

Chapter 2 Configuration HD Video

SD Video

Audio

SD PIP (192x192)

2

2

8

2

2

2

12

0

2

4

0

4

2

4

4

2

2

4

8

0

2

6

0

2

2

6

4

0

2

8

0

0

3

0

8

0

3

2

0

2

3

2

4

0

3

4

0

0

4

0

0

0

Before starting the transcode configuration, the DCM needs the knowledge of the used video/audio component combination. Important:  Changing this combination while a transcoding process is running might interrupt this transcoding process.  For each PIP stream created from an incoming HD stream, a HD video must be foreseen in the video/audio component combination.  The following table describes the capabilities of each resource setup mode: HD Video

SD Video

Audio

HD video or PIP (all resolutions) or both (for same stream)

SD video or PIP stream (96*96, 176*144 (QCIF), and 128*96 (SQCIF)) or both for the same stream

SD PIP (192x192) 192*192 PIP stream from SD input

Changing Video / Audio Component Combination The following steps describe how to change the video/audio component combination of a Transcoder Card. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the Transcoder Card for which the video/audio component combination must be changed. Result: The TC Interface Configuration page of the corresponding Transcoder Card is displayed.

102

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring a Transcoder Card

3

Under Resource Setup settings, select the desired video/audio component combination in the Configurations drop down box.

Note: When the Transcoder Card already performs an audio or video conversion, the video/audio component combinations which can't be combined with the conversion in progress are grayed out. For example: when the Transcoder Card performs three SD video conversion, 0 HD - 0 SD - 32 Audio - 0 SD PIP (192x192) and 0 HD - 2 SD - 28 Audio - 0 SD PIP (192x192) cannot longer be chosen. 4

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Important: Changing this video/audio component combination while a transcoding process is running might interrupt this transcoding process.

4011746 Rev AG

103

Chapter 2 Configuration

Changing Card Settings of an MFP Card Enabling or Disabling Audio Processing Introduction For a Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content Manager and a Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 device, using the audio processing capabilities of an MFP Card disables one of the processing engines (#4) of the card. By default audio processing is enabled and engine 4 cannot be used for video processing. Enabling audio processing is only allowed if no video processing is done by the engine #4 and disabling audio processing if no audio processing is done by the card. Note that changing audio processing needs a restart of the DCM.

To Enable or Disable Audio Processing The following procedure describes how to enable or disable audio processing for an MFP Card. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the MFP Card for which audio processing must be enabled or disabled. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

3

In the Audio Processing drop down box under the Card Setting, select Enabled or Disabled.

4

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation. After changing audio processing and confirmation, the following popup will be displayed.

Press Yes to confirm or No to abort the operation. 104

4011746 Rev AG

Changing Card Settings of an MFP Card

After pressing Yes, the device restarts.

Configuring the Resource Setup of a MFP Card Introduction An MPF Card is provided with four engines each having a number of slots. Before an MFP Card can be used for video processing like statistical re-multiplexing, VBR re-compressing..., the DCM needs the knowledge of the slots that must be allocated for SD video and for HD video. The following slot schemes can be used:  6 SD video  2 HD video  3 SD and 1 HD video Processing video services by an engine of an MFP Card gives a particular delay to these services. Giving more time to an engine for processing enhances the video quality of the service but increases the total delay. The time that an engine gets for processing is determined by the End to End Delay parameter. This parameter can be set between 2500 and 5000 ms and the default value is 4000 ms, which is a very good compromise between delay and video quality. Note: Particular set-top-boxes can only handle incoming video streams for which interlaced content is frame-coded without field motion estimation. Therefore the MPEG-2 Frame Pictures parameter needs to be enabled. Remark that enabling or disabling this parameter for a particular engine interrupts the services which are processed by this engine. Important:  For Statistical Remultiplexing of services by an engine, the End to End Delay for this engine should be at least 4000 ms.  Changing the End to End Delay and/or MPEG-2 Frame Pictures parameter of an engine interrupts all services that are processed by this engine.

To configure the Resource Setup The following steps explain how to configure the resource setup of an MFP Card. Important: Re-allocating slots is not allowed if the new setup does not match the current processes. For example if the engine processes two HD services and the setup is changed from 2 HD video to 3 SD and 1 HD video. Remark that slots allocated for HD are able to process an SD video but the opposite is not possible. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the MFP Card for which the source setup of engines must be configured. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

105

Chapter 2 Configuration

3

4

In the Resource Setup table, complete the following settings:

a

In the Setup drop down of the engine that must be configured, select 6 SD video, 2 HD video, or 3 SD and 1 HD video.

b

In the End to End Delay (ms) box, enter the total delay for the services that are processed by this engine. A value can be given between 2500 and 5000 ms and its default value is 4000 ms.

c

In the MPEG-2 Frame Pictures check box, tick the check box to obtain an outgoing video stream for which interlaced content will be frame-coded without field motion estimation or clear this check box otherwise.

d

Repeat step a and c for all engines.

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation. Notes:



The following confirmation box will appear if the End to End Delay (ms) parameter is modified to a value equal to or higher than 4000 ms or if the MPEG-2 Frame Pictures parameter is changed:



If the End to End Delay (ms) parameter is modified to a value lower than 4000 ms, then the following confirmation box will be displayed:

Press Yes to confirm or No to abort the operation. 106

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring an IP Video Gateway Card

Configuring an IP Video Gateway Card Changing Card Settings of an IP Video Gateway Card Introduction General DCM's IP Video Gateway Card provides IP encapsulation and decapsulation as well as ASI encapsulation and decapsulation of Serial Digital Interface (SDI) video streams. The Type parameter of the gateway card determines the process:  IP Gateway: IP encapsulation and decapsulation  ASI Gateway: ASI encapsulation and decapsulation Important:  Changing the Type parameter of an IP Video Gateway Card needs a reboot of the card.  ASI encapsulation and decapsulation can only be done by an IP Video Gateway Card with 3 electrical SDI Input ports and 3 electrical SDI Output ports provided with the JPEG2000 option. JPEG2000 Compressing and Decompressing When the IP Video Gateway Card is populated with the JPEG2000 option, the card can handle ASI or IP encapsulation and decapsulation of compressed SDI video using the JPEG2000 image coding system. The JPEG2000 option allows decompressing 3 incoming streams or compressing 3 outgoing streams simultaneously. Before configuring the gateway, the DCM needs to know which process must be done, decompressing (JPEG2K parameter = 3 Decoders) or compressing (JPEG2K parameter = 3 Encoders). Note: For an ASI Gateway configured IP Video Gateway Card, the JPEG2K parameter also determines the input/output port configuration of the card. If the parameter is set to 3 Decoders, the IP Video Gateway Card is calibrated for ASI decapsulation and will have three ASI input and three SDI output ports. If the parameter is set to 3 Encoders, the card is calibrated for ASI encapsulation and will have three SDI input and three ASI output ports.

4011746 Rev AG

107

Chapter 2 Configuration

 ASI Decapsulation (JPEG2K parameter = 3 Decoders)

 ASI Encapsulation (JPEG2K parameter = 3 Encoders)

Important: Changing the JPEG2K parameter of an IP Video Gateway Card needs a reboot of the card. 3D Video Support For ASI encapsulation and decapsulation of 3D video, both the left and right video stream of the 3D video must be bound by enabling 3D support. For more information, please refer to chapter IP Video Gateway. Important: Disable 3D support if the IP Video Gateway Card doesn't process 3D video. Stream Combinations The combinations of the streams (SD, HS, and 3G/3D) that can be processed by an IP Video Gateway Card depend on the SFP Transceivers installed into the SFP cages of the card. An IP Video Gateway Card with 1 Gbps SFP transceivers can handle up to 6 SD/HD streams. A card with 10 Gbps SFP transceivers is able to process the following stream combinations. 3G/3D Streams

108

SD/HD Streams

0

6

1

4

2

2

3

0 4011746 Rev AG

Configuring an IP Video Gateway Card

Important: Changing this stream combination while a process is running might interrupt this process. Genlocking When a valid reference signal is connected to the REF input of the IP Video Gateway Card, the outgoing streams can be synchronized to this signal. Therefore the gen lock feature of the card must be enabled. Important: If the gen lock feature is enabled while no valid reference signal is connected, no outgoing streams will be generated. Frame Rates of Incoming Uncompressed HD Streams Before the IP Video Gateway Card can handle incoming uncompressed HD stream, the system need the knowledge of the frame rate of the incoming streams, 25 - 29.97 59.94 fps or 25 - 30 - 60 fps.

Changing the IP Video Gateway Card Settings The following steps describe how to change the card settings of an IP Video Gateway Card. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the IP Video Gateway Card for which card settings must be changed. Result: The SDI Interface Configuration page of the corresponding IP Video Gateway Card is displayed.

3

Under the Card Settings, select the desired function for the IP Video Gateway Card:

 

IP Gateway: IP encapsulation/decapsulation of SDI video ASI Gateway: ASI encapsulation/decapsulation of SDI video

4

For an ASI Gateway configured card, select Enabled or Disabled in the 3D Support drop down box under the Resource Setup settings.

5

For an IP Gateway configured card, select the video/audio component combination in the Configurations drop down box under the Resource Setup settings.

4011746 Rev AG

109

Chapter 2 Configuration

6

In the JPEG2K drop down box, select the function of the JPEG2000 option, JPEG2000 compressing (3 Encoders) or JPEG2000 decompressing (3 Decoders).

7

Tick the Gen Lock check box under Setting to enable this feature or clear this check box otherwise.

8

In the HD Frame Rates in Uncompressed Transport drop down box, select the frame rate of the incoming uncompressed HD streams, 25 - 29.97 - 59.94 fps or 25 - 30 - 60 fps.

9

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Note: After changing the JPEG2000 and/or IP Video Gateway Card functionality, the following confirmation box will be displayed asking a reboot of the IP Video Gateway Card.

Press Yes to restart the card. Important: Changing the stream combination (Configurations parameter) while a process is running might interrupt this process.

Shutting Down the IP Video Gateway Card Introduction The DCM's IP Video Gateway Card is hot swappable, meaning this card can be removed without powering of the DCM. To prevent damaging the IP Video Gateway Card during disconnecting, the card must be shut down. This can be done via the user interface of the DCM or by pressing the eject button. The procedure to shut down the card via the eject button and the procedure to remove the card can be found in the system guide that is shipped with the device.

To Shut Down the IP Video Gateway Card The following procedure describes how to shut down an IP Video Gateway Card. 1

110

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring an IP Video Gateway Card

Result: The System Settings page is displayed. 2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the IP Video Gateway Card that must be shut down. Result: The SDI Interface Configuration page of the IP Video Gateway Card is displayed.

3

Click on Hot Swap.

Result: The following confirmation box is displayed.

4

Click on OK to confirm or on Cancel to abort the operation. The IP Video Gateway Card can be removed when the LEDs on the card start blinking.

4011746 Rev AG

111

Section C Port Configuration Introduction This section describes the procedures to change port related settings.

In this section ASI Port Configuration ................................................................................................114 GbE Port Configuration ...............................................................................................121 8-VSB RF Port Configuration ......................................................................................156 DVB S2 RF Port Configuration ...................................................................................162 SDI Port Configuration ................................................................................................172

4011746 Rev AG

113

Chapter 2 Configuration

ASI Port Configuration Introduction General The ASI Interface Card and ASI SFN Interface Card of the DCM are provided with a number of ASI ports, which can be configured individually either as input or output port. The ASI Interface Card is populated with 10 ASI ports and the ASI SFN Interface Card with 8. The configuration parameters of the ASI ports can be found on the configuration page of the ASI interface card. The ASI port numbering used by the GUI is shown in the illustration below.  ASI Interface Card

 ASI SFN Interface Card

Hint: The ASI SFN Interface Card is also provided with two GPS reference signal inputs. More information about these inputs can be found in topic Integrating the DCM into Single Frequency Networks on page 1045.

ASI Input Bandwidth Limitation The bandwidth of an incoming transport stream on an ASI port can be limited. When the bandwidth of the transport stream exceeds a particular value, packets will be dropped and the ASI Input Bandwidth Exceeded alarm will be activated. Due to the clock inaccuracy of the source device and the DCM (max. 30 ppm/clock), a margin of 20 Kbps will automatically be added to the given limit (Input Rate Limit (Mbps) parameter). This avoids dropping packets by clock differences between both devices. Hint: The Input Rate Limit (Mbps) parameter can also be modified via SNMP using the SA_Europe_DCM_SMI2.mib.

114

4011746 Rev AG

ASI Port Configuration

ASI Output Port Mirroring An ASI input or output port can be mirrored to one or multiple ASI output ports belonging to the same interface card. When an ASI port is configured as a port mirror for another ASI output port (mirror port), the output of this port is an exact copy of the output of the mirrored port. For a single ASI interface Card, maximum 5 ports can be mirrored and one port can have maximum nine mirror ports. For an ASI SFN Interface Card, maximum 4 ports can be mirrored and one port can have maximum 7 mirror ports. Once a port is mirrored to a port, additional configuration has to be done on the mirrored port. Configuring mirror ports is not possible. When an alarm arises on a mirrored port, only an alarm will be generated for the mirrored port, not for the mirror ports. In the Outputs tree on the Tree View page, a mirrored output port and its mirror ports are combined in one port branch. The following illustration depicts a branch of output port 3 mirrored to port 1, 2, and 4.

When an input port is mirrored to one or multiple output ports, the mirror output port(s) is (are) not visible in the Outputs tree. For more information concerning the Inputs and Outputs tree, please refer to topic Introducing the Services Trees on page 182. Note: When a port is mirrored to a port, all settings for this mirror port and all routings to this port are removed.

To Configure an ASI Input Port The following procedure explains how to configure an input port of an ASI Interface Card or ASI SFN Interface Card. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which an ASI input port must be configured. Result: The ASI Interface Configuration page containing the I/O settings of the card is displayed. Hint: The ASI Interface Configuration page of the interface card can also be displayed by right-clicking on the card in the Inputs or Outputs tree and pointing to Configuration in the shortcut menu.

4011746 Rev AG

115

Chapter 2 Configuration

Note: The Name, Type, Enabled, Packet Format, and Output Mode parameter of a mirror port are not applicable, see topic To Configure a Mirror Port on page 118. 3

In the Name box of the ASI port in question, enter a name for this input port. A logical name will facilitate the identification of the ASI input port in the user interface.

4

In the Type drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Input. Result: When the Type parameter is set to Input, both the Packet Format and Output Mode parameter are grayed out. WARNING: When the port type is changed, the related transport stream and service settings are removed!

5

In the Enable drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Enabled to enable the ASI input port or Disabled to disable the port.

6

When the bandwidth of the transport stream on the incoming ASI port must be limited, tick the Input Rate Limit (Mbps) check box and enter the value in the corresponding box.

7

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation. Notes:

116

-

If the ASI connector is fed with a valid signal, the packet format (188 Bytes or 204 Bytes) of this incoming signal is displayed in the Packet Format box of the ASI port, otherwise the packet format is indicated by Undefined.

-

Changing an Input port to an Output port is not possible when services or components of the port are passed to the output.

4011746 Rev AG

ASI Port Configuration

To Configure an ASI Output Port The following procedure explains how to configure an output port of an ASI Interface Card or ASI SFN Interface Card. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which a port must be configured. Result: The ASI Interface Configuration page containing the I/O Settings table of the interface card is displayed. Hint: The ASI Interface Configuration page of the interface card can also be displayed by right-clicking on the card in the Inputs or Outputs tree and pointing to Configuration in the shortcut menu.

Note: The Name, Type, Enabled, Packet Format, and Output Mode parameter of a mirror port are not applicable, see topic To Configure a Mirror Port on page 118. 3

In the Name box of the ASI port in question, enter a name for this output port. A logical name will facilitate the identification of the ASI output port in the user interface.

4

In the Type drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Output. WARNING: When the port type is changed, the related transport stream and service settings are removed!

5

4011746 Rev AG

In the Enable drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Enabled to enable the ASI output port, Disabled to disable the port, or Auto Enabled. With the Enabled parameter set to Auto Enabled mode, enabling/disabling the port follows the active/inactive state of the device, meaning the port is disabled if the DCM is inactive and the port is enabled if the DCM is active. 117

Chapter 2 Configuration

Hint: The Enabled Status parameter indicates the current enabling state of the ASI port. 6

In the Packet Format drop down box, select 188 Bytes or 204 Bytes. When the packet format is set to 204, 16 null bytes for Reed Solomon FEC bytes are added to the outgoing packets.

7

In the Output Mode drop down box, set the output mode of the outgoing ASI stream to Byte (burst mode) or to Packet mode. This parameter is default set to Byte.

8

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

To Configure a Mirror Port The following procedure describes how to configure a mirror port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which a mirror port must be configured. Result: The ASI Interface Configuration page containing the I/O Settings table of the interface card is displayed. Hint: The ASI Interface Configuration page of the interface card can also be displayed by right-clicking on the card in the Inputs or Outputs tree and pointing to Configuration in the shortcut menu.

3

In the Mirror of Port drop down box of the corresponding port, enter the port number of the mirrored port.

4

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Note:  After pressing Apply, all settings for this port and all routings to this port are 118

4011746 Rev AG

ASI Port Configuration

removed and the selected port is mirrored to this port.  With the exception of the Mirror of Port parameter, all port parameters of a mirror port are not applicable.  Port mirroring can be disabled by setting the Mirror of Port parameter of the mirror port to None.

Checking the ASI Port Parameters A parameter overview per ASI port together with a graphical representation of the port location on the rear panel of the DCM can be found on the ASI Port Configuration page of the user interface. The following illustration depicts an ASI Port Configuration page.

Perform the following steps to view the parameter overview of a particular ASI port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, expand the interface card branch for which a port must be checked.

3

Double click this port. Result: The ASI Port Configuration page of the port in question is displayed with the following interface information.

4011746 Rev AG

-

Number: port number

-

Name: port name 119

Chapter 2 Configuration

-

Type: input or output port

-

State: state of the port

-

Packet format: 188 or 204 bytes

-

Output mode: Burst (byte) or Packet mode

Hints:  The hardware configuration of the DCM is depicted in the Hardware configuration box. The corresponding ASI port is highlighted. Clicking on an interface card in the hardware configuration picture opens the ASI Interface Configuration page of the corresponding interface card.  The ASI Interface Configuration page containing the settings to configure the corresponding port can directly be accessed by pressing Configure Port.  The ASI Port Configuration page of a particular port can also be displayed by right-clicking on the port in the Inputs or Outputs tree and pointing to Configuration in the shortcut menu.

120

4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

GbE Port Configuration Configuring the Interface Parameters of a GbE Port Introduction The SFP cages of an IP Video Gateway Card and GbE Interface Card can be populated with respectively two and four SFP transceivers. For a GbE Interface Card these cages can be equipped with 1GbE SFP transceivers and the cages of the IP Video Gateway Card with 1GbE or 10GbE SFP transceivers. Important: The DCM needs the knowledge of the speed of the SFP transceivers installed into the IP Video Gateway Module. The procedure to do this can be found in topic Setting the Speed Mode of the IP Video Gateway Card Ethernet Ports on page 122. The port mode of the ethernet ports of the GbE Interface Card can be set to Port Pairs or to Fixed Individual Ports. When the port mode for a GbE Interface Card is set to Fixed Individual Ports, GbE port 1 and 3 are input ports and GbE port 2 and 4 output ports. These ports can individually be enabled and disabled and configured. When the mode is set to Port Pairs, the ethernet ports of the GbE Interface Cards make two port pairs. Since both ports of a port pair are considered as one virtual port, particular settings are configurable per individual port and particular settings are configurable per port pair. Important: The GbE ports of the IP Video Gateway Card always make one port pair. The illustration below shows these GbE port pairs.  GbE Interface Card

 IP Video Gateway Card

4011746 Rev AG

121

Chapter 2 Configuration

Notes:  When the port mode is set to Port Pairs, the GbE ports within a port pair can be configured in such a way that they can participate into GbE port backup applications. More information concerning GbE port backup can be found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Backup Parameters on page 914.  Incoming packets with CRC errors are by default dropped. For a GbE Interface Card, this behavior can be changed, see topic Changing the Port Mode on page 123.  The GbE ports of a GbE Interface Card and IP Video Gateway Card do not support IPv6.  The DCM cannot distinguish between two or more incoming multicast streams with identical multicast IP address / UDP port, even if the source IP addresses differ.

Setting the Speed Mode of the IP Video Gateway Card Ethernet Ports Introduction The SFP cages of an IP Video Gateway Card can be populated with either GbE SFP transceivers or with 10GbE SFP Transceivers. The DCM needs the knowledge of the SFP modules installed into the card. This can be done by specifying the corresponding speed mode of the ports, 1 Gbps or 10 Gbps. Important:  Changing the speed mode to 10 Gbps needs the GW_10G_GBE license.  After changing the speed mode, a reboot of the IP Video Gateway Card is required. To Set the Speed Mode of the Ethernet Ports The following procedure describes how to set the speed mode of the ethernet ports of an IP Video Gateway Card. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the IP Video Gateway Card for which the GbE port speed mode must be set. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

122

In the Mode drop down box under the GbE Port Speed settings, select 1 Gbps or 10 Gbps.

4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

Result: After changing the Mode parameter, a warning is displayed informing that the IP Video Gateway Card must be restarted. 4

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

5

Click on Yes to restart the IP Video Gateway Card or on No otherwise.

Hint: When rebooting the card is postponed by clicking on No, the card can be restarted afterwards as described in topic Shutting Down the IP Video Gateway Card on page 110.

Changing the Port Mode As seen in the introduction, the port mode of the ethernet ports of a GbE Interface Card can be set to Port Pairs or to Fixed Individual Ports. Important:  When the ethernet Port Mode is set to Fixed Individual Ports, port backup and port mirroring is not possible.  When port mirroring is enabled or when the Backup Mode is set to Auto 1 or Auto 2, changing the ethernet Port Mode to Fixed Individual Ports is not possible. WARNING: Changing the Port Mode parameter results in a temporary signal loss.

Packets with CRC errors are by default dropped by a GbE Interface Card. This default behavior can be changed by setting the Packets with CRC Error parameter to Process. The following steps describe how to change these settings. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which the ethernet port mode must be changed. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

123

Chapter 2 Configuration

3

In the Port Mode drop down box under Card Settings, select the desired mode, Port Pairs or Fixed Individual Ports. Result: The following or similar popup will be displayed.

4

Close this popup by pressing OK.

5

In the Packets with CRC Error drop down box, select Process or Drop.

6

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Configuring the GbE Port Settings Introduction To configure GbE ports, the following name and network parameters can be changed:  Name parameter  Type parameter (read only) This parameter shows the direction of the traffic through the GbE Ports. Input: unidirectional incoming traffic Output: unidirectional outgoing traffic I/O: bidirectional traffic  Enable parameter Determines the status of a GbE port, Enabled, Disabled, or Auto Enabled. With the Enable parameter set to Auto Enabled mode, enabling/disabling the port follows the active/inactive state of the device, meaning the GbE port is disabled if the DCM is inactive and the port is enabled if the DCM is active. Hint: The Enabled Status parameter indicates the current enabling state of the GbE port. Note: The IP Video Gateway Card doesn't support Auto Enabled.  Disable Mode parameter Determines the disable state of the port pair.

124

-

Port Only Disabled: the GbE port pair is disabled.

-

Full Link Disabled: the GbE port pair is disabled in such a way that the device connected to this port pair detects link loss. This setting is useful in case of 4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

device backup with the Digital Headend Backup Task of ROSA NMS.  MAC Address parameter (read only) MAC address of the corresponding GbE port  IP Address parameter The IP addresses in the following ranges are not allowed: -

0.0.0.0 - 0.255.255.255 (reserved by IANA)

-

127.0.0.0 - 127.255.255.255 (reserved by IANA)

-

224.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 (multicast addresses)

Important: Changing the IP address of a GbE port receiving traffic will interrupt this traffic shortly after applying the address.  Subnet Mask parameter  Auto Negotiation parameter Auto-Negotiation is a function where a device learns the capabilities of the device at the other end of the link and configures itself to the highest common set of capabilities. This setting must be equal to the auto-negotiation setting of the connected system. For Electrical GbE SFP Transceivers without 1000Base-X autonegotiation capabilities, this parameter must be disabled. For Electrical GbE SFP Transceivers with 1000Base-X auto-negotiation capabilities, this parameter must be enabled. More information concerning SFP transceivers can be found in the System Guide shipped with your DCM. Note: For an IP Video Gateway Card of which the GbE ports are populated with 10GbE SFP modules and for which the GbE Port Speed - Mode parameter is set to 10 Gbps, the Auto Negotiation parameter is not applicable.  Filtering parameter As described in topic Settings the GbE UDP Boundary on page 132, UDP packets are filtered using the destination UDP port number. All UDP packets for which the destination UDP port number is greater than the GbE UDP boundary setting parameter are considered as MPEG (GbE Interface Card) or SDI (IP Video Gateway Card) data packets. A second filtering on these MPEG/SDI data packets is by default done by using IP address filtering. All UDP packets for which the destination IP address matches the IP address of the GbE port will be processed. For certain reasons, for instance for IP aliasing, this second MPEG/SDI data packet filtering must be done by using MAC address filtering. All MPEG/SDI data packets for which the MAC address matches the MAC address of the GbE port will be processed. The following filters can be used:

4011746 Rev AG

-

Disabled: all MPEG/SDI data IP packets will be processed.

-

MAC Only: all MPEG/SDI data IP packets matching the MAC address of the GbE port will be processed. 125

Chapter 2 Configuration

-

IP Only (default): all MPEG/SDI data IP packets matching the IP address of the GbE port will be processed.

-

MAC and IP: all MPEG/SDI data IP packets matching the IP address and the MAC address of the GbE port will be processed.

 Output Port Mirroring parameter This parameter determines the mirroring mode of the GbE output ports. When the output port mirroring mode is switched on, both output ports will playout the same data. Notes: -

To determine the source IP address for an outgoing transport stream belonging to an output port for which the output port mirroring mode is switched on, the following rules are used (order of priority) 

The IP address of the mirrored output port will be used for both output ports if the IP address of the mirrored port is forced.



The source IP address of the VLAN will be used if the outgoing transport stream belongs to a VLAN and a VLAN is configured for the output port.



The IP address of the port will be used if the outgoing transport stream belongs to a VLAN and no VLAN is configured for the output port.



The IP address of the output port will be used if the stream does not belong to a VLAN.

 Output Streaming parameter This parameter determines the outgoing MPEG data packet streaming through the output port. -

On: output streaming is switched on

-

Off: output streaming is switched off

-

Auto: output streaming follows the active/inactive state of the device, meaning output streaming is switched off when the DCM is inactive and vice versa.

Notes: -

126

The actual streaming state is an internal port state. This does not mean that the transport stream will be streamed out at this port. Physically output streaming needs: 

The Enabled parameter of the output port is Enabled.



The Output Streaming parameter of the output port is set to On (or set to Auto for an active device).



The Streaming parameter of the outgoing transport stream is set to Activate. 4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

-

The Output Streaming parameter is not applicable if the Port Mode parameter of the GbE Interface Card is set to Port Pairs.

 RIP Router parameter This parameter determines the IP address of the router to where unsolicited RIP replies will be sent to. The default IP address is 224.0.0.9 (the standard multicast IP address for RIP). This parameter is only useful in transport stream backup applications using anycast, see topic Transport Stream Backup Using Anycast on page 930. Note: Both the IP Address and Subnet Mask parameter for a port become inapplicable if IP aliases are added to this port. More information concerning the IP aliasing feature can be found in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the GbE Ports on page 148. To Configure the GbE Name and Network Settings The following procedure explains how to change the name and network parameters of a GbE port. WARNING: After changing network settings of a GbE port, the routes will be removed and should be reapplied.

1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which GbE port interface parameters must be changed. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

For an IP Video Gateway Card, point to the Interface GbE link. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed.

4

4011746 Rev AG

Perform the following settings in the GbE Port Settings table:

127

Chapter 2 Configuration

Note: For an IP Video Gateway Card, port A is indicated by 1 and port B by 2. a

In the Name box of the port in question, enter a name of maximum 40 characters. A logical port name facilitates the identification of the GbE port in the application.

b

In the Enable drop down box of the port pair in question, select Enabled or Disabled.

c

In the Disable Mode drop down box, select Port Only or Full Link. Note: The Enable and Disable Mode parameter are only applicable in this table for a GbE Interface Card and when the Port Mode parameter is set to Fixed Individual Ports. For IP Video Gateway Cards and for a GbE Interface Card for which the Port Mode parameter is set to Port Pairs, these parameters are accommodated in the GbE Settings table, see topic Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 129.

128

d

In the IP Address box of the port in question, enter the IP address that should be assigned to this port.

e

In the Subnet Mask box of the port in question, enter the mask that determines the subnet to which the IP address belongs. The octets of the Subnet Mask must be separated by dots.

f

Switch on or off auto-negotiation by selecting On or Off in the Auto Negotiation drop down box of the port in question.

g

In the Filtering drop down box, select one of the following values: Disabled, MAC Only, IP Only, or MAC & IP.

h

In the Output Port Mirroring drop down box, select Non to disable output port mirroring or the mirroring port (Port X). 4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

5

i

In the Output Streaming drop down box, select Off, On, or Auto.

j

In the RIP Router box, enter the IP address of the router to where unsolicited RIP replies will be sent to.

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to reload the previous setting.

Notes:  The octets of the IP addresses must be separated by dots.  In the GbE Port Settings table, the Output Port Mirroring and Output Streaming parameters are only available for an output port and if the Port Mode parameter of the GbE Interface Card is set to Fixed Individual Ports

Changing the GbE Port Pair Settings Introduction To configure a GbE port pair, the following parameters can be changed.  Enable parameter: determines the status of a GbE port pair -

Enabled: output streaming is switched on.

-

Disabled: output streaming is switched off.

-

Auto Enabled: output streaming follows the active/inactive state of the device, meaning output streaming is switched off when the DCM is inactive and vice versa.

 Disable Mode parameter: determines the disable state of the port pair. -

Port Only Disabled: the GbE port pair is disabled.

-

Full Link Disabled: the GbE port pair is disabled in such a way that the device connected to this port pair detects link loss. This setting is useful in case of device backup with the Digital Headend Backup Task of ROSA NMS.

 Port Mirroring parameter: determines the mirroring mode of the ports within the GbE port pair. -

Disabled: only the active port of the GbE port pair streams out MPEG/SDI data packets.

-

Mirror 1 on 2 or Mirror 3 on 4: the backup port of the port pair streams out an exact copy of the main port.

Notes:

4011746 Rev AG



Port mirroring works only correctly for multicast destinations. Streaming out unicast traffic to different destinations is not possible with this as the streams are an exact copy of each other.



Port mirroring is not possible if the Port Mode parameter of a GbE Interface Card is set to Fixed Individual Ports. 129

Chapter 2 Configuration

 Mirror of Port Pair parameter: determines the mirroring mode of the GbE port pair of a GbE Interface Card. When the mirroring mode of a port pair is switched on, the active port of the port pair will playout the same data as the active port of the mirrored port pair. Notes: -

Switching on mirroring for both port pairs of a GbE Interface Card is not possible.

-

To determine the source IP address for an outgoing Transport Stream belonging to a port pair for which the mirrored mode is switched on, the following rules are used (order of priority)

-



the IP address of the mirrored port will be used for both port pairs if the IP address of the mirrored port is forced.



the source IP address of the VLAN will be used if the transport stream belongs to a VLAN and a VLAN is configured for the port pair (active or mirror).



the IP address of the port will be used if the stream belongs to a VLAN and no VLAN is configured for the port pair (active or mirror).



the IP address of the port (active or mirror) will be used if the stream do not belong to a VLAN.

The Mirror of Port Pair parameter is not applicable for an IP Video Gateway Card since such card is only equipped with one GbE port pair,

 Output Streaming parameter: determines the outgoing MPEG/SDI data packet streaming through the port pair. -

On: output streaming is switched on.

-

Off: output streaming is switched off.

-

Auto: output streaming follows the active/inactive state of the device, meaning output streaming is switched off when the DCM is inactive and vice versa.

Note: The actual streaming state is an internal port state. This does not mean that the transport streams will be streamed out at this port. Physically output streaming needs:

130

-

The Enabled parameter of the GbE port pair is Enabled.

-

Output Streaming parameter for the port pair is set to On (or set to Auto for an active device).

-

The selected port is active (not in port backup state).

-

The Streaming parameter of the streams is set to Activate.

4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

To Change GbE Port Pair Settings The following procedure explains how to configure a GbE Port Pair. Note: GbE port pairs can only be configured if the Port Mode of the GbE Interface Card is set to Port Pairs. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which GbE port interface parameters must be changed. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

For an IP Video Gateway Card, point to the Interface GbE link. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed.

4

Perform the following settings in the GbE Settings table.

Notes:

 

For an IP Video Gateway Card, port A is indicated by 1 and port B by 2.

a

In the Enable drop down box of the port pair in question, select Enabled, Disabled, or Auto Enabled.

b

In the Disable Mode drop down box, select Port Only or Full Link.

c

In the Port Mirroring drop down box of the port pair in question, select Mirror X on Y or Disabled.

d

In the Mirror of Port Pair drop down box of the port pair in question, select X-Y to determine the mirrored port or None to disable the mirroring mode of the port pair.

The Mirror of Port Pair parameter is not applicable for the port pair belonging to an IP Video Gateway Card.

Result: After changing the Mirror of Port Pair parameter, the following confirmation box is displayed.

Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

131

Chapter 2 Configuration

e 5

In the Output Streaming drop down box of the port pair in question, select one of the following values: On, Off, or Auto.

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Setting the GbE UDP Boundary The GbE UDP boundary setting acts as a filter for the incoming traffic. All traffic with UDP port greater than this setting will be considered and processed by the DCM as MPEG/SDI data. All traffic below this setting will be processed as non MPEG/SDI data. The Boundary parameter can be set between 0 and 65535 for each GbE Interface Card/IP Video Gateway Card and the default value is 6000. The following procedure explains how to set the GbE UDP boundary setting. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which the boundary setting must be changed. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

For an IP Video Gateway Card, point to the Interface GbE link. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed

4

In the Boundary box under the GbE UDP Boundary Setting, enter the UDP port value for the GbE UDP boundary setting.

5

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Checking the Interface Parameters of a GbE Port The interface parameters of a GbE port together with a graphical representation of the port location on the rear panel of the DCM can be found under Info on the GbE Port Configuration page of the port. The following illustration depicts a GbE Port Configuration page of a Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900.

132

4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

Perform the following steps to view the Info page of a particular GbE port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, expand the GbE Interface Card branch or IP Video Gateway Card branch for which a GbE port must be checked.

3

Double click on this port. Result: The GbE Port Configuration page of the port in question is displayed with the following interface parameters:

       

Number: port number Name: port name Type State: state of the port pair to which this port belongs MAC Address: MAC address of the port IP Address: IP address of the port Subnet Mask: Subnet Mask of the subnet to which this port belongs Auto-Negotiation: the auto-negotiation state of the port

Note: More information concerning the interface parameters of a GbE port can be found in topic To Configure the Interface Parameters of a GbE Port on page 124.

4011746 Rev AG

133

Chapter 2 Configuration

Hints:  The hardware configuration of the DCM is depicted in the Hardware Configuration box. The corresponding GbE port is highlighted. Clicking on a GbE Interface Card in the hardware configuration picture opens the GbE Interface Configuration page of the card.  The GbE Interface Configuration page can be accessed by pressing Configure Port on the GbE Port Configuration page.  The GbE Port Configuration page of a particular GbE port can also be displayed by right-clicking on the port in the Inputs or Outputs tree and pointing to Configuration in the shortcut menu.

Adding or Deleting Static ARP Table Entries Introduction For unicast IP streaming (1 sender and 1 receiver) within a particular LAN the DCM needs the knowledge of the MAC address of the device to which must be streamed.

Before the DCM starts streaming to a device with a particular IP address, it starts the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to identify the MAC address of this device by broadcasting an ARP request message and receiving an ARP reply message, which contains the MAC address, from the device. When a DCM is integrated into a unidirectional application, the system is not able to receive ARP reply messages after broadcasting ARP request messages. To deal with this the MAC address can manually be mapped to the IP address by adding a static ARP table entry. Note: Static ARP combined with VLAN is partially supported. If a static ARP is required on a VLAN port, a configuration on the underlying physical port is needed. Meaning this configuration applies to all VLAN ports attached to the physical port. More information concerning the VLAN functionality of the DCM can be found in topic Configuring VLAN on page 138.

To Add a Static ARP Table Entry The following procedure explains how to add a static ARP entry to the ARP table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

134

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which static ARP entries should be added to the ARP table. 4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

Result: The GbE Interface Configuration or SDI Interface Configuration page is displayed. 3

Point to the ARP link. Result: The ARP Configuration page is displayed.

4

Under the Add New Static ARP Entry settings, tick the Port check box(s) of the port(s) for which a static ARP entry must be added.

5

In the IP Address box, enter the IP address. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.

6

In the MAC address box, enter the MAC address associated with the entered IP address. The octets of the MAC address must be separated by colons.

7

Click on Add to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation. Result: After pressing Add, the new Static ARP entry is added to the Static ARP Settings table.

Deleting Static ARP Entries The following procedure explains how to delete Static ARP entries from the ARP table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The Configuration page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which static ARP entries should be removed from the ARP table. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration or SDI Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

Click on the ARP link. Result: The ARP Configuration page is displayed.

4

4011746 Rev AG

Tick the check box(es) in front of the Static ARP entry (entries) that must be removed.

135

Chapter 2 Configuration

Hint: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Static ARP Settings table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row. 5

Press Remove Checked Items to confirm or Reload to abort the operation. Result: After pressing Remove Checked Items, the selected entry (entries) will be removed from the Static ARP Settings table.

Adapting the Static Route Table Introduction When the DCM has to stream to a device situated outside the subnet to which the DCM belongs to, the Address Resolution Protocol is inadequate. To deal with this a Static Route Table must be setup containing the necessary information about the routes to that second network.

In the illustration above DCM A requires the knowledge of the router port that participates into the subnet of the DCM and the IP settings of LAN 2 of DCM B.

136

4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

Note: Static routes combined with VLAN are partially supported. If a static route is required on a VLAN port, a configuration on the underlying physical port is needed. Meaning this configuration applies to all VLAN ports attached to the physical port. More information concerning the VLAN functionality of the DCM can be found in topic Configuring VLAN on page 138.

To Add a New Static Route Entry The procedure below explains how to add a new static route entry to the static route table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which static route entries should be added to the Static Route table. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration or SDI Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

Point to the Routes link. Result: The Routes Configuration page is displayed.

4

Under the Add New Static Route settings, tick the Port check box(es) of the port(s) for which a static route entry must be created.

5

Tick the Default Gateway check box if a direct reachable IP router is used. Note: When the Default Gateway check box is set, both the IP address and the Subnet Mask parameter are not applicable.

6

In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the destination network or destination host. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.

7

In the Subnet Mask box, enter the Subnet Mask of the destination network (when a host IP address is entered, this parameter is not relevant). The octets of the Subnet Mask must be separated by dots.

8

In the Gateway box, enter the IP address of the port of the router to the destination port. The octets of the Gateway must be separated by dots.

9

Press Add to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

137

Chapter 2 Configuration

Result: After pressing Add, the new static route entry is added to the Static Route Settings table.

To Remove a Static Route Entry Perform the following steps to remove a static route entry from the static route entry table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the icon of the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which static route entries should be removed from the Static Route table. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration or SDI Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

Select the Routes link. Result: The Routes Configuration page is displayed.

4

Tick the check box(es) in front of the entry (entries) that must be removed from the Static Route Settings table. Hint: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Static Route Settings table, point to the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and point to the check box of the last row that must be removed.

5

Press Remove Checked Items to confirm or Reload to abort the operation. Result: After pressing Remove Checked Items, the selected route entry (entries) will be removed from the Static Route Setting table.

Configuring VLAN Introduction  About Virtual Local Area Network A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network configuration in which devices communicate using Local Area Network (LAN) protocols as if they were the same physical LAN, but where they are in fact on physical separate LAN. Broadcast and other LAN traffic remains within the LAN. Software masks the physical topology of the devices and provides a logical topology, which is more suitable to the user’s requirements.  About a DCM in a VLAN Environment Port 1 and 2 are considered as VLAN port pair 1 and port 3 and 4 VLAN port pair 2. VLAN port pairs can be configured with VLAN identifier and with own IP address and sub net mask for each port in the VLAN port pair.

138

4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

Remark When a VLAN port pair is defined:  the destination IP address of the incoming transport stream coming from the corresponding VLAN must match the IP address of the VLAN port pair.  the filtering of the GbE ports must be set to MAC only or Disabled and not the default value (IP only). More information concerning Filtering can be found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 124.

Notes The DCM with software version 10.10 supports:  VLAN tagging of outgoing transport stream packets  VLAN Tagging of IGMP packets  VLAN tagging of dynamic ARP packets (both request and replies)  When no source IP address is given using the user interface of the DCM, the source IP address of a VLAN tagged outgoing transport stream is the IP address of the VLAN port. If no such port exists, the IP address of the GbE port (physical port) is used. The procedure to change the source IP address of an outgoing transport stream can be found in topic Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams on page 267. The following list describes the VLAN functionality of the DCM:  Streaming different transport streams with same destination multicast IP address and same UDP port, and different VLAN ID is not allowed.  Receiving multicast transport streams on the same GbE port with identical IP address/UDP port from two different VLANs is not possible.  Receiving unicast transport streams on the same GbE port with identical UDP port from two different VLANs is not possible.  IP aliasing on VLAN ports is not possible.  Static ARP and static routing (in particular default gateway) on VLAN ports are only partially supported. More information about static ARP can be found in topic Adding or Deleting Static ARP Table Entries on page 134 and about static routing in topic Adapting the Static Route Table on page 136.  Changing the IP address of a VLAN port pair receiving multicast traffic will interrupt this traffic shortly.

Adding VLAN Port Pairs Perform the following procedure to add VLAN port pairs. 1 4011746 Rev AG

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. 139

Chapter 2 Configuration

Result: The System Configuration page is displayed. 2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which VLAN port pairs must be added. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration or SDI Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

Click on the VLAN link. Result: The VLAN Configuration page is displayed.

4

Perform the following settings under the Add New VLAN settings.

a

In the Port Pair selection box, point to the ports for which a VLAN port pair must be added.

b

In the VLAN ID box, enter a unique VLAN identifier for the corresponding VLAN port pair. A VLAN ID in the range from 1 up to 4094 can be used.

c

In the First IP Address box, enter an IP address for the first port in the port pair. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.

d

In the First Subnet Mask box, enter the subnet mask for the first port in the port pair. The octets of the subnet mask must be separated by dots.

e

In the Second IP Address box, enter an IP address for the second port in the port pair. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots. Note: The IP addresses of both ports must not be in use by a GbE port, another VLAN port pair, or IP aliasing.

f

In the Second Subnet Mask box, enter the subnet mask for the second port in the port pair. The octets of the subnet mask must be separated by dots.

g

Click on Add. Result: The VLAN port pair is added to the VLAN Settings table.

Notes:  The number of VLAN port pairs is limited to 118/GbE Interface Card.  Changing the IP address of a VLAN port receiving traffic will interrupt this 140

4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

traffic shortly after applying the address.

Removing VLAN Port Pairs The following steps explain how to remove VLAN port pairs from a particular GbE port pair. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which VLAN port pairs must be removed. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration or SDI Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

Click on the VLAN link. Result: The VLAN Configuration page is displayed.

4

In the VLAN Settings table, tick the check box(es) of the VLAN port pair rows that must be removed.

Hints:

5



To sort the VLAN Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the header.



To set the check boxes of consecutive rows, tick the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.

Press Remove Checked Items. Result: The selected row(s) is (are) removed from the VLAN Settings table.

Note: When a VLAN port is in use (for instance if an IGMP Multicast Group with corresponding VLAN ID is joined) the port pair cannot be removed.

4011746 Rev AG

141

Chapter 2 Configuration

Joining or Leaving GbE Ports to IGMP Multicast Groups Introduction The Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a dynamic protocol to register hosts in a multicast group on a particular LAN by exchanging IGMP messages. The DCM is compatible with IGMP version 1, 2, and 3. When the DCM participates into a VLAN environment, the IGMP packets must be VLAN tagged corresponding the VLAN port pairs. More information concerning VLAN can be found in topic Configuring VLAN on page 138.

Joining a GbE Port to a Multicast Group Perform the following steps to join one or more GbE ports of a GbE Interface Card or an IP Video Gateway Card to a multicast group. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which GbE port pair(s) must be added to a Multicast Group. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration or SDI Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

Point to the IGMP link. Result: The IGMP Configuration page is displayed.

4

Under the Join or Modify Multicast Group settings, configure the following parameters:

Note: The picture above shows the Join or Modify Multicast Group settings for a GbE Interface Card for which the Port Mode parameter is set to Port Pairs, but is not necessarily reflective of your particular configuration, i.e. port naming may be different. 142

4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

a

If the Port Mode of the GbE Interface Card is set to Port Pairs, point to the Port Pair selection button of the port pair that should be added to the Multicast Group. If the Port Mode is set to Fixed Individual Ports, click on the Port selection button of the input port that must be added.

b

In the VLAN IDs drop down box, select the VLAN ID corresponding the VLAN port pair. Select None to choose the native GbE port or port pair (without VLAN tags).

c

In the Action drop down box, select Join Multicast IP to give individual multicast IP addresses and select Join Multicast IP Range to give a range of multicast IP addresses. –

If Join Multicast IP is selected, enter the multicast IP addresses in the Enter the multicast IP addresses separated by a comma box. The multicast IP addresses must be separated by commas and the octets of the IP addresses by dots.

The Enter the multicast IP addresses separated by a comma box is only displayed if the Action drop down box is set to Join Multicast IP. –

If Join Multicast IP Range is selected, enter the first multicast IP address in the Start Multicast box and the number of successive multicast IP addresses in the Count box. The octets of the start multicast IP address must be separated by dots.

The Start Multicast box and Count box are only displayed if the Action drop down box is set to Join Multicast IP Range. d

In the with drop down box, select No Source IP, Source IP to enter individual source IP addresses, or Source IP Range to enter a range of source IP addresses. –

4011746 Rev AG

If Source IP is selected, enter the source IP addresses in the Enter the source IP addresses separated by a comma box. The source IP addresses must be separated by a comma and the octets of the IP addresses by dots.

143

Chapter 2 Configuration

The Enter the source IP addresses separated by a comma box is only displayed if the with drop down box is set to Source IP. –

If Source IP Range is selected, enter the first source IP address in the Start Source IP box and the number of successive source IP addresses in the Count box. The octets of the start source IP address must be separated by dots.

The Start Source IP box and Count box are only displayed if the Action drop down box is set to Source IP Range. e

f

In the drop down box under the with drop down box, select the source filtering: –

Include: adds the source IP address(es) to the include list of sources. An Include source list contains the source IP addresses from which multicast reception is allowed.

–

Exclude: adds the source IP address(es) to exclude list of sources. An Exclude source list contains the source IP addresses from which multicast reception is not allowed.

Click on Join. Result: The IP addresses are added to the list and appear in the IGMP Settings table.

Hint: In the IGMP Settings table, clicking on the arrow beside the source IP addresses arranges the corresponding source IP addresses vertically.

144

4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

Notes:  In an IGMPv2 environment the parameter under the with drop down box must be set to Exclude.  When the network between a router and the DCM (using IGMPv3) is populated with snooping switches supporting IGMPv2, the Version parameter under the Unsolicited IGMP Message settings must be set to IGMPv2.

 The DCM will use always the lowest IGMP version, when the Version parameter is set to IGMPv3 and other equipment uses a lower version, the DCM will send out the lower version IGMP messages.

Copying the IGMP Configuration to the other Port or Port Pair The following steps explain how to copy the IGMP configuration from one port or port pair to the other port or port pair. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which the IGMP configuration must be copied. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

Point to the IGMP link. Result: The IGMP Configuration page is displayed.

4

4011746 Rev AG

In the Action drop down box under the Copy Configuration settings, select:



From Port 1 - Port 2 to Port 3 - Port 4 or From Port 3 - Port 4 to Port 1 - Port 2 if the Port Mode of the GbE Interface Card is set to Port Pairs



From Port 1 to Port 3 or From Port 3 to Port 1 if the Port Mode of the GbE Interface Card is set to Fixed Individual Ports

145

Chapter 2 Configuration

5

Click on Copy. Result: The following (or similar) popup is displayed.

The list of source IP addresses of the port to which the IGMP configuration must be copied will be overwritten for any multicast IP address that is already present on the port. If the port contains joins of multicast IP addresses that are not present in the list of the port from which a copy is taken, these joins will be removed if the Remove the multicast join selection button is selected and remain in the list if the Keep the multicast join selection button is selected. 6

Click on OK to confirm or on Cancel to abort the operation.

Leaving the Multicast Group Membership of a GbE Port The following steps explain how to cancel a multicast group membership of a GbE port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which ports or port pairs must be removed from a multicast group. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration or SDI Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

Point to the IGMP link. Result: The IGMP Configuration page is displayed.

4

146

In the IGMP Settings table, tick the check box(es) in front of the entry (entries) that must be removed.

4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

Hint: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the IGMP Settings table, point to the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and point to the check box of the last row. 5

Press Leave Checked Items to confirm or Reload to abort the operation. Result: After pressing Leave Checked Items, the entries are removed from the IGMP Settings table.

Checking the Routes to Destination Devices Introduction Particular status parameters of the routes to destination devices to which should be streamed are categorized on the Destinations page of the user interface. The route parameters that can be found on the Destinations page are:

 Port: represents the port number for the route.  VLAN ID: represents the VLAN identifier.  IP Address: represents the IP address of the destination device.  Routing: represents the status of the route to the destination device, possible values:

4011746 Rev AG

-

Not Routable: no route to the destination device

-

Routable (via Gateway): a route to the destination device exists, the destination device is situated in another subnet of the DCM port and the connection is established using a router.

-

Routable (Destination in LAN): a route to the destination device exists. The destination device is situated in the same subnet of the DCM port.

-

Not Applicable 147

Chapter 2 Configuration

 ARP: represents the result of ARP, possible values: -

Destination Resolved: the DCM received an ARP reply message from the destination device that is situated in the same subnet.

-

Destination Unresolved: the DCM doesn't receive an ARP reply message from the destination device in the same subnet after broadcasting ARP request messages.

-

Gateway Resolved: the destination device is situated in another subnet and the DCM receives an ARP reply message from the router to this subnet.

-

Gateway Unresolved: the destination device is situated in another subnet and the DCM doesn't receive an ARP reply message from the router after broadcasting ARP request messages.

-

Destination has Static ARP: the static ARP entry is used for the route to the destination device (same subnet) or to the router (different subnet).

-

Multicast

-

Not Applicable

Hint: To sort the Destinations Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter header.

To Check the Routes to Destination Devices The following steps explain how to check the connection parameters of destination devices. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Destinations link after clicking on the Status link. Result: The Destinations page is displayed.

2

In the drop down box, select the interface card for which status parameters of the routes to destination devices must be checked. Result: The Destinations Overview table of the selected interface card is displayed.

Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature Introduction To eliminate additional clients to feed backup DCM devices in a backup application or to avoid the need for additional client licenses, the DCM supports IP address takeover by using IP aliasing. The IP aliasing feature of the DCM works as follows: When a client has to send IP packets to a port of the main DCM and the client's ARP table is not yet or no longer populated with ARP entries for this port, the client broadcasts an ARP request message containing the IP address of these packets. 148

4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

When IP aliasing is active on a network interface of the main DCM, the DCM responds with an ARP reply message containing IP address and MAC address of the port. When the client receives the ARP reply, it adds an ARP entry containing the mapping between IP address and MAC address for this port and starts sending IP packets to this port. When the backup DCM is activated, it broadcasts several gratuitous ARP messages containing the alias IP address and the MAC address of the corresponding backup DCM port. When the client receives such message it refreshes the ARP entry of the IP address matching the Alias IP address. Now the IP packets with destination IP address matching the alias IP address for the main DCM port will be sent to the corresponding backup DCM port. Three modes can be used for IP aliasing:  Inactive: the IP aliasing feature is not active.  Active: the IP aliasing feature is active.  Auto: the IP aliasing feature matches the DCM status, meaning the IP alias Mode is active when the DCM status is active and vice versa. Notes:  The following procedures describe how to change the IP alias mode for a GbE port on a GbE Interface Card and how to add or remove IP aliases to or from such port. The management ports also support IP Aliasing. The procedures to change the IP alias mode for management port and how to add or remove IP aliases to or from such port is described in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports on page 68.  IP aliasing can only be used for Advertising Servers.  IP aliasing cannot be combined with VLAN port pairs. For more information concerning the VLAN functionality of the DCM can be found in topic Configuring VLAN on page 138.  For IP Aliasing, the filtering of the GbE port must be set to MAC only or Disabled and not the default value (IP only). More information concerning Filtering can be found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 124.

Changing the IP Alias Mode The following procedure describes how to change the IP alias mode of a GbE port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which GbE port interface parameters must be changed. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

For an IP Video Gateway Card, point to the Interface GbE link. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

149

Chapter 2 Configuration

4

In the Mode drop down box in the IP Alias table of the port for which the IP alias mode must be changed, select Inactive, Active, or Auto.

Note: For an IP Video Gateway Card, port A is indicated by 1 and port B by 2. 5

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Adding an IP Alias The following steps explain how to add a new IP alias to a GbE port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which GbE port interface parameters must be changed. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

For an IP Video Gateway Card, point to the Interface GbE link. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed.

4

In the Port drop down box under the Add New Alias settings, select the port to which an IP alias must be added.

5

In the IP Address box, enter the IP address for the alias. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.

6

Press Add Row to confirm. Result: The IP alias is added to the corresponding IP Alias Port table.

Note: For an IP Video Gateway Card, port A is indicated by 1 and port B by 2. Result: When an IP alias is added to a port, the IP Address and Subnet Mask parameter of this port becomes inapplicable. 7

150

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

Removing IP Aliases Perform the following procedure to remove an IP alias from a GbE port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The Configuration page is displayed.

2

In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card or IP Video Gateway Card for which GbE port interface parameters must be changed. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed.

3

For an IP Video Gateway Card, point to the Interface GbE link. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page is displayed

4

In the IP Alias Port table of the corresponding port, set the check box in the row of the IP alias that must be removed.

Note: For an IP Video Gateway Card, port A is indicated by 1 and port B by 2. 5

Press Remove Checked Rows. Result: The IP alias is removed from the corresponding table.

Checking the GbE Statistics Introduction The GbE Statistics page represents more information concerning the overall statistics on traffic passing through each GbE port of the DCM. The values displayed are accumulated since the last start-up or the last reset. These figures can be refreshed by pressing Reload. The counters on the GbE Statistics page can also be shown in rate representation mode (number of frames per second). These figures are refreshed at regular time. For some reasons it can be useful to switch off this automatic refresh action or to change the refresh rate. Therefore this page is provided with a refresh ( ) drop down box that can be used change the refresh rate (every 10 sec, every 30 sec, or every minute) or to switch off this refresh actions. The default value of these refresh actions can be changed as describes in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 215. The following list describes the counters shown on the GbE Statistics page.

4011746 Rev AG

151

Chapter 2 Configuration

 Frames Received OK (Counters)

152

-

Total frames received: the total number of error-free frames received by the corresponding port

-

Broadcast frames: the number of frames successfully received by the corresponding port and which were directed to the broadcast address

-

Multicast frames: the number of frames successfully received by the corresponding port and which are directed to a multicast address

-

Control frames: the number of error-free frames received by the corresponding port, of which the Length/Type field was provided with the special Control Frame ID

-

VLAN tagged frames: the number of error-free VLAN frames received by the corresponding port

-

Pause frames: the number of pause frames received by the corresponding port

-

64 byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the corresponding port, which had a length of 64 bytes

-

65-127 byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the corresponding port, which had a length between 65 and 127 bytes

-

128-255 byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the corresponding port, which had a length between 128 and 255 bytes

-

256-511 byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the corresponding port, which had a length between 256 and 511 bytes

-

512-1023 byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the corresponding port, which had a length between 512 and 1023 bytes

-

1024-max byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the 4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

corresponding port, which were between 1024 bytes and the maximum length as specified by IEEE 802.3-2002 -

Oversized frames: the number of frames received by the corresponding port, of which the length exceeds the maximum length as specified by IEEE 802.32002

 Reception Errors (Counters)

4011746 Rev AG

-

FCS/CRC error: the total number of packets received by the corresponding port, which had a length between 64 and 1518 bytes, but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error)

-

Length/Type out of range: the number of frames received by the corresponding port, which had a length of at least 64 bytes and where the length/type field contained a length value that did not match the number of MAC client data bytes received

-

Invalid Opcode: the number of error-free frames received by the corresponding port, of which the Length/Type field was provided with MAC Control type identifier 88-08 but with opcode other than the PAUSE opcode

-

Undersized frames: the number of error-free, well-formed frames received by the corresponding port, which had a length less than 64 bytes

-

Fragments: the number of frames received by the corresponding port, which had a length less than 64 byte and with a bad Frame Check Sequence field

153

Chapter 2 Configuration

 Frames Transmitted OK (Counters)

154

-

Total frames transmitted: the total number of error-free frames transmitted by the corresponding port

-

Broadcast frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the corresponding port to a broadcast address

-

Multicast frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the corresponding port to a multicast address

-

Control frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the corresponding port, of which the Length/Type field were provided with the MAC Control Frame type identifier 88-08

-

64 byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the corresponding port, which had a length of 64 bytes

-

65-127 byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the corresponding port, which had a length between 65 and 127 bytes

-

128-255 byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the corresponding port, which had a length between 128 and 255 bytes

-

256-511 byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the corresponding port, which had a length between 256 and 511 bytes

-

512-1023 byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the corresponding port, which had a length between 512 and 1023 bytes

-

1024-max byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the corresponding port, which were between 1024 bytes and the maximum length as specified by IEEE 802.3-2002

-

VLAN tagged frames: the number of error-free VLAN frames transmitted by the corresponding port

4011746 Rev AG

GbE Port Configuration

-

Pause frames: the number of pause frames transmitted by the corresponding port

 Transmission errors (Counters)

-

Oversized frames: the number of frames transmitted by the corresponding port, of which the length exceeds the maximum length as specified by IEEE 802.3-2002

-

Buffer underrun: the number of frames discarded because the transmit buffer became empty during frame transmission

 Global (Counters)

-

Total Bytes received: the total number of bytes received by the corresponding port

-

Total Bytes transmitted: the total number of bytes transmitted by the corresponding port

Checking the GbE Statistics The following procedure explains how to check the GbE statistics. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to GbE Statistics link after clicking on the Status link. Result: The GbE statistics are displayed. Hint: To sort the tables by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter header.

2

In the Card drop down box, select the card for which GbE statistics should be checked.

3

In the Mode drop down box, select Rates or Counters.

4

If the mode is set to Rates, select 10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, or Stop in the Refresh drop down box.

4011746 Rev AG

155

Chapter 2 Configuration

8-VSB RF Port Configuration Introduction General The DCM 8-VSB Interface Card allows demodulating eight off-air terrestrial RF signals and offers these demodulated transport streams to the mux engine of the DCM for further processing. The 8-VSB Interface Card exists in two different flavors, a 4 RF inputs and an 8 RF inputs card. The following illustrations show the port location of an 8-VSB Interface Card with 4 RF inputs and with 8 RF inputs:  8-VSB Interface Card: 4 RF Inputs

 8-VSB Interface Card: 8 RF Inputs

Licensing Demodulating of RF channels is license based, meaning each port for which demodulation is enabled takes one 8VSB_RECEPTION license. More information about licensing can be found in topic Licensing on page 28.

Configuring the Input Settings of an 8-VSB RF Port The following steps explain how to configure the input settings of an 8-VSB RF port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the 8-VSB Interface Card for which the input settings must be changed. Result: The VSB Interface Configuration page containing the Input Settings table of the 8-VSB Interface Card is displayed.

156

4011746 Rev AG

8-VSB RF Port Configuration

3

In the Name box of the port in question, enter a name for the port. A logical name will facilitate the identification of the 8-VSB port in the user interface.

4

In the Enable box, select Enabled for enabling the port or Disabled for disabling. Note: Enabling an input port consumes an 8VSB_RECEPTION license.

5

In the Channel box, enter the number of the channel to which the port must tuned to. A value can be given between 1 and 82.

6

Repeat step 3 up to 5 for all ports that must be configured.

7

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Tip: The following additional information about the RF signal on the port is given in the Input Settings table.  Port (read only): represents the number of the port.  Frequency (MHz) (read only): represents the frequency (MHZ) of the chosen RF channel.  Locked (read only): represents if the DCM is locked to the incoming stream of the chosen RF channel or not.  Input Level (dBm) (read only): represents the level of the incoming stream of the chosen RF channel expressed in dBm.

Configuring the Alarm Threshold Levels When the input levels and/or MER level of an incoming signal drop below or exceed a user defined threshold level, an alarm will be generated. The following procedure describes how to change these threshold levels. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the 8-VSB Interface Card for which the input and/or MER threshold levels must be changed. Result: The VSB Interface Configuration page containing the 8-VSB Settings table of the 8-VSB Interface Card is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

157

Chapter 2 Configuration

3

In the Signal Low Threshold (dBm) box, enter the desired value for the low signal alarm threshold. A value can be given between -80 and -20 dBm and is by default set to -80.

4

In the Signal High Threshold (dBm) box, enter the desired value for the high signal alarm threshold. A value can be given between -80 and -20 dBm and is by default set to -20. Note: The Signal Low Threshold (dBm) parameter must be smaller than or equal to the Signal High Threshold (dBm) parameter.

158

5

In the MER Threshold (dB) box, enter the desired value for the MER alarm threshold. A value can be given between 0 and 40 dB and is by default set to 18.

6

Repeat step 3 up to 5 for all port that must be configured.

7

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

8-VSB RF Port Configuration

Checking the Interface Parameters of an 8-VSB RF Port The interface parameters of an 8-VSB RF port together with a graphical representation of the port location on the rear panel of the DCM can be found in the Info table on the VSB Port Configuration page of the port. The following illustration depicts a VSB Port Configuration page of a Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900.

Perform the following steps to view the VSB Port Configuration page of a particular 8-VSB RF port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, expand the 8-VSB Interface Card branch for which an 8-VSB RF port must be checked.

3

Double click on this port. Result: The VSB Port Configuration page of the port in question is displayed with the following interface parameters:

     4011746 Rev AG

Number: port number Name: port name Type State: state of the port to which this port belongs Channel: the channel to which the port is tuned to 159

Chapter 2 Configuration

 

Frequency: the frequency (MHZ) of the chosen RF channel



Input Level: the level of the incoming stream of the chosen RF channel expressed in dBm

Locked: indicates if the DCM is locked to the incoming stream of the chosen RF channel or not

Hints:  The hardware configuration of the DCM is depicted in the Hardware configuration box. The corresponding RF port is highlighted. Clicking on an interface card in the hardware configuration picture opens the VSB Interface Configuration page of the corresponding interface card.  The VSB Interface Configuration page of the 8-VSB Interface Card to which the port belongs can be accessed by pressing Configure Port. The VSB Port Configuration page of a particular port can also be displayed by right-clicking on the port in the Inputs tree and pointing to Configuration in the shortcut menu.

Checking the 8-VSB Statistics Introduction Figures indicating the quality of an incoming 8-VSB signal are categorized on the VSB Statistics page of the user interface. These figures are:  Card: this parameter represents the slot position of the card.  Port: this parameter shows the name of the 8-VSB RF input port.  Input Level (dBm): this parameter shows the level of the incoming signal.  MER (db): this parameter gives the modulation error ratio (MER) of the incoming signal. The MER is used to provide a single figure of merit analysis of the received signal. This figure is computed to include the total signal degradation at the input of the receiver and so give an indication of the ability of the receiver to correctly decode the signal. MER can be regarded as a form of signal to noise ratio measurement that will give an indication of a receiver’s ability to demodulate the signal, because it includes, not just Gaussian noise, but all other uncorrectable impairments of the received constellation as well.  FEC Errored Blocks - Correctable: this parameter represents the number of errored blocks that can be corrected by the 8-VSB Interface Card since reset.  FEC Errored Blocks - Not Correctable: This parameter shows the number of errored blocks that cannot be corrected by the 8-VSB Interface Card since reset.  FEC Errored Blocks - Clean: This parameter represents the number of blocks 160

4011746 Rev AG

8-VSB RF Port Configuration

without errors since reset.

To check the 8-VSB Statistics The following procedure describes how to display the statistics of the incoming 8VSB signals. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the VSB Statistics link after clicking on the Status link. Result: The VSB Statistics page containing the 8-VSB Statistics table is displayed.

To Reset the FEC Statistics Perform the following procedure to reset the FEC statistics of a particular incoming 8-VSB signal. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the VSB Statistics link after clicking on the Status link. Result: The VSB Statistics page is displayed.

2

Under the Reset Counters settings, select the 8-VSB Interface Card receiving the signal for which FEC statistics must be reset in the Card drop down box and the corresponding port in the Port drop down box.

3

Press the Reset button. Result: The FEC statistics of the selected signal are reset.

4011746 Rev AG

161

Chapter 2 Configuration

DVB S2 RF Port Configuration Introduction General The DVB-S2/CI Interface Card supports reception of DVB S L-band signals (as defined in ETSI EN 300 421) as well as DVB S2 L-band signals (as defined in ETSI EN 302 307) and provides a number of DVB common interface (CI) slots which can independently be used for descrambling purposes. The DVB-S2/CI Interface Card exists in two different flavors, a version with 2 RF input ports and 2 DVB CI slots and a version with 4 RF input ports and 4 DVB CI slots. The following illustrations show the port location for both versions:  DVB-S2/CI Interface Card: 2 RF inputs and 2 DVB CI slots

 DVB-S2/CI Interface Card: 4 RF inputs and 4 DVB CI slots

The DVB-S2/CI Interface Card is capable to process single streams as well as multi streams. When an RF port is tuned to a multi stream, the card is able to receive 6 incoming transport streams in a multi stream simultaneously. Important: For a VCM coded multi stream, the FEC frame type for all streams cannot be mixed, meaning all streams should have the FEC frame type set to short or to normal in the modulator.

Licenses Using the RF ports of a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card is license based, enabling a port occupies a DVB_S2_RECEPTION license and enabling a port for a multi stream processing needs a DVB_S2_MULTISTREAM license. 162

4011746 Rev AG

DVB S2 RF Port Configuration

Error Performance The following tables give the minimum C/N required in AWGN channel for Quasi Error Free performance (PER = 1.0E-7)  DVB-S Mode

C/N min (dB)

QPSK 1/2

2.5

QPSK 2/3

4.4

QPSK 3/4

5.4

QPSK 5/6

6.4

QPSK 7/8

7.1

 DVB-S2 Mode

4011746 Rev AG

C/N min (dB) Normal FEC frame 1 - 45 MSymbol/s

C/N min (dB) Short FEC frame 1 - 15 MSymbol/s

Pilots OFF

Pilots OFF

Pilots ON

Pilots ON

QPSK 1/4

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.3

QPSK 1/3

0.3

0.2

0.2

0.3

QPSK 2/5

0.4

0.2

0.4

0.2

QPSK 1/2

1.2

1.2

1.5

1.4

QPSK 3/5

2.4

2.5

2.7

2.7

QPSK 2/3

3.2

3.2

3.5

3.5

QPSK 3/4

4.2

4.2

4.4

4.4

QPSK 4/5

4.9

4.9

5.1

5.2

QPSK 5/6

5.3

5.3

5.8

5.7

QPSK 8/9

6.3

6.4

6.7

6.7

QPSK 9/10

6.6

6.6

8PSK 3/5

6.5

6.2

7.2

6.5

8PSK 2/3

6.9

6.9

7.5

7.3

8PSK 3/4

8.2

8.2

8.5

8.4

8PSK 5/6

9.6

9.7

9.9

10.0

8PSK 8/9

10.9

10.9

11.3

11.1

8PSK 9/10

11.2

11.2

16APSK 2/3

10.0

9.4

10.1

9.9

163

Chapter 2 Configuration Mode

C/N min (dB) Normal FEC frame 1 - 45 MSymbol/s

C/N min (dB) Short FEC frame 1 - 15 MSymbol/s

Pilots OFF

Pilots OFF

Pilots ON

Pilots ON

16APSK 3/4

10.6

10.6

10.9

10.8

16APSK 4/5

11.3

11.3

11.4

11.6

16APSK 5/6

11.9

11.8

12.2

12.3

16APSK 8/9

13.2

13.2

13.5

13.6

16APSK 9/10

13.4

13.4

Configuring the DVB-S2 Interfaces Introduction For setting up an RF interface of a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card, three groups of settings should be configured, the RF port settings, receiver settings, and the LNC Settings. The following list describes these settings. RF Port Settings  Name: name of the RF port. Labeling a port with a unique name facilitates the identification of the port in the application.  Enable: enables or disables the RF port. Enabling an RF port occupies a DVB_S2_RECEPTION license.  Port Mode: Single Stream or Multi Stream -

Single Stream: allows processing an incoming stream containing a single transport stream

-

Multi Stream: allows processing an incoming stream containing a single transport stream or an incoming stream containing multiple transport streams. Changing the Port Mode to Multi Stream takes a DVB_S2_MULTISTREAM license.

Receiver Settings The following list gives information about the receiver parameters that can be configured for a DVB S2 RF port. -

164

Mode: the type of DVB transmission 

DVB-S: for DVB S transmission



DVB-S2: for DVB S2 transmission



Auto: the DCM derives the DVB transmission type from the incoming signal. 4011746 Rev AG

DVB S2 RF Port Configuration

-

Sat Frequency (GHz): the frequency that the receiver should use for tuning the incoming signal. The frequency range depends on the LNC settings, see further in this topic. 

For a single band LNC: between 0.95 GHz + low band frequency of the local oscillator in the LNC amplifier and 2.15 GHz + low band frequency of the local oscillator in the LNC amplifier



For a dual band LNC: between 0.95 GHz + low band frequency of the local oscillator in the LNC amplifier and 2.15 GHz + high band frequency of the local oscillator in the LNC amplifier

-

Symbol Rate (MSym/s): the symbol rate of the incoming signal. This parameter can be set in the range from 1 up to 45 MSym/s in steps of 0.001 and the default value is 27.500 MSym/s.

-

Polarization: the polarization of the incoming signal (Horizontal or Vertical). This parameter determines the position of the polarizer in the LNC by putting 18 V on the LNC for horizontal polarization or 13 V for vertical polarization. This parameter is only applicable if LNC bias is enabled, see further in this topic.

-

Band Selection: For a universal LNC with a high and low band, this parameter determines to which band the receiver will tune if the satellite frequency belongs to the overlap of the low and high band. This parameter is only applicable if the LNC type is set to Dual Band, see further in this topic.

-

Signal Low Threshold (dBm): this parameter determines when the DVB S2 RF level too low alarm must be generated if the level of the RF signal drops.

-

Signal High Threshold (dBm): this parameter determines when the DVB S2 RF level too high alarm must be generated if the level of the RF signal rises.

-

CN Margin Low Threshold (dB): this parameter determines when the DVB S2 C/N margin too low alarm must be generated. The carrier to noise (CN) margin is the difference between current CN level and minimum required C/N level for quasi error free reception.

-

BER High Threshold: this parameter determines when the DVB S2 BER too high alarm must be generated if the BER rises. The values that can be used are: 1E-10, 1E-9, 1E-8, 1E-7, 1E-6, 1E-5, 1E-4, and 2E-4.

-

PL Scrambling Seq Ind: the sequence index that is used for physical layer (PL) scrambling. This parameter is by default 0.

Hint: Check the service information of the satellite service provider for the correct symbol rate, satellite frequency, polarization, band, and physical layer scrambling sequence index. LNC Settings The list below describes the LNC parameters that can be configured for a DVB S2 RF port. 4011746 Rev AG

165

Chapter 2 Configuration

-

Type: the LNC type, single band or dual band

-

LO Low Frequency (MHz): the low band frequency of the Local Oscillator (LO) in the LNC amplifier

-

LO High Frequency (MHz): the high band frequency of the Local Oscillator (LO) in the LNC amplifier

-

Bias: this parameter determines if power is provided via the RF input port to the LNC or not. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the position of the polarizer in the LNC will be determined by the Polarization parameter: Horizontal or Vertical. Important: The Bias settings can only be configured for DVB S2 RF port 1 and 2.

Setting up a DVB S2 RF Port The following procedure describes how to set up a RF port of a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the DVB-S2/CI Interface Card containing the RF port for which input setting must be changed. Result: The DVB S2 Interface Configuration page appears.

166

4011746 Rev AG

DVB S2 RF Port Configuration

3

In the DVB-S2 Interface table, complete the following settings.

RF Port Settings a

In the Name box of the column of the corresponding port, enter a new name for the port.

b

In the Enabled drop down box, select Enabled to enable DVB S or DVB S2 reception or Disabled otherwise.

c

In the Port Mode drop down box, select Single Stream or Multi Stream. Important: If the Port Mode of a port is set to Single Stream and the port receives a multi stream, no stream will be detected.

Receiver Settings d

4011746 Rev AG

In the Mode drop down box, select the desired setting: Auto (default), DVB-S, or DVB-S2.

167

Chapter 2 Configuration

e

In the Sat Frequency (GHz) box, enter the satellite frequency that should be used by the receiver for tuning the incoming signal.

f

In the Symbol Rate (MSym/s) box, enter the symbol rate of the incoming signal expressed in MSym/s.

g

In the Polarization drop down box, select Horizontal of Vertical.

h

In the Band Selection drop down box, select Auto, Forced Low, or Forced High.

i

In the Signal Low Threshold (dBm) box, enter the minimum threshold for the RF signal level.

j

In the Signal High Threshold (dBm) box, enter the maximum threshold for the RF signal level.

k

In the CN Margin Low Threshold (dB) box, enter the minimum carrier to noise margin threshold.

l

In the BER High Threshold drop down box, select the desired threshold.

m In the PL Scrambling Seq Ind box, enter the sequence index that is used for PL scrambling. LNC Settings n

In the Type drop down box, select Single Band or Dual Band.

o

In the LO Low Frequency (MHz) box, enter the low band frequency of the local oscillator expressed in MHz.

p

In the LO High Frequency (MHz) box, enter the high band frequency of the local oscillator expressed in MHz.

q

In the Bias drop down box, enable or disable LNC bias. Note: The Bias setting is only applicable for RF port 1 and 2.

4

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Checking the Port Status The following steps describe how to check the status information of a DVB S2 RF port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the DVB-S2/CI Interface Card for which status information of an RF port must be checked. Result: The DVB S2 Interface Configuration page appears containing the DVBS2 Interface table. Under Receiver Status in the DVB-S2 Interface table, the following information can be found:

168

4011746 Rev AG

DVB S2 RF Port Configuration

 

Status: OK or Not Locked



C/N Margin: the measured C/N margin together with a graphical representation of this value and thresholds



ISI Codes: the ISI codes of the transport streams belonging to an incoming multi stream.

RF Input Level: the measured RF input level together with a graphical representation of this value and the configured thresholds

Note: The ISI codes are not shown if the Port Mode parameter of the corresponding port is set to Single Stream. 3

Under Receiver Status, click on a text or icon in the column of the corresponding port to view its status details.

4

Click on OK to close the popup.

4011746 Rev AG

169

Chapter 2 Configuration

Checking the DVB-S2 Statistics Introduction The figures indicating the quality of an incoming RF signal via a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card are categorized on the DVB-S2 Statistics page of the user interface. These figures are:  Signal Status - Card: represents the slot position of the card.  Signal Status - Port: shows the name of the DVB-S2 RF input port.  Signal Status - Status: indicates the status of the signal, locked or not locked.  Signal Status - Level (dBm +/- 8): represents the level of the incoming RF signal.  Signal Status - C/N Margin: indicates the margin in dB above minimum C/N for Quasi Error Free reception  Bit Error Rate - Before RS/BCH: represents the Bit Error Rate before Reed Solomon (DVB-S) or Bose-Chaudhuri-Hocquenghem (DVB-S2).  Errored - Seconds: represents the number of one-second periods with one or more errored blocks.  Errored - Severely: shows the number of one-second periods with 30% or more errored blocks or at least one sync loss or loss of signal.  Errored - Packets: represents the number of errored packets received by the RF interface since reset.  Total - Packets: represents the total number of packets received by the RF interface since reset.

To check the DVB-S2 Statistics The following procedure describes how to display the statistics of the RF interfaces of the DVB-S2/CI Interface Cards. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the DVB-S2 Statistics link after clicking on the Status link. Result: The DVB-S2 Statistics page containing the DVB-S2 Statistics table is displayed.

To Reset the Statistics Perform the following procedure to reset the statistics of a particular RF interface. 170

4011746 Rev AG

DVB S2 RF Port Configuration

1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the DVB-S2 Statistics link after clicking on the Status link. Result: The DVB-S2 Statistics page is displayed.

2

Under the Reset Counters settings, select the DVB-S2 Interface Card receiving the RF signal for which statistics must be reset in the Card drop down box and the corresponding port in the Port drop down box.

3

Press the Reset button. Result: The statistics of the selected signal are reset.

4011746 Rev AG

171

Chapter 2 Configuration

SDI Port Configuration Introduction The IP Video Gateway Card provides IP-encapsulation/decapsulation of uncompressed SDI video. At the transmitter site, the IP Video Gateway Card enables SDI video to be carried over 1GbE or 10GbE and at the receiving site the IP Video Gateway Card converts the IP-encapsulated stream back to an uncompressed SDI stream. The following illustration shows an IP Video Gateway Card.

The IP Video Gateway Card is populated with 2 GbE or 2 10GbE ports, 6 SDI ports, a reference input (REF), and a loop through output (MON). The following illustration shows these connectors.

172

4011746 Rev AG

SDI Port Configuration

Configuring an SDI Port The following steps explain how to enable and disable an SDI port and to rename a port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the IP Video Gateway Card for which the SDI settings must be changed. Result: The SDI Interface Configuration page of the IP Video Gateway Card containing the SDI Port Settings table is displayed.

3

In the Name box, enter a name for the port.

4

For optical SDI ports, select Input or Output. Note: The SDI ports of the corresponding IP Video Gateway Card must be populated with appropriate SFP transmitter or receiver modules. For more information, please refer to the system guide shipped with your DCM or to the Installation and Operation Instructions - Digital Content Manager (DCM) IP Video Gateway Card shipped with the IP Video Gateway Card.

5

In the Enabled drop down box, select Enabled to enable the port or Disabled otherwise.

6

Repeat step 3 and 4 for all ports for which settings must be changed.

7

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Using SDI Generators Introduction The IP Video Gateway Card is provided with 6 SDI generators that can be used for testing the functionality of the card, for replacing a missing incoming SDI signal, of for backup stream. The SDI generators are able to produce SDI signals having different formats, frame rates, and colors. A generator signal can easily be dragged and dropped to the corresponding SDI output port or to the monitoring port. Each SDI generator is linked to an SDI output port. When an input loss alarm occurs on the input for which the signal is routed to the output, the output port can be 4011746 Rev AG

173

Chapter 2 Configuration

disabled (SDI No Stream Mode parameter = 0 VDC) or a particular signal generated by an SDI generator can be played out (SDI No Stream Mode parameter = Generator). If the SDI No Stream Mode parameter is set to 0 VDC, a generated SDI stream can be assigned to a main stream as backup stream. When SDI generators are enabled, the streams are shown in the Inputs tree.

To Configure SDI Generators Perform the following procedure to configure SDI generators. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the IP Video Gateway Card for which the SDI generator settings must be changed. Result: The Configuration - Interface page of the IP Video Gateway Card is displayed.

174

3

In the SDI Generator Settings table, complete the following settings in the row of the SDI generator for which the configuration must be changed.

4

In the Enable drop down box, select Enabled to enable the corresponding generator or Disabled to disable the generator.

4011746 Rev AG

SDI Port Configuration

5

In the Mode drop down box, select the desired video format. This format must match the format of the corresponding incoming video signal. Depending on the licenses installed on the DCM, the video formats are: 3G 1080p 60fps, 3G 1080p 59.94fps, 3G 1080p 50fps, HD 1080p 30fps, HD 1080p 29.97fps, HD 1080p 25fps, HD 1080i 30fps, HD 1080i 29.97fps, HD 1080i 25fps, HD 720p 60fps, HD 720p 59.94fps, HD 720p 50fps, SD 525i 29.97fps, or SD 625i 25fps.

6

In the Color Mode drop down box, select one of the following values:

  7

RGB: a signal will be generated with a fixed color RGB Cycling: a signal will be generated with cycling color

In the Color (RGB) boxes, enter the desired RGB values in the corresponding boxes (default set to black, RGB: 0:0:0). The first box indicates the brightness of Red, the second Green and the third Blue. Note: These parameters are only applicable if the Color Mode parameter is set to RGB.

8

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Note: The Enabled and Mode parameters are not applicable if the SDI No Stream Mode is set to Generator, see topic Changing Card Settings of an IP Video Gateway Card on page 107.

Changing the SDI No Stream Mode The following steps describe how to change the SDI no stream mode of an IP Video Gateway Card. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the IP Video Gateway Card for which the SDI generator settings must be changed. Result: The SDI Interface Configuration page of the IP Video Gateway Card containing the SDI No Stream Mode setting is displayed.

3

In the SDI No Stream Mode drop down box, select the desired value: 0 VDC or Generator. Note: Changing the SDI No Stream Mode parameter from Generator to 0 VDC automatically disables all SDI generators.

4

4011746 Rev AG

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

175

Section D General Configuration Introduction This section provides the procedures to change general configuration settings of the DCM.

In this section Changing the Display Mode .......................................................................................178

4011746 Rev AG

177

Chapter 2 Configuration

Changing the Display Mode Introduction In the user interface of the DCM, the display mode for the following parameters can be set to decimal or to hexadecimal:  Original network identifier (ON ID)  Transport stream identifier (TS ID)  Service identifier (SID)  Packet identifier (PID) The value of a parameter for which the display mode is set to hexadecimal is prefixed by 0x.

To Change the Display Mode of ON IDs, TS IDs, SIDs, and/or PIDs The following procedure explains how to change the display mode for ON IDs, TS IDs, SIDs, and/or PIDs. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

Click on the Display Settings link. Result: The Display Settings page containing the Display Mode settings is displayed.

178

4011746 Rev AG

Changing the Display Mode

3

In the Display Mode box, select Decimal or Hex in the drop down box of the identifier in question.

4

Press Apply All to confirm or Reload All to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

179

3 Chapter 3 Using the Tree View Introduction This chapter describes how to use the tree view of the user interface of the DCM.

In This Chapter      

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees ..........................................................182 Introducing the Advanced Routing Tree ........................................208 Changing Tree Settings ......................................................................215 Representation Mode of the Incoming Services .............................219 Finding Services or Transport Streams in a Tree ...........................223 Determining the Presence of a Transport Stream Node in the Inputs Tree ....................................................................................226

181

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

Introducing the Services Trees About the Tree The incoming services as well as the outgoing services are shown on the Tree View page of the user interface. The left hand pane of the page reflects the incoming services and the right hand pane the outgoing services. By default both the incoming and outgoing services are represented using trees (called Inputs and Outputs tree) for which the branches can be expanded or collapsed by pressing respectively the or sign. The representation of the incoming services can be changed, see topic Representation Mode of the Incoming Services on page 219. When the DCM is equipped with a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card, an MFP Card, or a Transcoder Card calibrated for transcoding or logo insertion, the Tree View page is provided with an additional pane, called Processing Tree pane. After expanding this pane, the Processing tree is displayed populated with:  a Transcoder containing services for which video and/or audio component conversion must be done.  an MFP Card with engines containing slots occupied with services or not.  a Logo Inserter containing the services for which logos, banners, or text should be inserted into video components.  a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card with CAMs containing services that should be descrambled. Expanding and collapsing the Processing Tree pane can be done by pressing respectively the and button in the Processing Tree header. More information can be found in topic Transcoding on page 505.

182

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees

The following illustration depicts the Tree View page of the user interface.

The trees can automatically be refreshed at regular time. During such tree refresh action the following popup is displayed.

The procedure to configure the tree refresh actions is described in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 215. Hint:  A tree can be refreshed manually by right-clicking in the corresponding tree pane and pointing to Reload in the shortcut menu.  The configuration of the tree refresh actions can temporarily be changed via the popup that appears after clicking on the refresh ( ) icon on the Tree View page.

4011746 Rev AG

183

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

In this popup, select the refresh rate in the corresponding drop down box (30 second, 1 minute, 5 minutes, or no refresh) and tick the check box of the tree(s) for which another refresh rate must be chosen. This temporary changed tree refresh configuration will be cleared as soon as the Tree View page is left. In a tree, each branch is provided with particular information concerning the branch. The following topics describe the different branch types.

Top Node Branch Representation The following illustration depicts the top node of the Inputs, Outputs, and Processing tree.

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a top node displays a shortcut menu to perform following actions:

184

Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the Inputs or Outputs tree

Settings

Displays the Default Settings page with display mode and session timeout settings

Bit Rates



Inputs tree: Displays the Input Bitrates page with bitrate figures of the incoming services



Outputs tree: Displays the Output Bitrates page with bitrates figures of the outgoing transport streams



Processing tree: Displays the Processing Bitrates page with bitrates figures of the services routed to the output via a Transcoder or MFP Card

Status

Displays the Device Status page with the device status overview

Configuration

Displays the System Settings page

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees

Card Branch Branch Representation The illustration below explains a card branch.

Notes:  When an interface card is equipped with a Co-Processor and/or FEC Card (GbE Interface Card only) Co-proc and/or FEC appears in the card branch of the Inputs, Outputs, and Configuration tree.  When the statmux controller function of a GbE Interface Card is enabled, Statmux appears beside the interface card type.  When the Processing Load Limits are enabled: -

the color of the font of the card identification becomes red if the processing load of the Co-Processor Card exceeds the warning level.

-

the color of the background becomes red if the processing load exceeds the maximum level.

For more information about the Processing Load Limits, please refer to Checking the Co-Processor Card Capacity on page 95.

Icon Overview The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a card branch. Indication

Description

(green)

Icon of an interface card, IP Video Gateway Card, MFP Card, or Transcoder Card

(red)

Icon of an interface card, IP Video Gateway Card, MFP Card, or Transcoder Card with major or critical alarm

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a card branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following actions:

4011746 Rev AG

185

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the selected card

Settings



Inputs and Outputs tree: displays the Default Settings page containing the display mode setting



Processing tree: displays the Transcoder Overview, MFP Overview, or Logo Inserter Overview page

(not applicable for an IP Video Gateway Card) Reset Co-Processor

Resets the Co-Processor Card

Video Settings

Opens the MFP Video page containing the basic video settings (MFP Card only).

Audio Settings

Opens the MFP Audio page (MFP Card only).

Bit Rates



Inputs tree: Displays the Input Bitrates page with bitrate figures of the incoming services



Outputs tree: Displays the Output Bitrates page with bitrates figures of the outgoing transport streams



Processing tree: Displays the Processing Bitrates page with bitrates figures of the services routed to the output via the Transcoder or MFP Card

(not applicable for an IP Video Gateway Card) Status

Displays the Device Status page with the device status overview

Configuration

Displays the interface page for the selected card

Port Branch Branch Representation The illustration below explains a port branch.  ASI, RF, or GbE port

 SDI Port

 SDI Generators

186

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees

 Monitor port

Notes:  When the Port Mode parameter of a GbE Interface Card is set to Port Pairs, a GbE port pair in the Inputs and Outputs tree is labeled with the port names of the port pair. In the Inputs and Configuration tree, the name of the active port is black colored and the name of the inactive port is gray colored. For more information please refer to topic Configuring the GbE Port Backup Parameters on page 914.  In the Outputs tree, a black colored name means a port that streams and a port with gray colored name means a port that doesn't stream. In the Configuration tree, a port that streams is indicated by (streaming).  When an ASI port is mirrored to one or more output ports, these ports are combined into one branch, see illustration below.

More information concerning ASI port mirroring can be found in topic ASI Port Configuration on page 114.  When the Port Mode parameter of a GbE Interface Card is set to Port Pairs and a GbE Port Pair is mirrored, the port pairs are combined into one branch in the Outputs tree, see picture below.

When the Port Mode parameter of a GbE Interface Card is set to Fixed Individual Ports and a GbE Port is mirrored, the ports are also combined in once branch, see picture below:

For information about port pair mirroring, please refer to topic Configuring the GbE Port Backup Parameters on page 914.

Icon Overview The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a port branch.

4011746 Rev AG

187

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View Indication (black) (red) (gray) (black) (red) (gray) (black) (red) (gray)

Description Icon of an enabled input port Icon of an enabled input port with active major or critical alarm Icon of a disabled input port Icon of an enabled output port Icon of an enabled output port with active major or critical alarm Icon of a disabled output port Icon of an enabled bidirectional port Icon of an enabled bidirectional port with active major or critical alarm Icon of a disabled bidirectional port

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a port branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following actions:  Inputs tree Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the selected port

Settings

Displays the Input Port Services page of the selected port

Bit Rates

Displays the Input Bitrates page with bitrate figures of the incoming services on the selected port

Status

Displays the Device Status page with the device status overview

Configuration

Displays the port configuration page of the selected port

 Outputs tree

188

Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the selected port

Settings

Displays the Output Port TS page of the selected port (GbE port only)

Stop Streaming All TS's

Stops streaming of all outgoing transport streams on the selected port

Start Streaming All TS's

Starts streaming of all outgoing transport streams on the selected port

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees Menu Item

Action

Switch BU Source

Switches all services to their main or backup source (GbE port only).

Revert All to Main

Switches all services in backup state to their main source (GbE port only).

Bit Rates

Displays the Output Bitrates page with bitrate figures of the outgoing transport streams on the selected port

Status

Displays the Device Status page with the device status overview

Configuration

Displays the port configuration page of the selected port

CI-CAM branch Branch Representation The CI-CAM branch in the Processing tree accommodates the DVB scrambled services or transport stream containing DVB scrambled services that are routed to the DVB-S2/CI Interface Card for descrambling. The following picture explains the CAM branch.

Icon Overview The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a CAM branch in the Processing tree. Indication

Description The Enabled Status of the CAM module is Enabled. The Enabled Status of the CAM module is Disabled. A scrambled service that should be descrambled by the CAM module is in alarm state.

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a CAM branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following action: Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the corresponding DVB-S2/CI Interface Card.

4011746 Rev AG

189

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View Menu Item

Action

Settings

Displays the DVBS2 Descrambler CAM page.

Status

Displays the Device Status page.

Configuration

Displays the DVBS2 CAM Configuration page containing the CAM settings and backup settings.

BISS Branch Branch Representation The BISS branch in the processing tree contains the BISS scrambled services or the transport stream containing the BISS scrambled services that are routed to the DVBS2/CI Interface Card for BISS descrambling.

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on the BISS branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following action: Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the corresponding DVB-S2/CI Interface Card.

Status

Displays the Device Status page.

Transport Stream Branch Branch Representation The illustration below explains a transport stream branch on:  an ASI Interface Card

 a GbE Interface Card

190

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees

 a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card that indicates a transport stream belonging to an incoming multi stream

Notes:  A pink colored name of an SPTS indicates an SPTS with merged service(s). More information concerning merged services can be found in topic Merging Components on page 324.  (RTP) in the branch of an Outgoing transport stream indicates that the packets in which the transport stream is encapsulated, are enlarged with an RTP Header. For more information, please refer to topic Changing Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams on page 259.

 (FEC) in the branch indicates a transport stream for which Forward Error Correction (FEC) is enabled. For more information concerning FEC, please refer to topic Forward Error Correction on page 279.

 (SFN Enabled) in the branch indicates a transport stream for which the SFN Mode is enabled. More information can be found in section Integrating the DCM into Single Frequency Networks on page 1045.  A transport stream in backup state or the service of an SPTS in backup state is indicated by an exclamation mark. When a TS Loss alarm is active for an incoming transport stream, the corresponding transport stream icon in the Inputs tree is red colored. The alarm indication for an incoming service will also be propagated to the transport stream branch in the Inputs tree. In the Output tree the transport stream icon is red colored if an alarm occurs for the transport stream or for the transport stream content. Transport stream alarm indications will be propagated to the corresponding port and card branch.

Icon Overview In the Tree View page of the user interface, a multi program transport stream (MPTS) is indicated by by

(blue icon). The icon of a transport stream that is transparently passed to the

output is white colored ( 4011746 Rev AG

(blue icon) and a single program transport stream (SPTS) ) in the Outputs tree. 191

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

A scrambled SPTS is indicated by a closed padlock in the icon (

).

A gray colored icon in the Outputs tree indicates a transport stream for which streaming is not activated (

,

,

).

A transport stream in alarm state or a transport stream containing a service in Service Loss alarm state is indicated by a red colored icon ( , , ). If such service is routed to the Outputs tree, or merged into an outgoing service, the icon of the corresponding outgoing transport stream in this tree is also red colored.

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a transport stream branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following actions:  Inputs tree Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the port containing the selected transport stream

Settings

Displays the Input TS Settings page of the selected incoming transport stream

Find Destinations

Locates the corresponding destinations in the Outputs tree.



For a MPTS: the corresponding transparent loop through transport stream



For a SPTS: the corresponding outgoing service or corresponding transparent loop through transport stream

Bit Rates

Opens the Bitrates Detail popup of the selected incoming transport stream

Status

Opens the Status Detail popup of the selected incoming transport stream

Configuration

Displays the port configuration page of the interface card to which the selected transport stream belongs to

 Outputs tree

192

Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the port containing the selected transport stream

Settings

Displays the Output TS page of the selected transport stream

SI Settings

Displays the Output SI Components page of the selected transport stream

Activate Streaming

Activates streaming of the selected transport stream

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees Menu Item

Action

Stop Streaming

Stops streaming of the selected transport stream

Switch BU Source

Switches all services to their main or backup source (GbE port only).

Revert All to Main

Switches all services in backup state to their main source (GbE port only).

Undo Loop Through

Transforms a transparent loop through transport stream on an ASI Interface card into a standard transport stream.

Remove All Services

Removes all services from the selected transport stream

Delete

Deletes the selected transport stream (GbE Interface Card)

Bit Rates

Opens the Bit Rates Detail popup for the selected outgoing transport stream

Status

Opens the Status Detail popup for the selected outgoing transport stream

Configuration

Displays the port configuration page of the interface card to which the selected transport stream belongs to

SDI Branch Branch Representation The following illustration depicts a branch of an SDI stream and a branch of an RTP encapsulated SDI stream.  Incoming SDI stream

 Incoming SDI stream encapsulated into RTP packets

 Outgoing SDI stream

4011746 Rev AG

193

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

 Outgoing SDI stream encapsulated into RTP packets

Icon Overview The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in an SDI branch. Indication

Description Icon of an SDI or RTP stream present at the input Icon of an SDI or RTP stream at the output for which streaming is activated Icon of a missing incoming SDI or RTP stream Icon of an SDI or RTP stream at the output without routing

(red)

Icon of an SDI or RTP stream with alarm indication present at the input Icon of an SDI or RTP stream at the output with alarm indication for which streaming is activated

(red)

Icon of an SDI or RTP stream at the output with alarm indication for which the incoming stream is missing

(gray)

Icon of an SDI or RTP stream at the output for which streaming is not activated

(gray)

Icon of an SDI or RTP stream at the output with alarm indication for which streaming is not activated

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on an SDI or RTP stream branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following action:  Inputs tree

194

Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the port containing the selected SDI or RTP stream

Settings

Displays the Input Port Stream page

Find Destinations

Locates a passed stream in the Outputs tree, see topic Locating a Passed Service or Stream in the Outputs Tree on page 225

Delete

Removes RTP stream entries

Status

Opens the Status Detail popup for the selected incoming stream

Configuration

Opens the GbE Port Configuration or SDI Port Configuration page

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees

 Outputs tree Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the port containing the selected SDI or RTP stream

Settings

Displays the Output Port Stream page

Find Source

Locates the routed stream in the Inputs tree

Stop Streaming

Stops streaming

Activate Streaming

Activates streaming

Delete

Removes the selected stream from the output

Status

Opens the Status Detail popup for the selected outgoing stream

Configuration

Opens the GbE Port Configuration or SDI Port Configuration page

Note: The shortcut menu of the SDI branch under the Monitor branch is slightly different.

3D Video Pair Branch Branch Representation The picture below shows the branch of a 3D video pair.

Hint: Expanding the 3D video pair branch shows both the left and right video stream of the 3D video pair.

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a 3D video pair branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following action: Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the 3D video pair.

Settings

Displays the Input Port Streams or Output Port Streams page.

Delete

Removes the 3D video pair binding. The corresponding streams will not be removed.

Configuration

Opens the GbE Port Configuration.

4011746 Rev AG

195

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

Statmux Pools Branch Branch Representation The statmux pools branch contains all statmux pools of a GbE Interface Card (IP statmux controller) or all statmux pools of a DCM (D9036 statmux controller). For more information about statmux, please refer to topic IP Statmux Controller on page 1067 or D9036 Statmux Controller on page 1091. The following picture depicts an IP statmux pools branch and a D9036 statmux pools branch.  IP statmux pools branch

 D9036 statmux pools branch

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a statmux pools branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following action: Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the card (IP statmux controller) or of the device (D9036 statmux controller).

Settings

Displays the Statmux Pools page.

Status

Displays the Device Status page containing the device status overview (IP statmux controller only).

Configuration

Displays the GbE Interface Configuration page of the card (IP statmux controller) or the Statmux Pools page (D9036 statmux controller).

Statmux Pool Branch Branch Representation The following illustration explains a statmux pool branch of an IP statmux controller and a statmux pool branch of a D9036 statmux controller.  IP statmux controller

196

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees

 D9036 statmux controller

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a pool branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following action: Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the card (IP statmux controller) or of the device (D9036 statmux controller).

Settings

Displays the Statmux Settings and Statmux Pool Settings table (IP statmux controller) or the Pool Definition page (D9036 statmux controller).

Delete

Removes the pool (D9036 statmux controller only)

Bit Rates

Displays the Service - Graph page showing a video bitrate overview of the selected pool (IP statmux controller only).

Status

Displays the Status - Device page containing the device status overview (IP statmux controller only).

Configuration

Displays the Configuration - Interface page of the corresponding interface card (IP statmux controller) or the Statmux Pools page (D9036 statmux controller).

Encoder Branch Branch Representation The D9036 encoders participating into a D9036 statmux community are accommodated under the D9036 Statmux Encoders branch in the Processing tree. The following illustration explains the branch of a D9036 encoder.

More information about the D9036 statmux community can be found in topic D9036 Statmux Controller on page 1091.

4011746 Rev AG

197

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

Icon Overview In the Processing tree, an encoder for which statmux communication is up, is an encoder for which the communication is down indicated by the following icon by .

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on an encoder branch or the D9036 Statmux Encoders branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following action: Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the corresponding D9036 statmux controller.

Settings

Displays the Statmux Encoders page with the settings of the encoders that participate into the D9036 statmux community and their VSEs.

Add VSE

Adds a pre-configured VSE to the community (encoder branch only).

Delete

Removes the encoder from the Processing tree (encoder branch only).

Configuration

Displays the Statmux Administration page.

MFP Engine Branch Representation The engines of an MFP Card are accommodated under the MFP Card branch in the Processing tree.The following picture depicts such engine branch.

Icon Overview The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in an engine branch in the Processing tree. Indication

Description An engine with occupied slots An engine without occupied slots An engine is in alarm state of a service belonging to the engine is in alarm state.

198

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on an engine branch of an MFP Card displays a shortcut menu to perform following action. Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads all engines of the MFP Card to which this engine belongs to.

Setting

Opens the MFP Overview page containing the service population of the MFP Card.

Video Settings

Opens the MFP Video page containing the basic video settings.

Audio Settings

Opens the MFP Audio page.

Reset Engine

Resets the selected MFP Card engine.

Status

Displays the Status Detail popup with the Detailed Engine Status Overview table.

Configuration

Opens the MFP Interface Configuration page.

Service Branch Branch Representation The illustration below explains a service branch.

Notes:  A pink colored service name indicates a service with merged service(s). More information concerning merged services can be found in topic Merging Components on page 324.  A service in backup state (outgoing service or one of the merged services) for which the Revertive mode is set to Revertive or Non Revertive will be indicated by an exclamation mark. A service for which the assigned backup service is missing at the input and for which the Revertive mode is set to Floating, will also be indicated by an exclamation mark.  When a Service Loss alarm occurs, the service icon will be red colored. The alarm indication will be propagated to the corresponding transport stream, rate control group (if present), port, and interface card. More information about Service Loss alarm triggers can be found in topic To Configure Triggers for Services Present at the Input on page 999.

4011746 Rev AG

199

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

Icon Overview In the Inputs, Processing, and Outputs tree, a service is indicated by the following icon

(blue).

A scrambled service is indicated by a closed padlock in the icon ( ) and a scrambled service that is descrambled by the DCM by an open padlock in the icon (

).

An incoming service in Service Loss alarm state is indicated by a red colored icon ( , ). If such service is routed to the Processing tree or Outputs tree, or merged into an outgoing service, the corresponding icons in these trees are also red colored ( , , ). The icon of a service, that is routed to the processing tree for descrambling and the corresponding card is not able to descramble it, is also red colored. A gray colored icon in the Outputs tree indicates a service for which streaming is not activated ( , , ) and in the Processing tree under the Transcoder Card branch or MFP Card branch a service that is not processed. A service missing at the input is indicated by a red crossed icon in the Inputs, Processing, and Outputs tree (

,

.

,

,

,

,

,

,

).

The reason for a missing service indication can be:  A preconfigured service at the output for which the service is not yet available at the input.  A service that was routed from the input to the Processing tree and/or Output tree for which the incoming service is unavailable. Note: In the Processing tree, the service icon of a PIP stream is prefixed by PIP.

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a service branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following action:  Inputs tree

200

Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the port containing the selected service

Settings

Displays the Input Service Settings page of the selected service

Find Destinations

Locates a passed service in the Outputs tree, see topic Locating a Passed Service in the Outputs Tree on page 225

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees Menu Item

Action

Bit Rates

Opens the Bit Rates Detail popup for the selected incoming service

Status

Opens the Status Detail popup for the selected incoming service

Configuration

Displays the port configuration of the interface card to which the selected incoming service belongs to

 Outputs tree Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the port containing the selected service

Settings

Displays the Output Service Routing page of the selected outgoing service

Advanced Routing

Displays the Advanced Routing tree of the service

Find Source

Locates the passed service in the Inputs tree

Find Active Source

Locates the passed active service (= not in backup state) in the Inputs tree

Activate Streaming

Activates streaming

Stop Streaming

Stops streaming

Enable Scrambling

Enables scrambling

Revert to Main

Starts a backup-to-main service backup transition. This menu item is only applicable if the Revertive mode of the service is set to Revertive or Non-revertive, the main service is available at the input, and the service is in backup.

Switch BU Source

Starts a service backup transition. This menu item is only applicable if the Revertive mode of the service is set to Floating and the backup service is available at the input.

Disable Scrambling

Disables scrambling

Enable Descrambling Enables descrambling

4011746 Rev AG

Disable Descrambling

Disables descrambling

Delete

Removes the selected service from the output

Bit Rates

Opens the Bit Rates Detail popup for the selected outgoing service

Status

Opens the Status Detail popup for the selected outgoing service

Configuration

Displays the port configuration page of the interface card to which the selected outgoing service belongs to

201

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

 Processing tree Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the services in the Processing tree

Settings

Displays the Transcoder Overview, MFP Overview, Logo Inserter Service , BISS Service Settings, or CAM Service Settings page

Video Settings

Opens the MFP Video page containing the basic video settings (MFP Card only).

Audio Settings

Opens the MFP Audio page (MFP Card only).

Find Source

Locates the passed service in the Inputs tree

Find Active Source

Locates the passed active service (= not in backup state) in the Inputs tree

Find Destinations

Locates a passed service in the Outputs tree, see topic Locating a Passed Service in the Outputs Tree on page 225

Bit Rates

Displays the Bit Rates Details popup for the selected service

Status

Displays the Status Detail popup for the selected service

Configuration

Displays the configuration page of the card to which the service belongs to:

  

For a Transcoder Card: the TC Interface Configuration page For an MFP Card: the MFP Interface Configuration page For a DVB S2/CI Interface Card: the DVB S2 CAM Configuration page

VSE Branch Branch Representation The following picture depicts a VSE branch in the Processing tree and Outputs tree of the user interface. The name of the VSE in indicated beside the VSE icon.

Notes:  A VSE in backup state will be indicated by an exclamation mark.  The encoding type beside the VSE name will only be displayed if the statmux controller is able to request information about the VSE from the encoder.

202

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees

Icon Overview In the Processing and Outputs tree, a virtual service encoder (VSE), for which statmux communication is up, is indicated by the following icon

(blue).

 A VSE with pending alarm is indicated by a red colored icon (

).

 A VSE that is not part of a D9036 statmux pool is gray colored in the Processing tree (

).

 A VSE that is not activated in the statmux pool is gray colored in the Outputs tree (

).

 A VSE, for which the statmux communication is down, is indicated with a red icon that is crossed out (

,

.

).

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a VSE branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following action:  Processing tree Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the corresponding D9036 statmux controller.

Settings

Displays the Statmux Encoders page with information about the statmux encoders and statmux video channels.

Delete

Removes the VSE from the D9036 statmux controller.

Configuration

Displays the Statmux Administration page.

 Outputs tree

4011746 Rev AG

Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the corresponding D9036 statmux pool.

Settings

Displays the Video Channels page with settings of all VSEs member of the corresponding pool.

Delete

Removes the VSE from the pool.

Configuration

Displays the Statmux Pools page.

203

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

Rate Control Branch Branch Representation The illustration below explains a rate control group branch.

Notes:  The alarm indication for transport stream or transport stream content will be propagated to the rate control group branch by using a red colored icon.  More information about rate control can be found in chapter Rate Control on page 563.

Icon Overview The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a rate control group branch. Indication

Description Icon of a TR All Services type rate control group containing all services of an outgoing transport stream and controlled by a Co-Processor Card. Icon of a TR Selective Services type rate control group containing a part of the services of an outgoing transport stream and controlled by a Co-Processor Card. Icon of a TR Multiple SPTS type rate control group containing single program transport streams and controlled by a Co-Processor Card. Icon of a TR... rate control group with alarm indication Icon of an MFP All Services type rate control group containing all services of an outgoing transport stream and controlled by an MFP Card. Icon of an MFP Selective Services type rate control group containing a part of the services of an outgoing transport stream and controlled by an MFP Card. Icon of an MFP Multiple SPTS type rate control group containing single program transport streams and controlled by an MFP Card. Icon of an MFP... rate control group with alarm indication

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a rate control group branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following actions:

204

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the port to which the rate control group belongs to.

Settings

Displays the Output TS Rate Control Detail page of the selected rate control group.

Delete

Deletes the selected rate control group.

Bit Rates

Displays the Output TS Rate Control Graph page of the selected rate control group.

Configuration

Displays the port configuration page of the interface card to which the selected rate control group belongs to.

Component Branch Branch Representation The illustration below explains a branch of an incoming component.

The illustration below explains a branch of an outgoing component.

Notes:  Each incoming transport stream is populated with an EMM PIDs main node containing the incoming EMM components and an Unreferenced PIDs main node containing the unreferenced components.  Each outgoing transport stream is populated with an EMM PIDs main node containing the passed EMM components and an Unreferenced PIDs main node containing the passed unreferenced components.  An empty main node is indicated by (None available).

4011746 Rev AG

205

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

 Components for which the stream type is remapped by changing the Output Standard mode of the outgoing transport stream or by creating ES type overrule entries are indicated in the Outputs tree.

Icon Overview The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a component branch. Indication

Description Icon of an Elementary Stream Icon of a scrambled Elementary Stream Icon of a descrambled Elementary Stream Icon of an unreferenced component at the input that is routed to the output but no longer present at the input Icon of an Elementary Stream at the output for which the PID is missing at the input Icon of a scrambled Elementary Stream at the output for which the PID is missing at the input Icon of a descrambled Elementary Stream at the output for which the PID is missing at the input Icon of the EMM PIDs main node Icon of the Unreferenced PIDs main node

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a Component branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following actions:  Inputs tree

206

Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the port containing the selected component

Bit Rates

Opens the Bit Rates Details popup of the service to which the selected incoming component belongs to

Configuration

Displays the port configuration page of the interface card to which the selected incoming component belongs to

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Services Trees

 Outputs tree Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the port containing the selected component

Settings

Displays the Output Service Component page of the selected component

Block PID

Blocks the selected component (if possible)

Bit Rates

Opens the Bit Rates Detail popup of the service to which the selected outgoing component belongs to

Status

Opens the Status Detail popup

Configuration

Displays the port configuration page of the interface card to which the selected outgoing component belongs to

 Processing tree Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the settings of the service population in the Processing tree

Settings

Transcoding: Displays the Transcoder Overview, Transcoder Audio, or Transcoder Video page depending on the selected component Logo Insertion: Displays the Logo Inserter Service page

Block PID

Blocks the selected component (MFP Card only).

Bit Rates

Displays the Bit Rates Detail popup for the service to which the component belongs to

Status

Opens the Status Detail popup.

Configuration

Displays the TC Interface Configuration page of the Transcoder Card to which the service belongs to

General Remarks  With the exception of the component branches, each branch is provided with bitrates figures. These figures appear by pausing the cursor on the arrow beside the branch. More information concerning these bitrates figures can be found in chapter Checking Bitrates on page 1117.  The order of the services and GbE transport streams can be changed. More information about changing the order in the trees can be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 215.

4011746 Rev AG

207

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

Introducing the Advanced Routing Tree Introduction The Advanced Routing tree gives a graphical overview of incoming services used to create an outgoing service including backup services, merged services, merged components, insertion channel for DPI... The following illustration depicts an example of an Advanced Routing tree.

In the Advanced Routing tree the incoming services that are currently played out are in bold. This tree is typically used for setting up a program switching application. More information concerning DCM's program switching feature can be found in section Program Switching on page 687. The Advance Routing tree for a service can be displayed by right-clicking on the corresponding outgoing service and pointing to Advanced Routing in the shortcut menu. Hint: The Advanced Routing tree can be refreshed by pressing Reload or by rightclicking in the corresponding tree pane and pointing to Reload in the shortcut menu.

208

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Advanced Routing Tree

Output Service Branch Branch Representation The illustration below explains an Output Service branch on a GbE Interface Card.

The illustration below explains an Output Service branch on an ASI Interface Card.

Icon Overview The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a service branch. Indication (blue) (red) (gray)

Icon of a service for which streaming is activated Icon of a service with alarm indication for which streaming is activated Icon of a service for which streaming is stopped.

(blue)

Icon of a service for which streaming is activated and for which the service is missing at the input.

(gray)

Icon of a service for which the service is missing at the input and for which streaming is stopped.

(red)

Icon of a service with alarm indication for which streaming is activated and for which the service is missing at the input.

(blue) (red) (gray)

4011746 Rev AG

Description

Icon of a scrambled service for which streaming is activated Icon of a scrambled service with alarm indication for which streaming is activated Icon of a scrambled service for which streaming is switched off

(blue)

Icon of a scrambled service for which streaming is activated and for which the service is missing at the input

(red)

Icon of a scrambled service with alarm indication for which streaming is activated and for which the service is missing at the input

(gray)

Icon of a scrambled service for which the service is missing at the input and for which streaming is stopped. 209

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on an Output Service branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following actions: Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the Advanced Routing tree

Settings

Displays the Output Service Routing page of the outgoing service

Find Source

Locates the passed service in the Inputs tree

Find Active Source

Locates the passed active service (= not in backup state) in the Inputs tree

Activate Streaming

Activates streaming

Stop Streaming

Stops streaming

Delete

Not applicable

Sources for Program Switching Branch Branch Representation The illustration below explains a Sources for Program Switching branch.

Shortcut Menu Right-clicking on a Sources for Program Switching branch displays a shortcut menu to perform following actions: Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the Advanced Routing tree

Settings

Not applicable

Add Alternate Source Adds an alternate source to the outgoing service

210

Remove All Alternates

Removes all alternate sources from the outgoing service

Delete

Not applicable

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Advanced Routing Tree

Main, Alternate, Merged, Backup Service Branch Branch Representation The illustration below explains a Main Service branch.

The alternate, merged, and backup branches are similar.

Icon Overview The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a service branch. Indication (blue) (red)

Description Icon of a service present at the input Icon of a service with alarm indication

(blue)

Icon of a preconfigured service for which the service is not yet or no longer available at the input.

(red)

Icon of a preconfigured service with alarm indication for which the service is not yet or no longer available at the input.

(blue) (red) (gray)

Icon of a scrambled service Icon of a scrambled service with alarm indication for which streaming is activated Icon of a non-active backup service

Shortcut Menu The illustration below displays the shortcut menu of the Main Service branch. The shortcut menus of the Alternate, Merged, and Backup Service Branch are similar. Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the Advanced Routing tree

Settings



For a Main or an Alternate Service branch: displays the Output Service Alternate Routing page.



For Merged Service branch: displays the Output Service Merge page.



For Backup Service branch: displays the Output Service Backup page.

4011746 Rev AG

211

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View Menu Item

Action

Show In Input Tree

Highlights the main service in the input tree

Add Merged Service

Adds a merged service to the main or alternate service

Add Backup Service

Adds a backup service to the main, alternate, or merged service. This menu item is not available for virtual main/alternate services but is available for services merged with virtual/alternate services

Delete

Not applicable

Merged Components Branch Branch Representation The merged components branch contains the component merge rules that apply to a particular incoming service. The illustration below explains a merged components branch.

Icon Overview The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a service branch. Indication (blue) (red)

Icon of a service present at the input Icon of a service with alarm indication

(blue)

Icon of a preconfigured service for which the service is not yet or no longer available at the input.

(red)

Icon of a preconfigured service with alarm indication for which the service is not yet or no longer available at the input.

(blue) (red) (gray)

212

Description

Icon of a scrambled service Icon of a scrambled service with alarm indication for which streaming is activated Icon of a non-active backup service

4011746 Rev AG

Introducing the Advanced Routing Tree

Shortcut Menu The illustration below displays the shortcut menu of the merged components branch. Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the Advanced Routing tree

Settings

Displays the Output Service Merge page of the corresponding service.

Show In Input Tree

Highlights the corresponding service in the input tree

Add Merged Component

Opens the Add Merged Service popup for creating a component merge rule for the corresponding service

Delete

Removes the branch with the corresponding component merge rules

Component Merge Rule Branch Branch Representation The following illustration explains a component merge rule branch.

Shortcut Menu The illustration below displays the shortcut menu of the component merge rule branch. Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the Advanced Routing tree

Settings

Displays the Output Service Merge page of the corresponding service.

Delete

Removes the component merge rule

4011746 Rev AG

213

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

Source for Splicing Branch Branch Representation The following illustration explains a Source for Splicing branch of manually triggers splice channel and for a splice channel triggered by an AD server.

Shortcut Menu The illustration below displays the shortcut menu of the Source for Splicing branch.

214

Menu Item

Action

Reload From Device

Reloads the Advanced Routing tree

Settings

Opens the Output Service DPI page for changing splicing channel settings

Add Splicing Source

Opens the Add Splice Source popup for configuring a splicing channel

Delete

Deletes the splicing channel

4011746 Rev AG

Changing Tree Settings

Changing Tree Settings Introduction To enhance the usability of the Inputs, Outputs, and Processing trees, following adaptations can be done:  Sort GbE TS in Tree by and Sort Services in Tree by parameter The order of the transport streams and services in the Inputs and Outputs trees can be modified by changing the Sort GbE TS in Tree by parameter to order the transport streams and the Sort Services in Tree by parameter to order the services. The values that can be used to sort transport streams are: -

IP Address

-

ON ID

-

TS ID

-

UDP Port

The values that can be used to sort the services are: -

Service Name

-

Service ID

 Tree Refresh Rate and Trees To Refresh parameter The trees can automatically be refreshed at regular time intervals. By default the refresh rate is set to No Refresh but it can be set to 30 seconds, 1 minute, or 5 minutes.  Removal Warning in Tree parameter Using the shortcut menu on the Outputs tree is quite easy. To protect the application from for instance accidentally removing of transport streams, an additional confirmation can be asked before the action will be executed. For certain reasons, for instance during reconfiguration actions, it can be useful to disable this feature. When this feature is enabled, an additional confirmation will be given for the following actions: -

Stopping transport stream streaming

-

Removing transport streams

-

Removing services

-

Removing rate control groups

 Drop on SPTS: desired action parameter During a drag and drop action of a service to an outgoing Single Program Transport Stream (SPTS) the following actions can be done: 4011746 Rev AG

Merging the service into the service of the SPTS 215

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

-

Adding the service to the transport stream

When the Drop on SPTS: desired action parameter is set to Ask for Service Merge or TS Add, a popup will appear asking the desired action. The following picture shows this popup.

 Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter During a drag and drop action of an incoming transport stream to a GbE port, the following actions can be done: -

Creating a transport stream and passing all services

-

Creating a transport stream for which passing rules are activated. More information about TS auto pass rules can be found in topic Creating Outgoing Transport Streams on page 246.

-

Passing a transport stream transparently. For more information about transparently passed transport streams (named Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream), please refer to topic Transparent Loop Through Transport Streams on page 248.

When the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter is set to Ask for the Desired Action, a popup will be displayed if an incoming transport stream is dropped on a GbE port asking the desired action. The following picture shows this popup.

 Warning to Apply Settings on Tab Change parameter Several pages provide multiple tab pages (for example the Service - Service page). When a parameter is changed on a tab page and another tab page is chosen without applying the setting, the parameter will not be modified. When the Warning to Apply Settings on Tab Change parameter is enabled, a warning will be given. The following picture shows such warning.

216

4011746 Rev AG

Changing Tree Settings

Note: This feature does not apply to tab pages with Apply All.  JIT tree loading mode parameter When this mode is enabled, the information needed in the user interface is loaded at the moment it is required (for instance by pausing the mouse pointer on the bitrates link). Enabling this mode speeds up the user interface, especially if the device is provided with a lot of services. This mode is by default enabled.  Default Refresh parameter Particular pages of the user interface, for instance the bitrates pages, can be refreshed at regular time: every 10 seconds, every 30 seconds, or every minute. This parameter determines the default refresh rate for these pages.

To Change the Tree Settings The following steps explain how to change the tree settings. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Display Settings link after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Display Settings page is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

217

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

2

In the Sort GbE TS in Tree by drop down box, select one of the following settings to sort the transport streams in the Inputs and Outputs tree:

    3

IP Address ON ID TS ID UDP Port

In the Sort Services in Tree by drop down box, select one of the following settings to sort the services in Inputs and Outputs tree:

 

Service Name Service ID

4

In the Removal Warning in Tree parameter, select Enabled to switch on the confirmation feature or Disabled to switch off this feature.

5

In the Drop on SPTS: desired action drop down box, select one of the following settings:

6



Always Add to TS: during a drag and drop action of a service to an outgoing SPTS, the service will be added to the transport stream.



Ask for Service Merge or TS Add: during a drag and drop action of a service to an outgoing SPTS, a popup appears asking for a service merge or a transport stream add.

In the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action drop down box, select one of the following settings:



Create TS and Pass All Services: during dragging and dropping an incoming transport stream to a GbE port, an outgoing transport stream containing all input services will be created.



Ask for Desired Action: during dragging and dropping an incoming transport stream to a GbE port, a popup will be displayed asking the desired action.

7

In the Tree Refresh Rate drop down box, select the desired refresh rate for the Input, Output and Processing tree: stop (default), 30 sec, 1 min, or 5 min.

8

In the Trees To Refresh box, set the check box of the tree(s) that must be refreshed.

9

In the JIT tree loading mode drop down box, select Enabled or Disabled.

10 In the Warning to Apply Settings on Tab Change drop down box, select Enabled or Disabled. 11 In the Default Refresh rate box, enter the desired refresh rate: 10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min or Stop. 12 Point to Apply to confirm or to Reload to abort the operation.

218

4011746 Rev AG

Representation Mode of the Incoming Services

Representation Mode of the Incoming Services Introduction In the left hand pane of the Service page the incoming services can be represented in four different modes:  Card representation mode  Port representation mode  Transport stream (TS) representation mode  Service representation mode Note: After opening the user interface the trees on both panes are collapsed and the incoming services are shown in Card representation mode.

Card Representation Mode With the incoming services in Card representation mode, the highest level in the tree view is card level. From this card level, you can browse through the cards, ports, transport streams, and services to a particular component. The illustration below shows the Inputs tree in Card representation mode.

Port Representation Mode With the incoming services in Port representation mode, the highest level is port level. The name of the interface card to which the port belongs to is indicated beside the port in the tree.

4011746 Rev AG

219

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

The illustration below depicts the Inputs tree in Port representation mode.

Transport Stream Representation Mode With the incoming services in TS representation mode, the highest level is transport stream. The position of the card and the port number to which the transport stream belongs to is indicated beside the transport stream. The illustration below depicts the Inputs tree in TS representation mode.

Service Representation Mode With the incoming services in Service representation mode, all services at the device inputs are categorized in a table. A service is accompanied with the following information:  Card: represents the card receiving the service.  Port: represents the name of the port receiving the service.

220

4011746 Rev AG

Representation Mode of the Incoming Services

 IP Address: represents the IP address of the destination port to which the transport stream, the incoming service belongs to, streams.  UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the destination port to which the transport stream, the incoming service belongs to, streams.  ON ID: represents the original network identifier of the incoming transport stream to which the service belongs (as defined in the SDT).  TS ID: represents the transport stream identifier of the incoming transport stream to which the service belongs (as defined in the PAT).  SID: represents the service identifier of the incoming service (as defined in the PAT).  Name: represents the name of the incoming service.

Hint: To sort the Input Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the header.

Changing the Representation Mode The following steps explain how to change the representation mode of the incoming services. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the view (

  4011746 Rev AG

) drop down box, select the desired representation mode.

Card Port

221

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

 

222

TS Service

4011746 Rev AG

Finding Services or Transport Streams in a Tree

Finding Services or Transport Streams in a Tree Introduction When the Tree View page is populated with a large number of services and transport streams, it can take some time to locate a particular item in a tree. Therefore the panes on the Tree View page are provided with a search function. Services and transport streams passed to the output can easily be located at the input and at the output. Note: Components within a service or Transport stream cannot be localized using the search function.

To Search a Service or Transport Stream Perform the following procedure to locate an incoming or outgoing service or transport stream using the search function. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

Right-click on the pane where the search function must be started. Result: The Search popup is displayed.

3

In the Search box, enter the search criteria. Note: The search function of the user interface is case-insensitive.

4

Under Search In, tick the tree(s) where services/transport stream must be located. Hint: The check box of the pane where the search action was started is by default ticked. Result: The Search popup displays the results of the search action in the Search results table.

4011746 Rev AG

223

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

Hints:  The search results can be highlighted in the tree(s) by clicking on the corresponding Highlight arrow.  Searching in multiple trees at the same time is possible by selecting the corresponding tree check boxes under Search in and pressing Search. in the Processing Tree header opens Search popup with Processing  Pressing Tree check box set.  Entering the search criteria in the search box on the Inputs or Outputs pane and pressing Search opens the Search popup with results for the selected pane.

Locating a Passed Service in the Inputs Tree The following procedure explains how to locate a passed service in the Inputs tree. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the service or SPTS that must be located at the input.

3

Right-click on this service or SPTS and point to Find Source in the shortcut menu. Result: The incoming service is highlighted in the Inputs tree.

224

4011746 Rev AG

Finding Services or Transport Streams in a Tree

Hints:  To locate the active service in a service backup application, right-click on the service or SPTS and point to Find Active Source in the shortcut menu.  The find source and find active source action can also be done in the Processing tree.

Locating a Passed Service in the Outputs Tree The following procedure explains how to locate a passed service or transport stream in the Outputs tree. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the service or transport stream that must be located at the output.

3

Right-click on this service or transport stream and point to Find Destinations in the shortcut menu. Result: A popup is displayed with all destinations.

4

Click on the Highlight Destination arrow to highlight the service or transport stream in the Outputs tree.

Hint: This action can also be used on the Processing tree.

4011746 Rev AG

225

Chapter 3 Using the Tree View

Determining the Presence of a Transport Stream Node in the Inputs Tree Introduction A transport stream node in the Inputs tree can be present for several reasons. The following list shows these reasons:  The transport stream or any part of the transport stream (Service, Component, EMM PID...) is passed to the output.  The transport stream is configured for transport stream backup or as backup source for another input transport stream.  The transport stream was detected less than 2 minutes ago at the input.  There is a specific Service Loss alarm trigger configured for at least one service in the transport stream.  There is a specific TS Loss alarm trigger configured for this transport stream.  There are specific FEC settings configured for this transport stream.  There is a specific compact CA descriptor setting for this transport stream.  There is a specific time base selection setting for this transport stream.  The transport stream signal is present at the input.  There is a specific input standard configured for this TS

To Determine the Presence of a Transport Stream Node in the Inputs Tree The following procedure describes how to determine why a transport stream node is shown in the Inputs tree. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the corresponding Transport Stream or to a service belonging to this transport stream.

3

Right-click on this transport stream or service and point to Status in the shortcut menu. Result: A popup is displayed containing the Why is this TS visible in the input tree? table.

226

4011746 Rev AG

Determining the Presence of a Transport Stream Node in the Inputs Tree

4011746 Rev AG

227

4 Chapter 4 Multiplexing Introduction This chapter outlines the re-multiplexing capabilities of the Digital Content Manager (DCM).

In This Chapter          

4011746 Rev AG

Section A Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or Transport Streams ...............................................................................231 Section B Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams .................................................................................................245 Section C Forward Error Correction ...............................................279 Section D Service Re-Multiplexing ..................................................301 Section E Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components ........321 Section F PSI/SI/PSIP Information .................................................397 Section G Changing Service Parameters.........................................465 Section H Activating or Stopping Streaming .................................487 Section I Removing Outgoing Services and Transport Streams .................................................................................................493 Section J Viewing Service Grooming ..............................................499

229

Section A Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or Transport Streams Introduction This section describes how to change settings of incoming services and incoming transport streams.

In this section Settings of Incoming Services......................................................................................232 Settings of Incoming Transport Streams ...................................................................235

4011746 Rev AG

231

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Settings of Incoming Services Introduction The user name of a service as well as the alarms used to trigger a Service Loss alarm can be configured for each individual incoming service. Note: The procedure to configure the Service Loss alarm for an incoming service can be found in topic Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers on page 997.

Changing Service Settings on the Service Settings Table of a Particular Incoming Transport Stream The following procedure describes how to change settings on the Service Settings table containing all services of a particular incoming transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service Link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the incoming transport stream containing the services for which settings must be changed.

3

Double-click on this incoming transport stream or right-click on this transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Input TS Settings page is displayed.

4

Click on the Service link. Result: The Input Service Settings page containing the Service Settings table of the selected transport stream is displayed.

Notes:



232

The illustration above shows a Service Settings table of an incoming transport stream on an ASI port. The Service Settings table of an incoming transport stream on a GbE or RF port is similar.

4011746 Rev AG

Settings of Incoming Services

5



Each service in the Service Settings table is indicated by its service identifier and service name.



A service of a transport stream that belongs to a multi stream (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only) is also accompanied with the input stream identifier (ISI) of the transport stream.

Enter a name in the User Name box for the service that must be renamed. A name with maximum 99 characters can be given, double-quotes in the name are not allowed. Hint: When no SDTa (DVB) or VCT (ATSC) is available, the user name will be used by the user interface to identify the service. For more information, please refer to topic Changing SDT Settings for a Particular Service on page 444.

6

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Changing Service Settings on the Service Settings Table of a Particular Port The following procedure describes how to change settings on the Service Settings table containing the services of all incoming transport streams on a particular port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service Link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the port containing the services for which settings must be changed.

3

Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Input Port Services page containing the Service Settings table containing the services of all incoming transport streams of the selected port is displayed.

Notes:



4011746 Rev AG

The illustration above shows a Service Settings table for all incoming transport streams on a GbE port. The Service Settings table of an incoming transport stream on an ASI or RF port is similar.

233

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

4

234



Each service in the Service Settings table is indicated by the destination IP address and UDP port number of the incoming transport stream (GbE port only) to which the service belongs to and by the service identifier and service name.



A service of a transport stream that belongs to a multi stream (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only) is accompanied with the input stream identifier (ISI) of the transport stream.

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

Settings of Incoming Transport Streams

Settings of Incoming Transport Streams Introduction Changing incoming transport stream settings can be done on the TS Settings table. This TS Settings table can be displayed for a single incoming transport stream (see topic Changing Setting of a Single Transport Stream on page 238) or for all incoming transport streams on a particular port (see topic Changing Setting of Multiple Transport Stream of a Particular Port on page 239). When incoming transport streams or services appear at the input, the settings of these incoming transport streams or services will get default values. The procedure to change these default values can be found in topic Changing the Default Incoming Transport Stream parameters on page 242. The DCM allows preconfiguring of incoming transport streams. When an incoming transport stream becomes available at the input that matches a preconfigured incoming transport stream, this transport stream will get these settings. The procedure to define preconfigured incoming transport streams can be found in topic Adding a Preconfigured Transport Streams on page 241. The following list describes the incoming transport stream settings that can be modified.  Input Standard parameter The type of a component in a service is indicated using the stream_type parameter in the Program Map Table (PMT). Depending on the standard, the association between the component type and the stream_type number differs, see table below. Video Component Type Stream type

0x01

0x02

0x80

0x2B

DVB

MPEG-1

MPEG-2

AVC

ATSC

MPEG-1

MPEG-2

AVC

DC-II

MPEG-1

MPEG-2

Mode

MPEG-2

AVC

Audio Component Type Stream type

0x03

0x04

0x06 + AC-3 descriptor

DVB

MPEG-1 Layer II

MPEG-2 Layer II

AC-3

ATSC

MPEG-1 Layer II

MPEG-2 Layer II

DC-II

MPEG-1 Layer II

MPEG-2 Layer II

Mode

4011746 Rev AG

0x81

0x0F

0x11

MPEG-2 AAC

MPEG-4 AAC

AC-3

MPEG-2 AAC

MPEG-4 AAC

AC-3

MPEG-2 AAC

MPEG-4 AAC

235

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

For particular digital processes, for example for rate control or DPI, the DCM requires the knowledge of this component type - stream_type association, therefore the standard must be given for each incoming transport stream. The Input Standard mode for incoming transport streams is default set to DVB. When most of the incoming transport streams are compliant with another standard, it is useful to change this default value.  Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor mode This mode must be enabled when the CA system uses Mediaguard Compact CA descriptors in the incoming transport stream with additional EMM PID or ECM PID references in the private data bytes. The mode is by default disabled. When this mode is enabled, these ECM components are automatically passed to the output during the service passing process. The EMM components become visible at the input and can be passed to the outputs like other EMM components. The procedure to pass EMMs can be found in topic Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components on page 371.  MPEG Priority Bit mode This mode determines the priority bit in the header of the MPEG packets and can be set to: -

Transparent: the priority bit will not be changed

-

Force to 0: the priority bit will be set to 0

-

Force to 1: the priority bit will be set to 1

The MPEG Priority Bit parameter is only displayed when the DCM is provided with the PRIORITY_BIT_ADAPTATION license. More information about licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 28.  Index Packet Interpreter mode (ASI and ASI SFN Interface Card only) This parameter enables or disables the index packet interpreter of an ASI or ASI SFN Interface Card. This function processes the index packets which are inserted into the incoming transport stream for deterministic re-multiplexing. More information about deterministic re-multiplexing can be found in topic Deterministic Remote Re-multiplexing on page 1057. It's strongly recommended to disable this parameter if the ASI transport stream doesn't belong to such application.  Time Base Selection mode, CBR Latency, and VBR Latency (GBE Interface Card only) Particular IP decoders (in for instance set top boxes) may not tolerate IP jitter introduced by the originating device (own introduced jitter) or IP jitter introduced by the IP infrastructure between the origin (for instance a server) and the MPEG decoder (network jitter). The DCM supports two dejittering methods: a general dejitter mode, which can be used to dejitter VBR and CBR streams and a CBR mode that should only be used for CBR streams. Both dejittering methods are based on PCR measurements and need the knowledge of the PCR that must 236

4011746 Rev AG

Settings of Incoming Transport Streams

be used. The Time Base Selection parameter determines the PCR PID and mode that will be used to de-jitter GbE input content. -

Auto: any PID containing a PCR can be used.

-

Auto Referenced PCR: a PCR PID referenced in the PMT of a service, which is present in the transport stream, is used.

-

Forced PCR: the PCR PID referenced in the PMT of a service, which is selected using its SID, is used.

-

CBR - Auto: any PID containing a PCR can be used.

-

CBR - Auto Referenced PCR: a PCR PID referenced in the PMT of a service, which is present in the transport stream, is used.

-

CBR - Forced PCR: the PCR PID referenced in the PMT of a service, which is selected using its SID, is used.

For the CBR mode and when the CBR dejitter buffer option is enabled, the CBR Latency parameter that is used to determine the dejitter buffer can be configured between 10 and 110 ms and is by default set to 110 ms. Usage:

  

The general dejitter mode can be used in most configurations. If the input stream has a constant bitrate, CBR dejitter mode can be used. In the following cases CBR mode should be used... –

if the latency of a stream passed from GbE should be lower than 110 ms.

–

if the PCR of the input stream contains sporadic errors, CBR dejitter mode can be used to avoid glitches in the output stream (for example if the accuracy of the PCR cannot be guaranteed over time or if the PCR interval is too high).



For incoming MPTS GbE streams, using the CBR dejitter mode is strongly recommended.



CBR dejitter mode should not be used in combination with DPI when the insertion stream is not present permanently, even if the insertion stream has a constant bitrate. If a service is passed to an output, it takes a few seconds more in CBR dejitter mode. Remark: CBR mode can only be used if the input streams have a constant bitrate.

For VBR streams the VBR Latency parameter determines the dejitter buffer. This parameter is by default set to 110 ms but can be enlarged up to 180 ms, for instance for incoming transport streams transmitted in burst (low bandwidth, 7 MPEG packets/UDP packet, and large PCR spacing). Notes:

4011746 Rev AG

237

Chapter 4 Multiplexing



If the CBR dejitter buffer option is disabled, CBR dejittering will be done using the VBR dejitter buffer.



When the Time Base Selection mode is set to Auto Referenced or CBR - Auto Referenced and no service is found from which a PCR can be used, the device starts working in Auto or CBR - Auto until a suitable service appears at the input.



Changing the Time Base Selection mode, CBR Latency, and/or VBR Latency parameter might introduce a glitch at the output.



Changing the mode from Forced or Auto Referenced PCR to Auto will always be done without changing the currently used PCR PID for the transport stream. No CC Errors will then be generated but PCR glitches are possible.



The CBR dejitter buffer option, CBR Latency parameter and VBR Latency parameter are card wide settings, meaning changing such setting applies to all incoming transport streams of the corresponding interface card. The procedure to change these settings can be found in topic Changing the Default Value for Incoming Transport Stream Parameters on page 242. Remark: The DCM cannot handle incoming VBR MPTS GBE streams.

Changing Setting of a Single Transport Stream The following steps explain how to change transport stream settings of a single incoming transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the incoming transport stream for which transport stream settings should be changed.

3

Double-click on this transport stream or right-click on this transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Input TS Settings page containing the TS Settings table for the selected incoming transport stream is displayed.

Note: The illustration above is an example of a TS Settings table of an incoming transport on a GbE port. The TS Settings table of an incoming transport on an ASI or RF port is similar. Hint: The corresponding incoming transport stream is identified by its ON_ID, TS_ID. For a transport stream that belongs to a multi stream (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only), these identification settings also provide the input stream identifier (ISI) of the transport stream. 238

4011746 Rev AG

Settings of Incoming Transport Streams

4

In the Input Standard drop down box, select the desired input standard mode: DVB, ATSC, DC-II, or Default (xxxxxx).

5

In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the desired mode: Enabled, Disabled, or Default (xxxxxx).

6

In the MPEG Priority Bit drop down box, select the desired value: Default (xxxxxx), Transparent, Force to 0, or Force to 1. Note: The MPEG Priority Bit drop down box is only displayed if the DCM is provided with PRIORITY_BIT_ADAPTATION license.

7

In the Index Packet Interpreter drop down box (ASI and ASI SFN Interface Card only), select Enabled or Disabled. Hint: After enabling this parameter, the identifier of the ASI Interface Card that inserted the index packets appears in the Packet Indexer ID column.

8

In the Time Base Selection drop down box (GbE Interface Card only), select one of the following values: Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, Forced PCR, CBR - Auto, CBR Auto Referenced PCR, CBR - Forced PCR, or Default (xxxxxx).

9

When the Time Base Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR or CBR - Forced PCR, enter the SID of the service with PCR PID reference in its PMT in the SID box (GbE Interface Card only).

10 Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation. Hint: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default (xxxxxx). The configured default value is shown between brackets. The procedure to change these default values can be found in topic Changing the Default Value for Incoming Transport Stream Parameters on page 242.

Changing Setting of Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular Port The following steps explain how to change transport stream settings of multiple incoming transport streams. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the port for which transport stream settings should be changed.

3

Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Input Port Services page is displayed.

4

Point to the TS Settings link. Result: The Input Port TS Settings page containing the TS Settings table for all incoming transport streams of the selected port is displayed.

5

4011746 Rev AG

In the TS Settings table, perform the following steps for each transport stream for which settings must be changed.

239

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Note: The picture above shows the TS Settings table containing the incoming transport streams on a GbE port. The TS Settings table containing the incoming transport stream on an ASI or RF port is similar. Hint:



The incoming transport streams of a GbE port are identified by the destination IP address, UDP port number, and source IP address (if available).



The transport streams belonging to a multi stream (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card) are identified by their input stream identifier.

a

In the Input Standard drop down box, select the desired input standard mode: DVB, ATSC, DC-II, or Default (xxxxxx).

b

In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the desired mode: Enabled, Disabled, or Default (xxxxxx).

c

In the MPEG Priority Bit drop down box, select the desired value: Default (xxxxxx), Transparent, Force to 0, or Force to 1. Note: The MPEG Priority Bit drop down box is only displayed if the DCM is provided with PRIORITY_BIT_ADAPTATION license.

d

In the Index Packet Interpreter drop down box (ASI and ASI SFN Interface Card only), select Enabled or Disabled.

e

In the Time Base Selection drop down box, select one of the following values: Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, Forced PCR, CBR - Auto, CBR - Auto Referenced PCR, CBR - Forced PCR, or Default (xxxxxx).

f

When the Time Base Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR or CBR - Forced PCR, enter the SID of the service with PCR PID reference in its PMT in the SID box.

Hint: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default (xxxxxx). The configured default value is shown between brackets. The procedure to change these default values can be found in topic Changing the Default Value for Incoming Transport Stream Parameters on page 242. 6

240

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

Settings of Incoming Transport Streams

Adding Preconfigured Transport Stream Entries The user interface of the DCM allows preconfiguring transport streams with particular transport stream settings for a GbE Interface Card or DVB-S2/CI Interface Card. When the incoming transport stream appears at the corresponding port, the transport stream will get these settings. The following steps explain how to add a preconfigured transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the port for which preconfigured transport streams should be created.

3

Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Input Port Services page is displayed.

4

Point to the TS Settings link. Result: The Input Port TS Settings page is displayed.

5

Under the Add Preconfigured TS settings, complete the following settings:

Note: The parameters under the Add Preconfigured TS settings are determined according to the interface card. This picture shows the parameters for a GbE Interface Card 6

7

4011746 Rev AG

In the Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following values:



Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming transport stream is a unicast IP address.



Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming transport stream is a multicast IP address.

Enter the destination IP address of the incoming transport stream in the IP Address box and the UDP port number in the UDP Port box (GbE Interface Card only).

241

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

8

For a transport stream belonging to a multi stream (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only), tick the ISI check box and enter the input stream identifier of the transport stream in the box beside the check box.

9

In the Input Standard drop down box, select the desired input standard mode: DVB, ATSC, DC-II, or Default (xxxxxx).

10 In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the desired mode: Enabled, Disabled, or Default (xxxxxx). 11 In the MPEG Priority Bit drop down box (GbE Interface Card only), select the desired value: Default (xxxxxx), Transparent, Force to 0, or Force to 1. Note: The MPEG Priority Bit drop down box is only displayed if the DCM is provided with PRIORITY_BIT_ADAPTATION license. 12 In the Time Base Selection drop down box (GbE Interface Card only), select one of the following values: Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, Forced PCR, CBR - Auto, CBR Auto Referenced PCR, CBR - Forced PCR, or Default (xxxxxx). 13 When the Time Base Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR or CBR - Forced PCR, enter the SID of the service with PCR PID reference in its PMT in the SID box. 14 Press Add to confirm. Result: The preconfigured transport stream is added to the TS Settings table. Hints:  The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default (xxxxxx). The configured default value is shown between brackets. The procedure to change these default values can be found in topic Changing the Default Value for Incoming Transport Stream Parameters on page 242.  As long as a preconfigured incoming transport stream has not been routed and do not match an incoming transport stream, the preconfigured transport stream can be removed by ticking the check box of the corresponding entry and pointing to Remove Checked Items.

Changing the Default Value for Incoming Transport Stream Parameters The following procedure describes how to change the default value for the incoming transport stream parameters. These values will be used for each incoming transport stream for which the associated parameters are set to default. WARNING: Changing default values involves changing the associated parameter for all incoming transport streams for which the value is set to default.

1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

242

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the default standard mode for incoming transport streams should be changed. 4011746 Rev AG

Settings of Incoming Transport Streams

Result: The interface configuration page of the selected interface card is displayed. 3

Point to the Default Settings link. Result: The Default Settings page is displayed.

4

Select the TS tab.

5

Under the Input TS Default Settings, modify the following parameters if required:

Note: The parameters under the Input TS Default Settings are determined according to the interface card. The picture above shows the parameters for a GbE Interface Card. 6

In the Standard drop down box in the Input TS Default Settings table, select the desired value: DVB, ATSC, or DC-II.

7

In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the desired value: Enabled or Disabled.

8

In the MPEG Priority Bit drop down box, select the desired value: Default (xxxxxx), Transparent, Force to 0, or Force to 1. Note: The MPEG Priority Bit drop down box is only displayed if the DCM is provided with PRIORITY_BIT_ADAPTATION license.

9

Tick the Index Packet Interpreter check box to enable this function or clear this check box otherwise.

10 In the Time Base Selection drop down box (GbE Interface Card only), select the desired value: Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, CBR - Auto, or CBR - Auto Referenced PCR. 11 Tick the CBR Latency (ms) check box to enable the CBR dejitter buffer option and if a latency different from the default value must be chosen, enter the desired latency in the corresponding box (GbE Interface Card only). 12 In the VBR Latency (ms) box, enter the desired latency (GbE Interface Card only). 13 Press Apply all to confirm or Reload all to abort the operation. Note: After changing the Time Base Selection, CBR Latency (ms), and/or VBR Latency (ms) parameter and pressing Apply, the following confirmation box is displayed:

4011746 Rev AG

243

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort.

244

4011746 Rev AG

Section B Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams Introduction This section describes how to create outgoing transport streams and how to configure these transport streams.

In this section Creating Outgoing Transport Streams ......................................................................246 Changing the Standard Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams .........................259 Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams .......................267 Configuring Automatic Pass Rules ............................................................................273 Changing the Default Values for the Advanced Transport Stream Settings .......275 Delaying Transparent Passed Transport Streams ....................................................278

4011746 Rev AG

245

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Creating Outgoing Transport Streams Introduction General Before services can be passed to an outgoing transport stream, the output port must be provided with one or more outgoing transport streams. Since an ASI output port only has one transport stream, each ASI port is by default provided with one transport stream with default settings. In contrast with the ASI output ports, the GbE ports accept multiple outgoing transport streams. During the transport stream creation process particular parameters are filled with default values. The procedure to change these default values can be found in topic Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams on page 265. Once outgoing transport streams are created, the corresponding parameters can be changed as described in topic Changing Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams on page 259.

Transport Stream Auto Pass Rules Transport stream (TS) auto pass rules for an incoming transport stream can be assigned to each outgoing transport stream. When TS auto pass rules for an incoming transport stream are assigned to an outgoing transport stream, the complete content of the incoming transport stream will be passed to this outgoing transport stream, including unreferenced components. The TS auto pass rules also determine the content of the outgoing transport stream if the content of the incoming transport streams varies. Meaning, when new services, Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs), and/or unreferenced component are added to the incoming transport stream, this new content will automatically be passed to the outgoing transport stream depending on the assigned TS auto pass rule(s). The following TS auto pass rules can be assigned:  Pass Unreferenced PIDs rule: all unreferenced components will automatically be passed to the output.  Pass EMMs rule: all EMMs will automatically be passed to the output.  Pass Services rule: all services will automatically be passed to the output.

246

4011746 Rev AG

Creating Outgoing Transport Streams WARNING: We strongly advise against performing processing like forcing PIDs, PID remapping, passing components or services from other incoming transport streams, DPI, scrambling... on the content of outgoing transport streams with Pass Unreferenced PIDs rule assignment without the knowledge of the packet identifiers of the unreferenced components that can be added to the corresponding incoming transport stream. Otherwise conflicts between unreferenced components passed from the input and components present at the output can arise resulting in CC errors.

TS auto pass rules can automatically be assigned during the creation of an outgoing Transport stream by passing an incoming transport stream to a port. TS auto pass rules can also be assigned to an existing outgoing transport stream. When TS auto pass rules are automatically created during the transport stream creation process, the rules automatically refer to the passed incoming transport stream. The PSI/SI information of the outgoing transport stream to which TS auto pass rules are assigned, is by default regenerated by the DCM (Output mode set to Generate). The procedure to change this mode is described in topic Changing the PSI/SI Generation Mode on page 427. Notes:  When services or EMMs are removed from the input, their nodes are indicated by their not-present icon and configuration settings are kept. Removing these nodes must be done manually. When unreferenced components are removed, all references at the output will be removed.  When services are passed to an outgoing transport stream with Pass Service rule assignment and services, which are still present at the input, are manually removed from the outgoing Transport stream, these services will be passed again when the service population of the incoming transport stream changes.  When services are added to an incoming transport stream that is passed with Pass Services rule assignment to an outgoing transport stream containing a TR All Services rate control group, the services will automatically be added to the rate control group. These new services will get default configuration settings.  When services are added to an incoming transport stream that is passed with Pass Services rule assignment to an outgoing transport stream containing one or more TR Selective Services rate control group, the services will not be added to a rate control group. When no TS auto pass rules are assigned to an outgoing transport stream, no unreferenced components are passed from the incoming transport stream to the output and the content of the outgoing transport stream remains static. Meaning, when new services, unreferenced component, or EMMs are added to the incoming transport stream, this new content will not automatically be passed to the output.

4011746 Rev AG

247

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Transparent Loop Through Transport Streams To copy an incoming transport stream to the output without manipulating the content of the transport stream, the transparent loop through feature of the DCM can be used. This feature transparently passes incoming transport streams (including stuffing) to the output and is useful for interface conversion (ASI to GbE or vice versa) and monitoring purposes. When an input transport stream is transparently passed to the output, all input components are dynamically passed to the outgoing transport stream. Additional configuration to the outgoing transport stream, service, and component settings is no longer possible and advanced MPEG processing, like rate control, scrambling... cannot be done. Only interface related settings, like: destination IP address, destination UDP port, VLAN, RTP/UDP, and FEC, can be modified. When the interface card, to which the transport stream is passed, is provided with a Co-Processor Card, the transport stream can be delayed from 5 ms up to 100 ms. More information about this feature can be found in topic Delaying Transparent Passed Transport Streams on page 278. The procedure to pass an incoming transport stream transparently to an output can be found in topic Passing a Transport Stream Transparently to an Output on page 256. In the Outputs tree Transparent Loop Through Transport Streams are indicated by means of a white colored transport stream icon, see picture below.

Notes:  A Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream branch has no children, meaning the services and components of such branch are not displayed since these are the same as at the input.  Incoming transport streams without PAT can transparently be passed.  When an incoming transport stream with errors is transparently passed to the output, these errors will also be present in the outgoing transport stream.  The packet format of an outgoing transport stream on an ASI port is 188 bytes with output mode set to Packet, independent of the packet format of the incoming transport stream. Hint: To protect the content of Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream, transport stream backup is possible. For more information about transport stream backup, please refer to topic Transport Stream Backup on page 917.

Transport Stream Creation Methods To facilitate the configuration of the DCM, different transport stream creating methods are foreseen: 248

4011746 Rev AG

Creating Outgoing Transport Streams

 Creating outgoing transport streams by adding individual transport streams. TS auto pass rules must be assigned manually if required.  Creating an outgoing transport stream by passing an incoming transport stream to a port. For a GbE port, TS auto pass rules can automatically be assigned. For an ASI port, the existing outgoing transport stream will be replaced by the incoming transport stream and TS auto pass rules are automatically assigned.  Creating multiple Single Program transport streams by passing individual incoming services to a GbE port. TS auto pass rules must be assigned manually if required.  Creating a Transparently Loop Through Transport Stream

General Notes  During the transport stream creation process to a GbE port an IP address must be assigned. Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing transport streams has the following restrictions. -

For SSM, use address from the range 232.0.0.0 - 232.255.255.255. Exception: addresses 232.0.0.0 ... 232.0.0.255 are reserved.

-

For ASM, use address from the range 239.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255. Exception: addresses 239.0.0.0 ... 239.191.255.255 are reserved.

-

Streaming MPEG data packets to addresses in the range 224.0.0.0 - 224.0.0.255 is strongly discouraged because this may cause trouble on for instance routers.

For more information please refer to RFC 3171 or to Cisco's Guidelines for Enterprise IP Multicast Address Allocation.  During for instance a service or transport stream backup transition, a PCR discontinuity at the output of the DCM might occur. Some downstream equipment uses the PCR for dejittering purposes and doesn't tolerate a PCR discontinuity. To deal with this the PCR continuity feature can be enabled to keep the PCR continuous. More information about this feature can be found in topic Changing Card Settings of a Co-Processor Card on page 89.

Creating Outgoing Transport Streams by Adding Individual Transport Streams to a Port Perform the following procedure to add an individual transport stream to a GbE port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2 4011746 Rev AG

In the Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing GbE port, 249

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

3

Double-click on this GbE port or right-click on the GbE port and select Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output Port TS page of the GbE port in question is displayed.

4

Under the Add New TS settings, complete the following settings:

a

Enter the original network identifier for the new transport stream in the ON ID box and the transport stream identifier in the TS ID box. Hint: Both the ON ID and the TS ID can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation, independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x. For more information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic Changing the Display Mode on page 178.

b

In the Output Standard drop down box, select the desired output standard mode: Transparent, Force Uplink, Force Video, or Force Audio3.

c

In the Streaming drop down box, select the desired setting:

d

250

–

Active: activates streaming

–

Stopped: stops streaming

–

Auto: streaming is active as long as the TS Out Loss alarm for the transport stream is inactive. Streaming will automatically be stopped if the TS Out Loss alarm becomes active and restarts automatically if the alarm becomes inactive.

Clear the Use Default Settings check box to fill the following parameters manually or tick this check box to fill these parameters by defaults. –

IP Address parameter Note: Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing transport streams has some restrictions. More information can be found in topic Introduction on page 246.

–

UDP Port parameter

–

Total Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter

–

Output Protocol parameter

4011746 Rev AG

Creating Outgoing Transport Streams

–

Output Rate parameter

Hint: Filling these parameters by defaults reduces the number of parameter adaptations during the transport stream adding process. The procedure to change these defaults can be found in Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams on page 265. e

Press Add to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Result: After pressing Add the newly created transport stream is added to the TS Settings table.

Hints:  The Sum of CBR TS box below the TS Settings table indicates the sum of the bitrates of the outgoing constant bitrate transport streams on the selected port and the Active Sum box the sum of the bitrates of the outgoing transport streams for which streaming is active.  For more information concerning the transport stream parameters, please refer to topic Changing Standard Settings of an Outgoing Transport Stream on page 259.

Creating a Transport Stream by Passing an Incoming Transport Stream to a Port To a GbE port An outgoing transport stream for a GbE port can be created by passing an incoming transport stream to this port. All services of the incoming transport stream are automatically passed to this outgoing transport stream. When auto pass rules must be assigned to the outgoing transport stream during the transport stream creation process, the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter must be set to Ask for the Desired Action. For more information, please refer to topic Changing Tree Settings on page 215. Note: Only services within the incoming transport stream will be passed to the output when no TS auto rules are assigned to the newly created transport stream, no EMMs or unreferenced components. The following procedure explains how to create a new outgoing transport stream for a GbE port by dragging and dropping an incoming transport stream to this port. 1

4011746 Rev AG

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. 251

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Result: The Tree View page is displayed. 2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the incoming transport stream that must be passed.

3

In the Outputs tree, browse to the GbE port for which the outgoing transport stream must be created.

4

Select the branch of the incoming transport stream and drag and drop this transport stream to the branch of the GbE port.

Result: When the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter is set to Ask for the Desired Action, the following popup is displayed.

Select the Create TS and Pass all Services to create an outgoing transport stream containing all services of the passed incoming transport stream or select Activate Automatic Pass Rules to assign auto pass rules to the outgoing transport stream. Once the selection is made, press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation. Result: An outgoing transport stream is created populated with the services of the passed incoming transport stream. When auto pass rules are assigned, the unreferenced components and EMMs are also passed and the ON ID and the TS ID of the newly created outgoing transport stream match the IDs of the passed incoming transport stream. A number of parameters are filled with defaults as defined on the Default Settings page of the GbE Interface Configuration page. More information concerning these defaults can be found in topic Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams on page 265. Note:  The Streaming parameter of the newly created outgoing transport stream is set to Stopped, meaning that the transport stream is not streamed through the GbE port. The procedure to enable streaming can be found in topic Activating or Stopping Streaming on page 487. 252

4011746 Rev AG

Creating Outgoing Transport Streams

 Individual components (EMMs and unreferenced components) can be passed, blocked, and if needed remapped manually; more information concerning passing and remapping of unreferenced components can be found in topic Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components on page 371.

To an ASI port An ASI port can only be populated with one outgoing transport stream. When an incoming transport stream is dropped to an ASI port, the existing outgoing transport stream will be replaced by the dropped transport stream. The outgoing transport stream is automatically labeled with the ON ID and TS ID of the incoming transport stream and assigned with TS auto pass rules. All components within this incoming transport stream are passed to the outgoing transport stream, including the unreferenced component. The following procedure explains how to create a new outgoing transport stream for an ASI port by dragging and dropping an incoming transport stream to this port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the incoming transport stream that must be passed.

3

In the Outputs tree, browse to the ASI port for which the outgoing transport stream must be created.

4

Select the branch of the incoming transport stream and drag and drop this transport stream to the icon of the ASI port.

Result: The following dialog is displayed asking the desired action.

5

4011746 Rev AG

Select the Activate Automatic Pass rules selection button and press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation.

253

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Result: After pressing OK, the following confirmation box is displayed asking to replace the existing outgoing transport stream.

6

Click on OK to confirm or on Cancel to abort the operation.

Creating SPTSs by Passing Incoming Services to a GbE Port Introduction Single Program Transport Streams (SPTSs) can be created by passing individual services of incoming transport streams to a GbE port. Two methods can be used, the Drag and Drop method and the Muxing method. The Drag and Drop method is useful when a discreet number of SPTSs must be created. The Muxing method is recommended if a large number of SPTSs should be created. A number of parameters of the newly created SPTSs are filled with defaults. The procedure to define these defaults can be found in topic Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams on page 265. The Streaming parameter of the newly created SPTSs is set to Stopped, meaning that newly created outgoing SPTSs do not stream through the GbE port. The procedure to enable streaming can be found in topic Activating or Stopping Streaming on page 487.

Drag and Drop Method The following steps explain how to create a SPTS on a GbE port using the Drag and Drop method. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

254

2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the incoming service for which an outgoing SPTS must be created.

3

In the Outputs tree, browse to the GbE port for which the outgoing SPTS must be created.

4

Select the branch of the incoming service and drag and drop the service to the branch of the GbE port.

4011746 Rev AG

Creating Outgoing Transport Streams

Result: An outgoing SPTS is created containing the passed service. Hint: A service processed by a Transcoder or MFP Card can also be dragged from the Processing tree and dropped to the branch of the GbE port for creating an outgoing SPTS. Please refer to topic Transcoding on page 505 for more information about transcoding and refer to topic Logo Insertion on page 599 for more information about logo insertion.

Muxing Method The following steps explain how to create SPTSs on a GbE port using the Muxing method. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that appears after pressing the Service link. Result: The Muxing page is displayed.

2

In the Input drop down box select Service and in the Output drop down box GbE Port (SPTS). Result: The Input Services and Output GbE Ports tables are displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

255

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Hint: To sort the Input Services or Output GbE Ports table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the header. 3

In the Input Services table, set the check boxes of the services for which outgoing SPTSs must be created.

4

In the Output GbE Port table, set the check box(es) of the GbE port(s) on which the outgoing SPTSs must be created. Hint: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input Services and Output GbE Ports table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.

5

Press Pass to confirm or Reload to abort the operation. Result: After pressing Pass the SPTSs are created. All check boxes in the Input Services table as well as the check boxes in the Output GbE Ports table will be cleared.

Passing a Transport Stream Transparently to an Output An incoming transport stream at a GbE, ASI, or 8-VSB RF port can transparently be passed to the output. Before incoming transport streams can transparently be passed to a GbE output port, the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter must be set to Ask for the Desired Action. For more information, please refer to topic Changing Tree Settings on page 215. The following procedure describes how to transparently pass an incoming transport stream to an output. 1

256

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. 4011746 Rev AG

Creating Outgoing Transport Streams

Result: The Tree View page is displayed. 2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the incoming transport stream that must be passed.

3

In the Outputs tree, browse to the port to which the transport stream must be passed.

4

Select the branch of the incoming transport stream and drag and drop this transport stream to the icon of the port.

Result: A popup is displayed asking the desired action.

Note: The picture above is the popup that appears if the incoming transport stream is dropped on a GbE port. The popup that appears if the transport stream is dropped to an ASI port is similar. 5

Select the Pass the TS Transparently selection button and press OK. Note: When the transport stream is dropped to an ASI port, the following confirmation box is displayed.

Click on OK to confirm or on Cancel to abort the operation. Result: After pressing OK, the incoming transport stream is transparently passed to the selected port.

4011746 Rev AG

257

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Hint: A Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream can be removed by rightclicking on the icon of the outgoing transport stream and pointing to Undo Loop Through in the shortcut menu. Performing the Undo Loop Through action on such stream on a GbE port removes the transport stream and doing this action on such stream on an ASI port automatically creates a standard transport stream having default settings. Notes:  A Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream branch has no children, meaning the services and components of such branch are not displayed since these are the same as at the input.  Since the bitrates figures are displayed for the incoming transport stream in the Inputs tree, no bitrate figures are displayed for the corresponding Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream in the Outputs tree.  The bitrate of a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream is not included in the bitrate of the port to which the transport streams belongs to.  When an incoming transport stream is transparently passed to an output port of an ASI SFN Interface Card of which the SFN mode is enabled, the ASI SFN adaptation settings will be lost. More information can be found in section Integrating the DCM into Single Frequency Networks on page 1045.

258

4011746 Rev AG

Changing the Standard Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams

Changing the Standard Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams Introduction For each outgoing transport stream the DCM needs the knowledge of the following standard transport stream parameters:  IP Address: IP address of the destination port to which the outgoing transport stream must stream Note: Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing transport streams has some restrictions. More information can be found in topic Introduction on page 246.  UDP Port: UDP port number of the destination port to which the outgoing transport stream must stream  ON ID: the original network identifier (ON ID) labels the outgoing transport stream with the source network of the transport stream.  TS ID: the transport stream identifier (TS ID) is used to identify the outgoing transport stream from other transport streams in the application.  Total Bit Rate (Mbps): The maximum bitrate that can be used by the corresponding transport stream. This is parameter is not applicable if the Output Rate parameter is set to VBR.  Output Standard: the service type coding used by particular set top boxes differs according to the standard. Therefore the DCM allows remapping of the PMT elementary stream_type by changing the Output Standard mode. The following table gives the PMT Elementary Stream_Type remapping possibilities. Stream Type Remapping Component Type

Video

1st Audio

2nd Audio 3rd Audio

4th Audio

Transparent

pass

pass

pass

pass

pass

Force Video

force 0x2

pass

pass

pass

pass

Force Uplink

force 0x2

force 0x3

force 0x81

pass

pass

Force Audio 3

force 0x2

pass

pass

force 0x6

pass

Mode

The Stream Type of an elementary stream recognized as a specific component type will be remapped to the specific value as indicated in the Stream Type Remapping table. An elementary stream, for which the stream type is remapped, is indicated in the Outputs tree and Service Component Settings table.

4011746 Rev AG

259

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

-

Outputs tree

-

Service Component Settings table

Hint: The DCM allows remapping the stream type of individual components by defining ES type overrule entries. For more information please refer to topic Overruling Elementary Stream Type on page 381.  Output Protocol: The IP packets in which an outgoing transport stream is encapsulated can be enlarged with an RTP header (RTP streaming). RTP stands for real time transport protocol and is the protocol standard for streaming media (video conferencing, audio conferencing, video streaming over the internet...). -

RTP: the IP packets are enlarged with RTP Header.

-

UDP: the IP packets are not enlarged with RTP header.

Notes: -

The RTP standard requires that an even UDP port number is chosen for an RTP stream.

-

For forward error correction (FEC) the Output Protocol parameter must be set to RTP. For more information concerning FEC, please refer to topic Forward Error Correction on page 279.

 Streaming: For backup or configuration purposes it can be useful to enable or disable streaming of the transport stream through the output port. Streaming can automatically be activated or stopped depending on the state of the TS Out Loss alarm of the outgoing transport stream.

260

-

Stopped: streaming of the transport stream is disabled.

-

Active: streaming of the transport stream is enabled.

-

Auto: streaming is active as long as the TS Out Loss alarm for the transport stream is inactive. Streaming will automatically be stopped if the TS Out Loss 4011746 Rev AG

Changing the Standard Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams

alarm becomes active and restarts automatically if the alarm becomes inactive. Note that the Auto mode can't be used for transparently passed transport streams. Hint: A transport stream stopped due to an active TS Out Loss alarm is indicated by Blocked in the string that appears after pausing your cursor on the arrow beside the stream branch, see picture below.

The Streaming mode cannot be set to Auto if the outgoing transport stream belongs to an ASI Interface Card for which the mode is set to ASI DTF.  (Output) Rate: The bitrate of an outgoing Transport stream can be fixed or variable. Set the Output Rate mode to CBR to define a constant bitrate transport stream or VBR to define a variable bitrate transport stream. Notes:  During the outgoing transport stream creation process certain TS settings are automatically filled by default values. The procedure to change these default values is described in topic Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams on page 265.  The IP Address, UDP Port, Output Protocol, and Rate parameters are only applicable when the outgoing transport stream belongs to a GbE port.  For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream on a GbE port, only the IP Address, UDP Port, Output Protocol, and Streaming parameters are applicable. For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream on an ASI port, only the Streaming parameters are applicable.

To Change Transport Stream Settings for a Single Transport Stream The procedure below describes how to change the transport stream settings for a single transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the transport stream for which settings must be changed.

3

Double-click on the transport stream or right-click on the transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output TS page of the selected transport stream is displayed.

4

Select the TS tab (or TS/Rate Control tab).

5

Under the TS Settings, adapt the parameters that must be changed for the corresponding transport stream.

4011746 Rev AG

261

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Hint: Pressing the arrow beside Configure TOT (PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode = DVB or Mixed) or Configure STT (PSI/SI/PSIP Output Standard Mode = ATSC or Mixed) displays the corresponding table page. For more information, please refer to topic Adding or Removing Time Offset Descriptors to or from a TOT on page 447 or to topic Modifying the STT on page 453. Notes:



Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing transport streams has some restrictions. More information can be found in topic Introduction on page 246.



Since variable bitrate MPTSs may arise dejittering issues further in the chain, the following confirmation box is displayed if the Rate parameter for an MPTS is set to VBR:

Click on OK to close the confirmation box.



262

When forward error correction is enabled, the Output Protocol parameter must be set to RTP. Changing the Output Protocol parameter from RTP to UDP and forward error correction is enabled displays a message box asking to disable FEC.

4011746 Rev AG

Changing the Standard Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams

Click on OK to confirm. For more information concerning FEC, please refer to topic Forward Error Correction on page 279. 6

Press Apply All to confirm or Reload All to abort the operation.

Notes:  The new ON ID and TS ID can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation, independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x. For more information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic Changing the Display Mode on page 178.  The IP Address, UDP Port, Output Protocol, and Rate parameter are not displayed in the Output TS page for a transport stream on an ASI port.  When settings of multiple transport streams on a particular GbE port must be changed, the Output Port TS page can be used. This page gives an overview of the settings of all outgoing transport streams for a particular port. For more information, please refer to topic To Change Transport Stream Settings for Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular Port on page 263.  For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream on a GbE port, only the IP Address, UDP Port, and Output Protocol parameters are applicable.

 For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream, the TS tab page also provides references of the corresponding incoming transport stream.

To Change Settings for Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular GbE Port The following procedure describes how to change the transport stream settings for multiple transport streams of a particular port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

263

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the output port containing the transport streams for which settings must be changed.

3

Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output Port TS page of the selected port is displayed.

4

In the TS Settings table, modify the parameters. Notes:



Changing the Output Protocol parameter from RTP to UDP while forward error correction is enabled is not possible. For more information concerning FEC, please refer to topic Forward Error Correction on page 279.



Since variable bitrate MPTSs may arise dejittering issues further in the chain, the following confirmation box is displayed if the Rate parameter for an MPTS is set to VBR:

Click on OK to close the confirmation box.

 5

For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Streams, the Total Bit Rate (Mbps), Output Standard, and Rate parameter are not applicable in the TS Settings table.

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Hint: When particular parameters for all transport streams on a port must be changed to similar values, the Update all TS function of the user interface can be used. The following procedure describes how to use this function. 1

264

Under the Update all TS settings, enter the desired value in the box or select the desired value in the drop down box of the parameter that should be changed for all transport streams of the selected ports.

4011746 Rev AG

Changing the Standard Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams

2

Press Update. Result: The settings are changed in the TS Settings table.

3

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams During the transport stream creation process particular parameters are filled in with default values. To facilitate the configuration of outgoing transport streams, other values can be given to these defaults. The parameters for which defaults can be changed are:  The IP settings of the destination device to which the outgoing transport stream must stream (only for a GbE Interface Card) -

Start IP Address parameter: the IP address that will be used during the outgoing transport stream creation process. When the Increment Scheme parameter is set to IP Address + 1, each time a new outgoing transport stream is created the IP address will be increased by 1. Note: Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing transport streams has some restrictions. More information can be found in topic Introduction on page 246.

-

Start UDP Port parameter: the UDP port number that will be used during the outgoing transport stream creation process. When the Increment Scheme parameter is set to UDP Port + 1 or UDP Port + 2, each time a new outgoing transport stream is created the UDP port number will be increased by 1 or 2.

-

Source UDP Port parameter: the source UDP port for the outgoing transport stream.

-

Increment Scheme parameter: When a transport stream is added to a GbE port, the destination IP settings are adapted using one of the following increment schemes: 

4011746 Rev AG

IP Address + 1: the default IP address for the newly created transport stream is equal to the IP address as defined in the Start IP Address 265

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

parameter and each time increased by one if occupied.

-



UDP Port + 1: the UDP port for the newly created transport stream is equal to the UDP port number as defined in the Start UDP Port parameter and each time increased by one if occupied.



UDP Port + 2: the UDP port for the newly created transport stream is equal to the UDP port number as defined in the Start UDP Port parameter and each time increased by two if occupied.



IP Address + 1 and UDP Port + 1: the IP address and UDP port for the newly created transport stream is equal to the IP address and UDP port as defines in the Start IP Address and Start UDP Port parameter and each time increased by one if occupied.

Protocol parameter

 Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter (only for a GbE Interface Card)  Standard parameter The following procedure explains how to change the default outgoing transport stream settings. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the default values for the outgoing transport stream parameters should be changed. Result: The interface configuration page of the selected card is displayed.

3

Click on the Default Settings link. Result: The Default Settings page is displayed.

4

Select the TS tab.

5

Under the Output TS Default Settings, modify the default settings.

Note: For an ASI Interface Card, only the Standard parameter is applicable. 6

266

Press Apply All to confirm or Reload All to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams

Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams Introduction For each outgoing transport stream, the follow advanced settings can be configured.  TOS (only for a transport stream on a GbE Interface Card) The Type of Service parameter (TOS) determines the IP packet header field that indicates the type or quality of the service for this IP packet. A value can be given between 0 and 255 and is default set to 0.  TTL (only for a transport stream on a GbE Interface Card) To prevent indefinite looping of IP packets in a network, the lifetime of IP packets can be limited by defining a time to live to these packets. This time to live parameter (TTL) determines a field in IP packet header that specifies how many routers a packet can pass before being discarded. Each time an IP packet passes a router, the TTL field of the packet is decreased by one and will be discarded if it reaches 0. A value can be given between 1 and 255 and is default set to 64.  Forbidden PID Ranges To prevent PID collisions further in the chain, five ranges of forbidden PID values can be reserved for an outgoing transport stream. This means that within the outgoing transport stream those ranges of output PID values will never be used by either -

Automatic PID remapping

-

Unreferenced component passing

-

PSI/SI/PSIP table PID remapping

-

Or any other way…

The minimum PID value in a forbidden PID range is 32 and the maximum value is 8190. The minimum width of a forbidden PID range is 1 and the maximum width is 1000. Notes: -

Specifying a range containing a PID value occupied by a remapped component (unreferenced component passing, PSI/SI/PSIP table remapping...) is not allowed.

-

Service component remapping by defining component tracking rules is allowed but the component rule output PID value will not be used.

 Source IP and Source UDP (only for a transport stream on a GbE Interface Card) 4011746 Rev AG

267

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

The source IP address and the source UDP port in the IP packets of an outgoing transport stream are by default the IP address and the UDP port of the GbE port. For certain reason (for instance VLAN applications) it can be useful to change these parameters.  UDP Size (only for a transport stream on a GbE Interface Card) This parameter determines the number of MPEG packets that will be encapsulated into a single UDP packet. This parameter can be set between 1 and 7 and its default value is 7. Note: A DCM with software package version 6.0 or lower, the number of MPEG packets into a single UDP packet is fixed to 7.  VLAN Enabled, VLAN Identifier and VLAN Priority (only for a transport stream on a GbE Interface Card) When the DCM participates into VLAN application, the transport streams can be VLAN tagged. The IP packets in which an outgoing transport stream is encapsulated are enlarged with a VLAN header including VLAN identifier (VLAN ID) and VLAN Priority. The VLAN ID parameter ranges from 0 to 4094 and the VLAN Priority parameter from 0 to 7. Note: During the outgoing transport stream creation process particular advanced transport stream settings are automatically filled by default values. The procedure to change these default values is described in topic Changing Default Values for the Advanced Transport Stream Settings on page 275.

Changing Advanced Parameters for a Single Transport Stream The following procedure describes how to change the advanced setting for a single transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the transport stream for which advanced parameters must be changed.

3

Double-click on the transport stream or right-click on the transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output TS page of the selected transport stream is displayed.

4

Select the Advanced tab. Result: The Advanced tab page containing the Advanced Settings is displayed.

268

4011746 Rev AG

Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams

5

In the TOS box, enter a correct type of service value.

6

In the TTL box, enter a correct time to live value.

7

Tick the Source IP check box and enter the source IP address for the IP packets of the outgoing transport stream in the Source IP box. The octets of the address must be separated by dots.

8

In the Source UDP box, enter the source UDP port for the IP packets of the outgoing transport stream.

9

In the UDP Size drop down box, select the number of MPEG packets that must be encapsulated into a single UDP packet.

10 Tick the VLAN On check box to enabling VLAN tagging for the selected outgoing transport stream or clear the check box to disable VLAN tagging. 11 In the ID box, enter the VLAN identifier. 12 In the Priority box, enter the VLAN priority. Note: The ID and Priority parameters are only applicable when the VLAN On check box is ticked. 13 Complete the following steps to specify forbidden PID ranges: a

Point to Forbidden PID Ranges (

).

Result: The Forbidden PID Ranges popup is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

269

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

b

Tick the check box of an empty row to create a range or clear the box to remove a range.

c

Enter the lower limit value of the forbidden PID range in the left hand box and the upper limit in the right hand box of the row. Hint: A hexadecimal value as well as a decimal value can be entered. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x.

d

Repeat step b and c for all ranges that must be specified.

e

Click on OK to confirm or on Cancel to abort the operation.

14 Press Apply All to confirm or Reload All to abort the operation.

To Change the Advanced Settings for Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular Port The procedure below describes how to change the advanced setting of multiple outgoing transport streams of a particular port. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the port for which advanced parameters of multiple transport streams must be changed.

3

Double-click on the port or right-click on the port and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output Port TS page of the selected port is displayed.

4

Click on the TS Advanced link. Result: The Output Port Advanced page is displayed.

5

In the Advanced Settings table, perform the following steps:

Hint: In the Advanced Setting table, each outgoing transport stream is indicated (TS identification) by source IP address, UDP port, ON ID, and TS ID.

270

a

Tick the VLAN Settings - Enabled check box to enabling VLAN tagging for the selected outgoing transport stream or clear the check box to disable VLAN tagging.

b

In the VLAN Settings - ID box, enter the VLAN identifier.

c

In the VLAN Settings - Priority box, enter the VLAN priority.

4011746 Rev AG

Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams

Note: The VLAN Settings - ID and VLAN Settings - Priority parameters are only applicable when the VLAN Settings - Enabled check box is ticked. d

In the IP Settings - TOS box, enter a correct type of service value.

e

In the IP Settings - TTL box, enter a correct time to live value.

f

Tick the Source - IP check box and enter the source IP address for the IP packets of the outgoing transport stream in the Source IP box. The octets of the address must be separated by dots.

g

In the Source - UDP box, enter the source UDP port for the IP packets of the outgoing transport stream.

h

In the UDP Size drop down box, select the number of MPEG packets that must be encapsulated into a single UDP packet.

i

Complete the following steps to specify forbidden PID ranges: i

Point to Target - Forbidden PID Ranges (

).

Result: The Forbidden PID Ranges popup is displayed.

ii Tick the check box of an empty row to create a new range or clear the box to remove a range. iii Enter the lower limit value of the forbidden PID range in the left hand box and the upper limit in the right hand box of the corresponding row. Hint: A hexadecimal value as well as a decimal value can be entered. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x. iv Repeat step ii and iii for all ranges that must be specified. v 6

Click on OK to confirm or on Cancel to abort the operation.

Press Apply All to confirm or Reload All to abort the operation.

Note: When particular parameters of all transport streams in the Advanced Settings table must be changed to similar values, the Update all TS function of the user interface can be used. The following procedure describes how to use this function. 1

4011746 Rev AG

Under the Update all TS settings, set or clear the VLAN Enabled check box and enter the desired value in the box of the parameter that should be changed for all transport streams of the selected port. 271

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Note: The ID and Priority boxes are only applicable when the VLAN Enabled check box is ticked. 2

To add or to change forbidden PID ranges, complete the following steps: a

Point to Forbidden PID Ranges (

).

Result: The Forbidden PID Ranges popup is displayed.

3

b

Tick the check box of an empty row to create a new range or clear the box to remove a range.

c

Enter the lower limit value of the forbidden PID range in the left-hand box and the upper limit in the right hand box of the row.

d

Repeat step b and c for all ranges that must be specified.

e

Click on OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation.

Press Update. Result: The settings are changed in the Advanced Settings table.

4

272

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring Automatic Pass Rules

Configuring Automatic Pass Rules Introduction During creating an outgoing transport stream by passing an incoming transport stream to an output port, TS auto pass rules referred to this incoming transport stream can automatically be assigned to the created outgoing transport stream. When TS auto pass rules are assigned during this process, all rules (Pass Unreferenced PIDs, Pass EMMs, and Pass Services rule) will be activated. Once an outgoing transport stream is created, the TS auto pass rules and the identification setting of the incoming transport stream to which these rules refer to can always be changed. Outgoing transport streams created without TS auto pass rule assignments can always be provided with rules. For more information concerning TS auto pass rules, please refer to subtopic Transport Stream Auto Pass Rules on page 246.

Assigning or Changing TS Auto Pass Rules The following steps describe how to assign or to change TS auto pass rules for a particular outgoing transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the transport stream to which TS auto pass rules must be assigned or for which rules must be changed.

3

Double-click on this transport stream or right-click on this transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output TS page of the selected transport stream is displayed.

4

In the Output TS page, select the Auto Pass tab. Result: The TS Auto Pass Rules and Service Auto Pass Rules settings are displayed.

5

Point to

Select input... beside Input TS under the TS Auto Pass Rules settings.

Result: The Input TS popup is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

273

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Hint: The settings in the Input TS popup depend on the chosen card. The picture above shows the settings for a GbE Interface Card. a

In the Card drop down box, select the interface card that receives the transport stream to which the rules refers to.

b

In the Port drop down box, enter the port that receives this transport stream.

c

In the Type drop down box (GbE Interface Card only), select one of the following settings:

d

–

Unicast: for a GbE unicast input port

–

Multicast: for a GbE multicast input port When a router is used between the streaming device and the DCM, the GbE port receiving the stream must join the multicast group.

In the IP box (GbE Interface Card only), enter the multicast IP address to which the source device of this transport stream streams. Note: The IP box is only applicable if the Type drop down box is set to Multicast.

e

In the UDP box (GbE Interface Card only), enter the UDP port number of the input port receiving this transport stream.

f

For a transport stream belonging to a multiple input stream (DVB S2/CI Interface Card only), tick the ISI check box and enter the input stream identifier of this transport stream in the corresponding box.

g

Click on OK to confirm and to close the Input TS popup.

6

Set or clear the Pass Unreferenced PIDs, Pass EMMs, and/or Pass Services check box under the TS Auto Pass Rules settings.

7

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Hint: TS auto pass rules can also be assigned and changed via SNMP using the SA_Europe_DCM_SMI2.mib.

274

4011746 Rev AG

Changing the Default Values for the Advanced Transport Stream Settings

Changing the Default Values for the Advanced Transport Stream Settings The procedure below describes how to modify the default values for the advanced transport stream settings. Note: With the exception of the settings in the Alarm Settings table, all advanced transport stream settings only apply to GbE Interface Cards. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The System Settings page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which the default values for the advanced transport stream parameters should be changed. Result: The Interface Configuration page of the selected interface card is displayed.

3

Click on the Default Settings link. Result: The Default Settings page is displayed.

4

Select the Advanced tab.

5

Under Default VLAN Settings, modify the following parameters:

6

7

a

Tick the VLAN On check box of the port pair for which VLAN tagging must be switched on.

b

In the ID box, enter the VLAN identifier.

c

In the Priority box, enter the VLAN priority.

Under the Advanced TS Settings, modify the following parameters:

a

In the TOS box, enter a type of service value.

b

In the TTL box, enter a time to live value.

Complete the following steps to specify forbidden PID ranges: a

Point to Forbidden PID Ranges (

).

Result: The Forbidden PID Ranges popup is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

275

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

b

Tick the check box of an empty row to create a range or clear the box to remove a range.

c

Enter the lower limit value of the forbidden PID range in the left-hand box and the upper limit in the right hand box of the row. Hint: A hexadecimal value as well as a decimal value can be entered. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x.

8

d

Repeat step b and c for all ranges that must be specified.

e

Click on OK to confirm or on Cancel to abort the operation.

In the Alarm Settings table, modify the following parameters:

a

Tick the Enabled check box of the Stuffing Rate Too Low row and enter a correct value in the corresponding Threshold box.

b

Tick the Enabled check box of the Payload Bitrate Too Low row and enter a correct value in the corresponding Threshold box.

For detailed information concerning the alarms settings of an outgoing transport stream, please refer to topic Configuring the Advanced Alarm Settings for an Outgoing Transport Stream on page 1010. 9

Select the TS tab.

10 Under the Output TS Default Settings in the UDP Size drop down box, select the number of MPEG packets that must be encapsulated into a single UDP packet.

276

4011746 Rev AG

Changing the Default Values for the Advanced Transport Stream Settings

11 Click on Apply All to confirm or Reload All to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

277

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Delaying Transparent Passed Transport Streams A transport stream that is transparently passed to an output port of an interface card provided with Co-Processor Card can be delayed from 5 ms up to 100 ms in steps of 1 ms (50 ms by default). The delay time is a card wide setting, meaning all transparent passed transport streams belonging to the card and for which this TS delay feature is switched on will be delayed with the same time. Before enabling the TS delay feature, the Coarse Delay parameter of the Co-Processor Card must be set to TS Delay and a delay must be given, see topic Changing Card Settings of a CoProcessor Card on page 89. Important: A Co-Processor Card used for delaying transparent passed transport streams cannot be used for other Co-Processor Card features like rate control, PID sync delay, audio leveling... The following procedure describes how to switch on or off the TS delay feature of a transparently passed transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the transparent passed transport stream for which TS delaying must be switched on or off.

3

Double-click on this transport stream or right-click on this transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output TS page of the selected transport stream is displayed.

4

Select the Advanced tab.

5

Under the Advanced Settings, tick the TS Delay check box to switch on this feature or clear this check box to switch off this feature.

Hint: This check box is only applicable if the Coarse Delay parameter is set to TS Delay, see topic Changing Card Settings of a Co-Processor Card on page 89. 6

278

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

Section C Forward Error Correction Introduction This section outlines the FEC option of the Digital Content Manager.

In this section Introduction ...................................................................................................................280 Configuring the FEC Settings for Incoming Transport Streams ............................285 Configuring the FEC Settings for Outgoing Transport Streams ............................294

4011746 Rev AG

279

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

Introduction General Due to its nature (occasionally packet loss, packet reordering, and/or packet jittering) a traditional IP network is not the perfect channel for transmitting broadcast-quality compressed video content. Forward Error Correction (FEC) developed by the PRO-MPEG forum is a unique technology to enhance the robustness of video traffic over IP networks. The DCM supports Pro-MPEG Code of Practice (COP) #3 release2, which is based on the exclusive or (XOR) boolean operator applied to a number of data packets. When a packet (called FEC packet) is created by performing the XOR boolean operation on a number of RTP packets, a missing RTP packet can always be reconstructed by performing the XOR operation on the FEC packet and the remaining RTP packets. FEC = RTP1 XOR RTP2 RTP1 = FEC XOR RTP2 RTP2 = FEC XOR RTP1

FEC Profiles The PRO-MPEG forum provides two FEC profiles: 1D FEC and 2D FEC, each having multiple FEC schemes.  1D FEC Profile The 1D FEC profile maps the RTP packet stream across columns (matrix of data packets), see illustration below.

280

4011746 Rev AG

Introduction

The XOR boolean operation is performed on the column RTP packets. This approach provides robustness against single missing RTP packets and multiple consecutive missing packets as long as only one packet is missing in a column and the numbers of consecutive missing packets do not exceed the number of columns (L). Example: When data packets 9, 10, and 11 are missing at the receiver side, these packets can be reconstructed by means of the remaining column packets and FEC packet 1, 2, and 3.

In the example, a burst loss of maximum 4 consecutive data packets can be reconstructed.  2D FEC Profile The error protection can be enhanced by performing the XOR boolean on both the column packets and row packets. As depicted in the following illustration a FEC packet is created for each row and for each column.

4011746 Rev AG

281

Chapter 4 Multiplexing

The 2D FEC scheme is able to reconstruct multiple missing packets in a single row and in a single column. Example: In the illustration below, data packet 1, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13 are lost.

Data packet 1, 7, and 13 can be reconstructed by means of the remaining row packets and associated row FEC packets ('1, '2, and '3). Once data packet 1, 7, and 13 are reconstructed, data packet 9, 10, 11, and 12 can be reconstructed by the associated column data packets and column FEC packets (1, 2, 3, and 4).

282

4011746 Rev AG

Introduction

FEC Schemes The FEC scheme is determined by the number of columns or row Length (L) and the number of rows or column Depth (D). Pro-MPEG Code of Practice #3 specifies following limits:  For 1D FEC profile: L * D 100 1 L 3 4 D 20  For 2D FEC profile: L * D 100 4 L 20 4 D 20  For Annex A (non block aligned sending arrangement): L 100 for a GbE Interface Card or > 1500 for an IP Video Gateway Card. For more information concerning forward error correction, please refer to section Forward Error Correction on page 279.

FEC Temperature This alarm is generated when the temperature of the FEC engine on the FEC Card exceeds 90° C (185° F) and cleared at 80° C (176° F).

Hardware Key Inserted This alarm is generated when the DCM hardware key is plugged in into the I/O connector at the rear panel of the device.

Heartbeat Protocol Error This alarm is generated when the UDP port used by the Heartbeat Protocol for standalone device backup is occupied.

Heartbeat Protocol Version Mismatch The version of the heartbeat protocol used by 2 devices in a standalone device backup setup is different. As long as the configuration of the device with the highest version is supported in the software version of the other device with lower version, this should not be a problem. This can be solved by upgrading or downgrading one of the devices to the same software version as the other device.

Illegal Encoder Version This alarm is generated when a statmux pool is populated with an encoder that is not supported by DCM's IP statmux feature.

Index Packet Discontinuity This alarm is generated when a discontinuity is detected in the index of the index packets. For more information, please refer to topic Inserting Index Packets into the CYTSs on page 1061.

978

4011746 Rev AG

Alarm Overview

Index Packet Interpreter Not Started This alarm is generated after enabling the Index Packet Interpreter mode of an incoming transport stream and no index packet has been received since. For more information about the index packet interpreter, please refer to topic Settings of Incoming Transport Streams on page 235.

Index Packet Interval Too High This alarm is generated when the maximum interval (1 second) between two consecutive index packets is exceeded. For more information, please refer to topic Inserting Index Packets into the CYTSs on page 1061.

Insertion Channel Active This DPI related alarm is generated when a splicing event is started.

Invalid Resolution This alarm is generated if the resolution of the incoming video component that is routed to an MFP Card for transcoding or transrating purposes differs from the following resolutions (horizontal x vertical): 352x480, 352x576, 352x288, 480x480, 480x576, 528x480, 528x576, 544x480, 544x576, 640x480, 640x576, 704x480, 704x576, 720x480, 720x576, 960x720, 960x1080, 1280x1080, 1280x720, 1440x1080, or 1920x1080.

Invalid Video Format This alarm is generated if a stream is present at the input but the stream type or stream format is wrong (for instance by packet loss in the network or corrupted data).

IP Gateway License Error This alarm is generated if an RTP stream is routed to an SDI output port or when an incoming SDI signal is routed to a GbE port without a license for that. More information concerning licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 28.

IP Gateway Reference Clock Input Loss This alarm is active if the gen lock feature of an IP Video Gateway Card is enabled and there is reference signal loss.

License Installation Failure This alarm is generated if uploading of a new license file fails, possible causes: invalid license version, the key of one or more features is invalid... More information about licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 28.

Link Loss The GbE link is down between the source device and the DCM or between the DCM and the destination device.

4011746 Rev AG

979

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

Link Switched This alarm is triggered when a port backup occurs. This alarm indicates that the port activation change has occurred and which port is the current active port.

Logo Problem For future use

Logo Video Problem This alarm is generated when the DCM is not able to insert a logo into a video stream due to for instance poor quality of the incoming video stream. This alarm is also generated if the TC CO-P DSP revision of the Transcoder Card is lower than V03.00.00.

Low Memory This alarm is generated if less the 50 MB of the available memory is free. This can be the case in very high load conditions if many services are passed containing large EITa schedule tables.

Main Backup Device Role Conflict This alarm is generated when the MAIN or BACKUP license of the DCM differs from the device role as defined in the Device Backup Settings table. For example: installing a backup license on a DCM configured as main device in a backup application.

Malfunction This alarm is raised if a video engine or the audio processor of an MFP Card fails. Contact your Cisco representative.

MIP Synchronization Can’t Be Started This alarm can only occur when MIP synchronization has not been successful once and will be generated if:

980

-

The Initiator becomes active after rebooting but doesn’t receive valid MIP sync data from the Target for more than one second. This alarm is cleared either after approx. 30 sec. or when the Initiator is able to synchronize with the Target.

-

The Initiator goes from active to inactive and it doesn’t receive valid MIP sync data from the Target for more than one second.

-

The Initiator is inactive and it receives MIP sync data from the Target for which SFN settings do not match.

-

The Target doesn’t receive valid MIP sync data for more than one second.

-

The Target hasn't been asked MIP sync data for more than one second.

-

The Target receives MIP sync data from the Initiator for which SFN settings 4011746 Rev AG

Alarm Overview

do not match. Possible causes: 

No network connection between the Initiator and the Target



The MIP synchronization settings (Target IP address, Account Name, or Password) of the Initiator or Target are badly configured.



The MIP sync data is invalid or too old, or the Initiator and Target are not time synchronized



Transport stream SFN settings differ.

This alarm is cleared when valid MIP sync data is received or one of the following settings changes: a parameter of the MIP synchronization settings, MIP synchronization, a parameter of the MIP settings, current activation (Initiator only). Hint: For more information about MIP synchronization, please refer MIP Synchronization on page 1055.

MIP Synchronization Communication Down This alarm only occurs when MIP synchronization has been successful at least once, meaning the ASI SFN Interface Cards of both devices are still MIP synchronized, and will be generated if: -

The Initiator is inactive and it doesn’t receive valid MIP sync data from the Target for more than one second.

-

The Target doesn’t receive valid MIP sync data for more than one second.

-

The Target hasn't been asked MIP sync data for more than one second.

Possible cause: 

No more network connection (for example router down, link loss...) or target configuration has changed causing Initiator to be badly configured (incorrect Target IP, Account Name, or Password).



One or more devices is no longer NTP synced causing the received MIP sync data to be considered invalid because too old.



Timeout (device busy with ... causing the communication to take longer than 1 second).

This alarm is cleared when one of the following settings changes: a parameter of the MIP synchronization settings, MIP synchronization, a parameter of the MIP settings, current activation (Initiator only). Hint: For more information about MIP synchronization, please refer MIP Synchronization on page 1055.

4011746 Rev AG

981

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

Missing FEC Stream(s) This alarm is generated if one or both FEC streams are missing for the incoming transport stream.

MPEG/AVC Mismatch This alarm is generated if the Rate Mode parameter is set to Transrate and the format of the incoming video differs from the format configured for the transrated video. For more information, please refer to topic Configuring the Population of a Rate Control Group on page 580.

No Ad Server Available The alarm is generated if the connection between the AD server and the DCM fails.

No AVC Encoder This alarm is generated when a Combined statmux pool is only populated with MPEG2 encoders.

No Components to Scramble: CP Extension There are no components available for scrambling.

No CWG Connection Available This alarm is generated when a stream is requested (CW’s needed) but there is no link with the Control Word Generator (CWG) or there is no channel capacity available.

No DTF Concentrator License Available Each ASI Interface Card participating into a DTF/MTR application consumes one DTF Scrambling License. This alarm is generated when the card mode of an Interface Card is set to ASI DTF and there are no more DTF Scrambling licenses available. More information concerning licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 28.

No DTF Scrambling License Available Each ASI Interface Card participating into a DTF/MTR application for which the transport stream must be scrambled consumes one DTF Scrambling license. This alarm is generated when the scrambling feature is switched on and there are no more DTF Scrambling Licenses available. More information concerning licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 28.

No ECMG Connection Available This alarm is generated when there is no link with the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) or when there is no channel capacity available.

982

4011746 Rev AG

Alarm Overview

No ECM's available: CP Extension This alarm arises when the DCM no longer receives ECMs for a scrambled service.

No EMM resources available The maximum number of generated EMM8 streams that can be passed is 64. This alarm occurs if the number of generated EMM streams passed to the output exceeds 64.

No FEC License Available (Decoding) This alarm is generated if no license is available at the arrival of an incoming transport stream when the Default Input FEC Settings Mode is set to 1D FEC or 2D FEC. In this case FEC for the corresponding transport stream will be disabled.

No FEC License Available (Encoding) This alarm is generated when not enough licenses are available after a reboot if the Default Input FEC Settings Mode is set to 1D FEC or 2D FEC.

No MPEG2 Encoder This alarm is generated when an MPEG-2 statmux pool is populated with an AVC encoder.

No PCR present This alarm is generated when a service cannot be transcoded due to a missing PCR.

No Resources Available to Run Pool This alarm arises when statmux controller doesn’t have the resources available to run the statmux algorithm for a certain pool. Possible causes: 

The statmux controller card that should host the resources to run the pool cannot be reached by the statmux pool administrator (cables disconnected...)



The corresponding card has been removed from the chassis.



The GbE Interface Card has been reconfigured to a regular interface card after it was set up for D9036 statmux and had been assigned pools to run.



…

Generated Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) are messages received from an Entitlement Management Message Generator via the EMMG to MUX interface and passed to an outgoing Transport Stream. 8

4011746 Rev AG

983

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

No SFP Fitted This alarm is generated if no SFP has been inserted.

Not Receiving Heartbeat Messages From Peer In a standalone device backup application the main and backup device communicates using heartbeat packets. This alarm is generated when a port of a device doesn't receive heartbeat packets from its peer. More information about standalone device backup can be found in topic Standalone Device Backup on page 956.

NTP Offset This alarm is generated when the time difference between DCM and the NTP server exceeds a particular threshold (Alarm Threshold parameter, by default 15 ms) after a time synchronization action or when the DCM is not synchronized with a NTP server. The procedure to change the Alarm Threshold parameter can be found in topic Synchronizing with a Time server on page 63.

Operational Temperature This alarm is generated when the device temperature exceeds 65° C (149° F).

Out of input service resources This alarm is generated if the sum of the service references in the PAT's of the incoming transport streams of an interface card exceeds 512.

PAT Error The Program Association Table (PAT) contains a list of all programs and packet identifiers (PIDs) contained in the transport stream and of associated Program Map Tables (PMTs), which contain detailed program descriptions. If the PAT is not available within a particular time interval9 or contains an error, a MPEG-2 decoder will not be able to select and decode a program from the transport stream. Notes: -

This alarm is also generated if a table ID different from 0x00 is found on PID 0x0000 or if the Scrambling_control_field is not 0x00 for PID 0x0000.

-

An incoming VBR transport stream with low bitrate can trigger a PAT error.

The time that a PAT, PMT, or component is not available in the Transport Stream before a alarm will be generated is adjustable. The procedure to change these time intervals can be found in topic Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms. 9

984

4011746 Rev AG

Alarm Overview

Payload Bitrate Too Low This alarm is generated when the bitrate of the payload of an outgoing transport stream drops below a configurable threshold. The procedure to set up this threshold can be found in topic Configuring the Advanced Alarm Settings for an Outgoing Transport Stream on page 1010.

PID error The packet with a particular PID and referred to in the PMT is not found within the specified time interval10.

PMT Error The PMT (Program Map Table) is a table for detailed program descriptions referenced in the PAT. As essential information for the MPEG-2 decoder, it contains the PIDs of all packets of the elementary streams as well as the PIDs of packets serving for the transmission of PCR values associated with the program. The PMT is of key importance for decoding TV and audio programs. If the PMT is not available within a particular time interval or contains an error, a MPEG-2 decoder will not be able to select and decode a program from the transport stream.

PMT section exceeds 1K The PMT section is limited to 1 K Byte, this alarm occurs if the PMT section exceeds this limit. Possible causes: -

Too many services merged

-

Too many descriptors added to the PMT

PLL At Least 30s In Holdover An ASI SFN Interface Card is provided with a GPS hold-over function that becomes active if the incoming 10 MHz clock fails. This alarm is generated if this GPS hold-over function is active for more than 30 seconds. Important: An ASI SFN Interface Card with part number 4027574C is not provided with this GPS hold-over function.

Port Already in Use - Bind Failed This alarm is triggered when a TCP server on the DCM cannot be started, because the configured TCP port is already in use. This alarm is used by the EIS, EMMG and PSIG proxies.

The time that a PAT, PMT, or component is not available in the Transport Stream before a alarm will be generated is adjustable. The procedure to change these time intervals can be found in topic Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms.

10

4011746 Rev AG

985

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

Port Bandwidth Exceeded The sum of the bandwidth of all outgoing transport streams on a particular GbE port has exceeded the maximum bandwidth for the corresponding port.

Power Up A power up message is generated after powering up or rebooting the DCM.

PS 1 Failure This alarm is generated when the power supply unit in slot PS1 is failing. The procedures to remove and to install a PSU can be found in the system guide shipped with the device. Keep in mind that only authorized and trained service personnel are allowed to maintain and to service the DCM after reading the Important Safety Instructions in the system guide.

PS 2 Failure This alarm is generated when the power supply unit in slot PS2 is failing. The procedures to remove and to install a PSU can be found in the system guide shipped with the device. Keep in mind that only authorized and trained service personnel are allowed to maintain and to service the DCM after reading the Important Safety Instructions in the system guide.

Received Channel Error Message The DCM received a channel error message from the Conditional Access System.

Requested PID could not be allocated A particular component for scrambling purposes could not be allocated, for instance the PID is already in use, another free PID is automatically allocated.

RTP sequence error This alarm arises when incoming RTP packets must be reordered by the IP Video Gateway Card.

Scrambling not started Scrambling is not started because there are no components or no Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) settings.

SD/HD Mismatch

986

-

Rate control: This alarm is generated when a HD service of which the SD/HD parameter is set to SD is added to a rate control group. The corresponding HD service will be blocked.

-

Transcoding: This alarm is generated if the incoming video component is HD but SD is set for the transcoded video component. The video component will not be transcoded.

4011746 Rev AG

Alarm Overview

Selected Alternate Service Not Present This alarm is triggered if via SCTE35 a command is received to select an alternate source for an output service but this alternate source has not been configured yet on the DCM. Configure/create the alternate service source for the particular output service.

Service Backup Switched This alarm is triggered when a service is backed up by its assigned backup service.

Service in Backup (Service Loss) This alarm is generated when a service is in backup state triggered by a Service Loss alarm.

Service in Backup (TS Loss) This alarm is generated when a service is in backup state triggered by a TS Loss alarm.

Service In The Clear This alarm is triggered if a service which is routed to a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card, doesn't contain scrambled components.

Service Loss The alarms to trigger a Service Loss alarm are configurable. More information concerning the configuration of Service Loss alarm triggers can be found in topic Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers on page 997.

Service Loss at output This alarm is generated for an outgoing service if the Service Loss alarm is active of the corresponding incoming service. This alarm can only be generated if triggers for Service Loss alarm for the incoming service are defined. More information concerning the configuration of Service Loss alarm triggers can be found in topic Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers on page 997.

Service Name Truncated in VCT The service name in a CVCT or TVCT is limited to 7 characters. This alarm is generated when the name given in the CVCT or TVCT table ( PSI/SI/PSIP output standard mode = ATSC) or in CVCT, TVCT, or SDT table ( PSI/SI/PSIP output standard mode = Mixed) is more than 7 characters.

Service Not Descrambled This alarm is generated if none of the scrambled components of a service which is routed to the output via a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card, are descrambled.

4011746 Rev AG

987

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

Service Redundancy Loss This alarm is triggered when the incoming service that is assigned to an outgoing service for service backup purposes, is missing at the input.

SFN No valid GPS clock reference present The ASI SFN Interface Card detects invalid GPS clock reference signal(s) on its 10 MHz and/or 1 PPS input. For more information, please refer to topic Integrating the DCM into Single Frequency Networks on page 1045.

Slate Generation Problem This alarm is generated if the service doesn’t contain the necessary components to generate a still picture clip: -

The service has no PCR PID.

-

The service has no MPEG2 video component.

-

The service has more than 1 MPEG2 video component.

Source IP address of TS changed This alarm is generated when the source IP address of the incoming transport stream changes. This can indicate that two source devices stream to the same destination address / UDP port.

Splice Aborted On Video Loss This alarm will be generated when video loss occurs on the insertion channel during a splice event for a splice channel for which Switch Back on Video Loss is enabled, see topic Configuring Splicing Channels on page 655. Due to the fleetingness of such alarm, it will be added to the alarm history list of the DCM but not to the Status pages of the DCM. The management systems in which the DCM participates will be informed by a message that must be cleared manually.

Splice Request Denied This alarm is triggered when Deny Splice Request If Insufficient Resources is enabled in context of capacity checking. A splicing service takes up more load than a spliceable service. When a splice_request is received, a load check is performed. If the load will exceed 100% when the service is spliced, the splice_request is denied because otherwise this splice or other splices will most likely fail. Decrease the processing load of the corresponding Co-Processor Card.

Statmux Controller Lost Communication With a Pool Server This alarm arises when the communication fails between the statmux pool administrator (which is the software component that manages the statmux pools) and the software component running the statmux algorithm. Which doesn't mean that the statmux algorithm is not running but modifications done on the pool or to VSEs managed by that pool will not be updated, neither on the pool nor on the VSEs on the D9036 devices member of that pool. 988

4011746 Rev AG

Alarm Overview

Stuffing Rate Too Low This alarm is generated when the bitrate of the stuffing within an outgoing transport stream drops below a configurable threshold. The procedure to set up this threshold can be found in topic Configuring the Advanced Alarm Settings for an Outgoing Transport Stream on page 1010.

Sync Byte Error The first byte of the transport stream packet header is the synchronization byte (0x47). In the MPEG-2 decoder the synchronization byte serves for synchronization with the packetized transport stream. When the synchronization byte is missing or contains errors too often, a MPEG-2 decoder will not be able to synchronize to the transport stream. A Sync Byte Error is generated when the synchronization byte in a transport stream packet is not detected.

Sync Loss This alarm is generated if sync loss is detected on an SDI port.

Temporary License Active This alarm is active as long as a temporary license is active.

Test Message A test message is generated. More information concerning test messages can be found in topic Generating Test Messages on page 994.

Time Table Acquisition Timeout This alarm is generated if the DCM fails to synchronize its clock to an incoming SI table within a certain timeout period. For more information concerning time synchronization to a SI table, please refer to topic Synchronizing Using an SI Table on page 66.

Too Many Encoders in Pool This statmux related alarm is generated when the statmux pool has reached the maximum number of encoders allowed in a pool.

Too Many Encoders Total This statmux related alarm is generated when the maximum number of statmuxing encoders has been exceeded.

Transcoding Problem This alarm is generated if a transcoding problem of an audio or video component arises. The alarm specifies the PID of the component. Possible causes are: input is scrambled, input errors...

4011746 Rev AG

989

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

Transrating problem This alarm is generated when the DCM is not able to control the bitrate (DCM's rate control feature) of the service due to poor quality of the incoming service or because of the incoming service is scrambled or when the clip used to create still picture services contains errors.

TS contains packets from more than 2 input TS This alarm is triggered for an ASI SFN Interface Card (V2), for which the type is set to Deterministic Remux, when an outgoing transport stream is consist of packets of more than 2 input transport streams.

TS Loss A TS Loss alarm can be generated when one of the following alarms is triggered: Link Loss, UDP Loss, Service Loss, Sync Loss, Sync Byte Error, UDP Stream Loss, or PAT Error. For more information concerning the TS Loss alarm, please refer to topic Configuring Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers on page 1005.

TS Out Loss This alarm is active for an outgoing transport stream if a service belonging this transport stream is in Service Loss at Output alarm state or if the Stuffing Rate Too Low or Payload Bitrate Too Low alarm is active. When the DCM is equipped with a ASI SFN Interface Card (indicated by ASI SFN V2), the PLL At Least 30s In Holdover alarm, which is generated if the GPS hold-over function of the card is active for more than 30 sec., can also be used to trigger a TS Output Loss alarm. For more information, please refer to topic Configuring the Advanced Alarm Settings for an Outgoing Transport Stream on page 1010.

TS Output disabled This alarm is generated when a TS output is disabled for an ASI SFN Interface Card due to:

 

missing or unvalid 10 MHz and/or 1 PPS input signal. missing MIP_INSERTION license(s) after installing a downgraded license file and rebooting the device.

TS Sync Loss The first byte of a transport stream packet header is the synchronization byte (0x47). In a MPEG-2 decoder, the synchronization byte serves for synchronization with the packetized transport stream. A TS Sync Loss error arises when the synchronization byte in a sequence of at least two transport stream packets is not detected.

UDP Loss This alarm is generated if a particular port no longer receives UDP packets. 990

4011746 Rev AG

Alarm Overview

UDP Stream Loss GbE Interface Card: The transport stream of which services are passed to the output is no longer detected at the corresponding UDP Port. Possible causes: 

The corresponding transport stream is played out to another UDP port.



The corresponding transport stream is no longer present at the input.



The UDP Port to which the transport stream is played out is lower than the GbE UDP Boundary setting.

IP Video Gateway Card: This alarm is generated if an RTP stream entry is created for an incoming RTP stream and the corresponding RTP stream is missing at the input.

Unable To Scramble Input TS In DTF Combined Transport Stream This alarm is generated when a DTF transport stream is configured for scrambling one or more of its services, but the Session Word (SW) at the specified index was not filled out by uploading a Session Word Distribution File (SWDF).

Unreferenced Pid Error The transport stream is permitted to contain only packets with program-specific information (PSI and SI tables), packets with certain PIDs that are reserved in the MPEG-2 standard, and packets that are identified in a Program Map Table (PMT). This alarm is generated if the DCM receives packets with non-referenced components. Notes: -

The alarm message reporting for this alarm is default disabled, meaning ROSA® NMS and/or SNMP trap receivers will not be informed when such alarm arises. The procedure to enabling alarm message reporting can be found in topic Enabling or Disabling Alarm Message Reporting for all Alarms on page 993.

-

With the exception of transport streams with missing PAT, this alarm will only be generated for components with PID higher than 32.

Unreferenced Pids Maximum Number Reached The DCM is able to handle 500 incoming unreferenced components per second and per interface card. The alarm is generated when the number of incoming unreferenced components exceeds 500. This only limits the number of unreferenced PIDs that can be shown in the user interface and the number of Unreferenced Pid errors that can be generated.

4011746 Rev AG

991

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

User Selected PCR PID Error This alarm is generated when the Time Base Selection parameter is set to VBR Forced PCR or CBR Forced PCR and the defined service is missing, has no PCR PID, or has a PCR PID that doesn't arrive regularly (within 100 ms).

Video Input Bandwidth Exceeded This alarm is generated if the bandwidth of the input signal exceeds the allowed video signal settings applied to the input SDI port of the IP Video Gateway Card. For example, when connecting an HD signal to an SDI input allowed for SD video signals.

Video Input Loss This alarm is generated if the incoming service that is routed to an engine of an MFP Card doesn't contain a video component or when the MFP Card cannot decode the incoming video stream. Possible Causes -

The video component of the corresponding incoming service is corrupt or scrambled.

-

There is no video component in the corresponding incoming service.

VSE Configuration Error This alarm is generated if a VSE is set up on the statmux controller for statmux purposes, and where for example a value given for a particular parameter is actually not supported by that VSE.

Wrong SFP Fitted This alarm is generated when a wrong SFP transceiver has been inserted, for example SDI SFP transceiver instead of a GbE SFP transceiver.

992

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the Alarms

Configuring the Alarms Introduction When an alarm becomes active on the DCM, the alarm is added to a Status page of the user interface and an alarm message is generated for reporting ROSA® messages or SNMP traps. The alarm messages coming from the DCM are logged on the ROSA Message Viewer or SNMP trap receiver. Note: The communication between the DCM and ROSA NMS or SNMP trap receivers can be checked by generating test messages. More information concerning generating test messages can be found in topic Generating Test Messages on page 994. The alarm message reporting by DCM can be enabled or disabled for all alarms or for individual alarms. The procedure to enable or disable the alarms message reporting for all alarms can be found in topic Enabling or Disabling Alarm Message Reporting for all Alarms on page 993 and for individual alarms in topic Configuring the Settings of the Device Alarms on page 994 or Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms on page 995. Each alarm is accompanied with a colored bullet indicating the severity level of the alarms. The severity of an alarm can be changed using the user interface. The following list shows the severity levels used by the DCM: Colored Bullet

Severity Level

Description

Indeterminate

The severity level cannot be determined.

Critical

The service is affected and an urgent corrective action is required.

(red)

Major

The service is affected and a corrective action is required.

(yellow)

Minor

A non-service affecting error occurred and action is required to prevent more errors.

(blue)

Warning

A potential service affecting error is detected.

(white)

Information

Information message

(magenta)

For more information about changing the severity level of an alarm, please refer to topic Configuring the Settings of the Device Alarms on page 994 or topic Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms on page 995 further in this topic.

Enabling or Disabling Alarm Message Reporting for all Alarms The following procedure explains how to enable or disable alarm message reporting for all alarms.

4011746 Rev AG

993

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Alarms link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Alarms page for the device is displayed.

2

In the Enabled drop down box under the All Alarms settings, select Yes to enable or No to disable alarm message reporting for all alarms (device and interface alarms).

3

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Note: The presence and status of both power supply units are represented using LEDs on the front panel of the DCM. When a PSU slot is empty, the corresponding LED illuminates red. By disabling the corresponding alarm, this LED can be extinguished.

Generating Test Messages The communication between the DCM and ROSA® NMS or SNMP trap receivers can be checked by generating a test message. Note: Before ROSA NMS is able to receive test messages, the DCM must be mapped into ROSA NMS. The procedure to map a DCM into ROSA NMS can be found in the Implementation Design Guide: Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS. The following procedure explains how to generate a test message. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Alarms link after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Alarms page for the device is displayed.

2

Press Generate Test Message at the bottom of the page. Result: A test message is sent to ROSA NMS and/or SNMP trap receivers.

Note: For some reasons it can be useful to change the severity level of a test message. The procedure to change the severity level can be found in topic Configuring the Settings of the Device Alarms on page 994 or topic Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms on page 995.

Configuring the Settings of the Device Alarms Perform the following steps to configure the device alarm settings. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Alarms link after pointing to the Configuration link. Result: The device Alarms page for the device is displayed.

2

994

In the Global Alarm Settings table, enable or disable alarm message reporting by selecting Yes or No in the Enabled drop down box of the alarm in question.

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the Alarms

3

In the (Major) Severity drop down box of the alarm, select the severity.

4

In the Begin Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be present before an alarm message is generated.

5

In the End Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be cleared before the corresponding alarm message is cleared.

6

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms The following procedure explains how to configure the interface alarm settings. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The Configuration page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the card for which alarm setting must be configured. Result: The interface configuration page for the interface card in question is displayed.

3

Select the Alarms link. Result: The Board Alarms page is displayed.

4

In the Generate Alarms drop down box under the TS Loss and Service Loss Alarm Generation settings, select For All Services to generate a Service Loss alarm / TS Loss alarm for all services / transport streams missing at the input or select Only for Groomed Services for services / transport streams only passed to the output.

5

In the Global Alarm Settings table, change the following parameters for each alarm that must be adapted:

4011746 Rev AG

995

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

6

7 996

a

Enable or disable the alarm message reporting by selecting Yes or No in the Enabled drop down box.

b

In the (Major) Severity drop down box of the alarm, select the desired severity.

c

In the Begin Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be present before an alarm message is generated.

d

In the End Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be cleared before the corresponding alarm message is cleared.

Under the Error Intervals (ms) settings, change the following error intervals if required:



PAT Error parameter: the time that the PAT is allowed to be not present in the transport stream before a PAT error will be generated



PMT Error parameter: the time that the PMT is allowed to be not present in the transport stream before a PMT error will be generated



PID Error (Audio/Video) parameter: the time that a particular audio or video component is allowed to be not present in the transport stream before a PID error will be generated.



PID Error (Data) parameter: the time that a particular data component is allowed to be not present in the transport stream before a PID error will be generated.

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation. 4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the Alarms

Note: The TS Loss and Service Loss Alarm Generation and Error Interval (ms) settings are not applicable for a Transcoder or MFP Card.

Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers Introduction To activate an input Service Loss alarm following triggers can be set:  TS Sync Loss: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the synchronization byte of the transport stream to which the service belongs, is not detected in a sequence of at least two transport stream packets.  Link Loss: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the GbE link is down between the source device and the DCM.  UDP Loss: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the corresponding port no longer receives UDP packets.  UDP Stream Loss: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the port of the incoming transport stream to which the service belongs to no longer detects packets at the corresponding UDP port.  Missing in PAT: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the PMT reference in the PAT for the service is missing. A trigger will also be given when the PAT of the incoming transport stream to which the service belongs to is missing after a device reboot action.  PMT Error: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the PMT for the service is not available within a particular time interval or contains errors.  Scrambled Service: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the incoming service is scrambled.  PID Error: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when components with PMT reference are not found within a particular time interval. PID Bitrate Error: a Service Loss alarm will be generated when the bitrate of components with PMT reference drops below a specified threshold. These thresholds are interface-card level parameters, meaning these settings apply to all services on the corresponding interface card. The procedure to specify these thresholds can be found in topic Changing the Default Service Loss Trigger Alarms on page 1003. When PID Error or PID Bitrate Error is selected, a trigger can be given for each component in the service (PID Type parameter: Any) or a list can be entered (PID List parameter) containing the PIDs of the components (PID type parameter: List) for which a trigger must be given. The PID Error / PID List combination act as a filter for the generated PID Errors. PIDs for components which have no reference in the PMT of the service will be ignored (also PMT PIDs or other SI PIDs).

4011746 Rev AG

997

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

When the PID Type parameter is set to Smart, the DCM will examine the service type. -

For video services, a Service Loss alarm will be triggered for the video component or for an audio component, not for data components.

-

For audio services, a Service Loss alarm will be triggered for an audio component, not for data components.

-

For data services, a Service Loss alarm will be triggered for the data component.

 GPIO: a Service Loss alarm can be triggered by means of a GPIO contact. More information concerning GPIO contacts can be found in topic Configuring the GPIO Contacts on page 80.  Not a Descrambled PID (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only): the Service Loss alarm will be triggered if none of the scrambled components of a service that is routed to the output via a CI-CAM of a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card is descrambled.  Descramble a clear PID (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only): a trigger will be given if a service without scrambled components is offered to a CI-CAM of a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card for scrambling purposes. The DCM handles a particular alarm hierarchy. For example: if a UDP Stream Loss is detected, Missing in PAT, PMT Error, an PID Error/ PID Bitrate Error will not be triggered. This means that a Service Loss alarm will not be triggered when a TS Sync Loss is detected and TS Sync Loss is not defined as Service Loss alarm trigger even if other alarms are defined to trigger a Service Loss alarm. The following table shows this alarm hierarchy. Hierarchy

Alarm

1

TS Sync Loss, Link Loss

2

UDP Loss

3

UDP Stream Loss

4

Missing in PAT, PMT Error, Scrambled Service, Not a Descrambled PID, Descramble a clear PID, PID Error/PID Bitrate Error

-

GPIO

Hint: When most of the incoming services must be defined with the same Service Loss alarm triggers, the configuration can be simplified by using default settings. Each new incoming service and each incoming service for which the Service Loss Mode is set to Default will be configured with these settings. The default parameters are dynamic, meaning when these default parameters are changed, all incoming services for which the Service Loss mode is set to Default will get these new settings. The procedure to configure these default parameters can be found in topic Changing the Default Service Loss Trigger Alarms on page 1003.

998

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the Alarms

Notes:  Depending on the setting of the Generate Alarms parameter, alarms can be generated for all incoming services and components or only for services and components which are passed to the output. For more information concerning the Generate Alarms parameter, please refer to topic Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms on page 995.  For preconfiguration purposes the DCM allows adding Service Loss alarm triggers (called preconfigured triggers) for services not (yet) present at the input of the device. The procedure to add preconfigured triggers can be found in topic Adding Preconfigured Triggers on page 1000.

To Configure Triggers for Services Present at the Input The following procedure explains how to change the Service Loss alarm triggers. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the incoming transport stream containing the service for which the Service Loss alarm triggers must be changed.

3

Double-click on this transport stream or right-click on this transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Input TS Settings page is displayed.

4

Click on the Service link. Result: The Input Service Settings page containing the Service Settings table is displayed.

5

In the Service Settings table, configure the following parameters in the rows of the services for which Service Loss alarm settings must be changed.

Note: The picture above depicts the Service Settings table of an ASI Interface Card, the Service Settings table of another interface card is similar. In the Mode drop down box, select the desired Service Loss trigger mode: 4011746 Rev AG

999

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

–

Disabled: Service Loss alarm trigger is disabled.

–

Default: the default alarms as defined on the configuration page of the corresponding interface card will be used to trigger a Service Loss alarm.

–

Specific: the alarms triggering a Service Loss alarm are selectable.



When the Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the check boxes for the alarms that have to trigger a Service Loss alarm: TS Sync Loss (ASI / 8-VSB / DVBS2/CI Interface Card only), Link Loss (GbE Interface Card only), UDP Loss (GbE Interface Card only) UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Missing in PAT, PMT Error, Scrambled Service, PID Error/PID Bitrate Error, GPIO, Not a Descrambled PID (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only), and/or Descramble a clear PID (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only).



When the PID Error/PID Bitrate Error check box is ticked, select PID Error or PID Bitrate Error in the drop down box beside this check box.



When PID Error or PID Bitrate Error is set as trigger, select one of the following settings in the PID Type drop down box: –

Any: a trigger will be given for all components within the incoming service.

–

List: a trigger will be given for the components as specified in the PID list box.

–

Smart: a trigger will be given depending on the component type. Hint: The thresholds used to trigger a PID Bitrate Error are interface-card level parameters, meaning these settings apply to all services on the corresponding interface card. The procedure to specify these thresholds can be found in topic Changing the Default Service Loss Trigger Alarms on page 1003.



When List is selected in the PID Type drop down box, enter the PID of the components(s) for which a trigger must be given. Multiple PIDs must be separated by commas.



When the GPIO check box is set, select the GPIO pin used to trigger the alarm in the GPIO drop down box. Note: Only the GPIO pins which are enabled can be chosen.

6

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Adding Preconfigured Triggers The following procedure describes how to create preconfigured triggers. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

1000

In the Inputs tree, browse to the port for which preconfigured triggers must be created.

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the Alarms

3

Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Input Port Services page containing the Service Settings and Add Preconfigured Trigger table is displayed.

4

Under the Add Preconfigured Trigger settings, complete the following parameters:

Notes: The picture above shows the Add Preconfigured Trigger settings for services on a GbE port. The settings for services on another port are similar. a

4011746 Rev AG

In the Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following values: –

Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming transport stream to which the service belongs to is a unicast IP address.

–

Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming transport stream to which the service belongs to is a multicast IP address.

b

Enter the destination IP address of the incoming transport stream to which the service belongs to in the IP Address box and the UDP port number in the UDP Port box.

c

In the SID box enter the service identifier of the service.

d

In the Mode drop down box, select the desired Service Loss alarm trigger mode: –

Disabled: Service Loss alarm trigger is disabled.

–

Specific: the alarms triggering a Service Loss alarm are selectable.

e

When the Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the check boxes for the alarms that have to trigger a Service Loss alarm: TS Sync Loss (ASI / 8-VSB / DVBS2/CI Interface Card only), Link Loss (GbE Interface Card only), UDP Loss (GbE Interface Card only) UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Missing in PAT, PMT Error, Scrambled Service, PID Error/PID Bitrate Error, GPIO, Not a Descrambled PID (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only), and/or Descramble a clear PID (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only).

f

When the PID Error/PID Bitrate Error check box is ticked, select PID Error or PID Bitrate Error in the drop down box beside this check box.

g

When PID Error or PID Bitrate Error is set as trigger, select one of the following settings in the PID Type drop down box: 1001

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

–

Any: a trigger will be given for all components within the incoming service.

–

List: a trigger will be given for the components as specified in the PID list box.

–

Smart: a trigger will be given depending on the component type. Hint: The thresholds used to trigger a PID Bitrate Error are interface-card level parameters, meaning these settings apply to all services on the corresponding interface card. The procedure to specify these thresholds can be found in topic Changing the Default Service Loss Trigger Alarms on page 1003.

h

When List is selected in the PID Type drop down box, enter the PID of the components(s) for which a trigger must be given. Multiple PIDs must be separated by commas.

i

When the GPIO check box is set, select the GPIO pin used to trigger the alarm in the GPIO drop down box. Note: Only the GPIO pins which are enabled can be chosen.

5

Click on Add. Result: The preconfigured trigger is added to the Service Settings table.

Hints:  Each preconfigured trigger entry in the Service Settings table for which the service is not yet present at the input is suffixed by a check box, this check box can be used to delete the entry.  The service loss parameters for both the services present at the input and the services not yet present can be changed in the Service Settings table. The procedure is similar to the procedure described in topic To Configure Triggers for Services Present at the Input on page 999.

Deleting Preconfigured Triggers The following procedure explains how to delete preconfigured triggers. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the port for which preconfigured triggers must be deleted.

3

Double-clicking on this port or right-click on this port and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Input Port Services page containing the Service Settings and Add Preconfigured Trigger table is displayed.

4

1002

In the Service Settings table, tick the check box(es) in front of the row of the preconfigured trigger(s) that must be removed. 4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the Alarms

Note: The picture above depicts the Service Settings table of an ASI Interface Card, the Service Settings table of a GbE Interface Card is similar. Hints:

5



To set check boxes of consecutive rows on the Service Settings table, tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be deleted.



The rows in the Service Settings table can be sorted by a specific parameter by pointing to the column header of this parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by clicking the header.

Click on Remove Checked Items to remove the selected rows or on Reload to abort the operation.

Note: Triggers for which the service is present at the input cannot be removed or set to default.

Changing the Default Service Loss Trigger Alarms For each incoming service, one or more alarms can be defined to trigger a Service Loss alarm. When incoming services must be defined with the same Service Loss trigger alarms, the configuration can be simplified by using default settings. Each new incoming service and each incoming service for which the Service Loss - Mode is set to Default will be configured with these settings. WARNING: The Default Service Loss Trigger parameters are dynamic, meaning when these default parameters are changed, all incoming services for which the Service Loss mode is set to Default will get these new settings.

The following procedure explains how to change the default Service Loss trigger alarms. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The Configuration page is displayed.

2

4011746 Rev AG

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which default Service Loss alarm triggers should be changed. 1003

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

Result: The interface configuration page of the selected card is displayed. 3

Point to the Default Settings link. Result: The Default Settings page is displayed.

4

Click on the TS-Service Backup tab. Result: The TS Service Backup tab page is displayed.

5

Under the Default Service Backup Settings, perform the following steps to configure the default Service Loss alarm triggers:

Note: The picture above depicts the Default Service Backup Settings of a GbE Interface Card, the Default Service Backup Settings of another interface card are similar. a

b

c

1004

In the Service Loss Trigger Mode drop down box, select the desired Service Loss alarm trigger mode: –

Disabled: Service Loss alarm trigger is disabled.

–

Specific: the alarms triggering a Service Loss alarm are selectable.

When the Service Loss Trigger Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the Service Loss Trigger Options check boxes for the alarms that have to trigger a Service Loss alarm: –

TS Sync Loss (ASI / 8-VSB / DVB-S2/CI Interface Card)

–

Link Loss (GbE Interface Card only)

–

UDP Loss (GbE Interface Card only)

–

UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card only)

–

Missing in PAT

–

PMT Error

–

Scrambled Service

–

PID Error/PID Bitrate Error

–

GPIO

–

Not a Descrambled PID (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only)

–

Descramble a clear PID (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only)

When the PID Error/PID Bitrate Error check box is ticked, select PID Error or PID Bitrate Error in the drop down box beside this check box and select one of the following settings in the second drop down box: Any or Smart. 4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the Alarms

d

When the GPIO check box is set, select the GPIO pin used to trigger the alarm in the GPIO drop down box. Note: Only the GPIO pins which are enabled can be chosen.

6

e

In the Video Bit Rate Threshold (Kbps) box enter the PID Bitrate Error threshold value for video components

f

In the Audio Bit Rate Threshold (Kbps) box enter the PID Bitrate Error threshold value for audio components

g

In the Data Bit Rate Threshold (Kbps) box enter the PID Bitrate Error threshold value for data components

Press Apply All to confirm or Reload All to abort the operation.

Configuring Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers Introduction To activate a TS Loss alarm following triggers can be set:  Link Loss alarm (GbE Interface Card only): this alarm will be triggered when the GbE link is down between the source device and the DCM.  UDP Loss alarm (GbE Interface Card only): this alarm will be triggered when the corresponding port no longer receives UDP packets.  Service Loss alarm: the alarms to trigger a Service Loss alarm are configurable. More information about the configuration of Service Loss alarms can be found in topic Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers on page 997.  Sync Loss alarm (ASI / 8-VSB / DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only): a TS Loss alarm will be triggered when the synchronization byte in a sequence of at least two transport stream packets are not detected.  Sync Byte Error alarm (ASI / 8-VSB / DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only): a TS Loss alarm will be triggered when the synchronization byte in a transport stream packet is not detected.  UDP Stream Loss alarm (GbE Interface Card only): a TS Loss alarm will be triggered when the transport stream, for which services are passed to the output, is no longer detected at the corresponding UDP port.  PAT Error alarm: this alarm will be triggered if the PAT of the corresponding transport stream is not available within a particular time interval11 or contains an error. This alarm will also be triggered when a table ID different from 0x00 is found on PID 0x0000.  Not a Descrambled PID (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only): the TS Loss alarm will be triggered if none of the scrambled components of a service that is routed to the The time that a PAT, PMT, or component is not available in the Transport Stream before a alarm will be generated is adjustable. The procedure to change these time intervals can be found in topic Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms. 11

4011746 Rev AG

1005

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

output via a CI-CAM of a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card is descrambled. The DCM handles a particular alarm hierarchy. For instance if a UDP Loss alarm is detected, Sync Loss alarm will not be triggered. This means that the DCM will not start a transport stream backup transition when a UDP Loss alarm is detected and UDP Loss is not defined as TS Loss alarm trigger even if other alarms are defined to trigger a transport stream backup. The following table shows this alarm hierarchy. Hierarchy

Alarm

1

Link Loss

2

UDP Loss

3

UDP Stream Loss

4

Sync Loss

5

Sync Byte Error, PAT Error, Not a Descrambled PID

Note: Since a similar hierarchy is used to trigger a Service loss alarm, a Service loss alarm will not mask any other alarm. Hints:  When most of the incoming transport streams must be defined with the same TS Loss alarms, the configuration can be simplified by using default settings. Each new incoming transport stream and each incoming transport stream for which the TS Loss - Mode is set to Default will be configured with these settings. The default parameters are dynamic, meaning when these default parameters are changed, all incoming transport stream for which the TS Loss - Mode is set to Default will get these new settings. The procedure to configure these default parameters can be found in topic Changing the Default Transport Stream Loss Trigger Alarms on page 1009.  For preconfiguration purposes the DCM allows adding TS Loss alarm triggers (called preconfigured triggers) for transport streams not (yet) present at the input of the device. To procedure to add preconfigured trigger can be found in topic Preconfiguring the TS Loss Triggers on page 1008.

To Configure Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers To Configure Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers for a Single Transport Stream The following procedure explains how to change the TS Loss alarm triggers for a single transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

1006

In the Inputs tree, browse to the incoming transport stream for which the TS Loss alarm triggers must be changed.

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the Alarms

3

Double-click on this transport stream or right-click on this transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Input TS Settings page is displayed containing the TS Loss settings.

Note: The picture above shows the TS Loss settings of a GbE Interface Card. The TS Loss settings for the other interface cards are similar. 4

In the TS Loss settings, configure the following parameters. a

b

5

In the Mode drop down box, select the desired TS Loss trigger mode: –

Disabled: TS Loss alarm trigger is disabled.

–

Default: the default alarms as defined on the configuration page of the corresponding interface card will be used to trigger a TS Loss alarm.

–

Specific: the alarms triggering a TS Loss alarm are selectable.

When the Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the check boxes for the alarms that have to trigger a TS Loss alarm: UDP Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Link Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Service Loss, UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Sync Loss (ASI / 8-VSB / DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only), Sync Byte Error (ASI / 8-VSB / DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only), PAT Error, and/or Not a Descrambled PID (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only).

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

To Configure Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers for Multiple Transport Streams on a Particular Port Perform the following procedure to change the TS Loss alarm triggers for multiple transport stream on a particular port (GbE Interface Card only). 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the port for which TS Loss alarm triggers should be changed.

3

Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Input Port Services page is displayed.

4

Click on the TS Loss link. Result: The Input Port TS Loss page is displayed containing the TS Loss table.

4011746 Rev AG

1007

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

5

In the TS Loss table, configure the following parameters. a

6

In the Mode drop down box, select the desired TS Loss trigger mode: –

Disabled: TS Loss alarm trigger is disabled.

–

Default: the default alarms as defined on the configuration page of the corresponding interface card will be used to trigger a TS Loss alarm.

–

Specific: the alarms triggering a TS Loss alarm are selectable.

b

When the Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the check boxes for the alarms that have to trigger a TS Loss alarm: Link Loss, UDP Loss, Service Loss, UDP Stream Loss, PAT Error, and/or Not a Descrambled PID (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only).

c

Repeat step a and b for all transport streams for which TS Loss alarm triggers must be configured.

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Preconfiguring the TS Loss Triggers The following steps explain how to preconfigure the TS Loss triggers (GbE Interface Card only). 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Inputs tree, browse to the port for which preconfigured triggers must be created.

3

Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Input Port Services page is displayed.

4

Click on the TS Loss link. Result: The Input Port TS Loss page is displayed containing the TS Loss settings.

1008

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the Alarms

5

In the Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following values:



Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming transport stream is a unicast IP address.



Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming transport stream is a multicast IP address.

6

Enter the destination IP address of the incoming transport stream in the IP Address box and the UDP port number in the UDP Port box.

7

In the Mode drop down box, select the desired Service Loss alarm trigger mode:

  

Disabled: TS Loss alarm trigger is disabled. Default: the default alarms as defined on the configuration page of the corresponding interface card will be used to trigger a TS Loss alarm. Specific: the alarms triggering a TS Loss alarm are selectable.

8

When the Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the check boxes for the alarms that have to trigger a TS Loss alarm: Link Loss, UDP Loss, Service Loss, UDP Stream Loss, PAT Error, and/or Not a Descrambled PID (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only).

9

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Changing the Default Transport Stream Loss Trigger Alarms For each incoming transport stream, one or more alarms can be defined to trigger a TS Loss alarm. When incoming transport streams must be defined with the same TS Loss trigger alarms, the configuration can be simplified by using default settings. Each new incoming transport stream and each incoming transport stream for which the TS Loss - Mode is set to Default will be configured with these settings. WARNING: The Default TS Loss Trigger parameters are dynamic, meaning when these default parameters are changed, all incoming transport streams for which the TS Loss - Mode is set to Default will get these new settings.

The following procedure explains how to change the default TS Loss trigger alarms. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The Configuration page is displayed.

2

4011746 Rev AG

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the default TS Loss trigger alarms should be changed. 1009

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

Result: The interface configuration page of the selected card is displayed. 3

Point to the Default Settings link. Result: The Default Settings page is displayed.

4

Click on the TS-Service Backup tab. Result: The Default TS Backup Settings and Default Service Backup Settings are displayed.

5

Under the Default TS Backup Settings, perform the following steps to configure the default TS Loss trigger alarms:

Note: The picture above shows the Default TS Backup Settings of a GbE Interface Card. The Default TS Backup Settings for the other interface cards are similar. a

b

6

In the TS Loss Trigger Mode drop down box, select the desired TS Loss alarm trigger mode: –

Disabled: TS Loss alarm trigger is disabled.

–

Specific: the alarms triggering a TS Loss alarm are selectable.

When the TS Loss Trigger Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the TS Loss Trigger Options check boxes for the alarms that have to trigger a TS Loss alarm: Link Loss (GbE Interface Card only), UDP Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Service Loss, UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Sync Loss (ASI / 8-VSB / DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only), Sync Byte Error (ASI / 8-VSB / DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only), PAT Error, and/or Not a Descrambled PID (DVB-S2/CI Interface Card only).

Press Apply All to confirm or Reload All to abort the operation.

Configuring the Advanced Alarm Settings for an Outgoing Transport Stream Introduction If the bitrate of the payload of an outgoing transport stream drops below a certain threshold, which can point to services or components missing at the output, an alarm (called Stuffing Rate Too Low alarm) can be generated. An alarm can also be generated when the bitrate of the stuffing within an outgoing transport stream drops below a certain threshold. When the DCM is equipped with an ASI SFN Interface Card (indicated by ASI SFN V2), the PLL At Least 30s In Holdover alarm, which is generated if the GPS hold-over function of the card is active for more than 30 sec., can be used to trigger a TS Output Loss alarm. 1010

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the Alarms

Notes:  When the outgoing transport stream is in VBR mode, the Stuffing Rate Too Low alarm will not be generated.  Short drops in the stuffing bitrates do not generate an alarm.  When a transport stream stops streaming while one of the alarms is active, the alarm will not be cleared or updated until the transport streams starts streaming again or until the alarm is disabled.

Configuring the Advanced Alarm Settings of a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream The following steps explain how to change the advanced alarm settings for an outgoing transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing transport stream for which the advanced alarm settings should be changed.

3

Double-click on this transport stream or right-click on this transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output TS page is displayed.

4

On the Output TS page, point to the Advanced link. Result: The Alarm Settings are displayed.

Note: This picture shows the Alarm Settings table of an ASI SFN Interface Card. 5

6

For the Stuffing Rate Too Low and Payload Bitrate Too Low alarm: a

Tick the Enabled check box to enable the alarm or clear the corresponding check box to disable the alarm.

b

Enter a threshold value in the Threshold box for the alarm that is enabled.

For the PLL At Least 30s in Holdover alarm: a

7

4011746 Rev AG

Tick the Trigger for TS Output Loss check box if the PLL At Least 30s in Holdover alarm has to trigger a TS Output Loss alarm or clear this check box otherwise.

Click on Apply All to confirm or on Reload All to abort the operation.

1011

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

Changing the Default Values of the Advanced Alarm Settings During the transport stream creation process particular parameters are filled in with default values. To facilitate the configuration of outgoing transport streams, other values can be given to these defaults. Perform the following steps to change the default values of the advanced alarm settings. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The Configuration page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the default value should be changed. Result: The interface configuration page of the selected card is displayed.

3

Click on the Default Settings link. Result: The Default Settings page is displayed.

4

Point to the Advanced tab. Result: The Alarm Settings are displayed.

Note: This picture shows the Alarm Settings table of an ASI SFN Interface Card. 5

6

For the Stuffing Rate Too Low and Payload Bitrate Too Low alarm: a

Tick the Enabled check box to enable the alarm or clear the corresponding check box to disable the alarm.

b

Enter a threshold value in the Threshold box for the alarm that is enabled.

For the PLL At Least 30s in Holdover alarm: a

7

Tick the Trigger for TS Output Loss check box if the PLL At Least 30s in Holdover alarm has to trigger a TS Output Loss alarm or clear this check box otherwise.

Click on Apply All to confirm or on Reload All to abort the operation.

Configuring the Card Not Operational Alarm Introduction When the alarm is enabled, the Card Not Operational alarm will be generated if the connection between the main board and corresponding card fails. For particular reasons, for example in backup applications, it can be useful that the Card Operational Failure alarm is triggered when other alarms arise. In the Global Alarm Settings table of a card, the alarms that can be used to trigger the Card Not Operational alarm are indicated by the icon. 1012

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the Alarms

If an I/O slot of the DCM housing is not populated with a card, the Card Not Operational alarm generation can be switched off, see topic Switching off the Alarm Generation on page 1014.

Adding Card Operational Failure Triggers The procedure below explains how to add Card Operational Failure alarm triggers. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The device Configuration page for the device is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the card for which triggers to activate the Card Operational Failure alarm must be added and point to the Alarms link. Result: The Board Alarms page of the selected card is displayed.

3

In the Global Alarm Settings table, tick the icon in the row of the alarm that has to trigger the Card Operational Failure alarm.

Result: The selected alarm is added to the Card Not Operational Alarm Triggers table and Yes is displayed beside the icon of the corresponding alarm in the Global Alarm Settings table. 4

Repeat step 3 for all alarms that have to trigger the Card Operational Failure alarm.

5

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Removing Card Operational Failure Triggers The following steps describe how to remove Card Operational Failure alarm triggers. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The device Configuration page for the device is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the card for which triggers to activate the Card Operational Failure alarm must be removed and point to the Alarms link. Result: The Board Alarms page of the selected card is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

1013

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

3

In the Card Not Operational Alarm Triggers table, tick the check box(es) of the trigger(s) that should be removed.

Hints:

4



To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Card Not Operational Alarm Triggers table, tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be deleted.



The rows in the Card Not Operational Alarm Triggers table can be sorted by a specific parameter by pointing to the column header of this parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending order by clicking on the parameter header.

Click on Remove Checked Items to remove the selected triggers.

Switching off Alarm Generation When a slot of a DCM is not populated with a card, a Card Not Operation alarm will be generated. To suppress this alarm generation, this default behavior can be changed. The following steps describe how to configure the Card Not Operational alarm. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Alarms link after pointing to the Configuration link. Result: The device Alarms page for the device is displayed.

2

In the Global Alarm Settings table, click on row.

in the Card Not Operational alarm

Note: The Card Not Operational alarm can only be configured if it's enabled. Result: The Card not operational popup is displayed.

1014

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the Alarms

3

In the drop down box of the card for which the alarm must be configured, select one of the following settings:

  4

Always: the default alarm generation behavior will be used. If card present: an alarm will only be generated if the slot was occupied with a card at boot time and the card is removed or is no longer detected due to a malfunction.

Press Apply to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation.

Configuring Device Operational Failure Alarm Introduction The Device Operation Failure alarm, that can be used to start for instance a device backup transition, can be triggered by several alarms. In the Global Alarm Settings table of the device, the alarms that can be used to trigger the Device Operation Failure alarm are indicated by the icon.

Adding Device Operational Failure Alarm Triggers The following steps describe how to add Device Operational Failure alarm triggers. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Configuration link and point to the Alarms link. Result: The Alarms page for the device is displayed.

2

4011746 Rev AG

In the Global Alarm Settings table, tick the icon in the row of the alarm that has to trigger the Device Operational Failure alarm.

1015

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

Note: Clicking on the icon in the row of the Card Not Operational alarm opens the Add Device Operational Failure popup.

In the Add Device Operational Failure popup, tick the check box of the card(s) for which the Card Not Operational alarm has to trigger a Device Operational Failure alarm and click on OK to confirm or on Cancel to abort the operation. Result: The selected alarm is added to the Device Not Operational Alarm Triggers table and Yes is displayed beside the icon of the corresponding alarm in the Global Alarm Settings table.

1016

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the Alarms

3

Repeat step 2 for all alarms that have to trigger a Device Operation Failure alarm.

4

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Removing Device Operational Failure Alarm Triggers The following steps explain how to remove Device Operation Failure alarm triggers. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Configuration link and point to the Alarms link. Result: The Alarms page for the device is displayed.

2

In the Device Not Operational Alarm Triggers table, tick the check box(es) of the trigger(s) that should be removed.

Hints:

3 4011746 Rev AG



To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Device Not Operational Alarm Triggers table, tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be deleted.



The rows in the Device Not Operational Alarm Triggers table can be sorted by a specific parameter by pointing to the column header of this parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending order by clicking on the parameter header.

Click on Remove Checked Items to remove the selected triggers. 1017

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

Checking the Alarms Introduction The details of the generated alarms of the DCM can be found on the Status page of the user interface of the DCM. These alarms are categorized in a number of tables:  Input TS Status Overview table: this table represents the alarms related to the incoming transport streams.  Detailed TS Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the alarms related to the incoming transport streams.  Input Service Status Overview table: this table contains the incoming service related alarms.  Detailed Service Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the alarms related to the incoming services.  Input RAW Video Streams Status Overview table: this table represents the alarms of incoming SDI or RTP streams.  Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the alarms of incoming SDI or RTP streams.  Processing Service Status Overview table: this table shows the transcoding related alarms  Detailed Processing Service Status Overview table: this table represents the details of the transcoding related alarms  Output TS Status Overview table: this table represents the alarms related to the outgoing transport streams.  Detailed TS Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the alarms related to the outgoing transport streams.  Output Service Status Overview table: this table contains the outgoing service related alarms.  Detailed Service Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the alarms related to the outgoing services.  Device Status Overview table: this table shows the alarms related to the device, cards, and ports.  Output RAW Video Streams Status Overview table: this table represents the alarms of outgoing SDI or RTP streams.  Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the alarms related to outgoing SDI or RTP streams. 1018

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Alarms

A summary of all active alarms is given on the Status Summary page. The Alarm Summary table on this page provides the number of alarms for each alarm category together with a link to the corresponding table. Notes:  After loading a status overview table from the DCM, the table is refreshed at regular time, meaning no button should be pressed to reload the page. For some reasons it can be useful to switch of these automatic refresh actions or to change the refresh rate. Therefore this page is provided with a refresh ( ) drop down box that can be used change the refresh rate (every 10 sec, every 30 sec, or every minute) or to switch off this refresh actions. The default value of these refresh actions can be changed as describes in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 215.  When a Service Loss or TS Loss alarm arises, the icon of the branch responsible for the alarm is adapted in the tree on the Tree View page. The status indication of a critical or major alarm is propagated to the interface card branch. The following picture shows the status propagation of a Service Loss alarm.

Checking the Alarm Summary Page The following steps describe how to check the alarm summary table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Summary link that appears after pressing the Status link. Result: The Status Summary page containing the Alarm Summary table is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

1019

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

Alarms related to Incoming Transport Streams The following procedure explains how to check the Input TS Status Overview table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Input link that appears after pressing the Status link. Result: The Input Status page containing the Input TS Status Overview table is displayed.

Hint: To sort the Input TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the header. The following information can be found on the Input TS Status Overview table:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Card: the name of the interface card receiving the corresponding transport stream  Port: the name of the input port receiving the corresponding transport stream  IP Address: the multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the corresponding transport stream  UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the GbE port, which receives the corresponding transport stream.  ISI: the input stream identifier of the transport stream if the transport stream belongs to a multi stream. This parameter is only present if the DCM is populated with a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card.  ON ID: the original network identifier of the corresponding transport stream  TS ID: the transport stream identifier of the corresponding transport stream  Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the corresponding transport stream  Detail: link to the detailed transport stream status overview

1020

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Alarms

Alarms Details related to Incoming Transport Streams Perform the following steps to check the Detailed TS Status Overview table of incoming transport streams. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Input link that appears after clicking on the Status link. Result: The Input Status page containing the Input TS Status Overview table is displayed.

2

In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow. Result: The Detailed TS Status Overview table of the TS alarm in question is displayed.

Hints:



The Detailed TS Status Overview table can also be opened in a popup by right-clicking on the corresponding transport stream in the Inputs tree on the Service page and pointing to Status in the shortcut menu.



To sort the Detailed TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the header.

The following information can be found on the Detailed TS Status Overview table:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Measurement: the alarm name  SID: the service identifier of the failing service (if applicable)  Name: the name of the failing service (if applicable)  PID: the packet identifier of the failing component (if applicable)  Value(s): the state of an alarm, Active or Not active  Detail: alarm details

Alarms related to Incoming Services The following procedure explains how to check the Input Service Status Overview table. 1

4011746 Rev AG

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Input link that appears after pressing the Status link. 1021

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

Result: The Input Status page containing the Input TS Status Overview table is displayed. 2

In the filter (

) drop down box select Service.

Result: The Input Service Status Overview table is displayed.

Hint: To sort the Input Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on the header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the header. In the Input Service Status Overview table each alarm is accompanied with the following information:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Card: the name of the interface card receiving the transport stream to which the service in question belongs  Port: the name of the input port receiving the transport stream to which the service in question belongs  IP Address: the multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the incoming transport stream to which the service in question belongs  UDP Port: the UDP port number of the GbE port receiving the incoming transport stream to which the service in question belongs  ISI: the input stream identifier of the transport stream if the transport stream belongs to a multi stream. This parameter is only present if the DCM is populated with a DVB-S2/CI Interface Card.  ON ID: the original network identifier of the incoming transport stream to which the service in question belongs  TS ID: the transport stream identifier of the incoming transport stream to which the service in question belongs  SID: the service identifier of the corresponding incoming service  Name: the name of corresponding incoming service  Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the corresponding incoming 1022

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Alarms

service  Detail: link to the Detailed Service Status Overview table containing the alarm details of the corresponding incoming service

Alarms Details related to Incoming Services Perform the following steps to check the Detailed Service Status Overview table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Input link that appears after pressing the Status link. Result: The Input Status page containing the Input TS Status Overview table is displayed.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box select Service.

Result: The Input Service Status Overview table is displayed. 3

In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow in the Detail column. Result: The Detailed Service Status Overview table of the service alarm in question is displayed.

Hint: To sort the Detailed Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the header. The following information can be found on the Detailed Service Status Overview table:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Measurement: the alarm name  Value(s): the state of an alarm, Active or Not active  Detail: alarm details Note: IP address 0.0.0.0 in the detail of an alarm generated on a GBE port indicates that the alarm is generated on a transport stream with the same IP address as the IP address of the port.

Alarms related to Incoming SDI or RTP Streams The following procedure explains how to check the Input RAW Video Streams Status Overview table.

4011746 Rev AG

1023

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Input link that appears after pressing the Status link. Result: The Input Status page containing the Input TS Status Overview table is displayed.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box select RAW Video Streams.

Result: The Input RAW Video Streams Status Overview table is displayed.

Hint: To sort the Input RAW Video Streams Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on the header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the header. In the Input RAW Video Streams Status Overview table each alarm is accompanied with the following information:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Card: the name of the IP Video Gateway Card receiving the SDI or RTP stream  Port: the name of the input port receiving the SDI or RTP stream  IP Address: the multicast IP address of the RTP stream  UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the GbE port  Alarmed States: the number of active alarms  Detail: link to the Detailed Service Status Overview table containing the alarm details of the corresponding stream

Alarm Details related to incoming SDI or RTP Streams Perform the following steps to check the Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Input link that appears after pressing the Status link. Result: The Input Status page containing the Input TS Status Overview table is displayed.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box select RAW Video Streams.

Result: The Input RAW Video Streams Status Overview table is displayed. 3

1024

In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow in the Detail column.

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Alarms

Result: The Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table with details is displayed.

The following information can be found on the Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Measurement: the alarm name  Value(s): the state of an alarm, Active or Not active  Detail: alarm details

Alarms related to the Transcoding Process The following procedure explains how to check the Processing Service Status Overview table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Processing link that appears after pressing the Status link. Result: The Processing Status page containing the Processing Service Status Overview table is displayed.

Hint: To sort the Processing Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on the header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the header. In the Processing Service Status Overview table each alarm is accompanied with the following information:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Card: the name of the IP Video Gateway Card receiving the SDI or RTP stream  SID: the service identifier of the corresponding service  User Name: the name of the service used in the Processing tree  Alarmed States: the number of alarms

4011746 Rev AG

1025

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

 Detail: link to the Detailed Service Status Overview table containing the alarm details of the corresponding stream

Alarm Details related to the Transcoding Process The following procedure explains how to check the Detailed Processing Service Status Overview table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Processing link that appears after pressing the Status link. Result: The Processing Status page containing the Processing Service Status Overview table is displayed.

2

In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow in the Detail column. Result: The Detailed Processing Service Status Overview table of the service alarm in question is displayed.

Hint: To sort the Detailed Processing Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on the header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the header. The following information can be found on the Detailed Service Status Overview table:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Measurement: the alarm name  Value(s): the state of an alarm, Active or Not active  Detail: alarm details

Alarms related to Outgoing Transport Streams The following procedure explains how to check the Input TS Status Overview table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Output link that appears after clicking on the Status link.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box, select TS.

Result: The Output Status page containing the Output TS Status Overview table is displayed.

1026

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Alarms

Hint: To sort the Output TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the header. The following information can be found on the Output TS Status Overview table:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Card: the name of the interface card streaming the transport stream in question  Port: the name of the input port streaming the transport stream in question  IP Address: the destination multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the outgoing transport stream  UDP Port: the destination UDP port number of the IP stream containing the outgoing transport stream  ON ID: the original network identifier of the outgoing transport stream in question  TS ID: the transport stream identifier of the outgoing transport stream in question  Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the transport stream in question  Detail: link to the detailed transport stream status overview

Alarms Details related to Outgoing Transport Streams Perform the following steps to check the Detailed TS Status Overview table of outgoing transport streams. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Status link.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box, select TS.

Result: The Output Status page containing the Output TS Status Overview table is displayed. 3

In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow. Result: The Detailed TS Status Overview table of the TS alarm in question is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

1027

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

Hint: To sort the Detailed TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the header. The following information can be found on the Detailed TS Status Overview table:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Measurement: the alarm name  SID: the service identifier of the failing service (if applicable)  Name: the name of the failing service (if applicable)  PID: the packet identifier of the failing component (if applicable)  Value(s): the state of an alarm, Active or Not active

Alarms related to Outgoing Services The following procedure explains how to check the Output Service Status Overview table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Output link after clicking on the Status link. Result: The Output Status page containing the Output Service Status Overview table is displayed.

Hint: To sort the Output Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on the header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the header. In the Output Service Status Overview table each alarm is accompanied with the following information:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Card: the name of the interface card streaming the transport stream to which the service in question belongs  Port: the name of the input port streaming the transport stream to which the service in question belongs 1028

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Alarms

 IP Address: the destination multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the outgoing transport stream to which the service in question belongs  UDP Port: the destination UDP port number of the IP stream containing the outgoing transport stream to which the service in question belongs  ON ID: the original network identifier of the outgoing transport stream to which the service in question belongs  TS ID: the transport stream identifier of the outgoing transport stream to which the service in question belongs  SID: the service identifier of the corresponding outgoing service  Name: the name of corresponding outgoing service  Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the corresponding outgoing service  Detail: link to the Detailed Service Status Overview table containing the alarm details of the corresponding outgoing service

Alarms Details related to Outgoing Services Perform the following steps to check the Detailed Service Status Overview table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Output link after clicking on the Status link. Result: The Output Status page containing the Output Service Status Overview table is displayed.

2

In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow in the Detail column. Result: The Detailed Service Status Overview table of the outgoing service alarm in question is displayed.

Hint: To sort the Detailed Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the header. The following information can be found on the Detailed Service Status Overview table:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Measurement: the alarm name

4011746 Rev AG

1029

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring

 Value(s): the state of an alarm, Active or Not active  Detail: alarm details

Alarms related to Outgoing SDI or RTP Streams The following procedure explains how to check the Output RAW Video Streams Status Overview table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Output link after clicking on the Status link. Result: The Output Status page containing the Output Service Status Overview table is displayed.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box select RAW Video Streams.

Result: The Output RAW Video Streams Status Overview table is displayed.

In the Output RAW Video Streams Status Overview table each alarm is accompanied with following information:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Card: the name of the IP Video Gateway Card transmitting the SDI or RTP stream  Port: the name of the output port transmitting the SDI or RTP stream  IP Address: the destination multicast IP address of the outgoing RTP stream  UDP Port: the destination UDP port number of the outgoing RTP stream  Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the corresponding outgoing service  Detail: link to the Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table containing the alarm details of the corresponding stream.

Alarm Details related to outgoing SDI or RTP Streams Perform the following steps to check the Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Output link after clicking on the Status link. Result: The Output Status page containing the Output Service Status Overview table is displayed.

1030

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Alarms

2

In the filter (

) drop down box select RAW Video Streams.

Result: The Output RAW Video Streams Status Overview table is displayed. 3

In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow in the Detail column. Result: The Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table with details is displayed.

The following information can be found on the Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table:  Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.  Measurement: the alarm name  Value(s): the state of an alarm, Active or Not active  Detail: alarm details

To Check the Device Status Overview Table Perform the following procedure to check the Device Status Overview table. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Device link that appears after clicking on the Status link. Result: The Device Status Overview table is displayed.

Each row in the Device Status Overview table is provided with the following information:

4011746 Rev AG



Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 993.

  

Card: the card name of the interface card on which an alarm arises Port: the name of the port on which an alarm arises Measurement: the alarm name 1031

Chapter 12 Alarm Monitoring



Detail: the alarm details (if applicable)

Downloading the Alarm History A file containing the history of the alarms generated by the DCM can be downloaded from the device. The downloaded file is a comma-delimited file (CSV extension) that can be opened with Notepad or Microsoft Excel. The following procedure describes how to download the alarm history. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Summary link that appears after pressing the Status link. Result: The Status Summary page is displayed.

2

Click on Download that is located beside Download Alarm History.

Result: The File Download dialog is displayed. 3

1032

Click on Open to open the file or on Save to save the file to your PC.

4011746 Rev AG

13 Chapter 13 Additional Features Introduction This chapter outlines the additional features of the DCM.

In This Chapter     

4011746 Rev AG

Section A Digital Transport Formatter .........................................1035 Section B Integrating the DCM into Single Frequency Networks ............................................................................................1045 Section C Deterministic Remote Re-multiplexing .......................1057 Section D IP Statmux Controller ....................................................1067 Section E D9036 Statmux Controller .............................................1091

1033

Section A Digital Transport Formatter In this section Introduction ................................................................................................................. 1036 Changing the ASI Interface Card Mode .................................................................. 1038 Configuring a DTF Transport Stream ...................................................................... 1039 Configuring Scrambling ............................................................................................ 1041

4011746 Rev AG

1035

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Introduction General The purpose of DCM's Digital Transport Formatter (DTF) feature is to encapsulate multiple MPTS or SPTS source streams as embedded private data inside an outgoing transport stream. At the receiver side a Multi Transport Receiver (MTR), for instance our D9804 Multi Transport Receiver, decapsulates and outputs the original transport streams with a fixed latency.

Source Stream Combining Combining multiple incoming transport streams into one outgoing transport stream is accomplished by mapping the original transport stream packets into Digital Transport Formatter (DTF) data packets. DTF data packets containing packets belonging to the same incoming transport stream are labeled with the same PID. At the MTR side, these PIDs will then be used to route the transport stream to the correct output. An outgoing DTF transport stream can also be populated with data packets to provide the MTR with additional data. Such data packets should not be encapsulated and stuffing can be removed.

Scrambling Each encapsulated transport stream can be encrypted by using Basic Interoperable Scrambling System Fixed Key scrambling (BISS mode 1). Even/odd pairs of Session Words used to derive the Control Words can be given via the user interface of the DCM or can be offered to the DCM by uploading an encrypted Session Word Distribution File (SWDF) using FTP. Note that for uploading a file via FTP the External IP Services for FTP must be enabled, see topic External IP Services on page 83. When the file is successfully uploaded and decrypted, the Session Words are added to the list of DTF keys and the uploaded file will be removed from the device. The DCM immediately starts using the new uploaded Session Words to derive the Control Words for scrambling. To decrypt the uploaded SWDF, a Session Word Distribution Key (SWDK) must be given. For adding DTF keys and entering an SWDK via the user interface of the DCM, you must be logged in with a GUI account member of the DTF Administrator security group. Such account has also the rights to remove all DTF keys together with the SWDK from the DCM via the user interface. More information about such GUI account can be found in topic Device Security on page 17. In the SWDF each Session Word is accompanied by an index. When a DTF transport stream or transport stream within this DTF stream must be scrambled, the Session Word must be chosen by means of its index. 1036

4011746 Rev AG

Introduction

Scrambling encapsulated transport streams by using BISS mode 1 is license based, meaning each ASI Interface Card for which the encapsulated services must be scrambled needs one DTF_SCRAMBLING license. More information concerning licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 28.

ASI Interface Card Mode Before a DCM can participate into a DTF/MTR application, DTF_CONCENTRATOR licenses are required and the card mode for one or more ASI Interface Cards must be set to ASI DTF. This action configures an ASI Interface Card into a Digital Transport Formatter and ports 1 up to 7 become input ports and ports 8 up to 10 output ports. The outgoing DTF transport stream is mirrored to the output ports.

4011746 Rev AG

1037

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Changing the ASI Interface Card Mode The following procedure describes how to change the ASI Interface Card mode. WARNING: Changing the ASI Interface Card mode involves removal of all output configurations for the ASI Interface Card.

1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The Configuration page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the ASI Interface Card for which the card mode must be changed. Result: The interface configuration page of the interface card is displayed.

3

Under the Card Settings, select the desired card mode in the Type drop down box.

 

ASI DTF: the DTF feature for the ASI Interface Card is enabled. ASI (default): the standard re-multiplexing mode is enabled.

Note: The Type parameter is only applicable when the DCM is provided with DTF_CONCENTRATOR licenses. Result: After changing the Type parameter the following confirmation box is displayed.

4

1038

Press Apply to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring a DTF Transport Stream

Configuring a DTF Transport Stream The following steps describe how to configure a DTF transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the DTF transport stream (DTF TS) that must be configured.

3

Right-click on this transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output TS page is displayed.

4

Under the TS Settings, enter the total bitrate for the DTF transport stream in the Total Bit Rate (Mbps) box. The value of the total bitrate depends on the packet mode of the outgoing transport stream. For Byte mode a value can be given between 0.1 and 155 Mbps and for Packet mode a value between 0.1 and 213 Mbps. The default value is 40 Mbps.

5

Perform the following steps in the Input Multiplexing table.

Hint: In the Input Multiplexing table each row represents an input port, which is indicated by card name (Input Card parameter) and port name (Input Port parameter). a

4011746 Rev AG

In the Status drop down box, select one of the following settings: –

Added: The transport stream is passed to the outgoing DTF transport stream.

–

Blocked: The transport stream will be blocked.

b

Set the Encapsulate check box to pass the transport stream packets with DTF encapsulation or clear this check box to pass the packets without encapsulation.

c

Tick the RDCS Mode check box for each RDCS TS that must be combined by DTF. For more information on RDCS, please refer to topic Deterministic Remote Re-multiplexing on page 1057.

1039

Chapter 13 Additional Features

d

When the Encapsulate check box is set, enter the insertion rate for the adaptation fields in the AF Insertion Rate (ms) box. A value in the range from 10 to 500 ms can be entered and is default set to 40 ms. Note: The AF Insertion Rate (ms) parameter is not applicable if the RDCS mode is enabled.

e

When the Encapsulate check box is cleared, tick the Remove Stuffing check box to remove the stuffing.

f

In the Output PID box, enter the PID value for the DTF packets containing the packets of the corresponding incoming transport stream. Note: In DTF mode, the device does not perform PID remapping in case PID collisions occur between non encapsulated and encapsulated streams. Be sure that no PID collisions can happen.

g 6

1040

Perform step a up to e for all input ports.

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring Scrambling

Configuring Scrambling Providing DTF Keys Introduction When the DTF transport streams or transport streams within the DTF stream must be scrambled, DTF keys must be given to the DCM by adding keys via the user interface or by uploading a Session Word Distribution File using FTP.

Adding DTF Keys The following steps describe how to add DTF keys via the user interface of the DCM. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the DTF administrators security group. Result: The DTF Key Configuration page is displayed.

2

Under the Add DTF Key settings, complete the following settings:

a

In the Index box, enter the index associated with the keys.

b

In the Even DTF Key and Retype Even DTF Key box, enter the even key.

c

In the Odd DTF Key and Retype Odd DTF Key box, enter the odd key.

d

Click on Add. Result: The DTF keys are added to the list.

3

Repeat step a up to d for all DTF keys that must be uploaded.

Hint: The Even DTF Key or the Odd DTF Key parameter can optionally be left blank.

Uploading an SWDF using FTP The following procedure describes how to upload an SWDF using FTP. Important: To upload an SWDF using FTP, the FTP external IP service must be enabled, see topic External IP Services on page 83. 1

Launch a command prompt box and type the following instruction at the command prompt. ftp IP address

4011746 Rev AG

1041

Chapter 13 Additional Features

With IP address the IP address of the management port of the DCM. 2

Logon using an OS account with FTP privileges.

3

At the FTP command prompt, enter the following instruction and press the [enter] key: CD swdf

4

Enter bin at the command prompt and press the [enter] key.

5

Enter put "path&filename" at the command prompt and press the [enter] key. with path&filename the path where the file is located on the PC and the name of the file.

Hint: To avoid typing mistakes, the file can be dragged from the explorer and dropped to the command prompt box after entering put at the command prompt. 6

Click Bye at the command prompt to exit ftp. Result: When the SWDF is successfully processed by the DCM, the file will be removed from the device after a while.

Entering the SWDK The following procedure describes how to set the Session Word Distribution Key (SWDK) via the user interface. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the DTF administrators security group. Result: The DTF Key Configuration page is displayed.

2

1042

Under the SWDK Configuration settings, enter the key in the SWDK Key and Retype SWDK Key box and point to Set.

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring Scrambling

Removing the DTF keys and SWDK from the Device The following steps describe how to remove the DTF keys together with the SWDK from the device. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the DTF administrators security group. Result: The DTF Key Configuration page is displayed.

2

Under the Clear All DTF Related Credentials settings, click on Clear.

Configuring the Scrambling Parameters of the DTF Transport Stream The following steps explain how to set the scrambling parameters of the DTF transport stream. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

3

In the Outputs tree, browse to the DTF transport stream (DTF TS) for which scrambling parameters must be configured.

4

Right-click on this transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output TS page containing the Scrambling Settings table of the selected DTF stream is displayed.

5

When all transport streams within the DTF stream must be scrambled with the same Control Word, tick the Index check box and enter the index of the corresponding Session Word in the Index box.

6

When an odd or even Session Word must be used for all transport streams within the DTF stream, tick the Parity check box and select the Odd or Even selection button.

7

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Configuring the Scrambling Parameters for Transport Streams within a DTF The following procedure describes how to change scrambling parameters for transport streams belonging to a DTF Stream. 4011746 Rev AG

1043

Chapter 13 Additional Features

1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

3

In the Outputs tree, browse to the DTF transport stream (DTF TS) for which scrambling parameters must be configured.

4

Right-click on this transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output TS page is displayed.

5

In the Input Multiplex table, perform the following settings.

Note: The scrambling parameters are not applicable if the Index check box in the Scrambling Setting table is ticked. For more information, please refer to previous sub topic. a

Set or clear the Scramble check box.

b

In the Index box, enter the index of the Session Word.

c

In the Parity selection box, select the Odd or Even selection button. Note: The Index box and Parity selection box are only applicable if the Scramble check box is set.

d 6

1044

Repeat step a up to c for all transport streams within the selected DTF stream.

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

Section B Integrating the DCM into Single Frequency Networks In this section Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1046 Steps to Take ............................................................................................................... 1048 Changing the ASI SFN Interface Card Settings ..................................................... 1049 Changing Reference Clock Settings ......................................................................... 1050 Changing SFN Adaptation Settings ........................................................................ 1052 MIP Synchronization ................................................................................................. 1055

4011746 Rev AG

1045

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Introduction About Single Frequency Networks A Single Frequency Network (SFN) is a network of terrestrial transmitters in which several transmitters simultaneously broadcast the same services over the same channel frequencies. Due to the differences in distance between the site containing the source services and the transmitter sites, the delay can vary greatly. Therefore the transmitters must accurately be synchronized. The transport stream distributed to the transmitter sites is provided with special timing information packets (called Mega-frame Initialization Packets or MIPs). The timing information in these MIPs is referenced to a 10 MHz and a 1 PPS signal obtained from a GPS receiver. The transport stream is divided into sections of uniform length (called mega frames) each carrying a MIP. The MIPs also provide information about the transmission mode to ensure that all modulators operate alike. At the transmitter sites, COFDM modulators receive the transport stream with MIP packets. With the timing information decapsulated from the MIP packets and the 10 MHz and 1 PPS signal obtained from a GPS receiver, the modulator will perform time and frequency synchronization. This allows sending the same signal at the same time and same frequency at the transmitter sites. The following illustration depicts the integration of a DCM into a typical SFN application.

1046

4011746 Rev AG

Introduction

About the Timing Information As seen in the previous sub topic, the timing information encapsulated into the MIP packets is referenced to the GPS reference clock signals (10 MHz and 1 PPS). This timing data is also derived from a configurable delay value (called Maximum Delay parameter). This Maximum Delay parameter must be set to a value larger than the longest propagation delay between the DCM output and the transmitters. This timing data informs the COFDM modulators about the time the first packet in the mega frame must be transmitted. With the exception of an ASI SFN Interface Card with part number 4027574C, an ASI SFN Interface Card is provided with a GPS hold-over function, that becomes active if one of the GPS signals fails. The SFN No valid GPS clock reference present alarm will be generated if this hold-over function becomes active due to a failing GPS signal. The PLL At Least 30s In Holdover alarm will be generated if this hold-over function is active for more than 30 seconds. This alarm can then be used to trigger a TS Output Loss alarm, see topic Configuring the Advanced Alarm Settings for an Outgoing Transport Stream on page 1010. Hint: In the GUI of the DCM, an ASI SFN Interface Card with GPS hold-over function is indicated by ASI SFN V2.

Integrating a DCM into a SFN Application For participating into SFN applications, the DCM can be provided with one or more ASI SFN Interface Cards. Such interface card is populated with 8 ASI interface ports, a 10 MHz and a 1 PPS input connector. DCM's SFN feature is license based, meaning each outgoing transport stream for which SFN is enabled requires a MIP_INSERTION license. More information about licensing can be found in topic Licensing on page 28. Note:  With the exception of a card with part number 4027574C, an ASI SFN Interface Card can be integrated into SFN applications combined with DCM's deterministic re-multiplexing feature. For more information about this feature, please refer to Deterministic Remote Re-multiplexing on page 1057.  An ASI SFN Interface Card cannot be integrated into DTF applications.

4011746 Rev AG

1047

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Steps to Take The following steps explain how to integrate a DCM populated with ASI SFN Interface Card(s) into a SFN application. a

Set the card type of the ASI SFN Interface Card to ASI SFN V2 if the card participates into a regular SFN application or to Deterministic Remux if the card belongs to a SFN application combined with DCM's deterministic remultiplexing function. The procedure to change this card type can be found in topic Changing the ASI SFN Interface Card Settings on page 1049. This setting is not available for an ASI SFN Interface Card with part number 4027574C.

b

Configure the reference clock settings of the ASI SFN Interface Card as described in topic Changing Reference Clock Settings on page 1050.

c

Configure the ASI ports of the ASI SFN Interface Card as described in topic ASI Port Configuration on page 114.

d

Create a transport stream multiplex by –

passing an incoming transport stream to an ASI port as described in topic Creating a Transport Stream by Passing an Incoming Transport Stream to a Port on page 251 or

–

populating the outgoing transport stream of an ASI port with services as described in section Service Re-Multiplexing on page 301.

e

If necessary, pass, block, and/or remap components as described in section Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components on page 321.

f

If necessary, modify the PSI/SI/PSIP information as describes in section PSI/SI/PSIP Information on page 397.

g

When the ASI SFN Interface Card is provided with a Co-Processor card, advanced MPEG processing like rate control, digital program insertion... can be done. For more information, please refer to the corresponding chapter.

h

Configure the SFN adaptation settings for the outgoing transport stream as described in topic Changing SFN Adaptation Settings on page 1052.

i

Repeat step c up to g for all SFN transport streams

Notes:  If PID 0x15 is already in use the SFN feature cannot be enabled.  The SFN feature of an outgoing transport stream that is transparently passed from the input cannot be enabled.  After enabling the SFN feature, the bitrate of the corresponding outgoing transport stream becomes fixed.

1048

4011746 Rev AG

Changing the ASI SFN Interface Card Settings

Changing the ASI SFN Interface Card Settings For adding an ASI SFN Interface Card into an SFN application, the following card specific settings can be modified.  Name parameter: the name of the card. A logical card name will facilitate the identification of the card in the user interface  Type parameter: An ASI SFN Interface Card can be used in a regular SFN application or in a SFN application combined with DCM's deterministic remultiplexing function. For an ASI SFN Interface Card in a regular SFN application, set this parameter to ASI SFN V2. Note: Since an ASI SFN Interface Card with part number 4027574C can't participate into an SFN application combined with deterministic re-multiplexing, this setting is not available for such card.  MIP Synchronization parameter: this parameter enables or disables MIP synchronization for devices participating in device backup application, see topic MIP Synchronization on page 1055. The following settings describe how to change the ASI SFN Interface Card settings. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The Configuration page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the ASI SFN Interface Card for which the card type must be changed. Result: The interface configuration page of the interface card is displayed.

3

Under the Card Settings, modify the following parameters if needed.

a

In the Type drop down box under the Card Settings, select ASI SFN V2.

b

Tick the MIP Synchronization check box to enable MIP synchronization for the card or clear this check box otherwise. Hint: MIP synchronization can only be enabled for an ASI SFN Interface Card belonging to an Initiator device.

4

4011746 Rev AG

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

1049

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Changing Reference Clock Settings Introduction Before the ASI SFN Interface Card can participate into an SFN application, the DCM needs the knowledge of following parameters.  10 MHz GPS Settings -

Impedance parameter: This parameter determines the 10 MHz signal termination, 50 Ohm or High impedance (default).

-

Clock Edge parameter: This parameter determines the edge (falling or rising (default)) of the 10 MHz signal that is used to clock the 1 PPS signal.

 1 PPS GPS Settings -

Impedance parameter: This parameter determines the 1 PPS signal termination, 50 Ohm or High impedance (default).

-

Slice Level (mV) parameter: The level detection of the 1 PPS signal can automatically be set (default) or can be set manually.

-

Edge parameter: As count reference the falling or rising edge (default) of the 1 PPS signal can be chosen.

To Change Reference Clock Settings The following steps explain how to change the reference clock settings. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The Configuration page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the ASI SFN Interface Card for which reference clock settings must be changed. Result: The interface configuration page containing the I/O and reference clock setting of the selected ASI SFN Interface Card is displayed.

3

1050

Perform the following settings in the Reference Clock Settings table:

4011746 Rev AG

Changing Reference Clock Settings

4

4011746 Rev AG

a

In the Impedance drop down box under 10 MHz GPS Settings, select High or 50 Ohm.

b

In the Clock Edge drop down box under 10 MHz GPS Settings, select Rising or Falling.

c

In the Impedance drop down box under 1 PPS GPS Settings, select High or 50 Ohm.

d

In the Slice Level (mV) drop down box under 1 PPS GPS Settings, select Automatic or Manual.

e

When the Slice level parameter is set to Manual, enter the slice level in the box beside the Slice Level (mV) drop down box.

f

In the Edge drop down box under 1 PPS GPS Settings, select Rising or Falling.

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

1051

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Changing SFN Adaptation Settings Introduction The SFN Mode parameter enables or disables the encapsulation of MIPs into the outgoing transport stream. Once the SFN Mode parameter is enabled, the other SFN adaptation settings can be configured. Hint: In the Outputs tree, a transport stream for which the SFN Mode is enabled is suffixed by (SFN Enabled). The Maximum Delay (µs) parameter, which determines the timing information into the MIPs, must be set to a value larger than the longest propagation delay between the DCM output and the transmitters. The parameters below determine the modulation and coding information added into the MIP packet.  Constellation parameter: QPSK (default value), 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.  Hierarchy And Interleaving parameter: Non Hierarchical (default value), Alpha 1, Alpha 2, or Alpha 4  Code Rate parameter: 1/2 (default value), 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8  Guard Interval parameter: 1/32 (default value), 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4  FFT Mode parameter: 2K (default value) or 8K  Channel Bandwidth parameter: 6 MHz, 7 Mhz, or 8 MHz (default value)  TS Priority parameter: Low or Non Hierarchical or High (default value)  DVB-H Timeslicing parameter: Enabled or Disabled (default value)  DVB-H MPE FEC parameter: Used or Not Used (default value)

To Change SFN Adaptation Settings The following procedure explains how to change the SFN adaptation settings for a particular outgoing transport stream. Hint: Before changing the SFN adaptation settings it is strongly advised to stop streaming the corresponding outgoing transport stream. Once the settings are properly configured, streaming the transport stream can be activated again. The procedure to stop and to activate streaming can be found in topic Activating or Stopping Streaming on page 487. 1

1052

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. 4011746 Rev AG

Changing SFN Adaptation Settings

Result: The Tree View page is displayed. 2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the transport stream for which settings must be changed.

3

Double-click on the transport stream or right-click on the transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output TS page containing the SFN Adaptation Settings for the selected transport stream is displayed.

Note: Changing SFN adaptation settings may results in temporary service loss. 4

In the SFN Mode drop down box, select Enabled or Disabled. Note: The other parameters in the SFN Adaptation Settings table are only applicable when the SFN Mode parameter is set to Enabled.

5

In the Maximum Delay (µs) box, enter a value between 0 and 1,000,000. µs.

6

In the Constellation drop down box, select QPSK, 16 QAM, or 64 QAM.

7

In the Hierarchy And Interleaving drop down box, select Non Hierarchical, Alpha 1, Alpha 2, or Alpha 4.

8

In the Code Rate drop down box, select 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, or 7/8.

9

In the Guard Interval drop down box, select 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, or 1/4

10 In the FFT Mode drop down box, select 2K or 8K 11 In the Channel Bandwidth drop down box, select 6 MHz, 7 Mhz, or 8 MHz. 12 In the TS Priority drop down box, select Low or Non Hierarchical or High. 13 In the DVB-H Timeslicing drop down box, select Enabled or Disabled. 14 In the DVB-H MPE FEC drop down box, select Used or Not Used. 15 Press Apply All to confirm or Reload All to abort the operation. Notes:  Each outgoing transport stream for which the SFN mode is enabled consumes 4011746 Rev AG

1053

Chapter 13 Additional Features

one MIP_INSERTION license.  If the SFN mode is enabled for an outgoing transport stream and the MIP_INSERTION license is no longer present, the SFN mode can be disabled but cannot be enabled again.

1054

4011746 Rev AG

MIP Synchronization

MIP Synchronization Introduction In order to minimize the impact of a DCM device backup transition on the DVB-T modulator, the MIP generation of the main and backup DCM can be synchronized. MIP synchronization will synchronize both the playout and the content of the MIP packets. To deal with this, one device must be configured as Initiator and the other as Target. If the Initiator is active, it provides the Target with particular synchronization information. The Target compares this information with its own timing information and if the information of the Target is out of sync, it will adapt its MIP insertion timings. If the Initiator is inactive, it asks the Target for synchronization information and if needed, he will modify its MIP insertion timings to be in sync with the active Target. During configuring the Initiator, the IP settings of the management port (10/100 Base-T or 1GbE) of the Target together with the settings of an OS account with IIOP privileges should be given, see topic Configuring the MIP Synchronization Settings. Once the MIP synchronization settings are properly configured, MIP synchronization for the ASI SFN Interface Card of the Initiator must be enabled, see topic Changing the ASI SFN Interface Card Settings on page 1049.

Configuring the MIP Synchronization Settings The following steps describe how to configure the settings for MIP synchronization. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Backup link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Backup page is displayed with the MIP Synchronization Settings.

2

In the Device Role drop down box, select Initiator or Target to chose the device role or None to disable this feature.

3

If Initiator is selected, complete the following settings: a

4011746 Rev AG

In the Target IP Address box, enter the IP address of the management port of the Target that is used to communicate with the Initiator.

1055

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Note:

4

1056

–

For an IPv4 IP address the octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.

–

For an IPv6 IP address, use a format as recommended by RFC 5952. The list with accepted and blocked IPv6 addresses can be found in topic Modifying Network Settings of the Management Ports.

b

In the Account Name box, enter the user name of the OS account.

c

Tick the Password check box and enter the password of this account in both Password boxes.

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

Section C Deterministic Remote Re-multiplexing In this section Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1058 Integrating the DCM Devices into an SFN Application with Deterministic Re-multiplexing .......................................................................................................... 1060 Modifying the Deterministic Re-Multiplexing Settings........................................ 1063 Changing the RDCS Settings .................................................................................... 1064

4011746 Rev AG

1057

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Introduction About Deterministic Re-Multiplexing In a deterministic re-multiplexing application with a master multiplexer and several remote re-multiplexers, the master multiplexer generates an outgoing transport stream and keeps track of all operations done during this creation process, like packet selection from the incoming MPTSs, null packet insertion, PSI/SI/PSIP regeneration and insertion, PCR re-stamping... The master multiplexer generates a helper transport stream (called Remux Data and Control Stream or for short RDCS) containing a description of all these multiplexing operations. This RDCS together with the original incoming MPTSs (further called contributory transport streams or for short CYTSs) are sent to the remote remultiplexers. From the CYTSs and the information in the RDCS, a remote re-multiplexer is able to generate a new outgoing transport that is bit-by-bit identical to the one generated by the master re-multiplexer. In SFN applications, DCM's deterministic re-multiplexing feature allows saving expensive satellite bandwidth. If for instance a network consist of several regional SFN networks, with each network a number of national services and a number of region specific services, and the headends of these regions are fed via satellite, then the national services should be transmitted only once together with all regional services.

Application Overview The following illustration depicts a simplified SFN application combined with DCM's deterministic re-multiplexer feature.

1058

4011746 Rev AG

Introduction

This setup uses DCM's Digital Transport Formatter (DTF) feature in combination with Multi Transport Receivers (MTR), for instance Cisco's D9804 Multi Transport Receiver, please refer to section Digital Transport Formatter on page 1035 for more information about this feature. For more information concerning SFN, please refer to topic Integrating the DCM into Single Frequency Networks on page 1045.

4011746 Rev AG

1059

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Integrating the DCM Devices into an SFN Application with Deterministic Re-multiplexing The following sub topics describe the DCM functionalities needed for the application as shown in the illustration.

Changing the ASI SFN Interface Card Settings For adding an ASI SFN Interface Card into a deterministic re-multiplexing application, the following card specific settings should be modified.  Name parameter: The name of the card. A logical card name will facilitate the identification of the card in the user interface  Type parameter: For an ASI SFN Interface Card participating into a deterministic re-multiplexing application, set this parameter to Deterministic Remux. Note: Since an ASI SFN Interface Card with part number 4027574C can't participate into an SFN application combined with deterministic re-multiplexing, this setting is not available for such card.  Master Mux ID parameter: This parameter is a unique identifier for the ASI SFN Interface Card and is used by the MTR to detect a master mux backup transition. The following settings describe how to change the ASI SFN Interface Card settings. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The Configuration page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the ASI SFN Interface Card for which the card type must be changed. Result: The interface configuration page of the interface card is displayed.

3

4

1060

Under the Card Settings, modify the following parameters if needed.

a

In the Name box, enter a name for the card.

b

In the Type drop down box under the Card Settings, select Deterministic Remux.

c

In the Master Mux ID box, enter a unique identifier for the card.

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

Integrating the DCM Devices into an SFN Application with Deterministic Re-multiplexing

Inserting Index Packets into the CYTSs Before the transport stream with national services and the transport streams with regional services can be offered to the master remultiplexer, index packets must be inserted by an ASI Interface Card into the transport stream at regular time (for instance every 100 ms). These packets contain an identification of the device that inserts these packets and needed by the ASI SFN Interface Card of the master multiplexer to create the RDCSs. The procedure to switch on this index packet insertion function is described in topic Configuring the Packet Indexer Settings for an Outgoing Transport Stream on page 1063.

Transparently Passing and Delaying the CYTSs Before the contributory transport streams (CYTSs) can be presented to DCM's digital transport formatter (DTF), these streams have to be delayed to compensate the delay that arises during the deterministic re-multiplexing process. To prevent the multiplexer from modifying the CYTSs, these transport streams must transparently be passed to the output. The procedure for transparently passing transport streams can be found in topic Passing a Transport Stream Transparently to an Output on page 256 and the procedure to delay such streams in topic Delaying Transparent Passed Transport Streams on page 278. Important: Since the DCM's TS delay feature needs a Co-Processor, transparently passing and delaying CYTSs should be done on an ASI Interface Card with CoProcessor Card.

Transport Stream Muxing and RDCS Creation To create RDCSs from the transport streams that should be transmitted via the regional SFN networks, these transport stream must be set up in the master multiplexer. This should be done by creating outgoing transport streams on the ASI SFN Interface Card and populating these transport streams with the necessary components from the incoming streams on the ASI Interface Card. The procedure to set up outgoing transport streams can be found in chapter Multiplexing. Once these transport streams are created, the card type of the ASI SFN Interface Card must be set to Deterministic Remux, see topic Changing the ASI SFN Interface Card Settings on page 1049 and the RDCSs should be configured, see topic Changing the RDCS Settings on page 1064. Before the DCM is able to process the index packets, which are inserted into the incoming transport streams and required to create the RDCS, the index packet interpreter for these stream must be enabled, see topic Settings of Incoming Transport Streams on page 235.

4011746 Rev AG

1061

Chapter 13 Additional Features

About the RDCS The remux data and control stream (RDCS) consists of three different packets: helper TS data packets, MUX description packets (MDP), and clock recovery support packets (CRSP). -

The helper TS data packets are the packets that are included in the outgoing transport stream but which cannot be extracted from the CYTSs, like PSI/SI packets, MIPs...

-

MDPs are the packets that describe how to generate the outgoing transport stream given the CYTSs and the helper TS data packets. To improve error resilience, each MDP packet can be sent out up to four times (configurable).

-

The CRSPs are inserted at regular time (configurable) to help the remote remultiplexer to re-construct the TS clock rate of the master multiplexer outgoing transport stream. These packets are used by the DTF/MTR functionality.

Creating the DTF Stream The delayed CYTSs and the RDCSs should be encapsulated into a DTF transport stream, therefore the CYTS and the RDCSs must be routed to the DTF input and the transport stream must properly be configured. The procedure to configure a DTF transport stream is described in topic Configuring a DTF Transport Stream on page 1039.

1062

4011746 Rev AG

Modifying the Deterministic Re-Multiplexing Settings

Modifying the Deterministic Re-Multiplexing Settings Labeling the Packet Indexer The following procedure describes how to label the ASI Interface Card that inserts index packets into the contributory transport streams (CYTSs). 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link. Result: The Configuration page is displayed.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the ASI Interface Card receiving the stream. Result: The interface configuration page of the interface card is displayed.

3

In the Packet Indexer ID box under the Card Settings, enter a unique identifier.

4

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Configuring the Packet Indexer Settings for an Outgoing Transport Stream The following procedure describes how to enable the index packet inserter for a particular outgoing transport stream and how to set the insertion interval. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing transport stream for which the packet indexer settings should be configured.

3

Double-click on this transport stream or right-click on this transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output TS page is displayed.

4

On the Output TS page, point to the Advanced link.

5

Under the Package Indexer Settings, tick the Insertion Interval (ms) check box and enter the interval in the corresponding box. The insertion interval can be set between 100 and 1000 ms and the default value is 100 ms.

6

Click on Apply All to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

1063

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Changing the RDCS Settings Introduction The following list gives a description of the RDCS parameters.  Output Mode parameter -

Main TS: only the created transport stream will be transmitted via the corresponding output port.

-

RDCS: only the RDCS will be transmitted via the corresponding port.

-

Main TS and RDCS: both the created transport stream and the RDCS will be transmitted. The created transport stream will be transmitted via the corresponding output port and the port transmitting the RDCS must be defined, see following parameter.

 RDCS Output Port parameter: the port that has to transmit the RDCS if both the created transport stream and RDCS must be transmitted.  RDCS Data Delay (ms) parameter: the time the RDCS data packets should be delayed compared to the RDCS MDP packets. This delay must be lower than the CYTS delay.  MDP Extension Interval (ms) parameter: determines how frequently the Mux Description Packets (MDP) will be provided with the extension field containing additional information. The lower the extension interval, the higher the RDCS rate will be.  MDP Multiplication Factor parameter: determines the number of copies that will be sent out of each MDP. This parameter is by default set to 1. To improve error robustness in case of packet loss in the uplink, this parameter can be increased to 4. Note that each additional copy significantly increases the RDCS.  MDP Multiplication Delay (ms) parameter: this parameter determines the time between two consecutive copies of each MDP and is only useful if the MDP Multiplication Factor parameter is set to 2 or higher. The MDP Multiplication Delay (ms) parameter can be set between 1 and 100 ms and the default value is 1 ms.  CRSP Interval (ms) parameter: this interval determines the time between two consecutive Clock Recovery Support Packets (CRSP).  CYTS Delay (ms) parameter: this parameter must match the time that the Contributory Transport Stream (CYTS) is delayed (TS Delay) by the CoProcessor Card on the ASI Interface Card to compensate the delays generated by the deterministic re-multiplexing process.

1064

4011746 Rev AG

Changing the RDCS Settings

To Change the RDCS Settings The following procedure describes how to configure the RDCS settings for an outgoing transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the transport stream for which RDCS settings must be changed.

3

Double-click on the transport stream or right-click on the transport stream and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Output TS page containing the RDCS Settings for the selected transport stream is displayed.

4

In the Output drop down box, select Main TS, RDCS, or Main TS and RDCS.

5

If the Output parameter is set to Main TS and RDCS, select the output port in the RDCS Output Port drop down box that has to transmit the stream RDCS

6

If the Output parameter is set to RDCS, or Main TS and RDCS, complete the following settings. Note: The following settings are not applicable if the Output parameter is set to Main TS.

4011746 Rev AG

a

In the RDCS Data Delay (ms) box, enter the time the RDCS data packets should be delayed.

b

In the MDP Extension Interval (ms)box, enter how frequently the MDPs should be provided with the extension field.

c

In the MDP Multiplication Factor box, enter the number of copies that should be sent out of each MDP.

d

In the MDP Multiplication Delay (ms) box, enter the time between two consecutive copies of each MDP.

e

In the CRSP Interval (ms) box, enter the time between two consecutive CRSPs.

f

In the CYTS Delay (ms) box, enter the time that the CYTS is delayed (TS Delay). 1065

Chapter 13 Additional Features

7

1066

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev AG

Section D IP Statmux Controller In this section DCM IP Statmux Concept ......................................................................................... 1068 IP Statmux Configuration ......................................................................................... 1073 Changing Statmux Pool Settings using the DCM GUI ......................................... 1083

4011746 Rev AG

1067

Chapter 13 Additional Features

DCM IP Statmux Concept Introduction Overview The DCM IP statmux feature allows transforming a GbE Interface Card into an IP statistical multiplex controller. A GbE interface of such interface card must be connected to a number of encoders via ethernet in order to control their video rate in one or multiple statmux pools. WARNING: A GbE Interface Card transformed into an IP statmux controller can no longer participates into re-multiplex applications.

The following illustration depicts a typical statistical multiplex application with Continuum® DVP Encoder Model D9032 devices and DCM. SDI

SDI

SDI

SDI

SDI

SDI

SDI

SDI

Encoder #1

IP or ASI

Encoder #2

IP or ASI

Encoder #3

IP or ASI

Encoder #4

IP or ASI

Modulators Power T Vu M

DCM SDI

SDI Router

SDI

Encoder #5

IP or ASI

ASI Router

IP-GbE or Multiple ASI

Or IP Switch

Scie Atla ntific nta

Power T Vu M Al ar P m1 S P 2 S

Model 990 D Digital D 0Content( C ) Manager M

Multiple ASI Power T Vu M

Power T Vu M

Power T Vu M

SDI

SDI

SDI

SDI

Encoder #59

IP or ASI

Encoder #60

IP or ASI

Power T Vu M

IP Switch

I P

ROSA NMS ROSA CLIENT

Features The DCM IP statmux controller has the following features:  Supports a maximum number of 60 encoders / GbE Interface Card  Allows a mix of MPEG2 and AVC encoders, standard definition (SD) and high definition (HD) on the same pool  Connects via ethernet to the encoders 1068

4011746 Rev AG

DCM IP Statmux Concept

 IP based communication between DCM IP statmux card and encoders  Support of up to 20 statmux pools / GbE Interface Card and up to 60 encoders per pool  Allows a mix of fixed rate and statistically multiplexed channels on the same multiplex  Supports default target bitrate, minimum and maximum bitrate allocation, priority and quality limit for each channel  Flexible management of services and pools using the Statmux Pool Manager tool integrated in ROSA NMS  Interaction with ROSA DHB task and/or ROSA EM for advanced redundancy support (IP statmux controller as well as encoder backup)  Statmux pool and service information available on the DCM user interface

Requirements A DCM participation into an IP statmux application needs a number of products. The following table shows the software requirements for these products. Product

Software Version MPEG2

Combined (MPEG2/AVC)

Continuum® DVP Encoder Model D9032

2.12.08 or higher

3.00.02 or higher

HD Encoder Model D9050

4.00.04 or higher

4.00.04 or higher

HDTV Encoder Model D9054

-

3.05.12 or higher

ROSA Network Management System

3.0 Build 15 or higher

3.0 Build 17 or higher

Statmux Pool Manager (SPM) driver for ROSA NMS

3.0.0 or higher

3.0.3 or higher

Digital Content Manager (DCM) device driver for ROSA NMS

3.0.18 or higher

6.00.72 or higher

Continuum DVP Encoder Model D9032 device driver for ROSA NMS

3.0.6/3.0.6.0 or higher

3.0.8 or higher

TV Encoder Model D9050 device driver for 3.0.7 or higher ROSA NMS

3.0.7 or higher

HDTV Encoder Model D9054 device driver for ROSA NMS

3.0.7 or higher

For combined statmux, the GbE Interface Card performing the aggregation of the statmuxed streams must be populated with a Co-Processor Card and a delay must be given to the AVC streams, for more information see topic Combined Statistical Multiplexing on page 1072.

4011746 Rev AG

1069

Chapter 13 Additional Features

DCM IP Statistical Multiplexing Statistical Multiplexing The statistical multiplexing concept is based on the idea that statistically, at any particular point in time, not all of the services within a multiplex of compressed video services require the maximum allocated bitrate to provide an artifact free image. It works on the basis that complex video scenes require more bandwidth than simple scenes and that there is a statistical probability that some services will be encoding highly complex material while others will not. This allows dynamically reallocation of bandwidth resulting in a more efficient use of the total available bandwidth for the multiplex without any appreciable artifacts.

Statmux Pool A statmux pool is a group of services that share a limited amount of bandwidth for statistical multiplexing. The statmux pool bitrate is the total amount of available bandwidth. During the statmuxing process each service is continuously allocated a controlled amount of bandwidth. At startup, the encoder starts at a default bitrate. As soon as the encoder established communication with the DCM IP statmux controller, statmuxing may start. Only active services contribute to the statmux pool and participate in the statmuxing process. When a service is disabled, or for example the IP link with the controller is down, statmuxing continues for the remaining services of the statmux pool only. A DCM statmux pool can handle a mix of standard definition (SD) and high definition (HD) services and MPEG-2 and AVC services.

IP-Based Statistical Multiplexing The new generation IP-based statistical multiplexing technology offers a flexible platform that can support a large number of encoders within multiple pools all managed by a single statmux controller. The signaling between encoders and controller can be sent over IP networks which makes it easy to reconfigure local and remote encoders.

DCM IP Statmux Controller The DCM IP statmux controller intelligently controls the MPEG-2/AVC encoding process to ensure that the specified bandwidth constraint is met, while optimizing the overall picture quality. This is based on a proprietary rate control algorithm with bitrate adjustment on a frame-by-frame basis ensuring that no more bits are used than necessary. The MPEG-2/AVC encoders make predictions about the required bandwidth and send it to the statmux controller via their ethernet interface. The controller then transmits bandwidth allocation messages to all the encoders part of the statmux pool. Bandwidth is assigned based on the encoder’s demand, user’s setup, total available bandwidth, and requirements of other services in the statmux pool. Each 1070

4011746 Rev AG

DCM IP Statmux Concept

encoder is directly controlled to provide the optimal bitrate. For each encoder it is possible to specify a minimum, maximum, and default bitrate, as well as priorities for each service to balance higher priority services with others. The sum of the default bitrates equals the statmux pool bitrate. The following illustration shows how the rate of each service in a statmux pool may vary and end up in 100 percent statmux pool usage.

When the total bitrate of all statmuxed services approaches the statmux pool bitrate, the DCM IP statmux controller prioritizes the services to stay below the statmux pool bitrate limit. You may define the priority setting for each encoder.

Quality Controlled Statistical Multiplexing As a variation of the normal statistical multiplexing concept, the DCM statmux controller offers an extra option for quality controlled encoding. The operator may predefine a target video quality parameter on the encoder to indicate an acceptable level of video quality. In this way a satisfying video quality is provided without using more bits than needed and leaving more bandwidth to other encoders without a quality limitation. If all encoders of the statmux pool are quality controlled, then there may often remain unused bandwidth, which may subsequently be used for time-insensitive data services.

Synchronous Versus Asynchronous Operation To further improve the overall performance, the DCM statmux controller offers further efficiency improvements in synchronous operation for MPEG-2 encoders in the pool. Synchronous operation can be used if all the video sources are locked phase and frequency wise. When synchronous operation is enabled, output stuffing is minimized and the dynamic behavior is further improved. For around 5% bandwidth can be saved for the MPEG-2 encoders in the pool by using the synchronous mode compared to asynchronous. Important: For a combined statmux pool with synchronous mode, only a benefit on MPEG-2 encoders can be achieved, not on AVC encoders. A combined statmux pool with 7 D9032 (MPEG-2) and 2 D9054 (AVC) encoders gives more benefit than a pool with 2 D9032 and 7 D9054 encoders. 4011746 Rev AG

1071

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Combined Statistical Multiplexing The DCM IP statmux feature allows controlling pools with MPEG-2 encoders only (MPEG-2) and pools with MPEG-2 and AVC encoders (Combined MPEG-2/AVC). When MPEG-2 and AVC encoders are combined in the same pool, the total bandwidth for all AVC encoders and the individual bandwidths for the MPEG-2 encoders are controlled by the DCM. The individual bandwidths for the AVC encoders are controlled by the internal standalone statmux controller of the AVC encoders. For quality controlled encoding the DCM offers an extra option by shifting more bandwidth from the AVC encoders to the MPEG-2 encoders or vice versa. Note: Due to architecture differences between AVC and MPEG2 encoders, an AVC encoder streams some frames earlier that an MPEG2 encoder. To avoid bandwidth overflow, the streams from the AVC encoders must be aligned with the streams from the MPEG2 encoders. Aligning these streams can be done by creating a rate control group populated with the streams coming from the AVC encoders and delaying these streams. Proceed as follows:  Change the rate control delay parameters of the GbE Interface Card on which the rate control group must be created, to the following values: -

Coarse Delay parameter: predifined

-

Fine Delay parameter: low, normal, or high depends on the Maximum Video Delay parameter of the MPEG2 encoders.

 Create a rate control group populated with the streams coming from the AVC encoders.  Change the Rate Control parameter of these streams to Pass Through. More information about rate control can be found in topic Rate Control on page 563.

1072

4011746 Rev AG

IP Statmux Configuration

IP Statmux Configuration Introduction Before a DCM can act as IP statmux controller, the statmux controller function of one or more GbE Interface Cards must be enabled. Enabling this function involves removing of all configuration settings of the interface card and the Boundary parameter is set to 6000. The procedure to enable the statmux controller function of a GbE Interface Card is described in topic Enabling or Disabling the Statmux Controller Function on page 1073. For more information concerning Boundary parameter, please refer to topic Settings the GbE UDP Boundary on page 132. For each individual encoder participating into the statmux application, the statmux parameters as well as the bitrate budget must be configured. The configuration of these parameters can be done on the user interface of the encoders or via our Statmux Pool Manager (SPM) tool, which is integrated into ROSA NMS. For redundancy purposes the DCM IP statmux controller has been developed to support device backup as well as encoder backup. Both device scenarios can be controlled by means of ROSA Element Manager or by means of ROSA DHB Task. More information concerning DCM IP statmux redundancy can be found in the Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 IP Statmux Application Note.

Configuring the DCM IP Statmux Controller Setting Enabling or Disabling the IP Statmux Feature The following steps explain how to enable or disable the statmux controller function of a GbE Interface Card. Note: A GbE Interface Card for which the statmux controller is enabled can no longer participate into re-multiplexing applications (multiplexing, rate control, digital program insertion...). 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which the statmux controller function must be enabled or disabled. Result: The interface configuration page of the selected interface card is displayed.

3

In the Statmux drop down box in the Card Settings, select Enabled or Disabled.

Result: The following confirmation box is displayed. 4011746 Rev AG

1073

Chapter 13 Additional Features

4

Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation.

5

Click on Apply.

Changing the Backup Type Mode of the IP Statmux Controller When the DCM IP statmux controller participates into a device backup application controlled by ROSA EM, the inactive/active state of the IP statmux controller has to follow the device activation mode of the device. This can be done by changing the Backup Type parameter of the IP statmux controller to Auto. When the IP statmux controller doesn't participate into a backup application, change this parameter to Off. The following procedure explains how to change the Backup Type parameter. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which the statmux Controller function must be enabled or disabled. Result: The interface configuration page of the selected interface card is displayed.

3

Point to the Statmux link. Result: The Statmux Configuration page containing the Statmux Settings is displayed.

4

In the Backup Type drop down box, select the initial state for the IP statmux controller, Auto or Off.

5

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Setting Up Introduction Before the SPM tool can be used to manage encoders in a statmux application, an SPM resource must be created and the encoders must be mapped into ROSA NMS. Once the SPM resource is created and the encoders are mapped, logical relations must be created between the encoders and the SPM resource.

1074

4011746 Rev AG

IP Statmux Configuration

Notes:  For each statmux pool in the statistical multiplex application an SPM resource must be created.  For combined statmux applications, two SPM resources must be created: a resource for the MPEG-2 encoders and a resource for the AVC encoders. This topic describes how to create a Statmux Pool Manager resource in ROSA, and how to setup a map with relations between the encoders and the Statmux Pool Manager resource. The procedure to install the SPM tool is described in the Implementation Design Guide: Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS. The procedure to install the encoder driver, to detect the encoders, and to map the encoders into ROSA can be found in the ROSA Network Manager System User's Guide or in the documentation shipped with your encoders.

Creating an SPM Resource in ROSA The following procedure explains how to create an SPM resource in the Server Explorer tree. 1

In the Server Explorer tree, right-click on the Units node and point to Units... in the shortcut menu. Results: The Units dialog is displayed.

2

Click on Add.... Result: The Add Unit dialog is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

1075

Chapter 13 Additional Features

3

In the Name box, enter a name for this SPM resource.

4

Click on Add. Result: The Statmux Pool Manager resource is added to the tree.

5

Press Close to close the Add Unit dialog.

6

Press Close to close the Units dialog.

Setting Up the Map The following procedure explains how to set up a map. 1

Set the Map Mode of the ROSA user interface to Editing mode by clicking on the Maps menu and ticking Allow Editing.

2

In the Maps Explorer, browse to the map for which a statmux setup must be created or create a new map by performing the following steps: a

In the Maps Explorer, right-click on Maps and point to New/link in the shortcut menu. Result: The New/Link Map dialog is displayed.

b

In the Map Name box, enter a name for the new map and press OK. Result: The new map appears.

3

Drag the SPM and encoder resources, which participate into the statmux application, from the Units node in the Server Explorer tree and drop them into the map.

4

Create a logical relation between each encoder and the SPM resource as described in the following steps: a

Activate the relation tool by pointing to Relation in the Draw menu.

b

Click on the first encoder and then on the SPM resource. Result: The Add relation dialog is displayed.

1076

4011746 Rev AG

IP Statmux Configuration

Note: Creating a relation from the encoder to the SPM or from the SPM to the encoder makes no difference. c

Click on Add. Result: The logical relation between the first encoder and the SPM resource is created.

d

Repeat step b and c for all encoders.

To Set Up the Bitrate Budget Perform the following steps to change the default video bitrate of services and to control the bitrate budget. 1

On the SPM user interface, click on the Bit Rate Budget tab. Result: The Bit Rate Budget tab is displayed showing the various encoder bitrates.

4011746 Rev AG

1077

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Hints:

2



Inactive encoders (for instance backup encoders not in use or main encoders in backup state) are represented in italic and all fields are read-only. These inactive encoders are ignored for bitrate budget allocation or setting the pool ID and target IP address.



The ROSA name of a not-responding encoder is colored red and all other fields are empty.

In the Pool Bit Rate box, enter the total available bandwidth for the statmux pool. Hint: By setting the pool bitrate as a first step, you will be informed if at any stage the total of the individual service settings exceeds this bitrate. Note: For a combined statmux application, the sum of the Pool Bit Rate parameters of both SPM resources must match the total bitrate of the pool. For example: a combined statmux application with five MPEG-2 encoders (SD services) and 2 AVC encoders (HD services) with a total pool bitrate equal to 30 Mbps; the pool bitrate of the MPEG-2 encoders can be set to 13 Mbps and for the AVC encoders to 17 Mbps.

3

In the Reserved Bit Rate box, type the bitrate amount that should not be used by the services and is reserved for instance for data communication. Hint: Click on Leverage Bit Rate to view the optimal default video bitrates according to the stuffing bitrate.

4

1078

In the Bit Rates - Video Default column, change the default video bitrate for each encoder. 4011746 Rev AG

IP Statmux Configuration

The default rate determines the encoding rate at which the encoder starts after power-up. Also, it determines the rate the encoder settles to in the event of communication errors between the IP statmux controller and the encoder, or when the IP statmux controller is disconnected. The default rate is also used to set up the Pool Bit Rate budget. The sum of the default rates for the active statmux programs equals the size of the statmux bitrate pool. The total rate of the statmux programs will not go beyond the statmux bitrate size, but may go lower depending on the maximum quality limit. Notes:

5



When an encoder doesn't participate into a statmux application and the encoder is set to Standalone VBR mode, the Bit Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR parameter shows the maximum Standalone VBR rate. When the encoder is change from Stand-alone Variable Bit Rate mode to Statistical Multiplexing mode the value in the Bit Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR parameter will show the fixed bitrate.



When the Video Rate Mode parameter of an encoder is set to Fixed, the Bit Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR parameter can be used to set the Fixed Video Rate parameter.

Click on Leverage Bit Rate if the video default rates must be adjusted so that the Pool Bit Rate is met. This means that all the statmux programs will have the same default rate. The default rate determines the encoding rate at which the encoder starts after power-up. Also, it determines the rate the encoder settles to during communication errors between the IP statmux controller and the encoder, or when the IP statmux controller is disconnected.

6

Click on Apply.

Note: The video rates shown on the SPM are Elementary Stream (ES) rates, no transport stream (TS) rates.

To Set Up the Statistical Multiplexing Parameters Perform the following steps to set up the statistical multiplexing parameters. 1

On the SPM user interface, click on the Statmux tab. Result: The Statmux tab is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

1079

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Hints:



Inactive encoders (for instance backup encoders not in use or main encoders in backup state) are represented in italic and all fields are read-only. These inactive encoders are ignored for bitrate budget allocation or setting the pool ID and target IP address.



The ROSA name of a not-responding encoder is colored red and all other fields are empty.

Note: The video rates shown on the SPM are Elementary Stream (ES) rates, no transport stream (TS) rates. 2

In the Pool ID box, type the statmux pool identification number.

3

In the Target IP Address box, type the IP address of the IP statmux controller port. Both a unicast IP address and a multicast IP address can be used. If the IP statmux application involves IP statmux one to one device backup, a multicast IP address must be used. Notes:



1080

Multicast IP addresses (class) must, for practice use, be in the range from 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255.

4011746 Rev AG

IP Statmux Configuration

4



When the Pool ID and/or Target IP Address of an MPEG-2 encoder are not matching the Pool ID and Target IP Address defined in the Statmux Pool Manager, the field of the mismatched Pool ID and/or Target IP Address is colored red. The Pool ID and Target IP Address defined in the Statmux Pool Manager can be applied to the corresponding MPEG-2 encoder(s) by clicking the Apply button that becomes applicable when such mismatch occurs.



For the SPM resource of the AVC encoders participating into a combined statmux application, the IP address must be set to 0.0.0.0.

Click on the Statmux parameter of the service that has to participate into the statmux application and select ON in the drop-down box. Note: If you activate more statmux services than supported by the IP statmux controller, only the programs that are activated first will take part in the statmuxing.

5

In the Min - Video Rate parameter, enter the minimum rate for the service. The instantaneous rate during statmux operation will not go below the stated minimum rate. The instantaneous rate may be higher than the stated minimum rate if so determined by the rate algorithm. The minimum statmux rate depends on the complexity of the picture and the picture resolution. Setting the minimum rate to half the default rate as a start point is recommended.

6

In the Max. - Video Rate parameter, enter the maximum rate for the service. This setting is used to prevent the rate for an individual program from exceeding a specified value. The range is from 1.5 Mbit/s to 15 Mbit/s If you do not need limitation to a specific rate, we recommend that you use a setting about 2 to 3 times the default rate, or just leave the setting at its maximum (15 Mbit/s). Example: You may need to use a lower maximum rate setting if you want to demultiplex the transport stream at a later stage and you have limited bandwidth available for that program. In this case you cannot permit the bitrate to exceed the specified level and therefore you need to cap it by using the maximum rate setting. Note: Stating a maximum rate limit may reduce the probability of reaching the maximum quality limit. You should use the maximum quality limit setting and not the maximum rate limit setting to choose your maximum picture quality limit. The maximum rate setting does not imply that the IP statmux controller will always try to reach that level, but simply that it will not supersede that rate.

7

If relevant change the Delay. It may be useful to use the Normal delay setting for a return channel that is for game shows with viewer interaction. Notes:

 4011746 Rev AG

SPM automatically sets the delay of all statmux services to the same setting as this is required for statmux services. 1081

Chapter 13 Additional Features

 8

SPM does not support the Low delay mode. If the encoder is in this mode SPM will change it to the Normal delay mode.

Set the Priority parameter. Enter the priority for the program in the Priority column. The priority setting can be set to prioritize which programs get access to bandwidth if there is not enough bandwidth available. In normal circumstances all programs will have the same priority setting but if a program has consistently low action content (for instance a talk back show) you may decide to allocate a lower priority to that program, knowing that the program can perhaps afford a reduction in picture quality from time to time. A total of 16 different priority settings from 0 to 15 allow you to allocate a different priority to each of 16 possible programs. The standard setting is 8.

9

Set the max. Quality Limit parameter. Enter the maximum quality limit for the program in the Quality Limit column. This parameter sets the maximum quality for the video channel. It is used to free capacity for opportunistic IP data when your video quality requirements are met. The joint rate control algorithm ensures that the encoders do not spend more bits on the video than required. The standard setting for all channels is 15. If you leave the maximum quality limit for all channels at 15, the IP statmux controller will attempt to use all of the statmux pool. Hint: Keep the target quality setting at 15 if you do not want to insert IP data. If you want to make room for IP data, you may experiment to reduce the quality limit to find the level that is appropriate for your service. The following settings for the various applications are recommended: Application

Max. Quality Limit

Best possible quality

15

High quality

14, 13, 12

Medium quality

11, 10, 9

Reduced quality

8, 7, 6, 5

Low quality

4, 3, 2, 1, 0

Note: The smaller the statmux pool, the less frequently the target quality limit will be reached. How often depends on the video material. As a rule of thumb, the more important IP data is, compared to the video, the lower the target quality limit should be. 10 Click on Apply.

1082

4011746 Rev AG

Changing Statmux Pool Settings using the DCM GUI

Changing Statmux Pool Settings using the DCM GUI Changing Statmux Pool Settings Introduction Using the user interface of the DCM, the following statmux pool parameters can be changed.  Name parameter: the name for the statmux pool.  Statmux Mode parameter: Synchronous, Asynchronous, or Disabled. Synchronous pools require that all encoders are locked to the same video source. For this reason, a synchronous pool cannot contain a mix of video signal types. The first encoder joining the statmux pool defines the video signal type required for all other encoders. Encoders with another video type are not allowed to join the pool. Statistical Multiplexing is switched off by setting this parameter to Disabled. The MPEG 2 encoders will then be fixed at their default rate. In Combined Mode the AVC encoders will be assigned the sum of the AVC default rates. Note that the internal statmuxing among AVC encoders is not disabled.  Content Mode parameter: MPEG2 for a statmux pool with MPEG 2 encoders only or Combined MPEG/AVC for a statmux pool with MPEG2 and AVC encoders  Priority parameter: determines the bit portion between MPEG-2 encoders and AVC encoders. A priority can be given between 1 and 255. Priority 1 gives the most bits to the MPEG2 encoders while 255 gives the most bits to the AVC encoders, 128 represents equal priority.  MPEG-2 Communication parameter: The IP address of the IP statmux controller port for the MPEG 2 encoder pools.  AVC Communication parameter: The IP address of the IP statmux controller port for the AVC encoder pool. When multiple AVC encoder pools are used the IP addresses must be unique. Note: The MPEG2 Communication parameter is an interface card wide setting and common to all pools of the interface card while the AVC Communication parameter is specific to the pool.

Changing the MPEG-2 Communication Parameter The following procedure describes how to change the MPEG-2 communication IP address for the MPEG-2 encoders. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which the statmux controller function must be enabled or disabled.

4011746 Rev AG

1083

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Result: The interface configuration page of the selected interface card is displayed. 3

Point to the Statmux link. Result: The Statmux Configuration page containing the Statmux Settings table is displayed.

4

In the MPEG-2 Communication box, enter the IP address as defined by the SPM for the MPEG-2 encoders. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.

5

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Hint: The MPEG-2 Communication parameter can also be changed on the Statmux Pools page that appears clicking on the statmux pools node. Notes:  Both a unicast IP address and a multicast IP address can be used. If the IP statmux application involves IP statmux one to one device backup, a multicast IP address must be used.  Multicast IP addresses (class) must, for practice use, be in the range from 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255.

Changing Statmux Pool Settings for a Particular Pool The procedure below describes how to change the statmux pool settings for a particular pool. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, right-click on the statmux pool for which statmux pool setting must be changed and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The page containing the Statmux Pool Setting is displayed.

3

Under the Statmux Pool Settings, modify the following parameters: a

1084

In the Name box, enter a name for the statmux pool. 4011746 Rev AG

Changing Statmux Pool Settings using the DCM GUI

b

In the Statmux Mode drop down box, select Synchronous, Asynchronous, or Disabled.

c

In the Content Mode drop down box, select MPEG2 or Combined MPEG/AVC.

d

In the Priority box, enter the correct value to determine the distribution of the bits between MPEG-2 encoders and AVC encoders.

e

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Hint: The ID parameter shows the statmux pool number and the Video Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter shows the bitrate of the statmux pool. Note: Both the Name, Statmux Mode, Content Mode, and Priority parameter are configurable when at least one active encoder populates the pool. When the pool is empty, these parameters show the previous defined name / statmux mode / priority.

Changing Statmux Pool Settings for Multiple Pools The procedure below describes how to change the statmux pool settings for multiple pools. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, right-click on the statmux pools node and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Statmux Pool Setting table is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

1085

Chapter 13 Additional Features

3

In the Statmux Pool Settings table, modify the following parameters for each pool if required: a

In the Name box, modify the name for the statmux pool.

b

In the Statmux Mode drop down box, select Synchronous, Asynchronous, or Disabled.

c

In the Content Mode drop down box, select MPEG2 or Combined MPEG/AVC.

d

In the AVC Communication box, enter the IP address of the IP statmux controller port for the AVC encoder pool.

e

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Hint: In the Statmux Pool Setting table each pool is accompanied with the following information:  ID parameter: shows the statmux pool identifier.  Video Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter: shows the bitrate of the statmux pool.  Active parameter: represents the active state of the pool.  AVC Communication parameter: represents the multicast IP address used by the AVC encoders for statmux that corresponds with the statmux pool identifier.

Checking the Statmux Settings of the Encoders The following procedure explains how to check the statmux settings of the encoders. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, right-click on the statmux pool for which encoder settings must be checked and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The page containing the Encoders table is displayed.

The following information is available in the Encoders table:

1086



Management - Port parameter: shows the port pair on the GbE Interface card used as IP statmux controller.



Source - IP Address parameter: shows the source IP address of the IP statmux controller port.

4011746 Rev AG

Changing Statmux Pool Settings using the DCM GUI



Destination - IP Address parameter: represents the IP address of the encoder ethernet port that has to receive statmux IP messages from the IP statmux controller.



Destination - UDP Port parameter: represents the UDP port number of the destination port to which the IP statmux controller sends IP statmux control messages.

 

Type parameter: represents the encoder type, MPEG-2 or AVC.

   

SID parameter: shows the service identifier of the corresponding service.

 

Name parameter: shows the name of the encoder as set on the encoder’s front panel user interface or embedded user interface. Frames parameter: represents the frame rate. Format parameter: represents the video definition (SD or HD). Priority parameter: represents the priority of the service in the statmux pool as set on the encoder. This setting determines the priority of the video quality of this service with respect to other services in the statmux pool. The priority value ranges between 0 and 15. State parameter: shows the statmux messaging status. Bit Rate (Mbps) - Min parameter: represents the minimum video bitrate as set on the encoder. The video bitrate during statmux operation does not go below the minimum video bitrate value.



Bit Rate (Mbps) - Max parameter: represents the maximum video bitrate as set on the encoder. The video bitrate during statmux operation does not exceed the maximum video bitrate value.



Bit Rate (Mbps) - Default parameter: shows the bitrate capacity from the total statmux pool capacity granted as default to the service. The sum of the default video bitrates for the services part of a statmux pool equals the size of the statmux pool bitrate.



Bit Rate (Mbps) - Target parameter: represents the target bitrate as determined by the statmux controller.

Notes:  Only active encoders are shown in the Encoders table. Encoders without valid input signal are not shown, even if they are setup to produce black or color bar when having input loss. Pools without active encoders are also not shown, until at least one active encoder joins the pool.  The Name, Format, and Priority parameter of an AVC encoder is not displayed.

Checking the Video Bitrate Overview of a Statmux Pool Once the components of a statmux pool are properly configured, a graphical representation of the bitrates of the services is depicted on the Service Graph page of the corresponding statmux pool. 4011746 Rev AG

1087

Chapter 13 Additional Features

The Service Graph page is refreshed automatically every 10 seconds. A manual refresh can be executed by pressing Reload. The following illustration shows an example of a Service Graph page.

The Services table and Null Packets table provide the legend of the diagram together with the following information:  Encoder IP Address: IP address of the encoder to which the service belongs to  Name: name of the service  SID: service identifier of the service  Avg Video Bit Rate: the average bitrate of the video component of the service Hint: To sort the Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the header. Perform the following steps to check the Service - Graph page of a statmux pool. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, press the Tree View link after pointing to the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

1088

4011746 Rev AG

Changing Statmux Pool Settings using the DCM GUI

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the statmux pool for which the video bitrate graph must be checked.

3

Double-click on this statmux pool or right-click on this statmux pool and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Service - Settings page is displayed.

4

Click on the Graph link. Result: The Service - Graph page is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

1089

Section E D9036 Statmux Controller In this section Introduction ................................................................................................................ 1092 Configuring the D9036 Statmux Application ......................................................... 1095 Modifying the Statmux Community Population ................................................... 1100 Managing the D9036 Statmux Pools ........................................................................ 1104 Handling VSEs............................................................................................................ 1110

4011746 Rev AG

1091

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Introduction General DCM's D9036 statistical multiplex controller is able to control the video rate of Virtual Service Encoders (or for short VSEs) of devices belonging to Cisco's D9036 Modular Encoding Platform. Hint: The term VSE is generally used in D9036 encoder publications and refers to the collection of encoding resources each processing a single service (with video, VBI, and audio). The illustration below depicts an example of a statistical multiplex (further called statmux) application with Cisco equipment combined with device redundancy.

About StatMux Controlling System DCM's statmux algorithm controls the VSE encoding processes of D9036 encoders to ensure that the specified bandwidth constraint is met, while optimizing the overall picture quality. This is based on a rate control algorithm with bitrate adjustment on a frame-by-frame basis ensuring that no more bits are used than necessary. The VSE video encoding engine of a D9036 encoder makes predictions about the required bandwidth and sends it to the statmux controlling system via their ethernet 1092

4011746 Rev AG

Introduction

interface. The statmux controller then interchanges bandwidth allocation and timing messages with all the D9036 encoders with VSEs sharing the same amount of limited bandwidth (further called statmux pool). Bandwidth is assigned based on the VSE encoding engine's demand, user’s setup, total available bandwidth, and requirements of other VSEs in the statmux pool. Each VSE encoding engine is directly controlled to provide the optimal bitrate.

Bandwidth Management To prevent transport stream bitrate overshoots, a statmux pool can be populated with the complete transport stream population containing VSEs that should be statmuxed (further called statmux VSEs), CBR VSEs, and Capped CBR VSEs. For CBR as well as for Capped VBR VSEs, the statmux controller needs the knowledge of the transport stream bandwidth of each individual VSE. For the VSEs that should be statmuxed (further called statmux VSEs) it is possible to specify a minimum, maximum, and default bandwidth, as well as priorities to balance higher priority VSEs with others. This minimum and maximum bandwidth determine the window in which the bandwidth can fluctuate during statmuxing. For each statmux VSE a part of the bandwidth must be allocated for the non-video components within the VSE and an overhead bandwidth for the pool must be specified for data components, VBI components... The following picture gives a graphical overview of the bandwidth allocation of a statmux pool.

The default video calculation feature of the statmux controller can be used to determine the default bitrates for individual or for all statmux VSEs within the pool. The amount of bitrate that is allocated by this feature to a statmux VSE is determined by the video compression (MPEG-2 or AVC), video resolution (SD/HD)... When during statmuxing the total bandwidth of all statmux VSEs approaches the remaining bandwidth for statmuxing, the statmux controller system prioritizes the VSEs to stay below this remaining bandwidth limit.

4011746 Rev AG

1093

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Important: The video rate mode which determines a CBR, Capped VBR, or statmux VSE is a parameter that is set on the encoder. When this parameter is modified on the encoder without changing this on the DCM, bitrate overshoots may arise.

About the Statmux Community A statmux community (or for short community) is a set of D9036 encoders with an active statmux controller that participates into a statistical multiplex application. For redundancy purposes a community can be provided with an inactive statmux controller (backup controller) that takes over the functionality of the failing active controller (main controller). In a D9036 statmux application, a statmux controller is a DCM populated with one or multiple GbE Interface Cards for which the D9036 statmux functionality is enabled. The term statmux controller further used in this section refers to such DCM. Important:  Before a D9036 statmux application can be set up, the statmux controller and the D9036 encoders with VSEs that should be statmuxed must be member of the same community. The procedure to make a statmux controller member of a community is described in topic Configuring the Statmux Community on page 1097. The procedure to make a D9036 member of a community can be found in the documentation shipped with the D9036 device or in its online help.  A statmux controller or D9036 encoder can only be member of one community.

1094

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the D9036 Statmux Application

Configuring the D9036 Statmux Application Introduction Before a DCM can participate into the community of a D9036 statmux application, the D9036 statmux functionality must be enabled for at least one of its GbE Interface Cards and the port mode of the card(s) should be set to port pairs. Note that a GbE Interface Card, for which the D9036 statmux functionality is enabled, cannot longer participate into a regular statmux application or into re-multiplexing applications (multiplexing, rate control, digital program insertion...). A GbE Interface Card is provided with two GbE port pairs and only one port pair can be used at a time. After enabling D9036 statmux functionality and setting the GbE port mode to port pairs, port pair Port 1 - Port 2 is by default selected for its statmux traffic. If needed, GbE port pair Port 3 - Port 4 can be selected. To ensure that the end-to-end delay of the statmux traffic over IP doesn't influence the accuracy of the statmux process, the statmux controller provides a number of parameters that can be used to enhance and to secure the low-latency of this network traffic. During setting up a statmux pool, a unique UDP port number is assigned to the pool. This UDP port number is the first free number in the UDP port number pool. Before attempting to create statmux pools, the statmux controller needs to know the lowest UDP port number of this UDP port number pool. Important: For DCM device backup, the D9036 statmux controller configuration described in the following sub topics has to be done on both the main as well as the backup DCM.

To Configure the GbE Interface Card The following steps describe how to enable the D9036 statmux controller functionality of a GbE Interface Card and how to set its port mode to port pairs. Important: The following configuration should be done for all GbE Interface Cards that participate into the D9036 statmux application. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which the statmux controller function must be enabled or disabled. Result: The GbE Interface Configuration page of the selected interface card is displayed.

3

4011746 Rev AG

In the Statmux drop down box under the Card Settings, select D9036 Enabled.

1095

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Result: The following confirmation popup is displayed

4

Click on OK to confirm this setting or on Cancel otherwise.

5

In the Port Mode drop down box, select Port Pairs. Result: After changing the port mode to port pairs, the following or similar popup will be displayed.

6

Close this popup by pressing OK and click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Notes:  After applying, the current configuration settings of the GbE Interface Card are removed and the UDP Boundary parameter is set to 49400. All traffic with UDP port greater than 49400 is considered and processed by the DCM as MPEG/AVC/SDI data and traffic with UDP port lower than this value as non MPEG/AVC/SDI data. For more information about this UDP Boundary parameter, please refer to topic Setting the GbE UDP Boundary on page 132.  The D9036 statmux controller functionality of a GbE Interface Card cannot be disabled if active pools are running on this card.

Determining the GbE Port Pair used for Statmux Communication The following procedure describes how to select the GbE port pair of a GbE Interface Card that should be used for the statmux traffic.

1096

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the D9036 Statmux Application

Important: The following configuration should be done for all GbE Interface Cards that participate into the D9036 statmux application. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Configuration link.

2

In the Configuration tree, double-click on the D9036 statmux card for which the port pair must be changed and point to D9036 Statmux link. Result: The D9036 Statmux Configuration page is displayed.

3

In the Communication drop down under Statmux Settings, select the port pair that should be used for the statmux traffic.

4

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Configuring the Statmux Community The following procedure describes how to configure the statmux community for a D9036 statmux application. Important: The statmux community settings of all D9036 encoders and the DCM(s) (main and backup device) must be equal. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Statmux link after pointing to the Configuration link. Result: The Statmux Administration page is displayed.

2

3

Under Statmux Community, complete the following settings.

a

In the Name box, enter the name for the statmux community (max. 20 characters).

b

In the IP box, enter the multicast IP address for the community. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.

c

In the UDP box, enter the UDP port number. A number can be given between 1024 and 65535. Since traffic with UDP port number greater than the UDP boundary are considered to be MPEG/AVC/SDI data, ensure that the UDP port number is below this UDP boundary (by default 49400).

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Configuring the Statmux Pool IP Assignment Policies The following procedure describes how to set the lowest UDP port number for the UDP port number pool.

4011746 Rev AG

1097

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Note: The default value of this parameter is 49200 and under normal conditions, this value should not be changed. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Statmux link after pointing to the Configuration link. Result: The Statmux Administration page is displayed.

2

In the Starting UDP Port Number box under SPS IP Assignment Policies, enter the lowest UDP port number for the UDP port number pool.

3

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

Changing the Quality of Service Settings The following procedure explains how to change the QoS parameters for the network traffic. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Statmux link after pointing to the Configuration link. Result: The Statmux Administration page is displayed.

2

Under Statmux Community, modify the following settings if required.

a

In the TTL box, enter the time to live value. This value determines the number of times a packet can pass a router before it will be discarded. A value between 1 and 255 can be entered and is by default set to 2.

b

In the QoS Mode drop down box, select one of the following modes.

c

–

Tos/Cos (Precedence): better low-latency is given by modifying the type of service (TOS) and class of service (COS) sub field in the TOS field of the IP packet header.

–

Custom: better low-latency is given by modifying the TOS field of the IP packet header

–

Differentiated Service: better low-latency is given to the D9036 statmux traffic by adding a differentiated services code point (DSCP) in the header of the IP packets.

If Tos/Cos (Precedence) is selected: –

1098

Select one of the following values in the ToS drop down box: Minimum Delay, Maximum Reliability, Normal, Maximum Throughput, or Minimum Cost.

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring the D9036 Statmux Application

–

3

4011746 Rev AG

Select one of the following values in the CoS (Precedence) drop down box: Flash, Immediate, Internetwork Control, Priority, Network Control, Routine, Critical ECP, Flash override.

d

If Custom is selected, enter a value between 1 and 255 in the ToS Custom box. A higher number gives better low-latency.

e

If Differentiated Service is chosen, enter a value between 1 and 255 in the Code Point box. A higher number gives better low-latency.

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

1099

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Modifying the Statmux Community Population Introduction Once the statmux community is properly configured, all D9036 encoders (with matching statmux community settings) their VSEs will be displayed under the D9036 Statmux Encoders branch in the Processing tree. The following picture shows an example of statmux community displayed in the Processing tree.

For pre-configuring a D9036 statmux application, the DCM allows adding encoders and VSE population manually. As soon as the pre-configured encoders and/or VSEs are recognized by the statmux controller, the encoders and/or VSEs will be included into the statmux community. The following sub topics describe how to add and remove pre-configured D9036 encoders and VSEs to or from a statmux community.

Adding Encoders to the Statmux Community The following procedure describes how to add a D9036 encoder to the statmux community. 1

In the user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link. Result: The Tree View page appears.

2

In the Processing tree, right-click on the D9036 Statmux Encoders branch and point to Add Encoder in the shortcut menu. Result: The Add Encoder popup appears.

3

1100

In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the encoder. The octets of the address must be separated by dots. 4011746 Rev AG

Modifying the Statmux Community Population

4

Click on OK to confirm or on Cancel to abort the operation. Result: After confirmation the encoder will be added to the Processing tree.

Adding VSEs to the Statmux Community Perform the following steps to add a VSE to the statmux community. 1

In the user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link. Result: The Tree View page appears.

2

In the Processing tree, browse to the encoder to which a VSE must be added.

3

Right-click on this encoder and point to Add VSE in the shortcut menu. Result: The Add VSE popup is displayed.

4

In the Name box, enter the name of the VSE. This name must match the name given to the VSE in the D9036 user interface.

5

Click on OK to confirm or on Cancel to abort the operation. Result: After confirmation, the VSE will be added in the Processing tree under the corresponding encoder branch.

Removing VSEs from the Statmux Community The steps below describe how to remove a pre-configured VSE from the statmux community. Note: A pre-configured VSE that is also a member of a D9036 statmux pool cannot be removed. 1

In the user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link. Result: The Tree View page appears.

2

In the Processing tree, browse to the VSE that must be removed.

3

Right-click on this VSE and point to Delete in the shortcut menu. Note: When the removal confirmation feature is enabled, the following confirmation box will be displayed after selecting Delete in the shortcut menu.

4011746 Rev AG

1101

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Press Yes to confirm or No to cancel the operation. Result: The VSE is removed. Hint:  The VSE can also be removed by dragging and dropping the VSE to the wastebasket.  The procedure to enable or disable the removal confirmation feature can be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 215.

Removing Encoders from the Statmux Community The procedure below explains how to remove a pre-configured D9036 encoder from a statmux community. Note: A pre-configured encoder with VSE(s) that is (are) member of a D9036 statmux pool can't be removed from the statmux community. 1

In the user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link. Result: The Tree View page appears.

2

In the Processing tree, browse to the encoder that should be removed.

3

Right-click on this encoder and point to Delete in the shortcut menu. Note: When the removal confirmation feature is enabled, the following confirmation box will be displayed after selecting Delete in the shortcut menu.

Press Yes to confirm or No to cancel the operation. Result: The encoder is removed. Hint:  An encoder can also be removed by dragging and dropping the encoder to the wastebasket.  The procedure to enable or disable the removal confirmation feature can be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 215.

Checking the Statmux Community Population The following procedure describes how to check the encoder and VSE population of the statmux community. 1

1102

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Statmux link after pointing to the Configuration link. 4011746 Rev AG

Modifying the Statmux Community Population

Result: The Statmux Administration page is displayed. 2

Point to the Encoders link. Result: The Statmux Encoders page containing the Statmux Encoders and Statmux Video Channels table is displayed.

 The Statmux Encoders table represents the encoders that participate into the statmux community with following information: name of the encoder, the IP address, the status (connected or disconnected), and the maximum number of VSEs that the encoder can handle. Hint: A disconnected encoder means that the encoder fails to communicate with the community or indicates a pre-configured encoder that's not yet communicate with the community.  The Statmux Video Channels table shows the VSEs that participate into the community with following information: name and IP address of the encoder to which the VSE belongs to, the name of the VSE, the status (running or disconnected), and the name of the pool in which the VSE is processed.

4011746 Rev AG

1103

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Managing the D9036 Statmux Pools Introduction A D9036 statmux pool is a group of VSEs sharing a limited amount of bandwidth for statistical multiplexing. The amount of bandwidth assigned to a statmux pool determines the total room in which the statmux controller can control the video encoding engines of the D9036 devices. This bandwidth also includes the non-video components like audio, PSI/SI/PSIP, VBI, data... But since the statmux controller is not able to determine the total amount of bitrate that will be occupied by these nonvideo component, a part of this pool bandwidth must be reserved. Important: The D9036 statmux controller processes each pool using a pool server and each GbE Interface Card configured as D9036 statmux controller provides four pool servers, meaning: -

A DCM (D9900 or D9901 device) with one GbE Interface Card can handle 4 pools.

-

A DCM (D9900 or D9901 device) with two GbE Interface Card can handle 8 pools.

-

A DCM (D9900 device) with three GbE Interface Card can handle 12 pools.

-

A DCM (D9900 device) with four GbE Interface Card can handle 16 pools.

When a new pool is created, the statmux controller assigns a free pool server to this pool without using a particular ordering algorithm. When for instance two new pools are created, the pool servers assigned to the pools might originate from a different GbE Interface Card, even if a particular card has enough pool servers for both pools.

About the Pool Settings The following list describes the parameters that can be modified to configure a D9036 statmux pool.  Name This parameter labels the statmux pool with a name. Note that pool names must be unique in a community. A logical pool name facilitates the identification of the statmux pool in the application. The length of the name can be maximum 20 characters.  Bandwidth (Mbps) This parameter determines the maximum bandwidth of the D9036 statmux pool. This bandwidth includes the sum of all video, audio, data, VBI, and metadata component that will be carried in the transport stream. 1104

4011746 Rev AG

Managing the D9036 Statmux Pools

 Bandwidth Overhead (Mbps) This parameter allocates a part of the pool bandwidth and is used for the non video components of the VSEs like audio, data, PSI/SI/PSIP...  Safe Rate (for future use)  Max Number of VSE This parameter determines the maximum number of VSEs that can be member of the statmux pool. This parameter can be set between 1 and 16.  Guarantee Min Rate During the statmux process the video bitrate of a VSE fluctuates between the minimum and maximum bitrate that is assigned to that VSE in the pool. In some cases, for instance for still picture video, the video encoding engine of the D9036 is able to produce good quality video with bitrates lower than the assigned minimum bitrate. When the Guarantee Min Rate parameter is disabled, the encoding video engine of the D9036 is allowed to produce video with a bitrate lower than this assigned minimum bitrate. Note that this parameter applies to all VSEs in that pool and can't be set during creating a D9036 statmux pool, only by changing the settings of an existing pool.

Adding D9036 Statmux Pools via Statmux Pools Overview The following procedure explains how to create a pool via the Statmux Pools overview page of the GUI. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Statmux link after pointing to the Configuration link. Result: The Statmux Administration page is displayed.

2

Click on the Pools link. Result: The Statmux Pools page is displayed.

3

Press Add Pool. Result: The Add Pool popup appears.

Hint: The Add Pool popup can also be opened by right-clicking on the D9036 Statmux Pools branch in the Outputs tree and pointing to Add Pool in the shortcut menu. 4 4011746 Rev AG

In the Name box, enter a unique name for the pool. 1105

Chapter 13 Additional Features

5

In the Bandwidth (Mbps) box, enter the maximum bandwidth for the pool.

6

In the Max. number of VSE box, enter the maximum number of VSEs that can participate in this pool.

7

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation. Result: After clicking on Apply, the new pool is added to the Statmux Pools table.

Note: When the maximum number of pools that can be handled by the statmux controller is exceeded by this action, the following popup will be displayed after pressing Apply. Press OK to close the popup.

Changing D9036 Statmux Pool Settings The following steps describe how to change particular settings of a D9036 statmux pool. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Statmux link after pointing to the Configuration link. Result: The Statmux Administration page is displayed.

2

Click on the Pools link. Result: The Statmux Pools page is displayed.

3

1106

In the Statmux Pools table, click on must be changed.

in the row of the pool for which settings

4011746 Rev AG

Managing the D9036 Statmux Pools

Result: The Pool Definition page with the settings of the selected pool is displayed. 4

Under the Pool Settings, modify the following settings if required.

Note: The Safe Rate parameter is for future use.

5

a

In the Name box, modify the name of the pool.

b

In the Bandwidth (Mbps) box, modify the maximum bandwidth of the pool.

c

In the Bandwidth Overhead (Mbps) box, modify the bandwidth reserved for the non-video components.

d

In the Max number of VSE box, modify the maximum number of VSEs that can be member of the pool.

e

Tick the Guarantee Min Rate check box if it's allowed by the statmux process to assign lower bitrates to a VSE than the configured minimum bitrate for that VSE or clear this check box otherwise.

Click on Apply to confirm or on Reload to abort the operation.

Checking the Bitrates of Statmux Pools The user interface of the DCM gives the following bitrate figures for a statmux pool:  Pool Bandwidth (Mbps): the total bandwidth of the statmux pool  Overhead (Mbps): the amount of bandwidth that is allocated for data, VBI...  Sum Reserved: the sum of reserved bandwidths of all VSE in the statmux pool. The reserved bandwidth is the bitrate allocated for the non-video components in the VSE.  Sum Non Statmuxed: the sum of the default bandwidths of the CBR and capped VBR VSEs in the statmux pool. 4011746 Rev AG

1107

Chapter 13 Additional Features

 Remaining Pool Bandwidth for Statmuxed Channels: the amount of bitrate that can be used for the VSEs that should be statmuxed. If a part of the statmux bandwidth is unused, for instance when the sum of the default bandwidths of the statmux VSEs is lower that the remaining pool bandwidth, this amount of unused bandwidth appears beside this parameter. The following steps describe how to check the statmux pool bandwidth figures. 1

In the user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link. Result: The Tree View page appears.

2

In the Outputs tree, right-click on the statmux pool for which bitrate figures must be checked and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Pool Definition tab page appears.

3

Click on the Video Channels tab. Result: The Video Channels page containing the Pool Info table with bitrate figures is displayed.

Hint: The Pool Bandwidth (Mbps) as well as the Overhead (Mbps) parameter can be modified in this table.

Removing D9036 Statmux Pools The following steps explain how to remove statmux pools via the Statmux Pools overview page of the GUI. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Statmux link after pointing to the Configuration link. Result: The Statmux Administration page is displayed.

2

Click on the Pools link. Result: The Statmux Pools page is displayed.

3

In the Statmux Pools table, click on removed.

in the row of the pool that should be

Result: The following confirmation box appears.

1108

4011746 Rev AG

Managing the D9036 Statmux Pools

4

Press Remove to confirm or Cancel to abort the removal operation.

Hint: A pool can also be removed by right-clicking on the pool in the Outputs tree and pointing to Delete in the shortcut menu.

4011746 Rev AG

1109

Chapter 13 Additional Features

Handling VSEs Introduction Before a VSE can participate into a statmux application, the VSE must be added to a D9036 statmux pool and the following information must be given:  Default Bitrate The default bitrate determines the encoding rate of a VSE at which the encoder starts after power up. Also, it determines the rate the encoder settles to in the event of communication errors between the IP statmux controller and the encoder, or when the IP statmux controller is disconnected. The sum of the default bitrates for the active VSEs equals the size of the pool bandwidth less the pool bandwidth overhead and total VSE reserved bandwidth. The default bitrate can be determined by the statmux system or can manually be configured.  Minimum Bitrate This parameter determines the lower threshold of the window in which the bitrate of the VSE can fluctuate during statmux.  Maximum Bitrate This parameter determines the upper threshold of the window in which the bitrate of the VSE can fluctuate during statmux.  Reserved Bandwidth This parameter determines the amount of bandwidth that should be allocated for the non-video components in the VSE. The parameter is by default set to 0.5 Mbps.  Priority This parameter can be set to prioritize which VSE get access to bandwidth if there is not enough bandwidth available. In normal circumstances all VSEs will have the same priority setting but if a VSE has consistently low action content (for instance a talk back show) a lower priority can be allocated to that VSE, knowing that the VSE can perhaps afford a reduction in picture quality from time to time. A value can be given between 0 (lowest priority) and 6 (highest priority) and is by default set to 3. Note: The Priority parameter cannot be configured during adding a VSE to a statmux pool.  Delay (for future use) The following table shows the minimum, default, and maximum VSE bitrates in respect to the video resolution and encoding format.

1110

4011746 Rev AG

Handling VSEs Video Resolution

Encoding Format

Default VSE bitrate values Min.

Default

Max

SD

H264

0.5

1.5

12.5

SD

MPEG2

2

3

15

HD

H264

3

8

25

HD

MPEG2

5

15

23

1

3

15

Unknown (pre-configured VSEs)

Hint: The Status parameter represents the status of the statmux process for the VSE.

Adding VSEs to a Statmux Pool The following steps explain how to add a VSE to a statmux pool. 1

In the user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link. Result: The Tree View page appears.

2

In the Processing tree, browse to the VSE that should be added to the statmux pool.

3

In the Outputs tree, expand the D9036 Statmux Pools branch.

4

Drag the VSE from the Processing tree to the corresponding pool in the Outputs tree.

Result: The Add VSE popup appears.

4011746 Rev AG

1111

Chapter 13 Additional Features

5

In the Default Bitrate (Mbps) box, enter the desired default bitrate in the corresponding box. If the statmux system has to determine the default bitrate for the VSE, clear the Default Bitrate (Mbps) check box.

6

In the Minimum Bitrate (Mbps) box, enter the minimum bitrate that the VSE can have during statmuxing.

7

In the Maximum Bitrate (Mbps) box, enter the maximum bitrate that the VSE can have during statmuxing.

8

In the Reserved Bandwidth (Mbps) box, enter the amount of bandwidth that should be reserved for the non-video components within the VSE.

9

Click on OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation.

Changing Statmux Settings of VSEs The following procedure explains how to change the statmux settings of a VSE. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service page. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the D9036 statmux pool for which settings of a VSE must be changed.

3

Right-click on this pool and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Pool Definition page is displayed.

4

Point to the Video Channels link. Result: The Video Channels page appears. Hint: The Video Channels page can also be opened by right-clicking on a VSE that belongs to the pool in the Outputs tree and pointing to Settings in the shortcut menu.

1112

4011746 Rev AG

Handling VSEs

Hints:

5

6



Clicking on the encoder.



The figures at the bottom of the TS Rates (Mbps) - Max, TS Rates (Mbps) Predicted, and TS Rates (Mbps) - Reserved column represent the sum of the values in the corresponding column.

icon opens the user interface of the corresponding

In the Video Channels table, modify the following settings if needed. a

Tick the VSE check box if the VSE has to participate into the statmux pool or clear this otherwise.

b

If the statmux system has to determine the default bitrate for the VSE, clear the TS Rates (Mbps) - Default check box. Otherwise tick this check box and enter the default bitrate in the TS Rates (Mbps) - Default box.

c

In the TS Rates (Mbps) - Min box, change the minimum bitrate that the VSE can have during statmuxing.

d

In the TS Rates (Mbps) - Max box, change the maximum bitrate that the VSE can have during statmuxing.

e

In the TS Rates (Mbps) - Reserved box, change the amount of bandwidth that should be reserved for the non-video components within the VSE.

f

In the Priority box, enter the priority for the VSE.

Click on Optimize Bitrate Budget. Result: A prediction of the default bitrates are given in the TS Rates (Mbps) Predicted column without applying the modifications to the statmux controller and encoders.

7

Press Apply to confirm the modifications or Reload to abort the operation.

Hint: The bitrate figures of the statmux pool are given in the Pool Info tab, see topic Checking the Bitrates of Statmux Pools on page 1107.

Removing VSEs The following steps describe how to remove a VSE from a pool.

4011746 Rev AG

1113

Chapter 13 Additional Features

1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after clicking on the Service page. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Outputs tree, browse to the D9036 statmux pool for which a VSE should be removed.

3

Right-click on this pool and point to Settings in the shortcut menu. Result: The Pool Definition page is displayed.

4

Point to the Video Channels link. Result: The Video Channels page appears. Hint: The Video Channels page can also be opened by right-clicking on a VSE that belongs to the pool in the Outputs tree and pointing to Settings in the shortcut menu.

5

In the Video Channels table, point to removed.

in the row of the VSE that should be

Result: The following confirmation appears.

6

Click on Remove to confirm or on Cancel to abort the operation.

Hint: Removing a VSE from a D9036 statmux pool can also be done by right-clicking on the VSE in the Outputs tree and pointing to Delete in the shortcut menu.

Checking the VSE Overview of the Statmux Pools The following steps describe how to check the VSE overview of the different statmux pools. 1

1114

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Statmux link after pointing to the Configuration link. 4011746 Rev AG

Handling VSEs

Result: The Statmux Administration page is displayed. 2

Click on the Pools link. Result: The Statmux Pools page containing the Statmux Video Channels table is displayed.

In the Statmux Video Channels table each VSE is accompanied with: the name of the statmux pool to which the VSE belongs to, the encoder to which the VSE belongs to, the name of the VSE, the minimum, maximum and default bandwidth for the VSE, and the priority.

4011746 Rev AG

1115

14 Chapter 14 Checking Bitrates Introduction This chapter describes the procedures to check the bitrates of the incoming and outgoing transport streams. Next to these procedures, this chapter also contains a description of the parameters accompanied with the bitrate figures.

In This Chapter  

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Bitrates in the Input and Output Tree ...................1118 Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables .........................................1121

1117

Chapter 14 Checking Bitrates

Checking the Bitrates in the Input and Output Tree To Check the Bitrates in the Service Overview Trees With the exception of the component leaves, all branches in the Inputs, Outputs, and Processing tree are provided with bitrates figures. The bitrate figures of a particular branch appear by pausing the cursor on the arrow beside the branch. The following list describes the bitrates figures in these trees.  The total incoming or outgoing bitrate of the device

 The total incoming or outgoing bitrate of an interface card

 The total incoming or outgoing bitrate of a port

For a GbE Interface Card, the current bitrate is accompanied with line rate figures of both port pair ports. The current bitrate shows the bitrate of all transport streams without stuffing and overhead. The line rate represents the bitrate of all transport streams with stuffing and overhead. For an IP Video Gateway Card, the line rates for both ports are shown.  The bitrate figures of a rate control group (ASI and GbE Interface Card only)

 The bitrate figures of an incoming or outgoing transport stream

 The bitrate figures of an incoming or outgoing service

Notes:  In contrast with the input bitrate figures, which include the stuffing rate, the output bitrate figures do not include stuffing bitrates.  The bitrate figures shown in the trees are not automatically updated. These figures will be updated by pressing Reload. 1118

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Bitrates in the Input and Output Tree

Opening a Popup Window with Transport Stream Bitrates The bitrates of services and components within an incoming or outgoing transport stream can be checked by using a popup. The following procedure explains how to open such popup. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View page after clicking on the Service link. Result: The Tree View page is displayed.

2

In the Inputs or Outputs tree, browse to the transport stream for which the bitrates of transport stream details must be checked.

3

Right-click on the transport stream and point to Bit Rates in the shortcut menu. Result: A popup containing the bitrates of the transport stream details is displayed.

After loading the tables from the DCM, the bitrate figures are refreshed at regular time, meaning no button should be pressed to reload the figures. For some reasons it can be useful to switch off these automatically refresh actions or to change the refresh rate. Therefore this popup is provided with a refresh ( ) drop down box that can be used change the refresh rate (every 10 sec, every 30 sec, or every minute) or to switch off this refresh actions. The default value of these refresh actions can be changed as describes in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 215. Hints:  The identification parameters of the transport stream are shown above the table. 4011746 Rev AG

1119

Chapter 14 Checking Bitrates

 For more information concerning the TS Bit Rate, Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview, and Detailed TS Component BIT Rates Overview table, please refer to topic Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables on page 1121.

1120

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables

Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables Introduction The bitrates of the incoming transport streams as well as the bitrates of the outgoing transport streams are categorized in a number of tables. The following overview lists the bitrates overview tables that can be checked using the user interface of the DCM.  Input bitrates tables -

Service Bit Rates Overview table: shows the bitrates of all incoming services.

-

Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bitrates of the components within an incoming service.

-

TS Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bitrates of the incoming transport streams.

-

Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bitrates of the services within an incoming transport stream.

-

Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bitrates of the components within an incoming transport stream.

 Output bitrates tables -

Service Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bitrates of all outgoing services.

-

Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bitrates of the components within an outgoing Service.

-

TS Bit Rates Overview table: shows the bitrates of all outgoing transport streams.

-

Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bitrates of the services within an outgoing transport stream.

-

Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bitrates of the components within an outgoing transport stream.

-

Rate Control Group Bit Rates Overview table: shows the bitrates of the services that participate in a rate control group.

-

Detailed Rate Control Group Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bitrates of the services within a rate control group.

 Processing bitrates -

4011746 Rev AG

Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table: shows the bitrates of service population in the Processing tree.

1121

Chapter 14 Checking Bitrates

-

Detailed Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bitrates of the components within a service.

After loading a table from the DCM, the bitrate figures are refreshed at regular time, meaning no button should be pressed to reload the figures. For some reasons it can be useful to switch of these automatically refresh actions or to change the refresh rate. Therefore each bitrate page is provided with a refresh ( ) drop down box that can be used change the refresh rate (every 10 sec, every 30 sec, or every minute) or to switch off this refresh actions. The default value of these refresh actions can be changed as describes in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 215.

Checking the Input Bitrates Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Incoming Services The bitrates overview of all incoming services is categorized in the Service Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts an example of a Service Bit Rates Overview table.

Each row in the table represents an incoming service containing the following information:  Card: the slot name of the interface card receiving the transport stream to which the service belongs  Port: the name of the input port receiving the transport stream to which the service belongs  IP Address: the multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the transport stream to which the service belongs (if applicable)  UDP Port: the UDP port number of the GbE port receiving the transport stream to which the service belongs (if applicable)  ON ID: the original network identifier of the transport stream the service belongs to 1122

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables

 TS ID: the transport stream identifier of the transport stream the service belongs to  SID: the service identifier of the service  Name: the name of the service  Current (Mbps): the actual bitrate of the service  Avg (Mbps): the average bitrate of the service since reset  Min (Mbps): the minimum bitrate of the service since reset  Peak (Mbps): the maximum bitrate of the service since reset  Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table Perform the following steps to check the bitrates overview of the incoming services. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box, select Service.

Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed. Hint: To sort the Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Components within an Incoming Service The bitrates overview of the components within an incoming service can be found in the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts an example of a Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table.

Hint: The identification parameters of the service to which the components belong to are shown above the table. Each row in the table represents a component containing the following information:  PID: the packet identifier of the component  Name: the name of the component  ES Type: the component type  Current (Mbps): the actual bitrate of the component 4011746 Rev AG

1123

Chapter 14 Checking Bitrates

 Avg (Mbps): the average bitrate of the component since reset  Min (Mbps): the minimum bitrate of the component since reset  Peak (Mbps): the maximum bitrate of the component since reset Perform the following steps to check the bitrates overview of the components of the incoming services. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box, select Service.

Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed. 3

In the row of the service for which component bitrates must be checked, point to the arrow in the Detail column. Result: The Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table of the selected service is displayed

Hint: To sort the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Incoming Transport Streams The bitrates of the incoming transport streams are categorized in the TS Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts a TS Bit Rates Overview table.

Each row represents an incoming transport stream containing the following information.  Card: the slot name of the interface card receiving the transport stream  Port: the name of the port receiving the transport stream 1124

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables

 IP Address: the multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the incoming transport stream (if applicable)  UDP Port: the UDP port number of the GbE port that enters the transport stream (if applicable)  ON ID: the original network identifier of the transport stream  TS ID: the transport stream identifier of the transport stream  Total (Mbps): the bitrates of the incoming transport stream (with null packets) -

Current: the actual bitrate

-

Avg: the average bitrate since reset

-

Min: the minimum bitrate since reset

-

Peak: the maximum bitrate since reset

 Stuffing (Mbps): the bitrates of the null packets in the incoming transport stream -

Current: the actual bitrate

-

Avg: the average bitrate since reset

-

Min: the minimum bitrate since reset

-

Peak: the maximum bitrate since reset

 Detail: link to the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview and Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table Hint: Pressing the TS ID value opens the Service page of the corresponding transport stream. The following steps explain how to check the bitrates overview of the incoming transport streams. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link. Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box, select TS.

Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed. Hint: To sort the TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

4011746 Rev AG

1125

Chapter 14 Checking Bitrates

Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Services within an Incoming Transport Stream A bitrates overview of all services within a particular incoming transport stream can be found in the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture shows an example of a Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table.

Hint: The identification parameters of the transport stream to which the services belong to are shown above the table. Each row in the table represents a service containing the following information:  SID: the service identifier (SID) of the incoming service  Name: the name of the incoming service  Current (Mbps): the actual bitrate of the service  Avg (Mbps): the average bitrate of the service since reset  Min (Mbps): the minimum bitrate of the service since reset  Peak (Mbps): the maximum bitrate of the service since reset  Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table, more information concerning this table can be found in topic Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Components within an Incoming Services on page 1123. The following procedure explains how to check the bitrates overview of the services within a particular incoming transport stream.

1126

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables

1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link. Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box, select TS.

Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed. 3

In the row of the incoming transport stream for which the service bitrates must be checked, point to the arrow. Result: The Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table of the transport stream in question is displayed.

Hint: To sort the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header. Notes:  The bitrates shown in the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table are on PID level, meaning the bitrates of tables with same PID are shown in one figure, example: the bitrate of the TOT is included into the bitrates of the TDT.  The bitrates of the services within a particular incoming transport stream can be opened in a popup by right-clicking on the transport stream in the Inputs tree on the Service page and pointing to Bit Rates in the shortcut menu.

Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Components within a Transport Stream The bitrates of the components within a transport stream are categorized in the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts such table.

Hint: The identification parameters of the transport stream to which the components belong to are shown above the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table. Each row in the table represents a component containing the following information:  PID: the packet identifier of the table  Type: the table type  Current (Mbps): the actual bitrate of the table  Avg (Mbps): the average bitrate of the table since reset

4011746 Rev AG

1127

Chapter 14 Checking Bitrates

 Min (Mbps): the minimum bitrate of the table since reset  Peak (Mbps): the maximum bitrate of the table since reset The following procedure explains how to check the bitrates of the components within a transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box, select TS.

Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed. 3

In the row of the transport stream for which component bitrates must be checked, point to the arrow in the Detail column.

4

Result: The Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table of the selected transport stream is displayed.

Hint: To sort the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header. Note: The bitrates of the components within a particular incoming transport stream can be opened in a popup by right-clicking on the transport stream in the Inputs tree on the Service page and pointing to Bit Rates in the shortcut menu.

Checking the Output Bitrates Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Outgoing Transport Streams The bitrates of the outgoing transport streams are categorized in the TS Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture shows a TS Bit Rates Overview table.

Each row represents an outgoing transport stream containing the following information. 1128

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables

 Card: the interface card used to stream the outgoing transport stream  Port: the number of the port used to stream the outgoing transport stream  IP Address: the IP address of the destination device for the outgoing transport stream  UDP Port: the UDP port number of the destination device for the outgoing transport stream  ON ID: the original network identifier of the outgoing transport stream  TS ID: the transport stream identifier of the outgoing transport stream  Payload (Mbps): bitrates of the payload in the outgoing transport stream -

Current: the actual bitrate

-

Avg: the average bitrate since reset

-

Min: the minimum bitrate since reset

-

Peak: the maximum bitrate since reset

 Stuffing (Mbps): bitrates of the stuffing in the outgoing transport stream -

Current: the actual bitrate

-

Avg: the average bitrate since reset

-

Min: the minimum bitrate since reset

-

Peak: the maximum bitrate since reset

 Detail: link to the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview and Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table Hint: Pressing the TS ID value opens the TS Outputs page of the corresponding transport stream. Perform the following steps to check the bitrate overview of outgoing transport streams. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link. Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box, select TS.

Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed. Hint: To sort the TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

4011746 Rev AG

1129

Chapter 14 Checking Bitrates

Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Services within an Outgoing Transport Stream The bitrates of the services within a particular outgoing transport stream are categorized in the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts such table.

Hint: The identification parameters of the transport stream to which the services belong to are displayed above the table. Each row in the table represents a service containing the following information:  SID: the service identifier of the outgoing service  Name: the name of the outgoing service  Current (Mbps): the actual bitrate of the outgoing service  Avg (Mbps): the average bitrate of the outgoing service since reset  Min (Mbps): the minimum bitrate of the outgoing service since reset  Peak (Mbps): the maximum bitrate of the outgoing service since reset  Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table. Perform the following steps to check the bitrates of the services within a particular outgoing transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link. Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box, select TS.

Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed. 3

In the detail column, point to the arrow of the transport stream for which the service bitrates must be checked. Result: The Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

1130

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables

Hint: To sort the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header. Note: The bitrates of the services within a particular outgoing transport stream can be opened in a popup by right-clicking on the transport stream in the Outputs tree on the Service page and pointing to Bit Rates in the shortcut menu.

Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Components within an Outgoing Transport Stream The bitrates of the components within an outgoing transport stream are categorized in the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts such table.

Hint: The identification parameters of the transport stream to which the tables belong to are displayed above the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table. Each row in the table represents a table containing the following information:  PID: the packet identifier of the table  Type: the table type  Current (Mbps): the actual bitrate of the table  Avg (Mbps): the average bitrate of the table since reset  Min (Mbps): the minimum bitrate of the table since reset  Peak (Mbps): the maximum bitrate of the table since reset Note: The bitrates shown in the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table are on PID level, meaning the bitrates of tables with same PID are shown in one figure, for example: the bitrate of the TOT is included into the bitrate of the TDT. Perform the following steps to check the bitrates of the components within a particular outgoing transport stream. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link. Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box, select TS.

Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed. 4011746 Rev AG

1131

Chapter 14 Checking Bitrates

3

In the Detail column, point to the arrow of the transport stream for which the component bitrates must be checked. Result: The Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

Hint: To sort the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter header.

Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Outgoing Services The Service Bit Rates Overview table on the Output Bit Rates page provides a bitrates overview of all outgoing services. The following picture shows a Service Bit Rates Overview table.

Each row in this table represents an outgoing service containing the following information:  Card: the interface card used to stream the outgoing transport stream the service belongs to  Port: the port name used to stream the outgoing transport stream to which the service belongs to  IP Address: the IP address of the destination device for the outgoing transport stream the service belongs to (if applicable)  UDP Port: the UDP port number of the destination device for the outgoing transport stream the service belongs to (if applicable)  ON ID: the original network identifier of the outgoing transport stream to which the service belongs to  TS ID: the transport stream identifier of the outgoing transport stream the service belongs to  SID: the service identifier of the outgoing service 1132

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables

 Name: the name of the outgoing service  Current (Mbps): the actual bitrate of the outgoing service  Avg (Mbps): the average bitrate of the outgoing service since reset  Min (Mbps): the minimum bitrate of the outgoing service since reset  Peak (Mbps): the maximum bitrate of the outgoing service since reset  Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table Hint: Pressing the TS ID value opens the TS Output page of the corresponding transport stream. The following procedure explains how to check the bitrates overview of the outgoing services. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that appears after clicking on the Bit Rates link. Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

Hint: To sort the Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Components within an Outgoing Service The bitrates overview of the components within an outgoing service can be found in the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts an example of a Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table.

Hint: The identification parameters of the service to which the components belong to are shown above the table. Each row in the table represents a component containing the following information:  PID: the packet identifier of the component  Name: the name of the component  ES Type: the component type  Current (Mbps): the actual bitrate of the component  Avg (Mbps): the average bitrate of the component since reset 4011746 Rev AG

1133

Chapter 14 Checking Bitrates

 Min (Mbps): the minimum bitrate of the component since reset  Peak (Mbps): the maximum bitrate of the component since reset Perform the following steps to check the bitrates overview of the incoming services. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box, select Service.

Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed. 3

In the row of the service for which component bitrates must be checked, point to the arrow in the Detail column. Result: The Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table of the selected service is displayed

Hint: To sort the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Rate Control Groups The bitrates of the rate control groups are categorized in the Rate Control Group Bit Rates Overview table. The picture below shows such a table.

Each row represents a service containing the following information:  Group Name: the name of the rate control group  Card: the interface card used to stream the outgoing transport stream(s) of the rate control group  Port: the port name used to stream the transport stream(s) of the rate control group  Payload (Mbps): bitrates of the payload in the rate control group -

1134

Current: the actual bitrate

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables

-

Avg: the average bitrate since reset

-

Min: the minimum bitrate since reset

-

Peak: the maximum bitrate since reset

 Stuffing (Mbps): bitrates of the stuffing in the rate control group -

Current: the actual bitrate

-

Avg: the average bitrate since reset

-

Min: the minimum bitrate since reset

-

Peak: the maximum bitrate since reset

 Detail: link to the Detailed Rate Control Group Bit Rates Overview table. Hint: Pressing the Group Name parameter opens the Output Port Rate Control Detail page of the corresponding rate control group. Perform the following steps to check the services that belong to rate control groups. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link. Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box, select Rate Control Group.

Result: The Rate Control Group Bit Rates Overview table is displayed. Hint: To sort the Rate Control Group Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Services within a Rate Control Group The bitrates of the services within a rate control group are categorized in the Detailed Rate Control Group Bit Rates Overview table. The following table shows an example of such table.

4011746 Rev AG

1135

Chapter 14 Checking Bitrates

Hint: The identification parameters of the rate control group, to which the services in the Detailed Rate Control Group Bit Rates Overview table belong to, are shown above the table. Each row in the table represents a service containing the following information:  IP Address: the IP address of the destination device for the outgoing transport stream to which the service belongs to  UDP Port: the UDP port number of the destination device for the outgoing transport stream to which the service belongs to  ON ID: the original network identifier of the transport stream to which the service belongs to  TS ID: the transport stream identifier of the transport stream to which the service belongs to  SID: the service identifier of the service  Name: the name of the service  Current (Mbps): the actual bitrate of the service  Avg (Mbps): the average bitrate of the service since reset  Min (Mbps): the minimum bitrate of the service since reset  Peak (Mbps): the maximum bitrate of the service since reset  Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table, more information concerning this table can be found in topic Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Outgoing Services on page 1132. The following procedure explains how to check the bitrates of the services within a rate control group. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.

2

In the filter (

) drop down box, select Rate Control Group.

Result: The Rate Control Group Bit Rates Overview table is displayed. 3

In the row of the rate control group for which service bitrates must be checked, point to the arrow in the Detail column.

4

Result: The Detailed Rate Control Group Bit Rates Overview table of the selected rate control group is displayed.

Hint: To sort the Detailed Rate Control Group Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter header.

1136

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables

Checking the Bitrates of the Services in the Processing Tree Checking the Bitrates of the Services The bitrates of the services routed to the output via a Processing tree are categorized on the Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture shows a Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table.

Each row in this table represents a service containing the following information:  Card: the card to which the service belongs to  SID: the service identifier of the service  Name: the user name of the service  Current (Mbps): the actual bitrate of the service  Avg (Mbps): the average bitrate of the service since reset  Min (Mbps): the minimum bitrate of the service since reset  Peak (Mbps): the maximum bitrate of the service since reset  Detail: link to the Detailed Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table The following procedure explains how to check the bitrates overview of the outgoing services. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Processing link that appears after clicking on the Bit Rates link. Result: The Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed. Hint: To sort the Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

Checking the Bitrates Overview of the Components within a Service The bitrates overview of the components within a service can be found in the Detailed Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts an example of a Detailed Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table.

4011746 Rev AG

1137

Chapter 14 Checking Bitrates

Each row in the table represents a component containing the following information:  PID: the packet identifier of the component  Name: the name of the component  ES Type: the component type  Current (Mbps): the actual bitrate of the component  Avg (Mbps): the average bitrate of the component since reset  Min (Mbps): the minimum bitrate of the component since reset  Peak (Mbps): the maximum bitrate of the component since reset Perform the following steps to check the bitrates overview of the incoming services. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, click on the Processing link that appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.

2

In the row of the service for which component bitrates must be checked, point to the arrow in the Detail column. Result: The Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table of the selected service is displayed Hint: To sort the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

Restarting the Bitrate Measurement The bitrates measurements can be restarted for each individual card. Restarting can be done on both the Input page and Output page of the Bit Rates page. The following procedure explains how to restart the bitrate measurements. 1

1138

On the Input or Output page of the Bit Rates page, tick the check box(es) under the Reset Board Bit Rates settings for the card(s) for which the bitrate measurement must be restarted.

4011746 Rev AG

Checking the Bitrates Overview Tables

2

Point to Reset. Result: The bitrate measurement of the selected card(s) is restarted.

4011746 Rev AG

1139

15 Chapter 15 Software Upgrade Introduction This chapter outlines the guidelines to upgrade the software of the DCM.

In This Topic   

4011746 Rev AG

Introduction .......................................................................................1142 Upgrading the DCM Software using its User Interface ..............1144 Upgrading the DCM Software using Upgrade-It.........................1146

1141

Chapter 15 Software Upgrade

Introduction The Digital Content Manager is a continuously growing platform and additional functionality can be added at any time by upgrading its software. Therefore Cisco provides software packages at regular time. For information on how to obtain a software package for the DCM, please contact you Cisco representative. Upgrading a DCM can be done by using its graphical user interface or via Cisco's Upgrade-It. Important: After upgrading the DCM, the device will be rebooted. When the device participates into a device backup application and the device is active, a manual main-to-backup or backup-to-main transition must be performed before starting upgrade process. The following steps explain how to perform a manual transition: 1

Check if the inactive device is up and running.

2

Check if the configuration of the inactive device matches the configuration of the active device and modify if required.

3

Perform a manual transition:



Device backup controlled by ROSA's Digital Headend Backup Task On the GUI of the DHB task, click on the Backup Status tab, select the DCM section, and point to Backup to inactivate a main device or to Restore to inactivate a backup device. For more information concerning the Digital Headend Backup task, please refer to the Digital Headend Backup - User's Guide.



Device backup controlled by ROSA Element Manager On the GUI of the ROSA EM device, change the Backup State parameter on the Backup tab of the main device to: –

Backup to inactivate a main device

–

Inactive to inactivate a backup device

More information concerning device backup controlled by ROSA EM can be found in topic Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager on page 950 or in the ROSA Element Manager - User's Guide.



Standalone device backup On the user interface of the main DCM, click on the Configuration link and point to the Backup link. Click on Manual Backup to inactivate a main device or to on Manual Restore to inactivate a backup device. For more information concerning the standalone backup, please refer to Standalone Device Backup on page 956.

Hint: During downloading a software package for the DCM particular errors may arise (for instance an incomplete download). To ensure that the software package is error free, it can be checked by running verify.bat. This verify.bat file can be found in the package. 1142

4011746 Rev AG

Introduction

System Requirements To install the Upgrade-It software package and to run the application, the PC should meet the following minimum requirements.  Pentium™ processor, minimum 166 MHz.  128Mb of RAM  SVGA Graphics Adapter with minimum 800x600 resolution  Windows compatible mouse  Operating system

4011746 Rev AG

-

PC: Microsoft OS, Windows 98 or newer

-

Server: Microsoft OS, Windows NT 4.0 or newer

1143

Chapter 15 Software Upgrade

Upgrading the DCM Software using its User Interface For a DCM with software package version 10.0 or higher, the software package can be upgraded using its user interface. Therefor you have to log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group. The following procedure describes how to upgrade the software package of a DCM using its user interface. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Click on the Maintenance link that appears after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Maintenance page is displayed.

3

Under Upgrade Device, click on Browse...

Result: The upload dialog of the web browser appears. 4

Browse to \gui_upgrade in the software package.

5

Select the file that starts with DCM-MKII_64G for a D9902 device and the file that starts with DCM-16G for a D9900 or D9901 device and point to Open.

6

Press Upgrade. Result: The following confirmation box appears.

7

Click on OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation. Result: The following information window that indicates the upgrading progress appears after a while.

1144

4011746 Rev AG

Upgrading the DCM Software using its User Interface

After upgrading the software package, the device will automatically reboot, which takes some time. The following message box will be displayed when the device starts rebooting.

4011746 Rev AG

1145

Chapter 15 Software Upgrade

Upgrading the DCM Software using Upgrade-It Introduction For upgrading a DCM without using its user interface, Cisco provides the UpgradeIt tool. This tool runs as a stand-alone application on a remote PC, which is connected to the same LAN as a management port of the DCM. This software tool can be found in the tools directory of the DCM software upgrade package. During a software package upgrade, you must login to the DCM using an OS account for which FTP is enabled and the FTP external IP service of the DCM must be switched on. More information concerning OS accounts can be found in topic Device Security on page 17 and information about the external IP services in topic Network Connections and Statistics on page 83.

Opening the Upgrade-It Tool Perform the following steps to open the Upgrade-It tool. 1

Insert the DCM software upgrade package CD into the CD drive of the PC.

2

Browse to the Tools directory of the CD and start the Upgrade-It tool. Result: The Upgrade-It dialog is displayed.

1146

4011746 Rev AG

Upgrading the DCM Software using Upgrade-It

Notes:  The Upgrade-It tool is provided with a Reboot after Upgrade function that gives an additional and unnecessary reboot command to the DCM after the upgrading-process when enabled. Disabling this function can be done by pointing to the Settings menu and unchecking the Reboot after Upgrade menu item.

 The Upgrade-It tool is provided with an option that removes installation files after flashing. When this option is enabled during a DCM upgrade a number of error messages will be displayed. These errors have no effect on the upgrading process. Disabling this function can be done by pointing to the Settings menu and unchecking the Delete Files after Flashing menu item.

Selecting the Software Module Perform the following steps to select a software module and documentation package (configuration guide and online help) to upgrade the DCM software. 1

In the Available Modules box, click on Open.... Result: The Open dialog is displayed.

2

Browse to the folder containing the software module (*.txt).

3

Select the appropriate file and point to Open.



For a D9900 or D9901 device: DCM Software_16G.txt located under \Continuum DVP Digital Content Manager Upgrade Package



For a D9902 device: DCM2 Software_64G.txt located under \Continuum DVP Digital Content Manager MkII Upgrade Package

Result: The software module is displayed in the Available Modules box.

4011746 Rev AG

1147

Chapter 15 Software Upgrade

4

In the Available Modules box, check the software module that must be used to upgrade the DCM.

Selecting the Device The following procedure explains how to select the DCM that should be upgraded. 1

In the Target box, click on Add.... Result: The Add Target IP dialog is displayed.

2

Select IP Address or IP Address Range in the drop down box.

3

Enter the IP address of the DCM or the beginning address of the IP address range in the From box.

4

If IP Address Range is selected in the drop down box, enter the ending address of the IP address range in the To box.

5

Press Add to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation. Result: The devices corresponding the entered IP address or IP address range are reflected in the Targets box.

6

1148

In the Targets box, right-click on the DCM for which the software must be upgraded and point to Current User... in the shortcut menu.

4011746 Rev AG

Upgrading the DCM Software using Upgrade-It

Result: The Set Current User dialog appears.

7

In the User Name and Password box, enter the login settings of the OS account and click on OK.

8

Click on Refresh to refresh the Slot Details of the selected targets.

9

Select the file to be upgraded by selecting the check box manually in the Slot Details list or by pressing Select.

Flashing the Software The following procedure explains how to flash the software. 1

When Available Modules, Targets, and Slot Details are configured correctly, press Flash to start the upgrading process. Result: The Flash Status dialog box with the status of the software upgrade process is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

1149

Chapter 15 Software Upgrade

Notes:  After upgrading the software and publication package, the device will automatically reboot, which takes several minutes.  When the user interface was open during the upgrading process, you have to restart the web browser because the browser's cache may contain erroneous data. Important: After upgrading a DCM with software package version lower than 8.5 to a software package version 8.5 or higher, a number of accounts are automatically created. After the first login to the user interface a popup will be displayed showing the automatically created accounts.

1150

4011746 Rev AG

A

Appx auto letter

Appendix A

Customer Information Introduction This chapter contains information on obtaining product support.

In This Topic  

4011746 Rev AG

Product Support ................................................................................1152 Return Products for Repair..............................................................1154

1151

Appendix A Customer Information

Product Support Obtaining Support IF...

Then...

you have general questions about this product

contact your distributor or sales agent for product information or refer to product data sheets on www.Cisco.com.

you have technical questions about this product

call the nearest Technical Support center or Cisco office.

you have customer service questions or need a return material authorization (RMA) number

call the nearest Customer Service center or Cisco office.

Support Telephone Numbers This table lists the Technical Support and Customer Service numbers for your area. Region

Centers

Telephone and Fax Numbers

North America

Cisco Services

For Technical Support, call:

Atlanta, Georgia United States

 Toll-free: 1-800-722-2009  Local: 678-277-1120 (Press 2 at the prompt)

For Customer Service, call:    

Europe, Middle East, Africa

Belgium

Toll-free: 1-800-722-2009 Local: 678-277-1120 (Press 3 at the prompt) Fax: 770-236-5477 Email: [email protected]

For Technical Support, call:  Telephone: 32-56-445-197 or 32-56-445-155  Fax: 32-56-445-061

For Customer Service, call:  Telephone: 32-56-445-444  Fax: 32-56-445-051  Email: [email protected]

1152

Japan

Japan

 Telephone: 81-3-5908-2153 or +81-3-5908-2154  Fax: 81-3-5908-2155

Korea

Korea

 Telephone: 82-2-3429-8800  Fax: 82-2-3452-9748  Email: [email protected]

China (mainland)

China

 Telephone: 86-21-2401-4433  Fax: 86-21-2401-4455  Email: [email protected]

All other Asia Pacific countries & Australia

Hong Kong

 Telephone: 852-2588-4746  Fax: 852-2588-3139  Email: [email protected]

4011746 Rev AG

Product Support Region

Centers

Telephone and Fax Numbers

Brazil

Brazil

 Telephone: 11-55-08-9999  Fax: 11-55-08-9998  Email: [email protected] or [email protected]

Mexico, Central America, Caribbean

Mexico

For Technical Support, call:  Telephone: 52-3515152599  Fax: 52-3515152599

For Customer Service, call:  Telephone: 52-55-50-81-8425  Fax: 52-55-52-61-0893  Email: [email protected]

All other Latin America countries

Argentina

For Technical Support, call:  Telephone: 54-23-20-403340 ext 109  Fax: 54-23-20-403340 ext 103

For Customer Service, call:  Telephone: 770-236-5662  Fax: 770-236-5888  Email: [email protected]

4011746 Rev AG

1153

Appendix A Customer Information

Return Products for Repair Introduction You must have a return material authorization (RMA) number to return a product. Contact the nearest customer service center and follow their instructions. Returning a product to Cisco for repair includes the following steps:  Obtaining a RMA number  Obtaining a customer service center shipping address  Packing and shipping the product

Obtaining an RMA Number and Shipping Address You must have an RMA number to return products. RMA numbers are valid for 60 days. If you already have a number, but it is older than 60 days, you must contact a customer service representative to revalidate the number. You can return the product after the RMA number is revalidated. Follow these steps to obtain an RMA number and shipping address. 1

Contact a customer service representative to request a new RMA number or revalidate an existing one. Refer to the earlier section titled Support Telephone Numbers to find a customer service telephone number in your area.

2

Provide the following information to the customer service representative:

   

Product name, model number, part number, serial number (if applicable)

 

Any service contract details

Quantity of products to return A reason for returning the product Your company name, contact, telephone number, email address, and fax number Purchase order number of repair disposition authority, if available

Result: The customer service representative issues the RMA number and provides the shipping address. Notes: If you cannot provide a purchase order number:

1154



A proforma invoice listing all costs incurred will be sent to you at the completion of product repair.



Customer service must receive a purchase order number within 15 days after you receive the proforma invoice. 4011746 Rev AG

Return Products for Repair



Products can accrue costs through damage or misuse, or if no problem is found. Products incurring costs will not be returned to you without a valid purchase order number.



Proceed to Packing and Shipping the Product.

Packing and Shipping the Product Follow these instructions to pack the product and ship it to Cisco. 1

Are the product’s original container and packing material available?

 

If yes, pack the product in the container using the packing material. If no, pack the product in a sturdy, corrugated box, and cushion it with packing material.

Important:

2



You are responsible for delivering the returned product to Cisco safely and undamaged. Shipments damaged due to improper packaging may be refused and returned to you at your expense.



Do not return any power cords or accessories.

Write the following information on the outside of the container:

    

Your name Your complete address Your telephone number RMA number Problem description

Note: Absence of the RMA number may delay processing of product repair and/or result in the equipment being returned unrepaired. Include the RMA number in all correspondence. 3

Ship the product to the address provided by the customer service representative. Note: Cisco does not accept freight collect. Be sure to prepay and insure all shipments.

4011746 Rev AG

1155

B

Appx auto letter

Appendix B

Extended Operations Introduction This appendix describes how to download MIBs and traces from the DCM.

In This Topic      

4011746 Rev AG

Viewing Trace Logs ..........................................................................1158 Downloading MIBs from the DCM ................................................1165 Capturing Live Network Data ........................................................1167 Restarting the System .......................................................................1169 Checking the CPU Load...................................................................1174 Using DCM's Script Engine .............................................................1175

1157

Appendix B Extended Operations

Viewing Trace Logs Introduction The DCM keeps a number of trace logs containing data and troubleshooting information of particular events. These trace logs and information are useful for troubleshooting purposes and can directly be opened using the user interface of the DCM. The trace logs can also be downloaded to the hard disk of your PC. The user interface of the DCM allows consulting the following trace logs: Security Log, GUI Trace, Action Log, ORB Trace, ORB Timings, Mainboard Trace, Board 1 - 4 Trace (D9900 device), Board 1 - 2 (D9901 device), Transrater Trace, DPI Trace, SNMP Trace, and Transcoder Trace. Note: The Transrater Trace and DPI Trace are only available if licenses are present. The following illustration shows an example of a Mainboard Trace log:

1158

4011746 Rev AG

Viewing Trace Logs

Determining the Trace Log Content Introduction The content of particular trace logs can be modified. The content of the device and card logs can be determined by selecting modules and choosing a trace level and the content of the ORB trace log can be determined by changing the ORB trace level.

Determining the Content of the Device and Card Trace Logs The following procedure explains how to change the trace logs parameters to determine the content of device and/or card trace logs. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Traces link that appears after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Traces page containing the Device Trace Settings table is displayed.

2

In the Device Trace Settings table, configure the following settings: a

In the Trace Level drop down box of the corresponding card, select one of the following values: None, All, Minor, or Major. Note: When the Trace Level parameter is set to All, Minor, or Major, the following warning icon is added in the header of the user interface indicating the DCM is in service mode.

b

In the Modules box of the corresponding card, tick or clear the desired module check box(es). Note: All module check boxes can be set or cleared by pointing to the corresponding Enabled All or Disabled All button.

c 4011746 Rev AG

Repeat step a and b for all interface cards. 1159

Appendix B Extended Operations

3

Point to Apply.

Changing the ORB Trace Level The following steps explain how to change the ORB Trace level. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Traces link that appears after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Traces page is displayed.

2

In the ORB Trace Level drop down box under the ORB Trace Settings, select the ORB Trace level received from our representative.

Opening a Trace Log in the User Interface Opening the Complete Trace Log The following procedure explains how to view a trace log. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Traces link that appears after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Traces page is displayed.

2

In the Trace Logs table, click on

of the trace log that must be opened.

Result: The selected trace log opens.

Opening and Filtering a Trace Log The procedure below describes how to open and to filter a trance log.

1160

4011746 Rev AG

Viewing Trace Logs

1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Traces link that appears after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Traces page is displayed.

2

In the Trace Logs table, click on

of the trace log that must be opened.

Result: The selected trace log opens.

4011746 Rev AG

1161

Appendix B Extended Operations

3

In the filter (

) drop down box, select the desired filter.

Result: The trace log is filtered using the selected filter. Hint: Pressing beside the filter ( unfiltered trace log.

) drop down box opens the page of the

Checking Troubleshooting Information The following steps describe how to display particular troubleshooting information of the DCM. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Traces link that appears after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Traces page is displayed.

2

In the Troubleshooting Info table, point to the Link arrow of the troubleshooting information that must be checked.

Note: The troubleshooting information that can be checked depends on the configuration of the device. The following picture shows the Transport Stream Index Info.

1162

4011746 Rev AG

Viewing Trace Logs

Downloading Trace Logs Introduction The user interface of the DCM allows downloading individual trace log files or exporting of all trace log files compressed into one file.

Downloading a Single Trace Log File The procedure below explains how to download a single trace log file. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Traces link that appears after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Traces page is displayed.

2

In the Trace Logs table, click on

of the log file that must be downloaded.

Result: The File Download dialog is displayed. 3

Browse to the folder in which the file should be saved and give the file a name.

4

Confirm the operation.

Exporting the Trace Log Files The export function of the user interface of the DCM compresses all trace log files into a single file and exports this file to the hard disk of your PC. This file can also include the Core files and hardware statistics of the DCM. Note: A file containing the core files is very large. The following procedure explains how to download the trace log files using the export function. 1

4011746 Rev AG

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Traces link that appears after clicking on the Help link. 1163

Appendix B Extended Operations

Result: The Traces page is displayed. 2

Under the Trace Export settings, tick the Include Core Files check box if the Core files of the DCM must be included and the Include Hardware Statistics check box if the hardware statistics must be included.

3

Press Export. Result: The File Download dialog appears after a while.

4

Point to Save. Result: The Save As dialog is displayed. Note: If the file should be saved in a different folder, locate and open the folder.

1164

5

In the File Name box, enter a name for the file.

6

Click on Save to confirm or on Cancel to abort the operation.

7

When the core files are exported, press Delete beside Delete Core Files to remove the core files from the device.

4011746 Rev AG

Downloading MIBs from the DCM

Downloading MIBs from the DCM Introduction In order to build your own GUI, the MIB files used by the DCM can be downloaded from the DCM to the hard disk of your PC using the File Transfer Protocol (FTP).

To Download MIB files The procedure below describes how a MIB file can be copied from a DCM to the hard disk of a PC using FTP. Important: The FTP external IP service must be enabled to download MIBs using FTP, see topic External IP Services on page 83. 1

Launch the Internet Explorer browser and in the Address line of the browser enter the following instruction: ftp://X.X.X.X/mibs/ Where X.X.X.X is the IP address of your DCM. Result: The Log On As dialog is displayed.

2

Log on using an OS account of which the FTP option is enabled. Result: After pressing Log On, the directory containing the MIB files is shown.

4011746 Rev AG

1165

Appendix B Extended Operations

3

1166

Copy the MIB file to your local hard disk.

4011746 Rev AG

Capturing Live Network Data

Capturing Live Network Data Introduction For troubleshooting purposes the DCM allows capturing ethernet network data on its management ports, local host, or on the ports of its GbE Interface Card(s). The captured information (max. 150 MB) is stored into multiple files and compressed into a single file. For capturing ethernet network data, two modes are foreseen, a standard and an expert mode. Capturing ethernet network data using the expert mode can only be done on Cisco's request and the data required to setup a capture process will be given by your customer service representative. CAUTION: Capturing network data introduces additional CPU load and can influence the correct operation of the DCM.

To Capture Network Data The following steps explain how to capture network data and to download this information to your PC. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Click on the Maintenance link that appears after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Maintenance page is displayed.

3

4011746 Rev AG

For a standard capture, point to the Standard selection button under the Start a Capture settings and complete the following settings:

a

In the Board drop down box, select the board.

b

For a GbE Interface Card, complete the following settings to specify the network details: –

Enter the port in the TS GbE Port box.

–

Enter the destination IP address in the TS IP Address box. 1167

Appendix B Extended Operations

–

Enter the UDP port number in the TS UDP Port box.

c

In the Stop If box, enter the string that should be used to stop the capturing process if it occurs.

d

Under Is found in, tick the check boxes of the traces in which the string has to occur for stopping the capturing process.

4

For an expert capture, point to the Expert selection button and configure the parameters as given by your Cisco representative.

5

Under the Start a Capture settings, configure the parameters as given by your Cisco representative.

6

Click on Start. Result: Capturing is started and an entry is added to the Capture Settings Overview table.

When the event for which capturing is started occurs, the process will be stopped. Hint: A capture process can manually be stopped by pressing the Capture Settings Overview table.

icon in the

Once the capture process is completed, the icon appears in the Actions column for the corresponding capture entry. Click on this icon to download the file. Important: After downloading the file, click on

1168

to remove the file from the DCM.

4011746 Rev AG

Restarting the System

Restarting the System Introduction  The DCM or an IP Video Gateway Card of the DCM can be restarted from a remote location using its user interface. Three different restart actions can be given:  Warm restart (device or IP Video Gateway Card): the device or card restarts with its previous settings.  Cold restart (device or IP Video Gateway Card): the device restarts and the previous configuration settings are lost. Performing a Cold restart of the device do not remove the security settings, the network settings of the 10/100 Base-t and GbE interface of the DCM housing, and license file.  Factory restart (device only): the device restarts and all previous settings (even the security settings and the network settings of the ethernet ports of the DCM housing) and license file are lost. The device becomes in the state as when it leaves our assembly line. Important: Restarting the DCM with a Factory restart brings the device in the same state as when it leaves our assembly line. After such restart an initial security setup must be done and the procedures to do this are described in topic Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration on page 1231. Download this User's Guide to your PC since the user interface of the DCM is not accessible during this setup. The license file can be retrieved using the Cisco online License-IT application via the World Wide Web and a standard web browser. After submitting the equipment's Device Host ID the license file is returned by e-mail. The License-IT application is accessible by entering the following URL in your web browser: https://online.sciatl.com/license-it. For more information about the License-IT application, see also the application note License Key Protected Options. Notes:  Performing a Cold or Factory restart can only be done using the user interface when you are logged on to the DCM with a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.  A Factory restart can also be done by restarting the DCM (Cold or Warm restart or by powering up the device) while the DCM hardware key (with pin 1 and 4 connected to pin 6) is plugged in into the I/O connector of the DCM. When the DCM hardware key is plugged in, the following icon is displayed in the user interface header, see picture below.

4011746 Rev AG

The illustration below shows the I/O connector of the D9900 device with 1169

Appendix B Extended Operations

-

mating field-wiring connector.

The illustration below shows the I/O connector of the D9901 device with mating field-wiring connector.

 A Factory restart removes the CA certificate for HTTPS from the DCM and a new one is generated at bootup time. After performing a Factory restart, the CA certificates of all PCs used to configure and to monitor the DCM using its user interface must be removed and the new generated CA certificate must be installed. A warm restart of the DCM can also be triggered using a GPIO contact. The procedure to configure the GPIO contacts and to assign a GPIO contact for rebooting the DCM can be found in topic Configuring the GPIO Contacts on page 80. When the device participates into a device backup application and the device is active, a manual main-to-backup or backup-to-main transition must be performed before restarting the device (Warm restart). The following steps explain how to perform a manual transition:

1170

1

Check if the inactive device is up and running.

2

Check if the configuration of the inactive device matches the configuration of the active device and modify if required.

3

Perform a manual transition:

4011746 Rev AG

Restarting the System



Device backup controlled by ROSA's Digital Headend Backup Task On the GUI of the DHB task, click on the Backup Status tab, select the DCM section, and point to Backup to inactivate a main device or to Restore to inactivate a backup device. For more information concerning the Digital Headend Backup task, please refer to the Digital Headend Backup - User's Guide.



Device backup controlled by ROSA Element Manager On the GUI of the ROSA EM device, change the Backup State parameter on the Backup tab of the main device to: –

Backup to inactivate a main device

–

Inactive to inactivate a backup device

More information concerning device backup controlled by ROSA EM can be found in topic Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager on page 950 or in the ROSA Element Manager - User's Guide.



Standalone device backup On the user interface of the main DCM, click on the Configuration link and point to the Backup link. Click on Manual Backup to inactivate a main device or to on Manual Restore to inactivate a backup device. For more information concerning the standalone backup, please refer to Standalone Device Backup on page 956.

To Restart the DCM System The following steps explain how to restart a DCM or an IP Video Gateway Card using the user interface. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group when the device or IP Video Interface Card must be restarted using a Cold or Factory restart.

2

On the user interface, point to the Maintenance link that appears after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Maintenance page is displayed.

3

Under Reboot in the drop down box beside the Reboot button, select Device to restart the device or select the IP Video Gateway Card that must be restarted.

4

In the drop down box under Reboot, select the desired action: Warm, Cold, or Factory.

4011746 Rev AG

1171

Appendix B Extended Operations WARNING:

5



After performing a Factory restart, all configuration settings, network setting, licenses, and security settings will be lost.



After restarting the DCM using a Cold restart, all configuration settings will be lost.



After restarting the DCM using a Warm restart, the outgoing services will be interrupted.

Press Reboot. Result: A confirmation popup is displayed.

6



Warm restart confirmation popup



Cold restart confirmation popup



Factory restart confirmation popup

Press OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation.

Important: After performing a Factory restart, the initial security configuration setup must be done. The procedure to do this is described in topic Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration on page 1231. Notes:  Booting the DCM can take some time depending on the configuration and the features of the device.  After changing settings using the user interface, it takes at most 5 minutes before 1172

4011746 Rev AG

Restarting the System

these settings are stored in non-volatile memory. When the DCM is powered down during this time, these settings will be lost. To deal with this, wait 5 minutes before powering down the DCM or trigger a Warm Restart and wait 20 seconds before powering down the DCM by unplugging the power cord.  For a D9902 device the time that the system is up since the last cold reboot is displayed at the bottom of the Maintenance page.

4011746 Rev AG

1173

Appendix B Extended Operations

Checking the CPU Load Processing video and/or audio services consumes particular CPU power of the main board and corresponding interface or processing card. For the main board, interface cards, and the processing cards, the CPU power that isn't used can be checked as described in the following procedure. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Maintenance link that appears after clicking on the Help link. Result: The Maintenance page is displayed.

2

Under CPU Load at the bottom of this page, select main board or card for which the CPU power, which is not in use, must be checked.

3

Click on Get Load. Result: The Idle Time parameter displays the current CPU power that is not in use.

1174

4011746 Rev AG

Using DCM's Script Engine

Using DCM's Script Engine Introduction DCM's script engine allows adding additional functionality to the DCM by running scripts. Scripts, uploaded to DCM's script library, must be started manually. When a script has to be restarted after a reboot of the DCM, the autorun function of the script must be activated. Particular scripts need additional information before they can be started. This information must be given by uploading a configuration file. Please contact your Cisco representative to obtain scripts.

Working with DCM's Script Library Uploading Scripts to DCM's Script Library The following steps describe how to add scripts to DCM's script library. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Point to the Scripts link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Script Engine page is displayed.

3

Point to Browse beside the Scripts box.

Result: The Choose file or similar dialog is displayed. 4

Browse to the folder containing the script (*.gz). Result: The path and file name of the script is displayed in the Scripts box.

5

Click on Add Script. Result: When the script is successfully uploaded, it is added to the Scripts table.

Uploading Script Configuration Files Once the script is uploaded, the associated configuration file can be uploaded. The following procedure describes how to upload a configuration file to the DCM.

4011746 Rev AG

1175

Appendix B Extended Operations

1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Scripts link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Script Engine page is displayed.

2

In the Config drop down box, select the script for which the configuration file must be uploaded.

3

Point to Browse beside the Add Config button. Result: The Choose file dialog is displayed.

4

Browse to the folder containing the configuration file (*.cfg).

5

Click on Add Config. Result: The configuration file is uploaded.

Removing Scripts from DCM's Script Library Perform the following steps to delete a script from the DCM script library. 1

Log on to the DCM using a GUI account belonging to the administrators security group.

2

Point to the Scripts link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Script Engine page is displayed.

3

In the Script table, click on

in the row of the script that must be removed.

Result: The script with associated configuration file is removed from the script library of the DCM.

Starting and Stopping Scripts To Start a Script The following steps explain how to start a script. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Scripts link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Script Engine page is displayed.

2

1176

In the Script table, click on

in the row of the script that must be started.

4011746 Rev AG

Using DCM's Script Engine

To Start a Scripts with Activated Autorun Function The following procedure describes how to start a script while its autorun function is automatically activated. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Scripts link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Script Engine page is displayed.

2

In the Scripts table, tick the Auto check box in the row of the script that must be started with autorun function activated.

3

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation. Result: The script is started and its autorun function is activated.

Hint: The autorun function of a script can be deactivated by clearing its Auto check box, even when the script is running.

To Stop a Running Script The following steps explain how to stop a running script. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Scripts link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Script Engine page is displayed.

2

In the Script table, click on

in the row of the script that must be stopped.

Downloading a Script Log file from the DCM During running a script, particular events are logged into a log file. The following procedure explains how to download a log file of a script from the DCM. 1

On the user interface of the DCM, point to the Scripts link that appears after clicking on the Configuration link. Result: The Script Engine page is displayed.

2

4011746 Rev AG

In the Script table, click on downloaded.

in the row of the script for which a log file must be

1177

Appendix B Extended Operations

Result: The File Download or similar dialog is displayed. 3

1178

Point to the Save File selection button and click on OK.

4011746 Rev AG

C

Appx auto letter

Appendix C

Additional Configuration Introduction This appendix outlines the following additional configurations, like configuring IP security on a computer, setting up the initial security configuration of a DCM, installing and removing CA certificates...

In This Topic   

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows ......................................................1180 Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration ...............................1220 Installing and Removing CA Certificates ......................................1234

1179

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Configuring IPsec on Windows Introduction To ensure secure communication between the DCM and the computer running the user interface of the DCM, IP Security (IPsec) can be used. The procedures in this topic describe the IP Security configuration for a computer running Windows XP Professional or Windows 2003 Server, and for a computer running Windows Vista and Windows 7. The procedure to configure IPsec for DCM is described in topic Configuring IP Security on page 75. Note: The DCM uses Internet Key Exchange (IKE) for IP security. IKE is configured to use preshared keys that can be set by the user. The DCM supports 3DES encryption, MD5/SHA1 hashing, and Diffie-Hellman group 2. The procedures to configure a computer running Windows XP, Windows 2003 Server, or Windows Visa are set up as an example with correct settings for the DCM and with MD5 hashing. For a computer running Windows 7, a set up is giving with SHA1.

To Configure IPsec on a Computer Running Windows XP or Windows 2000 Server Windows XP or Windows 2003 Server can be configured to use IPsec using the Microsoft Management Console (MMC). The MMC is a generic management console that can manage many different Windows components. IPsec configuration in Windows consists of four main tasks:  Access the IPsec management console.  Create IP address lists to identify computers.  Create Filter actions to define encryption parameters.  Create Policies that put IP address lists and filter actions together. Each of these tasks is described below. Note: You must be an Administrator user to perform these tasks.

Accessing the IPsec Management Console The following steps explain how to open the IPsec management console. Launching MMC The following steps explain how to open the MMC main screen. 1 1180

From the Windows desktop, click on Start in the System Tray, and then choose Run… from the Start menu. 4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

Result: The Run dialog box appears.

2

Enter mmc in the Open drop down box, and then click on OK. Result: The MMC main screen appears as shown below.

Adding the Appropriate Snap-In In order for MMC to manage the IPsec component, you must add the appropriate IPsec snap-in as follows: 1

From the File menu, choose Add/Remove Snap-in. Result: The Add/Remove Snap-in dialog appears as shown below.

4011746 Rev AG

1181

Appendix C Additional Configuration

2

Click on Add. Result: The Add Standalone Snap-in dialog appears as shown below.

3

In the Available Standalone Snap-ins box, choose IP Security Policy Management and then click on Add. Result: The Select Computer or Domain dialog appears as shown below.

1182

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

4

Confirm that the Local computer selection button is selected, and then click on Finish.

5

Click on Close to close the Add Standalone Snap-in dialog and to return to the Add/Remove Snap-in dialog.

6

Confirm that IP Security Policies on Local Computer now appears in the Standalone tab of this dialog.

7

Click on OK to return to the management console. Result: The screen should now appear as shown below.

4011746 Rev AG

1183

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Note: If Console Root is highlighted in the left-hand pane, click on IP Security Policies on Local Computer to display the options shown in the right-hand pane above. Hint: The IP Security Policies on Local Computer settings can also be accessed via Control Panel / Administrative Tools / Local Security Policy.

Creating a New IP List Complete the following steps to create a new IP list. 1

In the left-hand pane of the Management Console, right-click on the IP Security Policies on Local Computer item and choose Manage IP filter lists and filter actions from the shortcut menu. Result: The Manage IP filter lists and filter Actions dialog appears as shown below.

2

Click on Add to open the IP Filter List dialog. Result: The IP Filter List dialog is displayed. Note that the default name New IP Filter List appears in the Name box.

3

1184

In the Name box, replace the default name with a new list name that is meaningful to you (Headend IPs in the example below).

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

4

Confirm that the Use Add Wizard check box is checked, and then click on Add to start the IP Filter List wizard.

5

Complete the steps of the wizard as follows: a

IP Filter Description and Mirrored property (Windows 2003 Server only). This specifies a filter in each direction. Tick the Mirrored. Match packets with the exact opposite source and destination addresses check box.

b

IP Traffic Source. This identifies the source of IP traffic for this list. Choose My IP Address from the drop down box, and then click on the Next box.

c

IP Traffic Destination. This identifies the destination of the IP traffic for this list. Choose A specific IP Address from the drop down box, then enter the IP address of the destination device, and then click on Next.

d

IP Protocol Type. This identifies what protocols are valid for this list. Choose Any from the drop down box, and then click on Next.

e

Click on Finish. For a computer running Windows 2003 Server, the IP Filter Properties dialog is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

1185

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Click on OK to close the IP Filter Properties dialog. Result: The IP Filter List dialog should now appear as shown below.

1186

6

Click on OK to return to the Manage IP filter lists and filter actions dialog.

7

Confirm that the new IP list now appears in the IP Filter Lists box.

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

Creating a New Filter Action Complete the following steps to create a new filter action. 1

Click on the Manage Filter Actions tab to show current filter actions and to add a new entry for the ROSA EM. Result: The tab opens as shown below.

2

Click on Add to start the Filter Action wizard.

3

At the wizard welcome screen, click on Next >.

4

Complete the steps of the wizard as follows: a

Filter Action Name. Replace the default name New Filter Action with a meaningful name for the new action (for instance Headend IPsec Filter), and then click on Next >.

b

Filter Action General Options. Select the Negotiate Security selection button, and then click on Next >.

c

Communicating with computers that do not support IPsec. Choose Do not communicate with computers that do not support IPsec, and then click on Next >.

d

IP Traffic Security. Select the Custom selection button, and then click on Settings. Result: The Custom Security Method Settings dialog appears as shown below.

4011746 Rev AG

1187

Appendix C Additional Configuration

e

Tick the Data integrity and encryption (ESP) check box and then select MD5 and 3DES from the Integrity algorithm and Encryption algorithm drop down boxes, respectively.

f

Click on OK to save your selections and return to the Filter Action wizard IP Traffic Security wizard page.

g

Click on Next to proceed to the final page of the Filter Action wizard.

h

Click on Finish. Result: The new filter action should now appear in the Filter Actions box as shown below.

1188

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

5

Double-click on the filter action you just created to open the Headend IPsec Filter Properties dialog.

6

On the Security Methods tab, confirm that the Session key perfect forward secrecy check box is checked and the other boxes are cleared, as shown in the picture below.

7

When finished, click on OK to close the Headend IPsec filter Properties dialog and return to the Manage IP filter lists and filter actions dialog.

4011746 Rev AG

1189

Appendix C Additional Configuration

8

Click on Close to close this dialog and return to the MMC dialog.

To Create a New IPsec Policy Complete the following steps to create a new IPsec policy. 1

Right-click on the right-hand pane of the MMC, and then point to Create IP Security Policy... in the shortcut menu to open the IP Security Policy wizard.

2

At the wizard welcome screen, click on Next > to continue, and then complete the steps of the wizard as follows: a

1190

IP Security Policy Name. In the Name box, replace the default policy name with a name that is more meaningful to you (for instance Headend Policy), and then click on Next >.

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

b

Requests for Secure Communication. Confirm that the Activate the default response rule check box is not checked, and then click on Next >.

c

On the final page of the wizard, confirm that the Edit Properties check box is checked, and then click on Finish. Result: The Headend Policy Properties dialog appears as shown below.

3

Select the General tab and click on Advanced. Result: The Key Exchange Settings dialog is displayed.

4

Point to Methods.... Result: The Key Exchange Security Methods dialog is displayed.

4011746 Rev AG

1191

Appendix C Additional Configuration

5

In the Security method preference order list box, select a security method with 3DES encryption and move it to the top of the list by clicking on Move up. Note: When the desired method is not available, an existing method can be modified by clicking on Edit... or a new method can be created by clicking on Add....

Select the desired Integrity algorithm, Encryption Algorithm (3DES), and Diffie-Hellman group (Medium (2)) in the corresponding drop down boxes and press OK to close the dialog. 6

Click on OK to close the Key Exchange Security Methods dialog and to return to the Key Exchange Settings dialog.

7

Click on OK to close the Key Exchange Settings dialog and to return to the Headend Policy Properties dialog.

8

Clear the Use Add Wizard check box and then click on Add…. Result: The New Rule Properties dialog appears as shown below.

1192

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

9

On the IP Filter List tab, select the Headend IPs selection button.

10 On the Filter Action tab, select the Headend IPsec Filter selection button. 11 On the Authentication Methods tab, click on Add. Result: The New Authentication Method Properties dialog appears as shown below.

12 Select the Use this string (preshared key) selection button, and then enter alphanumeric string (between 1 and 200 characters). 4011746 Rev AG

1193

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Note: Be sure to make a note of this string, as it must exactly match the preshared key entered in the destination device. 13 Click on OK to save the preshared key entry and return to the New Rule Properties dialog. Result: The preshared key is added to the Authentication method preference order box.

14 Select the existing Kerberos entry, and then click on Remove to delete this entry from the list. 15 In the confirmation dialog, click on Yes to accept the changes. 16 Click on OK to close the New Rule Properties dialog. Result: The Edit Rule Properties dialog should now display only the newly entered rule.

1194

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

17 Close the dialog to return to the MMC. Confirm that the new policy now appears on the right-hand pane. 18 Right-click on the new policy, and then choose Assign in the shortcut menu to activate the policy. If all of the above steps were performed correctly and the destination device is also configured properly, the computer will now require IPsec to talk to the destination device. Note: If you have difficulty communicating with the destination device after completing this procedure, ask your system administrator for assistance.

To Unassign IPsec To disable IPsec on a computer running Windows XP or Windows 2003 Server, you must unassign the IPsec policy as follows: 1

Open the Management Console as described in topic Accessing the IPsec Management Console on page 1180.

2

In the right-hand pane of the Management Console, right-click on the IPsec policy and point to Un-assign in the shortcut menu.

For Further Information Additional information on configuring IPsec for Windows XP Professional and Windows 2003 Server is available on the following web page: http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?familyid=a774012a-ac25-4a1d8851-b7a09e3f1dc9&displaylang=en 4011746 Rev AG

1195

Appendix C Additional Configuration

To Configure IPsec on a Computer Running Windows Vista Configuring the IPsec Settings The following procedure explains how to set up an IPsec connection for Windows Vista. Note: You must be an Administrator user to perform these tasks. 1

From the Windows desktop, click on Start in the System Tray, and then choose Control Panel. Result: The Control Panel dialog appears.

2

In the left-hand pane of the Control Panel dialog, point to Classic View.

3

In the right-hand pane of the Control Panel dialog, double-click on Administrative Tools. Result: The Control Panel - Administrative Tools dialog appears.

4

Double-click on Windows Firewall with Advanced Security. Result: The User Account Control might appear.

5

Click on Continue. Result: The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog appears.

1196

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

6

Select Connection Security Rules in the left hand pane of the dialog.

7

Right-click in the Connection Security Rules pane and point to New Rule... in the shortcut menu. Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Rule Type dialog appears.

8

4011746 Rev AG

Select the Server-to-server selection button and click on Next >.

1197

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Endpoints dialog appears.

9

Under Which computers are in Endpoint 1?, select the These IP addresses selection button and click on Add.... Result: The IP Address dialog for Endpoint 1 appears.

10 Select the This IP address or subnet selection button. 11 Enter the IP address of this computer in the corresponding box and press OK to close the IP Address dialog and to return to the New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Endpoints dialog. 1198

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

12 Under Which computers are in Endpoint 2?, select the These IP addresses selection button and click on Add.... Result: The IP Address dialog for Endpoint 2 appears. 13 Select the This IP address or subnet selection button. 14 Enter the IP address of the destination device in the corresponding box and press OK to close the IP Address dialog and to return to the New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Endpoints dialog. 15 Click on Next >. Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Requirements dialog appears.

16 Select the Required authentication for inbound and outbound connections selection button and click on Next >. Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Authentication Method dialog appears.

4011746 Rev AG

1199

Appendix C Additional Configuration

17 Select the Preshared Key selection button. 18 In the Key box, enter the preshared key and press Next >. Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Profile dialog appears.

19 Leave all check boxes ticked and press Next >. 1200

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Name dialog appears.

20 In the Name box, enter a name for the IPsec connection (Headend IPs in the example). 21 Click on Finish to close the wizard and to return to the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog. 22 In the left hand pane of the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog, right-click on Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer and point to Properties in the shortcut menu. Result: The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer dialog appears. 23 Click on the IPsec Settings tab Result: The IPsec Settings tab page appears.

4011746 Rev AG

1201

Appendix C Additional Configuration

24 Press Customize.... Result: The Customize IPsec Settings dialog appears.

1202

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

25 In the Key exchange (Main Mode) selection box, select the Advanced selection button and point to the corresponding Customize... button. Result: The Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog appears.

26 In the Key exchange algorithm selection box, select the desired algorithm for key exchange (Diffie-Hellman Group 2). 27 In the Security methods box, press Add. Result: The Security Method dialog appears.

4011746 Rev AG

1203

Appendix C Additional Configuration

a

In the Encryption algorithm selection box, select the desired encryption algorithm for key exchange (3DES).

b

In the Integrity algorithm selection box, select the desired integrity algorithm (MD5).

c

Press OK to close the Security Method dialog and to return to the Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog.

Result: The selected key exchange method is added to the Security methods list box. Note: In the Security methods box, at least one method must match a key exchange method of the destination device. 28 Click on OK to close the Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog and to return to the Customize IPsec Settings dialog. 29 In the Data protection (Quick Mode) selection box, select the Advanced selection button and press the corresponding Customize... button. Result: The Customize Data Protection Settings dialog appears.

1204

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

30 In the Data integrity and encryption box, point to Add.... Result: The Integrity and Encryption Algorithms dialog appears.

a

4011746 Rev AG

In the Protocol selection box, select the desired protocol for data protection (ESP). 1205

Appendix C Additional Configuration

b

In the Encryption algorithm selection box, select the desired encryption algorithm for data protection (3DES).

c

In the Integrity algorithm selection box, select the desired integrity algorithm (MD5)

d

In the Key lifetime (in minutes) box, enter or choose the time a key will be used for data integrity before a new key will be generated. A lifetime can be chosen in the range from 5 minutes up to 2,879 minutes.

e

In the Key lifetime (in KB) box, enter or choose the amount of data that will be sent with a key before a new key will be generated. A lifetime can be chosen in the range from 20,480 KB up to 2,147,483,647 KB.

f

Press OK to close the Integrity and Encryption Algorithms dialog and to return to the Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog.

Result: The selected data protection method is added to the Data integrity and encryption algorithms box. Note: In the Data integrity and encryption algorithms box, at least one method must match a data protection method of the destination device. 31 Press OK to close Customize Data Protection Settings dialog and to return to the Customize IPsec Settings dialog. 32 Press OK to close the Customize IPsec Settings dialog and to return to the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer dialog. 33 Close the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog.

Enabling or Disabling IPsec Enabling or disabling IPsec on a computer running Windows Vista can be done as follows: 1

Open the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog as described in topic Configuring the IPsec Settings on page 1196.

2

In the left hand pane of the dialog, point to Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer.

3

In the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer pane, right-click on the IPsec entry and select Enable Rule or Disable Rule in the shortcut menu.

To Configure IPsec on a Computer Running Windows 7 Configuring the IPsec Settings The following procedure explains how to set up an IPsec configuration for Windows 7. Notes: You must be an Administrator user to perform these tasks. 1

1206

From the Windows desktop, click on Start button in the System Tray, and then choose Control Panel. 4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

Result: The Control Panel - All Control Panel Items dialog is displayed.

2

4011746 Rev AG

Under the Adjust your computer's settings, click on Windows Firewall.

1207

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Result: The Windows Firewall page appears.

3

If the Windows firewall is switched off, switched on the firewall by pointing Turn Windows Firewall on or off in the left-hand pane of the dialog, select Turn on Windows Firewall, and click on OK.

4

In the left-hand pane of the dialog, point to Advanced settings. Result: The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog appears.

5 1208

In the left-hand pane of the dialog, click on Connection Security Rules. 4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

Result: The Connection Security Rules page appears.

6

In the right-hand pane of the dialog, point to New Rule.... Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard appears.

7

4011746 Rev AG

Select Server-to-server and click on Next >.

1209

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Result: The Endpoints page appears.

8

Under Which computers are in Endpoint 1?, select These IP addresses. and point to Add.... Result: The IP Address dialog for Endpoint 2 appears.

9

Keep This IP address or subnet selected and enter the IP address of this computer in the corresponding box

10 Press OK to close the IP Address dialog and to return to the Endpoints page of the New Connection Security Rule Wizard dialog. 1210

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

11 Under Which computers are in Endpoint 2?, select These IP addresses and click on Add.... Result: The IP Address dialog for Endpoint 2 appears. 12 Select This IP address or subnet and enter the IP address of the destination device in the corresponding box 13 Press OK to close the IP Address dialog and to return to the Endpoints page of the New Connection Security Rule Wizard dialog. 14 Click on Next >. Result: The Requirements page appears.

15 Select Required authentication for inbound and outbound connections and click on Next >.

4011746 Rev AG

1211

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Result: The Authentication Method page appears.

16 Select Advanced and click on Customize. Result: The Customize Advanced Authentication Methods dialog appears.

17 Under First authentication, click on Add....

1212

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

Result: The Add First Authentication Method dialog appears.

18 Select Preshared key (not recommended), enter the preshared key in the corresponding box, and press OK to confirm and close the dialog. 19 Click on OK to confirm and to close the dialog. 20 On the Profile page of the New Connection Security Rule Wizard dialog click on Next >.

4011746 Rev AG

1213

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Result: The Profile page appears in the dialog.

21 Leave the defaults and click on Next>. Result: The Name page of the wizard appears.

1214

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

22 In the Name box, enter a name for the rule and in the Description [optional] box a description and click on Finish to close the wizard. 23 In the left-hand pane of the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog, select Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer. 24 Click on the Action menu and select Properties.

Result: The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer Pr.. dialog appears.

25 Click on the IPsec Settings tab.

4011746 Rev AG

1215

Appendix C Additional Configuration

26 Click on Customize.... Result: The Customize IPsec Settings dialog appears.

27 Under Key exchange (Main Mode), select Advanced and click on Customize.... Result: The Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog appears. 1216

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

28 Click on Add.... Result: The Add Security Method dialog appears.

29 Set the Integrity algorithm to SHA-1, the Encryption algorithm to AES-CBC 128, and the Key exchange algorithm to Diffie-Hellman Group 2. 30 Click on OK to confirm and to close the dialog.

4011746 Rev AG

1217

Appendix C Additional Configuration

31 Close the Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog by clicking on OK. 32 In the Customize IP sec Settings dialog, select Advanced under Data protection (Quick Mode) and click on Customize.... Result: The Customized Data Protection Settings dialog appears.

33 Tick the Require encryption for all connection security rules that use these settings. check box and click on Add... under Data integrity and encryption. Result: The Add Integrity and Encryption Algorithms dialog appears.

1218

4011746 Rev AG

Configuring IPsec on Windows

34 Under Protocol, select ESP (recommened) and under Algorithms, set Encryption algorithm to AES-CBC 128 and Integrity algorithm to SHA-1. 35 Click on OK to confirm and to close the dialog. 36 On the Customize Data Protection Settings, click on OK to close the dialog. 37 Click on OK in the Customize IPsec Settings dialog to close this dialog. 38 Click on OK in the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer Pr... dialog to close this dialog. 39 Close both the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security and Control Panel dialog.

Enabling or Disabling IPsec Enabling or disabling IPsec on a computer running Windows 7 can be done as follows: 1

Open the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog as described in topic Configuring the IPsec Settings on page 1206.

2

In the left hand pane of the dialog, point to Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer.

3

In the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer pane, right-click on the IPsec entry and select Enable Rule or Disable Rule in the shortcut menu.

4011746 Rev AG

1219

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration Introduction This section provides the procedures that must be done after a Factory restart for a D9900 or D9901 device. The procedure that should be done for a D9902 is described in the system guide that is shipped with this device. Important:  For setting up of new devices, use the procedure that is described in the system guide shipped with the device.  During the initial security configuration, only IPv4 addresses can be assigned to the management ports of the DCM. Once this initial security configuration is completed, IPv6 addresses can be assigned as described in topic Modifying Network Settings of the Management Ports.

Removing the Old CA Certificate During the initial security configuration setup, the communication between the DCM and the PC is done using HTTPS. A Factory restart of the DCM removes the old CA certificate and creates a new one. If the of the PC that is connected to the DCM is provided with the old CA certificate, this old certificate must be removed. The procedure to remove a CA certificate is described in topic Installing and Removing CA Certificates on page 1234.

Connecting a PC to the DCM Setting up the initial security configuration of the DCM must be done by connecting a PC directly to a management port of the DCM. A D9900 and D9901 provide a 10/100 Base-T and a GbE management port. Use a crossover cable for a 10/100 BaseT to 10/100 Base-T connection or a straight cable for a GbE to GbE connection. The following illustration locates the management ports of the DCM housing.  D9900 device GbE 10/100 Base-T I/O

PS 1

GbE

10/100

3 1

4 2

7

6

PS 2

9

8

10

4 1

2

3

4 2

1

-DC/GND/+DC

7

6

4

3

5

9

8

10

4 1

2

3

4 1

1220

2

3

4

5

4011746 Rev AG

Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration

 D9901 device

After performing a Factory restart, the management ports are provided with default network settings. These settings are: Parameter

10/100Base-T

GbE

IP address

150.158.230.250

150.158.231.250

Subnet Mask address

255.255.255.000

255.255.255.000

Gateway

-

-

To establish connection, the network settings of the PC must be configured in such a way that it belongs to the same subnet. For example, to connect the GbE port of the DCM to a GbE port of a PC, the IP address of the PC's GbE port can be set to 150.158.231.1 and the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0. The following steps describe how to configure the IP settings of a PC running Windows 7. 1

Open the Control Panel of Windows XP by clicking on Start and then on Control Panel.

2

In the All Control Panel Items window, click on Network and Sharing Center.

3

Click on Change adapter settings, right-click on the Local Area Connection of the port that is used to establish connection with the DCM and select Properties. Result: The Properties dialog of the selected port appears.

4011746 Rev AG

1221

Appendix C Additional Configuration

4

In the This connection uses the following items box, select Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IP) and click on Properties. Result: The Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IP) Properties dialog is displayed.

1222

4011746 Rev AG

Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration

5

Select the Use the following IP address selection button and enter the IP address and subnet mask in the corresponding boxes. Note: Leave all other fields blank.

6

Click on OK to confirm.

Installing the New CA Certificate To Install the DCM CA Certificate into the Microsoft Internet Explorer Web Browser The following procedure describes how to install the DCM certificate into the Microsoft Internet Explorer web browser. 1

In the address bar of the web browser, enter the default IP address of the management to which the PC is connected to.

 

10/100Base-T port: 150.158.230.250 GbE port: 150.158.231.250

Result: The following page is displayed.

2

4011746 Rev AG

Click on the Continue to this website (not recommended). link.

1223

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Result: The DCM login page appears.

3

Click on Certificate Error in the address bar of the web browser and point to View certificates in the Certificate Invalid popup. Result: The Certificate dialog appears.

1224

4011746 Rev AG

Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration

4

Select the Certification Path tab.

5

In the Certificate Path box, select the root certificate and click on View Certificate. Result: A new Certificate dialog with information of the root certificate is displayed.

6

Click on Install Certificate... Result: The Certificate Import Wizard appears.

4011746 Rev AG

1225

Appendix C Additional Configuration

7

Click on Next >. Result: The following wizard page appears.

8

Select Place all certificates in the following store and click on Browse... Result: The Select Certificate Store dialog appears.

9

Select Trusted Root Certification Authorities and click on OK to confirm and to close the dialog.

10 In the Certificate Import Wizard dialog, click on Next >. Result: The Complete the Certificate Import Wizard page appears. 11 Click on Finish.

1226

4011746 Rev AG

Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration

Result The following Security Warning popup appears.

12 Click on Yes. Result: The following Certificate Import Wizard popup appears.

13 Click on OK. 14 Close the Certificate dialogs by clicking on OK. 15 Close the web browser. 16 Proceed with the initial security procedure as described in topic Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration on page 1231.

To Install the Certificate into the Mozilla Firefox Web Browser The following procedure describes how to install the DCM certificate into the Mozilla Firefox web browser. 1

In the address bar of the web browser, enter the default IP address of the management to which the PC is connected to.

 

4011746 Rev AG

10/100Base-T port: 150.158.230.250 GbE port: 150.158.231.250

1227

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Result: The following page is displayed.

2

Click on I Understand the Risks link. and point to Add Exception.... Result: The Add Security Exception dialog is displayed.

1228

4011746 Rev AG

Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration

3

Click on View... Result: The Certificate Viewer dialog appears.

4

Select the Details tab.

5

In the Certificate Hierarchy box, select the root certificate and point to Export... Result: The Save Certificate To File dialog appears.

6

Browse to the location where the certificate can be stored and press Save.

7

Close the Certificate Viewer and Add Security Exception dialog.

8

In the menu bar of the web browser, click on Tools and select Options. Result: The Options dialog appears.

9

Point to Advanced and select the Encryption tab. Result: The Encryption tab page is displayed.

10 Click on View Certificates. Result: The Certificate Manager dialog is displayed. 11 Click on the Authorities tab

4011746 Rev AG

1229

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Result: The Authorities tab page appears.

12 Point to Import.... Result: The Select File containing CA certificate(s) to import dialog is displayed. 13 Browse to the location of the DCM certificate (XXXXXX.crt). 14 Select this certificate and point to Open. Result: The Downloading Certificate dialog is displayed.

15 Verify if the field in quotes in the Downloading Certificate dialog corresponds with the Host ID of the DCM. 16 Tick the Trust this CA to identify web sites. check box and point to OK. Result: The Downloading Certificate dialog is closed and the certificate is added to the web browser. 1230

4011746 Rev AG

Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration

17 Close the Certificate Manager and Options dialog. 18 Close the web browser. 19 Proceed with the initial security procedure as described in topic Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration on page 1231.

Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration Introduction The following list gives more information about the initial security configuration settings.  About Password Policy, Security Accounts, and Security Groups The DCM can be accessed using its user interface or using FTP, IIOP, SSH, SNMP, or telnet (further called external IP services). To protect the configuration of the DCM from inappropriate access by users or to protect the device from hacker-attacks, the DCM is provided with a password security feature that confirms the identity of the user who is attempting to access the device. DCM's password security is set up by defining security accounts. A security account consists of a unique user name with password. By adding security accounts to security groups, particular access permissions and rights can be given to users. Security accounts can be defined to access the DCM via its user interface (further called GUI accounts) and accounts can be defined to access the DCM by external IP services (further called Operation System accounts). To access the DCM using its user interface, the following security groups are defined: Administrators (full control), Automation (external triggers), Guests (readonly control), Users (read-write), and DTF Administrator (DTF Key Configuration). During the initial security setup, a GUI account belonging to the Administrator security group and an Operating System account must be created. The Operating System account gets automatically access to the DCM for troubleshooting (SSH and telnet), access via FTP or IIOP is optional. To prevent people from using weak passwords to access the DCM user interface or to use external IP services for accessing the DCM, the following password policy is used:

4011746 Rev AG

-

The password may not contain more than 80 characters.

-

The password must contain characters from at least three of the following classes: lower case letters, upper case letters, digits, and special characters.

-

No character in the password can be repeated more than three times consecutively.

-

The password cannot be the same as the associated username, and not be the username reversed.

-

The password cannot be cisco, ocsic, or any variant obtained by changing the 1231

Appendix C Additional Configuration

capitalization of letters therein, or by substituting 1 | or ! for i, and/or substituting 0 for o, and/or substituting $ for s.

 About External IP Services The DCM can be accessed using external IP services like FTP for upgrading device software, SSH and telnet for troubleshooting purposes, and IIOP and SNMP for external management purposes. When the device leaves our assembly line all these external IP services are disabled. During the initial security setup, the external IP services required for your application can be enabled. Hint: Enabling IPConfig can be useful for applications where the IP addresses of the management ports of a DCM are frequently changed. The IPConfig tool is able to retrieve the IP addresses from a DCM. More information concerning this tool can be found in the system guide shipped with the DCM.

To Set Up the Initial Security Configuration The following steps explain how to configure the network settings of the management ethernet ports of the DCM housing and the initial security settings. 1

Open a web browser and enter the factory IP address of the connected ethernet port in the address bar. Result: The login page of the user interface is displayed.

2

Enter admin in both the Username and Password box and press Login. Note: The username and the password are case sensitive. Result: The Initial Security Configuration page appears.

1232

4011746 Rev AG

Setting Up the Initial Security Configuration

3

In the Accounts table, complete the following settings for both the GUI Administrator and Operating System account:

a

In the User Name box, enter a name for this account (max. 40 characters).

b

In the Password and Re-enter Password boxes, enter a password (max. 80 characters) that meets DCM's password policy (see introduction).

c

For the Operating System account, tick the options check boxes of the external IP service(s) required for this account.

Note: The following OS account names cannot be used: root, scriptengine, nobody, and sshd. 4

In the External IP Services table, tick the Enabled check boxes of the external IP services required for your application.

5

In the Network Settings table, complete the following settings for both ethernet ports of the DCM housing (10/100 and GbE port).

a

In the IP Address box, enter the IP address (IPv4) for the port.

b

In the Subnet Mask box, enter the subnet mask.

c

For a default gateway address, tick the Default Gateway selection button and enter the IP address in the corresponding box.

Notes:

 

The octets of the IP addresses must be separated by dots. All management ports should be connected to a different subnet.

6

Press Apply to confirm or Reload to abort the operation.

7

Close the user interface.

4011746 Rev AG

1233

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Installing and Removing CA Certificates Introduction The communication between the DCM and the PC running the web browser can be done using HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) or HTTPS (Hypertext Transfer Protocol Secure). For HTTPS, the DCM is provided with a CA certificate generator which can be used to create a CA certificate for the web browser. During the initial security configuration, the communication between the PC running the web browser and the DCM is done using HTTPS. To communicate over HTTPS without warnings, the web browser of the PC needs a CA certificate from the DCM. Important: The validity period of a DCM CA certificate is ten years. Make sure that the clock of the DCM is correctly set before downloading the CA certificate from the device. The following topics describe the procedures to install and to remove the CA certificate of the DCM for Microsoft Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox.

Installing the CA Certificate into Microsoft Internet Explorer The following procedure describes how to install the DCM certificate into the Microsoft Internet Explorer web browser. 1

Enter the IP address of the DCM in the address bar of the web browser. Result: The following page is displayed.

2 1234

Click on the Continue to this website (not recommended). link. 4011746 Rev AG

Installing and Removing CA Certificates

Result: The DCM login page appears.

3

Click on Certificate Error in the address bar of the web browser and point to View certificates in the Certificate Invalid popup. Result: The Certificate dialog appears.

4 4011746 Rev AG

Select the Certification Path tab. 1235

Appendix C Additional Configuration

5

In the Certificate Path box, select the root certificate and click on View Certificate. Result: A new Certificate dialog with information of the root certificate is displayed.

6

Click on Install Certificate... Result: The Certificate Import Wizard appears.

1236

4011746 Rev AG

Installing and Removing CA Certificates

7

Click on Next >. Result: The following wizard page appears.

8

Select Place all certificates in the following store and click on Browse... Result: The Select Certificate Store dialog appears.

9

Select Trusted Root Certification Authorities and click on OK.

10 In the Certificate Import Wizard dialog, click on Next >. Result: The Complete the Certificate Import Wizard page appears. 11 Click on Finish.

4011746 Rev AG

1237

Appendix C Additional Configuration

Result The following Security Warning popup appears.

12 Click on Yes. Result: The following Certificate Import Wizard popup appears.

13 Click on OK. 14 Close the Certificate dialogs by clicking on OK. 15 Restart the web browser.

Installing CA Certificates into Mozilla Firefox The following procedure describes how to install the DCM certificate into the Mozilla Firefox web browser. 1

Enter the IP address of the DCM in the address bar of the web browser. Result: The following page is displayed.

1238

4011746 Rev AG

Installing and Removing CA Certificates

2

Click on the I Understand the Risks link and point to Add Exception.... Result: The Add Security Exception dialog is displayed.

3

Click on View... Result: The Certificate Viewer dialog appears.

4011746 Rev AG

1239

Appendix C Additional Configuration

4

Select the Details tab.

5

In the Certificate Hierarchy box, select the root certificate and point to Export... Result: The Save Certificate To File dialog appears.

6

Browse to the location where the certificate can be stored.

7

Close the Certificate Viewer and Add Security Exception dialog.

8

In the menu bar of the web browser, click on Tools and select Options. Result: The Options dialog appears.

9

Point to Advanced and select the Encryption tab. Result: The Encryption tab page is displayed.

10 Click on View Certificates. Result: The Certificate Manager dialog is displayed. 11 Click on the Authorities tab Result: The Authorities tab page appears.

1240

4011746 Rev AG

Installing and Removing CA Certificates

12 Point to Import.... Result: The Select File containing CA certificate(s) to import dialog is displayed. 13 Browse to the location of the DCM certificate (XXXXXX.crt). 14 Select this certificate and point to Open. Result: The Downloading Certificate dialog is displayed.

15 Verify if the field in quotes in the Downloading Certificate dialog corresponds with the Host ID of the DCM. 16 Tick the Trust this CA to identify web sites. check box and point to OK. Result: The Downloading Certificate dialog is closed and the certificate is added to the web browser. 17 Close the Certificate Manager and Options dialog. 4011746 Rev AG

1241

Appendix C Additional Configuration

18 Close the web browser.

Removing the DCM CA Certificate from the Microsoft Internet Explorer The following steps describe how to remove the DCM CA certificate from the Microsoft Internet Explorer web browser. 1

Open the Microsoft Internet Explorer web browser.

2

Click on the Tools menu and point to Internet Options. Result: The Internet Options dialog appears.

3

Click on the Content tab. Result: The Content tab page is displayed.

4

Under Certificates, click on Certificates. Result: The Certificates dialog is displayed.

5

Point to the Trusted Root Certification Authorities tab. Result: The Trusted Root Certification Authorities tab page is displayed.

1242

4011746 Rev AG

Installing and Removing CA Certificates

6

Select the CA certificate of the DCM (indicated by DCM's serial) in the list box and press Remove. Result: The following confirmation box is displayed.

7

Click on Yes to confirm. Result: The following confirmation box appears.

4011746 Rev AG

1243

Appendix C Additional Configuration

8

Click on Yes to confirm. Result: The CA certificate is removed from the web browser.

9

Close the Certificates and the Internet Options dialog.

10 Close the web browser.

Removing the DCM CA Certificate from the Mozilla Firefox Web Browser The following steps explain how to remove the DCM CA certificate from the Mozilla Firefox web browser. 1

Open the Firefox web browser.

2

Click on the Tools menu and point to Options... Result: The Options dialog appears.

3

Point to Advanced and select the Encryption tab. Result: The Encryption tab page is displayed.

4

Click on View Certificates. Result: The Certificate Manager dialog is displayed.

5

Click on the Authorities tab Result: The Authorities tab page appears.

1244

4011746 Rev AG

Installing and Removing CA Certificates

6

Select the CA certificate of the DCM (indicated by DCM's serial) under Cisco Systems in the You have certificates on file that identify these certificate authorities list box and press Delete.... Result: The Delete CA Certificates confirmation box appears.

7

Click on OK. Result: The DCM CA certificate is removed from the You have certificates on file that identify these certificate authorities list box.

8

Close the Certificate Manager and the Options dialog.

9

Close the web browser.

4011746 Rev AG

1245

Glossary 3D three dimensional

3DES triple data encryption standard (168 bit).

8PSK octonary phase-shift keying - a method of digital signal modulation in which the electromagnetic wave cycle is shifted horizontally a particular degree to represent binary code. 8PSK has eight discrete phase angles.

AAC advanced audio coding.

AC access criteria.

ac, AC alternating current. An electric current that reverses its direction at regularly recurring intervals.

AC-3 audio compression - 3. Digital audio encoding technique developed by Dolby® for multi-channel sound applications.

AD advertising.

ADTS audio date transport stream.

4011746 Rev AG

1247

Glossary

AES advanced encryption standard.

AFD active format description.

AH authentication header.

AIT application information table.

AP add unspliced insertion PIDs

ARP address resolution protocol. Internet protocol used to map an IP addresses to physical (hardware) addresses on local area networks.

ASI asynchronous serial interface. Allows the intermittent transfer of data one bit at a time rather than in a steady stream.

ASM any source multicast

ATSC Advanced Television Systems Committee of the USA.

AVC advanced video coding.

Avg average.

BAT bouquet association table.

1248

4011746 Rev AG

Glossary

BER bit error rate. The percentage of bits that have errors relative to the total number of bits received in a transmission.

BISS Basic Interoperable Scrambling System

BMP bitmap.

C/N or CNR carrier-to-noise ratio. The ratio, in decibels, of the carrier to that of the noise in a receiver's IF bandwidth after specified band limiting and before any nonlinear process such as amplitude limiting and detection takes place.

CA conditional access. The system, software, and components necessary to provide or deny subscribers selective access to specific services.

CABAC context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding.

CAM conditional access module.

CAS conditional access system.

CAT conditional access table.

CAVLC context-adaptive variable-length coding.

CBR constant bitrate.

4011746 Rev AG

1249

Glossary

CC continuity counter.

CEA consumer electronics association.

CEAM cable emergency alert message.

CI common interface.

CI-CAM common interface - conditional access module.

COFDM coded orthogonal frequency division multiplexing.

COP code of practice.

COS class of service.

CP crypto period.

CPB coded picture buffer.

CPBR clear PID bitrates

CPU central processing unit.

1250

4011746 Rev AG

Glossary

CRC cyclic redundancy code.

CRSP clock recovery support packets.

CSA common scrambling algorithm.

CSV comma-separated values. A data file format supported by many spreadsheet programs, in which fields are separated by commas. Also referred to as comma delimited.

CVCT cable virtual channel table.

CW control word.

CWG control word generator.

CYTS contributory transport stream.

dc, DC direct current. An electric current flowing in one direction only and substantially constant in value.

DC-II DigiGipher-II

DCM digital content manager.

DES data encryption standard. 4011746 Rev AG

1251

Glossary

DHB digital headend backup.

DPI digital program insertion.

DRT disaster recovery table.

DSCP differentiated services code point.

DSL digital subscriber line. A technology for bringing up to 8.0 Mb/s of bandwidth to homes and small businesses over ordinary twisted-pair copper telephone lines.

DSM-CC digital storage media - command and control. DSM-CC, Part 6 of MPEG-2, is an ISO/IEC standard developed to provide the control functions and operations specific to managing MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 bitstreams. These protocols may be used to support applications in both stand-alone and heterogeneous network environments. In the DSM-CC model, a stream is sourced by a server and delivered to a client. Both the server and the client are considered to be users of the DSM-CC network. DSM-CC defines a logical entity called the Session and Resource Manager (SRM) which provides a (logically) centralized management of the DSM-CC Sessions and Resources.

DSNG digital satellite news gathering.

DSP digital signal processor.

DTF digital transport formatter

DTS decode time stamp.

1252

4011746 Rev AG

Glossary

DVB A standard developed by the Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Group, which is a European organization that has authored many specifications for satellite and cable broadcasting of digital signals. Part of the DVB work has been focused specifically on conditional access.

DVB-CSA digital video broadcasting - common scrambling algorithm

DVB-H digital video broadcasting - handhelds.

DVB-T Digital Video Broadcasting baseline system for digital terrestrial television.

DVP digital video platform.

EAS Emergency Alert System.

EBIF ETV binary interchange format.

EBU European broadcasting union.

ECM entitlement control message.

ECMG entitlement control message generator.

EDH error detection and handling.

EIS event information scheduler. 4011746 Rev AG

1253

Glossary

EISS ETV integrated signaling stream.

EIT event information table.

EITa p/f event information table actual present/following.

EITa sch event information table actual schedule.

EITo p/f event information table other present/following.

EITo sch event information table other schedule.

EM element manager.

EMM entitlement management message.

EMMG entitlement management message generator.

EN European norm.

EPG electronic program guide.

ES elementary stream.

1254

4011746 Rev AG

Glossary

ESP encapsulation security payload.

ETM extended text message.

ETR ETSI technical report.

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute.

ETT extended text table.

ETV enhanced television.

FCS frame check sequence

FEC multi-protocol encapsulation - forward error correction is a method that is introduced by DVB-H to provide immunity to interference experienced in mobile environments. This method organizes IP packets into a table and protects each row with Reed-Solomon overhead. The IP packets and FEC overhead are separately encapsulated and transmitted.

FEC forward error correction. System of data transmission in which redundant bits generated at the transmitted end are used by the receiver to detect, locate, and correct transmission errors before delivering the data to the local data communications link. This avoids requiring the transmitter to resend information.

FFT fast Fourier transform.

4011746 Rev AG

1255

Glossary

FI follow insertion.

FM frequency modulation. A transmission technique in which the frequency of the carrier varies in accordance with the modulating signal.

FP follow primary.

FTP file transfer protocol. Allows users to transfer text and binary files to and from a personal computer, list directories on the foreign host, delete and rename files on the foreign host, and perform wildcard transfers between hosts.

GbE or GigE gigabit ethernet. A LAN transmission standard that provides a data rate of 1 billion bits per second. Gigabit ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3z standard. Gigabit ethernet is carried primarily on optical fiber.

GIF graphics interchange format.

GMT Greenwich mean time.

GOP group of pictures.

GPIO general purpose input output

GPS global positioning system.

GUI graphical user interface. A program interface that takes advantage of a computer graphics capabilities to make the program visually easier to use.

1256

4011746 Rev AG

Glossary

HD or HDTV high definition. A digital television format providing picture quality similar to 35 mm movies with sound quality similar to compact disk (CD).

HE-AAC high efficient advanced audio coding.

HTML hypertext mark-up language. A language used to create documents on the World Wide Web.

HTTP hypertext transport protocol. A communication protocol used to request and transmit files over the Internet and other networks.

HTTPS hypertext transfer protocol secure.

I/O input/output.

IANA Internet assigned number authority.

ICMP internet control message protocol.

ID identifier.

IEC International Electro-technical Commission.

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. IEEE was founded in 1963. It is an organization composed of engineers, scientists, and students and is best known for developing standards for the computer and electronics industries.

4011746 Rev AG

1257

Glossary

IGMP Internet group management protocol. A protocol used to established host memberships in particular multicast groups on a single network.

IIOP Internet inter-ORB protocol. A protocol developed to implement CORBA solutions over the web. It enables browsers and servers to exchange integers, arrays, and more complex objects. It is a protocol for communication between an application programming interface (API) and an external client.

IKE internet key exchange

IP Internet protocol. A standard that was originally developed by the United States Department of Defense to support the internetworking of dissimilar computers across a network. IP is perhaps the most important of the protocols on which the Internet is based. It is the standard that describes software that keeps track of the internetwork addresses for different nodes, routes, and outgoing/incoming messages on a network. Some examples of IP applications include email, chat, and Web browsers.

IPMP intellectual property management and protection

IPsec internet protocol security.

ISI input stream identifier.

ISO International Organization for Standardization. An international body that defines global standards for electronic and other industries.

ITU International Telecommunications Union.

ITU-T international telecommunication union - telecommunication. 1258

4011746 Rev AG

Glossary

JPEG joint photographic experts group.

LAN local area network. A communications link between two or more points within a small geographical area, such as between buildings. Typically permits data rates up to 100 Mbps. Smaller than a metropolitan area network (MAN) or a wide area network (WAN).

LATM low-overhead MPEG-4 audio multiplex.

LCN logic channel number.

LED light-emitting diode. An electronic device that lights up when electricity passes through it.

LO local oscillator.

LOAS low overhead audio stream.

MAC media access control. The layer in the OSI model above the physical layer. It defines media access control methods and parameters for access to the physical media.

MCT MTR inband control tables.

MD5 message digest 5 algorithm.

MDP mux description packets.

4011746 Rev AG

1259

Glossary

MER modulation error ratio.

MGT master guide table.

MHEG multimedia/hypermedia expert group

MIB management information base. SNMP collects management information from devices on the network and records the information in a management information base. The MIB information includes device features, data throughput statistics, traffic overloads, and errors.

MIP mega-frame initialization packets.

MMC Microsoft management console.

MMI man machine interface.

MON monitor

MPE multi-protocol encapsulation.

MPEG Motion Picture Experts Group. A joint committee of the International Standards Organization (ISO) and the International Electrotechnical Commission (EG). This committee develops and maintains the MPEG specification for a series of hardware and software standards designed to reduce the storage requirements of digital video and audio. The common goal of MPEG compression is to convert the equivalent of about 7.7 MB down to under 150 K, which represents a compression ratio of approximately 52 to 1. Current standards are MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and MPEG-4.

1260

4011746 Rev AG

Glossary

MPTS multi-program transport stream.

MQAM modulator multiple quadrature amplitude modulation modulator. A device with two input ports that allow it to receive MPEG transport streams simultaneously from two different sources. The MQAM separates the content in these transport streams, encrypts it, modulates it, and then sends it to DHCTs on the cable network. The four, independent radio frequency (RF) outputs on the back panel of an MQAM allow the cable operator to use only one unit of rack space for the hardware and one unit of rack space for ventilation, while providing the same number of RF output channels as four QAMs.

MTR multi transport receiver

mux multiplexer. A device that combines two or more signals into one output.

NIT network information table.

NITa network information table actual.

NITo network information table other.

NMS network management system. A software system designed specifically to monitor a network and to facilitate troubleshooting.

NTP network time protocol.

NTSC National Television Standards Committee. A committee that determines video signal standards for television displays in the United States, Canada, Mexico, and Japan, as well as other Latin American and Asian countries. The NTSC standard calls for fixed-resolution, interlaced displays that are updated 30 times 4011746 Rev AG

1261

Glossary per second with a resolution of 525 lines.

NVOD near video on demand.

ON ID original network identifier.

ORB object request broker.

OS operating system.

OUTV occasional use television.

PAL phase alternate line.

PAT program association table.

PC personal computer.

PCR program clock reference.

PD private data.

PDG private date generator.

PES packetized elementary stream 1262

4011746 Rev AG

Glossary

PID packet identifier or program identifier.

PIM program information message.

PL physical layer.

PMT program map table. Identifies and indicates the locations of the streams that make up each service, and the location of the Program Clock Reference fields for a service.

PNG portable network graphics.

PNM program name message.

PNS perceptual noise substitution.

PPS pulse per second.

PS power supply.

PSI program specific information.

PSIG program specific information/service information generator.

PSIP program and system information protocol. (A digital TV data transport standard.) 4011746 Rev AG

1263

Glossary

PSU power supply unit.

PTS presentation time stamp.

QAM quadrature amplitude modulation. A phase modulation technique for representing digital information and transmitting that data with minimal bandwidth. Both phase and amplitude of carrier waves are altered to represent the binary code. By manipulating two factors, more discrete digital states are possible and therefore larger binary schemes can be represented.

QAM256 A QAM technique that produces 256 discrete states, each state representing 8 bits of information. The most complex of common QAM techniques.

QAM64 A QAM technique that produces 64 discrete states, each state representing 6 bits of information.

QCIF quarter common intermediate format.

QPSK quadrature phase-shift keying. A phase modulation technique for representing digital information. QPSK produces four discrete states, each state representing two bits of information.

RAM random access memory. A type of computer memory that can be read from or written to in a nonlinear fashion.

RCDS remote control and diagnostics system.

RDCS remote data and control.

1264

4011746 Rev AG

Glossary

REF Reference

RF radio frequency. The frequency in the portion of the electromagnetic spectrum that is above the audio frequencies and below the infrared frequencies, used in radio transmission systems.

RFC request for comments.

RGB red-green-blue.

RGBA red-green-blue alpha.

RIP routing information protocol.

RMA return material authorization. A form used to return products.

ROSA® RCDS open system architecture.

RRT ratings region table.

RST running status table.

RTP real-time transport protocol.

RU rack unit. RU is the measuring unit of vertical space in a standard equipment rack. One RU equals 1.75" (44.5 mm). 4011746 Rev AG

1265

Glossary

RX receive or receiver.

SBR spectral band replication. This is a technology to enhance audio or speech codex, especially at low bitrate.

SCG scrambling control group.

SCS simulcrypt synchronizer.

SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers, Inc. A not-for-profit professional organization formed in 1969 to promote the sharing of operational and technical knowledge in the field of cable television and broadband communications.

SD or SDTV standard definition. A digital television format providing picture quality similar to digital versatile disk (DVD).

SDI serial digital interface.

SDT service description table.

SDTa service description table actual.

SDTo service description table other.

SECAM séquentiel couleur avec mémoire. (French color TV standard.)

1266

4011746 Rev AG

Glossary

SFN single frequency network.

SFP small form-factor pluggable.

SHA1 secure hash algorithm version 1.0.

SI system or service information. Tuning information sent from the DNCS to DHCTs which provides the information that DHCTs need to be able to tune to a particular service.

SID service identifier.

SL sync layer.

SNMP simple network management protocol. A protocol that governs network management and the monitoring of network devices and their functions.

SPM statmux pool manager

SPTS single program transport stream.

SQCIF sub-quarter common intermediate format.

SSH secure shell.

SSM synchronous status message. 4011746 Rev AG

1267

Glossary

StatMux statistical multiplexing.

STB set-top box.

STT system time table.

SVGA super video graphics adapter. (800 by 600 pixels, 1.33:1 aspect ratio.)

SW session word.

SWDF session word distribution file.

SWDK session word distribution key.

TC transcoder.

TCP transmission control protocol. One of the main protocols in TCP/IP networks. TCP enables two hosts to establish a connection and exchange streams of data. TCP guarantees delivery of data and packets, and will be delivered in the same order in which they were sent. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery of the data, TCP takes care of keeping track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet.

TCP/IP transmission control protocol/Internet protocol. Two interrelated protocols that are part of the Internet protocol suite. TCP operates on the OSI transport layer and breaks data into packets. IP operates on the OSI network layer and routes the packets. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery of the data, TCP takes care of keeping track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a 1268

4011746 Rev AG

Glossary message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet.

TDT time and date table.

TGA targa.

Timeslicing Time slicing is a technique that is used in DVB-H applications to increase the battery life time of mobile DVB-H receivers (for instance cell phones, PDAs...). Chunks of data will be transmitted in burst, which allows the mobile receiver to be switched off when no data is transmitted. During this inactivity the mobile receiver can scan neighboring cells in order to select the best reception conditions and to be prepared for seamless handovers.

TNS temporal noise shaping.

ToS type of service

TOT time offset table.

TR transrating.

TS transport stream.

TS ID transport stream identifier.

TTF truetype font.

4011746 Rev AG

1269

Glossary

TTL time to live. A field in many packet protocols that is used to ensure that packets that do not find their destinations are eventually eliminated from the network.

TV television.

TVCT terrestrial virtual channel table.

TX transmit or transmitter.

UDP user datagram protocol. A connectionless protocol, like TCP, that runs on top of IP networks. Unlike TCP/IP, UDP/IP provides very few error recovery services, offering instead a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network without acknowledgements for guaranteed delivery.

URL uniform resource locator. A standardized way of representing different documents, media, and network services on the World Wide Web. The URL is most commonly referred to as the Web address for a particular item. For example, the URL, or Web address, for Cisco is http://www.Cisco.com.

UTC coordinated universal time.

VBI vertical blanking interval.

VBR variable bitrate.

VCM variable coding and modulation.

VCT Virtual Channel Table. 1270

4011746 Rev AG

Glossary

VII video index information.

VITC vertical interval time code.

VLAN virtual local area network. A local area network with a definition that maps workstations on some other basis than geographic location (for example, by department, type of user, or primary application). The virtual LAN controller can change or add workstations and manage load balancing and bandwidth allocation more easily than with a physical picture of the LAN. Network Management System software keeps track of relating the virtual picture of the local area network with the actual physical picture. VLANs are based on logical instead of physical connections.

VSB vestigial side band

VSE virtual service encoder.

VSM video service management.

WAN wide area network. A WAN consists of two or more LANs. The largest WAN in existence is the Internet. A data communications network that serves users across a wide-ranging geographic area and often uses transmission devices provided by common carriers. Frame Relay, SMDS, and X.25 are examples of WANs.

XML extensible markup language.

XOR exclusive or.

4011746 Rev AG

1271

Index 6 - Auto • 769

( (Major) Severity parameter • 994, 995

< parameter • 316 parameter • 316

0 0 VDC SDI no stream mode • 173, 175

1 1 Gbps speed mode • 122 10 Gbps speed mode • 122 10/100 Port parameter • 72 1024-max byte frames counter • 151 128-255 byte frames counter • 151 1D FEC profile • 280, 283

2 25 Hz frame rate delay • 89 256-511 byte frames counter • 151 2D FEC profile • 283

3 3 Decoders JPEG2K • 107, 109 3 Encoders JPEG2K • 107, 109 30 Hz frame rate delay • 89 3D Support parameter • 109 3D video • 107, 109, 871, 903 3D video pair branch • 195 3DES • 75, 1180, 1187 3G 1080p 50fps mode • 174 3G 1080p 59.94fps mode • 174 3G 1080p 60fps mode • 174

5 512-1023 byte frames counter • 151

4011746 Rev AG

64 byte frames counter • 151 65-127 byte frames counter • 151

8 8-VSB Interface Card • 2, 3, 9, 156 8VSB Port MER Level Too Low alarm • 972 8VSB Port No License alarm • 972 8VSB Port RF Input Level Too High alarm • 972 8VSB Port RF Input Level Too Low alarm • 972 8VSB Port RF Input Lock Loss alarm • 972 8-VSB RF port configuration • 156 8-VSB RF port input settings • 156 8-VSB RF signal reception licensing • 28 8-VSB Settings table • 157 8-VSB statistics • 161 8VSB_RECEPTION license • 28, 156

A A specific IP Address setting • 1184 AAC Decode Settings • 548 AAC processing settings • 550 AAC Processing Settings • 548 AAC-LC audio • 540, 543 About link • 15 About Window • 15 AC Manager Component • 732, 790, 792 AC start delay • 743 AC Start Delay parameter • 762 AC stop delay • 743 AC-3 audio • 506, 543 AC3_AUDIO_TRANSCODE_EXTENSION license • 508 Accepted IPv6 addresses • 52 Access Controlled parameter • 449 Access criteria • 734, 738, 743, 788, 806 Access Criteria Configuration dialog • 802, 803, 804, 805, 806, 808 Access criteria information • 804, 805 Access Criteria list • 802, 805, 808 Access Criteria tab • 802, 808, 809 1273

Index

Access rights • 734, 737, 769 Accessing the IPsec Management Console • 1180 According to EIS insertion • 766 Account Name parameter • 21, 1055 Accounts page • 19, 20 Action parameter • 142, 145 Actions • 609, 610, 611, 613, 628 Activate - Backup command • 925 Activate - Main command • 925 Activate Automatic Pass Rules parameter • 251, 253 Activate command • 943, 949 Activate outgoing service streaming • 491 Activate Streaming command • 488, 491, 909 Activate streaming state • 890, 891, 895 Activate the default response rule parameter • 1190 Activating a DCM • 60 Activating streaming • 487, 488, 491, 909 Activating streaming of outgoing services • 491 Activating Transport Streams • 488 Activation time • 743 Active CAM parameter • 830 Active CWG Removed alarm • 972 Active ECMG Removed alarm • 972 Active EIS Removed alarm • 973 Active EMMG Removed alarm • 973 Active IP aliasing • 68, 148, 149 Active parameter • 81 Active PSIG Removed alarm • 973 Active revertive • 914 Active streaming • 249, 251, 254, 259 Adapt (P)SI parameter • 557 Adapting static route table • 136 Add Access Criteria command • 804 Add Access Criteria dialog • 804 Add Alternate Source popup • 692, 693 Add Backup Service popup • 716, 718 Add CA System command • 802 Add CA System dialog • 802 Add Caption Service Item popup dialog • 538 Add Clip command • 317 Add Component command • 794 Add Component dialog • 794 Add Custom PID Row table • 337, 338 Add Device Operational Failure popup • 1015 Add dummy component references • 337 ADD EAS Proxy settings • 639 Add EIS Proxy Setting table • 776 Add Encoder popup • 1100 1274

Add ES Type Overrule settings • 382 Add Exception List Item popup • 424 Add Font settings • 613 Add Input Stream settings • 874, 879 Add Logo settings • 607, 627 Add Merged Service popup • 703, 704 Add New ECMg command • 757 Add New EMMg command • 769 Add New IPsec settings • 76 Add New IPv4 Alias settings • 69, 150 Add new IPv6 Alias settings • 69 Add New IPv6 Subnet settings • 55 Add New Merged Service or Merged Service Component settings • 326, 331, 519, 624 Add New OS Account settings • 21 Add New Rate Control Group settings • 571, 573 Add New SNMP Trap Destination settings • 57 Add New Static ARP Entry settings • 134 Add New Static Route settings • 72, 137 Add New TS settings • 249 Add New User settings • 19 Add New VLAN settings • 139 Add NTP Server settings • 63 Add PMT Descriptor Rule settings • 389, 391, 393 Add PMT Descriptor settings • 386 Add Preconfigured Service popup • 304, 312 Add Preconfigured Trigger settings • 1000 Add Preconfigured TS settings • 241, 288, 923 Add Private Data rule type • 766 Add PSIG Proxy Settings • 779, 780, 781 Add Script settings • 1175 Add Server To List command • 63 Add Service dialog • 793 Add Service Location Descriptor parameter • 452 Add Specific Other Table settings • 421 Add Standalone Snap-in dialog • 1180 Add Table settings • 406 Add Target IP dialog • 1146 Add Time Offset Descriptor settings • 447 Add TransportStream dialog • 792 Add VSE popup • 1101, 1111 Add/Remove Snap-in command • 1180 Add/Remove Snap-in dialog • 1180, 1181 Adding a static ARP table entry • 134 Adding access criteria information • 804 Adding an IP alias • 69, 150 Adding banners • 615 Adding card operational failure triggers • 1013 Adding CAS • 802 4011746 Rev AG

Index

Adding component merge rules • 331, 333 Adding components • 794 Adding Conditional Access System • 802 Adding device operational failure alarm triggers • 1015 Adding dummy PCRs • 471 Adding ECMG connection entries • 759 Adding EMM components to a CI-CAM • 832 Adding encoders • 1100 Adding IPsec peers • 76 Adding login page information • 26 Adding new static route entries • 137 Adding operating system accounts • 21 Adding OS accounts • 21 Adding PID sync delay groups • 475 Adding PMT descriptors • 386, 387 Adding preconfigured service loss alarm triggers • 1000 Adding preconfigured services • 304 Adding preconfigured Transport Stream entries • 241, 923 Adding RTP stream entries • 874 Adding security accounts • 19 Adding service component tracking rules • 351, 352 Adding service location descriptors to a VCT • 452 Adding services to rate control groups • 580, 582 Adding services to services list • 793 Adding SNMP Trap destinations • 57 Adding static route entries • 72 Adding the appropriate Snap-In • 1181 Adding time offset descriptors to a TOT • 447 Adding tracking rules • 351 Adding Transport Streams • 792 Adding virtual services • 312 Adding VLAN port pairs • 139 Adding VSEs to a statmux pool • 1111 Adding VSEs to the statmux community • 1101 Additional Heartbeat link parameter • 962 Additional Heartbeat link settings • 962 Additional TS Info parameter • 790 Address Resolution Protocol • 134 Administrative Tools • 1196 Administrator account • 17 Advanced Encoding Tools parameter • 548, 550 Advanced routing tree • 208 Advanced RTP stream settings • 899, 901 Advanced scrambling settings • 821 Advanced Settings • 278, 764 Advanced Settings dialog • 821, 902 4011746 Rev AG

Advanced Settings table • 270 Advanced TS Settings • 275 Advanced Video Settings • 528, 532 Advanced Video Settings table • 532 AES 128 • 75 AES 256 • 75 AFD & BAR Data (SD/HD/3G) parameter • 892, 897 AH • 75 AIT • 398 AIT playout interval • 434 Alarm history • 1032 Alarm message reporting • 993 Alarm Metric parameter • 931, 932, 933, 934 Alarm monitoring • 971 Alarm overview • 972 Alarm Settings • 1011, 1012 Alarm Settings table • 275 Alarm Summary table • 1018, 1019 Alarm Threshold (ms) parameter • 63 Alarms page • 993, 994, 1015 Algorithm • 89 Algorithm parameter • 92 All Alarms settings • 993 All card filter • 500 Allow AC3 parameter • 540, 542 Allow All Traffic IPsec filter • 77 Allow HD parameter • 526, 527 Allowed Banner parameter • 631 Allowed Video Signal parameter • 874, 878, 879 Allowing EAS alert insertion • 637 Allowing scrambling • 753 Alternate Service branch • 211 Alternate Service PCR Settings table • 470, 471 Analog modulation mode • 449 Analog service type • 449 Animated logos • 600 Annex A sending arrangement • 284, 294, 295 Annex B sending arrangement • 284, 294, 295 Any PID type • 997, 999, 1000 Anycast • 930 App Ver parameter • 829 Application information table • 398 Application Type parameter • 406 Apply button • 13 Apply to EIT command • 415, 418, 427, 431 ARP • 134 ARP Configuration page • 134, 135 ARP parameter • 147 ARP reply message • 134 ARP request message • 134 1275

Index

ASI - 8VSB backup TS IS type • 920 ASI - 8VSB backup type • 923, 941 ASI - 8VSB input selection type • 470 ASI - 8VSB input type • 66, 273, 304, 326, 331, 338, 373 ASI - 8VSB socket type • 919 ASI - 8VSB source TS type • 421, 424 ASI - 8VSB type • 415, 418, 427, 938 ASI decapsulation • 107, 870 ASI encapsulation • 107, 870 ASI Gateway type • 107, 109 ASI Input Bandwidth Exceeded alarm • 973 ASI input bandwidth limitation • 114 ASI Input Loss alarm • 973 ASI Interface Card • 2, 3, 9, 114 ASI Interface Configuration page • 115, 117, 118, 119 ASI output port mirroring • 114 ASI packets • 870 ASI Port configuration • 114 ASI SFN Interface Card • 2, 3, 9, 114 ASI stream • 884 ASI stream settings • 878 ASI Sync Loss alarm • 973 ASI video gateway • 869 Assiging PSI/SI generator interface • 779 Assigning access criteria • 806, 808 Assigning auto pass rules • 273 Assigning backup services • 937, 941 Assigning backup streams • 947, 948 Assigning backup Transport Streams • 918 Assigning clips to services • 318 Assigning ECMG interfaces • 757 Assigning EMMG Interfaces • 769 Assigning services • 793, 938 Assigning TS auto pass rules • 273 Async Sources alarm • 973 At ES Level insertion • 766 At Service Level insertion • 766 ATSC • 400, 402 ATSC EIT - ETT Settings • 431 ATSC EIT Current PID Usage table • 431 ATSC input standard • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 ATSC mode • 402 Audio Bit Rate Threshold (Kbps) parameter • 1003 Audio Bitrate Altered alarm • 973 Audio decode settings • 548 Audio downmixing • 543 Audio field • 512 Audio Level Clipped alarm • 973 1276

Audio Mismatch alarm • 972, 974 Audio parameter • 891, 896 Audio processing • 104 Audio Processing parameter • 104 Audio processing settings • 550 Audio resources • 543 Audio settings • 892, 897 Audio Settings table • 546 Audio transcoding • 506 Audio transcoding process • 543 Audio up and downmixing • 543 Audio upmixing • 543 Authentication header • 75 Authentication method preference order list • 1190 Authentication Methods tab • 1190 Auto component passing method • 347 Auto ECM PID source • 757 Auto Enabled GbE port • 124 Auto IP aliasing • 68, 148, 149 Auto mode • 443 Auto Negotiation parameter • 124, 127, 132 Auto Pass All EIT Other pf Tables settings • 424 Auto pass rules • 246, 273, 308, 309 Auto Pass tab • 273, 308 Auto Reference PCR time base selection mode • 238, 239, 241, 242 Auto time base selection mode • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 Auto x backup mode • 914 Automatic Channel ID Selection parameter • 757, 759 Automatic ECM ID mode • 806, 817 Automatic network PID insertion into PAT • 443 Automatic NIT in PAT mode • 456 Automatic Start parameter • 816 Aux Dialog Normalization Level parameter • 553 Aux Peak Mixing Level (dB) parameter • 553 Aux Production Info Exists parameter • 553 Aux Room Type parameter • 553 Available Modules box • 1146 Available Standalone Snap-ins list • 1180 AVC local program insertion settings mode • 89

B -b parameter • 316 Backup - Card parameter • 941 Backup - IP Address parameter • 941 Backup - Main Delays (s) parameter • 938, 941 Backup - Port parameter • 941, 948 4011746 Rev AG

Index

Backup - SID parameter • 941 Backup - UDP parameter • 941 Backup Card parameter • 923 Backup command • 926 Backup Delay parameter • 830 Backup Device parameter • 954, 969 Backup device role • 962 Backup IP parameter • 923 BACKUP license • 29 Backup licensing • 29 Backup link • 328, 334 Backup Mode parameter • 914, 915, 954 Backup page • 42, 962 Backup parameter • 941 Backup Port parameter • 923 Backup scenarios • 913, 918, 937 Backup Script parameter • 954, 969 Backup Service branch • 211 Backup Service Selection popup • 938 Backup services • 938, 941 Backup Settings table • 830, 949 Backup stream • 947 Backup Stream - IP parameter • 947 Backup Stream - Type parameter • 947 Backup Stream - UDP parameter • 947 Backup switching parameters • 926, 944 Backup tab • 947, 948, 949, 969 Backup to Main Delay (s) parameter • 962 Backup to main service assignment • 937 Backup to main Transport Stream assignment • 918 Backup transition • 925, 926, 943 Backup Transport Streams • 918, 919, 920 Backup trigger • 917, 937 Backup TS ID - Card parameter • 920 Backup TS ID - Enabled parameter • 920 Backup TS ID - IP Address parameter • 920 Backup TS ID - Port parameter • 920 Backup TS ID - Type parameter • 920 Backup TS ID - UDP Port parameter • 920 Backup TS popup • 919, 920, 923 Backup TS settings • 919, 925 Backup TS table • 920, 926 Backup Type parameter • 923, 941 Backup-to-Main transition • 949 Bad Packets parameter • 297, 899 Band Selection parameter • 164 Bandwidth Exceeded alarm • 974 Bandwidth Limit Low Pass Filter parameter • 551 Bandwidth management • 1093 4011746 Rev AG

Banner insertion • 632 Banner insertion feature • 600, 631 Banner Insertion settings • 603, 631, 637 Banner library • 614 Banner parameter • 632, 637 Banner settings • 615, 618 Banner Stops parameter • 615, 618 Banners page • 615, 618, 621, 637 Banners table • 615, 618, 621 Baseline EBIF • 651, 675 Baseline EBIF output ES type • 337 Basic interoperable scrambling system • 846 Basic Video Settings • 528, 530 Basic Video Settings table • 530 BAT • 398, 406 BAT playout interval • 434 Begin Debouncing (s) parameter • 994, 995 Behavior settings • 615, 618 BER High Threshold parameter • 164 BER parameter • 168 Best match service component pass rule • 352 Bias parameter • 164 Binding 3D Video Pairs • 903 BISS • 846 BISS Bandwidth Exceeded alarm • 974 BISS branch • 190 BISS descrambling • 484, 845 BISS descrambling parameters • 484, 855 BISS Mode 0 operational mode • 846 BISS Mode 1 operational mode • 846, 847, 848 BISS Mode E operational mode • 846 BISS scrambling • 845 BISS scrambling parameters • 847 BISS_1_DESCRAMBLING license • 34, 846 Bit Error Rate - Before RS/BCH parameter • 170 Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter • 890, 891, 894, 895, 896 Bit rate limiting • 564, 565 Bit rate overload protection • 566 Bit rate reduction • 566 Bit rates • 1117 Bit Rates command • 1119 Bit rates of services in the Processing tree • 1137 Bit rates overview of components within incoming service • 1123 Bit rates overview of components within outgoing services • 1133 Bit rates overview of components within outgoing Transport Streams • 1131 Bit rates overview of components within services • 1137 1277

Index

Bit rates overview of components within Transport Stream • 1128 Bit rates overview of components within Transport Streams • 1127 Bit rates overview of incoming services • 1122 Bit rates overview of incoming Transport Streams • 1124 Bit rates overview of outgoing services • 1132 Bit rates overview of rate control groups • 1134 Bit rates overview of services within incoming Transport Stream • 1126 Bit rates overview of services within outgoing Transport Streams • 1130 Bit rates overview of services within transrating groups • 1135 Bit rates overview tables • 1121 Bit Rates page • 1138 Bit Stream Mode parameter • 548, 550, 551 Bitrate (kbps) parameter • 534, 535, 540, 542 Bitrate Too Variable For CBR Dejittering alarm • 974 Bitstream Vera • 612 Block • 449 Block aligned sending arrangement • 284, 899 Block CA Info parameter • 482, 484 Block PID command • 344 Blocked by DPI current service componnet status • 347 Blocked by System current service componnet status • 347 Blocked by TS Rule current service componnet status • 347 Blocked current service componnet status • 347 Blocked IPv6 addresses • 52 Blocked parameter • 83 Blocking components • 321 Blocking service components • 344 Board Alarms page • 995, 1013 Board Backup Configuration page • 915 Board parameter • 421, 911, 919 Boundary parameter • 132 Bouquet association table • 398 Bouquet ID parameter • 406 B-Pictures parameter • 528 Broadcast frames counter • 151 Browse command • 613 budcm.py script • 951, 954 budcm_smx.py script • 969 Buffer Overflow alarm • 974 Buffer underrun counter • 151 Bypassing IPsec • 78 1278

Bytes parameter • 389, 391, 393

C C/N (dB) parameter • 168 C/N Margin (dB) parameter • 168 CA • 743 CA Certificates • 1234 CA descriptor • 739, 741, 743 CA descriptor insertion • 441 CA event • 743 CA ID parameter • 347 CA subsystem identifier • 755, 757 CA SubsystemID parameter • 757, 802 CA system • 733, 755 CA system identifier • 755 CA System Properties dialog • 803 CA SystemID parameter • 757, 802 Cable emergency alert message table • 400 Cable VCT • 400 CAM • 734 CAM BU Trigger parameter • 834 CAM In Backup alarm • 974 CAM License Missing alarm • 974 CAM Mode parameter • 830 CAM Settings table • 829 Capacity Checking • 97 Caption Service Descriptor • 537 Caption Service Descriptor Settings - Mode parameter • 537, 538 Caption Service Number parameter • 538 Caption Services field • 538 Capture Settings Overview table • 1167 Capturing network data • 1167 Card branch • 185 Card configuration • 87 Card filter • 500 Card Not Operational alarm • 974, 1012 Card Not Operational Alarm Triggers table • 1013 Card not operational popup • 1014 Card operational failure trigger • 1013 Card parameter • 155, 160, 161, 304, 415, 418, 421, 427, 500, 887, 938 Card related alarms • 972 Card representation mode • 219 Card Settings • 88, 89, 104, 109, 123, 1049, 1095 CAS • 733 CAS ID parameter • 353, 755 CAS information • 802 CAS properties • 803 4011746 Rev AG

Index

CAT • 398, 739 CAT playout interval • 434 CAT Settings • 441 CBR - Auto PCR time base selection mode • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 CBR - Auto Referenced PCR time base selection mode • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 CBR - Forced PCR time base selection mode • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 CBR Latency parameter • 235, 242 CC Error alarm • 975 CEAM • 400, 427 CEAM sub table information • 418 Center Mix Level parameter • 551 Changing access criteria properties • 805 Changing auto pass rules • 273 Changing backup switching parameters • 926, 944 Changing banner settings • 618 Changing CAS properties • 803 Changing conditional access system properties • 803 Changing Co-Processor settings • 92 Changing default FEC settings • 290, 299 Changing default PMT descriptor rule parameters • 393 Changing default service auto pass rules • 309 Changing default service loss trigger alarms • 1003 Changing default table playout interval parameters • 438 Changing descrambling settings • 484 Changing EAS proxies • 640 CHanging ECM ID mode • 816, 817 Changing ECMG descriptor rules properties • 767 Changing EIS interface connection parameters • 777 Changing EMMG descriptor rules properties • 774 Changing EMMG specific parameters • 771 Changing ES type overrule entries • 382 Changing GbE port backup parameters • 915 Changing GbE port pair settings • 129 Changing incoming ASI stream settings • 878 Changing incoming SDI stream setting • 878 Changing incoming service settings • 232, 233 Changing incoming Transport Stream settings • 238, 239, 242 Changing IP Video Gateway Card settings • 107 Changing login information • 26 4011746 Rev AG

Changing logo settings • 607 Changing network settings • 52 Changing operating system accounts • 22 Changing OS accounts • 22 Changing outgoing ASI streams settings • 891 Changing outgoing SDI stream settings • 890 Changing outgoing service settings • 468 Changing outgoing Transport Stream settings • 259, 263 Changing password policy rules • 23 Changing port backup parameters • 915 Changing PSI/SI/PSIG output mode • 427, 431 Changing PSIG interface connection parameters • 780 Changing PSIP information • 449 Changing rate control group parameters • 574, 575 Changing rate control specific parameters • 575 Changing read community strings • 59 Changing scrambler properties • 787 Changing scrambling settings • 482 Changing security account settings • 20 Changing service parameters • 465 Changing service properties • 232, 233, 796 Changing session timeout • 27 Changing SI information • 443 Changing SNMP Trap format • 58 Changing standard ASI stream settings • 891 Changing standard RTP stream settings • 894, 895 Changing table playout interval parameters • 436, 437, 438 Changing the device name • 50 Changing the ECMG specific parameters • 761 Changing the IP alias mode • 68, 149 Changing the IPsec filter • 77 Changing the output standard mode • 402, 403, 404 Changing the port mode • 123 Changing the scrambling mode • 750 Changing the Transcoder Card calibration • 100 Changing time zne • 454 Changing Transport Stream properties • 261, 263, 265, 267, 268, 270, 275, 795 Changing TS auto pass rules • 273 Changing write community strings • 59 Channel parameter • 156, 159, 759 Channel closed by CA System alarm • 975 Channel ID EMM PID source • 769 Channel ID parameter • 757 Channel Number parameter • 449 1279

Index

Channel set up • 769, 776, 779 Channel status message • 743, 762 Channels parameter • 546 Channels tab • 553 Checing incoming video signals settings • 877 Check SCG at Provision Time parameter • 786, 787 Check Scrambling Control Group at Provisioning Time Option • 786, 787 Checking 8-VSB RF port interface parameters • 159 Checking 8-VSB statistics • 160 Checking alarm summary page • 1019 Checking alarms • 1018 Checking ASI port parameters • 119 Checking bit rates • 1117 Checking bit rates overview tables • 1121 Checking component merge rules • 334 Checking DCM devices • 817 Checking EMM component parameters • 360 Checking FEC statistics • 292, 882 Checking GbE statistics • 151 Checking IP video gateway statistics • 910 Checking JPEG2000 summary • 891, 896 Checking merded components • 341 Checking merged services • 328 Checking network statistics • 83 Checking NTP statistics • 64 Checking private data component parameters • 366 Checking Routes Destination Devices • 147 Checking service component settings • 347 Checking transrating comparison • 592 CI-CAM branch • 189 CI-CAM configuration • 829 Cisco DCM Series D9900 Digital Content Manager • 2, 3 Cisco DCM Series D9901 Digital Content Manager • 2, 3 Cisco DCM Series D9902 Digital Content Manager • 2, 3 Clip Data table • 317, 318 Clip parameter • 318 Clips • 315, 316, 317, 318 Clips / Delay tab • 275, 294, 318, 902, 1012 Clips Configuration page • 317, 318 Clips/Delay Setting table • 318 Clock page • 62, 63, 64, 66 Closed Caption (HD/3G) parameter • 892, 897 Closed Caption parameter • 526, 527, 534, 535, 538, 584, 587 1280

Closed Caption Settings table • 538 Closed Caption tab page • 538 Closed captions • 534, 537 CN Margin Low Threshold (dB) parameter • 164 Coarse Delay parameter • 89, 92 Code Point parameter • 1098 Coding parameter • 168 Cold restart • 1169 Color (#RGB) parameters • 615, 618 Color (RGB) parameters • 174 Color Mode parameter • 174 Column FEC Stream IP parameter • 285, 286, 294, 295, 880, 899 Column IP parameter • 288 Column Socket Type parameter • 288 Communicating with computers that do not support IPsec • 1187 Communication messages • 812 Communication parameter • 1096 Communication restoration • 821 Communication setup • 812 Communication started message • 812 Communication Status alarm • 950 Communication Status column • 812, 813 Communication stopped message • 812 Communication timeout parameters • 821 Community Contains Multiple VSEs with Same Name and Encoder on DCM alarm • 975 Community Contains Multiple VSEs with Same Name on D9036 alarm • 975 Community String parameter • 57 Community Strings settings • 59 Company parameter • 829 Component branch • 205 Component Merge Rule - Input PID parameter • 334 Component Merge Rule - Language parameter • 334 Component Merge Rule - Stream Type parameter • 334 Component Merge Rule - Stream Type Value parameter • 334 Component Merge Rule - Tag parameter • 334 Component Merge Rule - Type parameter • 334 Component Merge Rule branch • 213 Component Merge Rule popup • 334 Component merge rules • 331, 333, 334, 336 Component Merge Rules parameters • 328 Component Tag parameter • 331, 344, 519, 624 Component Tag tracking type • 353

4011746 Rev AG

Index

Component Tracking Rules table • 350, 351, 353, 354, 521, 523 Component type • 235 Components • 321, 324 Compression Boost parameter • 549 Compression Cut parameter • 549 Conditional access • 743 Conditional access event • 743 Conditional access module • 734 Conditional access provider • 738 Conditional access system • 732, 733 Conditional access system information • 802 Conditional access system properties • 803 Conditional access table • 398, 739 Configuration settings • 42 Configuration tab • 811 Configurations parameter • 102, 109 Configure EAS Proxy popup • 640 Configure Output RTP Stream popup • 884, 885 Configure SDI generators • 174 Configure service loss alarm triggers • 999 Configure STT command • 261 Configure TOT command • 261 Configuring a Co-Processor Card • 89 Configuring a mirror port • 118 Configuring a Transcoder Card • 100 Configuring access criteria • 788 Configuring alarm threshold levels • 157 Configuring Alarms • 993 Configuring an ASI input port • 117 Configuring an ASI output port • 117 Configuring an IP Video Gateway Card • 107 Configuring Banner Insertion Settings • 631 Configuring card not operational alarm • 1012 Configuring descrambling parameters • 855 Configuring device alarms • 994 Configuring device backup settings • 962 Configuring device operational failure alarm • 1015 Configuring FEC settings • 285, 286, 288, 290, 294, 295, 297, 299, 880, 899 Configuring GbE port settings • 124 Configuring GPIO contacts • 80, 81 Configuring Interface alarm settings • 995 Configuring IP aliasing • 148 Configuring IPsec • 1180 Configuring JPEG2000 compression settings • 891, 892, 896, 897 Configuring outgoing streams • 890 Configuring payload bit rate too low alarm • 1010 4011746 Rev AG

Configuring PIP streams • 534 Configuring RTP stream settings • 879 Configuring scrambling parameters • 847 Configuring service transcode settings • 557 Configuring stuffing rate too low alarm • 1010 Configuring the hitless merge feature • 906 Configuring transcoded audio components • 542 Configuring transcoded video components • 527 Configuring Transport Stream loss alarm triggers • 1005, 1006, 1007 Configuring VLAN • 138 Connection Security Rules • 1196 Connection with CA System lost alarm • 975 Connections table • 757, 759, 760 Console Root • 1180 Constellation parameter • 168 Contact information • 16 Context sensitive online help • 12 Continuous mode • 297, 899 Continuously loop count • 607, 609 Control frames counter • 151 Control Panel • 1196 Control Panel - Administrative Tools dialog • 1196 Control Panel dialog • 1196 Control tab • 815, 823 Control word • 734, 735, 743, 846 Control word generator • 734, 735, 743 Coprocessor Board Settings • 92, 97 Co-Processor Card • 3, 9, 89 Co-Processor Card capacity • 95 Co-Processor Not Operational alarm • 975 Copy command • 145 Copying IGMP configuration • 145 Copyright parameter • 551 CoS (Precedence) parameter • 1098 Count parameter • 41, 142 Counters mode • 155 Country Code parameter • 447 CPB Delay (ms) parameter • 534, 535 Create Best Match Pass Rules parameter • 352 Create IP Security Policy command • 1190 Create rule command • 351 Create Rule tracking rule • 347 Create TS and Pass all Services parameter • 251 Creating a New Filter Action • 1187 Creating a New IP List • 1184 Creating a New IPsec Policy • 1190 Creating clips • 315, 316 Creating EAS proxies • 639 Creating ES stream type overrule entries • 382 1281

Index

Creating outgoing Transport Streams • 246, 249, 251, 253, 254, 255, 256 Creating PIP streams • 535 Creating Rate Control groups • 571, 573 Creating service component tracking rules • 351, 352 Creating SPTSs • 254 Critical severity level • 993 CRSP • 1061 CRSP Interval (ms) parameter • 1064 Crypto Period • 734, 735, 743 Crypto Period parameter • 776 Cryptographic algorithm • 733 CSA algorithm • 92 Current Activation parameter • 60 Current Configuration field • 627 Current Output PID parameter • 378 Current processing load • 95 Custom component passing method • 347 Custom mode • 528 Custom parameter • 1187 Custom PID Settings • 337, 338, 341, 342 Custom QoS mode • 1098 Custom Security Method Settings dialog • 1187 Custom Setting FEC stream mode • 288 CVCT • 400, 449 CVCT playout interval • 434 CVCT Settings • 450 CVCT TS Settings • 452 CW • 734, 735, 743 CWG • 734, 735, 743 CYTS • 1058 CYTS Delay (ms) parameter • 1064

D D parameter • 294, 295, 299, 899 D9036 statmux controller • 1091 Data Bit Rate Threshold (Kbps) parameter • 1003 Data ID EMM PID source • 769 Data ID(s) parameter • 766, 773 Data integrity and encryption (ESP) parameter • 1187 Data logging • 17 Data parameter • 386, 804 Data stream • 741 DataBroadcast service type • 444 DC High Pass Filter parameter • 551 DC-II input standard • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 DCM Blacklist parameter • 969 DCM device parameter • 969 1282

DCM housing • 3 DCM licensing • 28 DCM publications • 12 DCM tab • 969 Dd2Mac service type • 444 Deactivate command • 949 Deactivating a DCM • 60 Dec number format • 789, 816 Decode parameter • 546 Decoding tab • 548 Default Bitrate (Mbps) parameter • 1110, 1111 Default descrambling parameters • 856 Default Descrambling Settings • 856 Default FEC settings • 290, 299 Default Gateway parameter • 137 Default incoming Transport Stream parameters • 242 Default Input FEC Settings • 290 Default input standard • 238, 239, 241 Default Mediaguard compact CA descriptor mode • 238, 239, 241 Default mode • 285, 286, 999, 1006, 1007, 1008 Default MPEG priority bit mode • 238, 239, 241, 242 Default outgoing Transport Stream settings • 265, 275 Default Output FEC Settings • 299 Default Output Service Settings • 492 Default output standard mode • 403 Default PMT descriptor rule parameters • 393 Default PSI settings • 456 Default Refresh parameter • 215 Default scrambling mode • 751 Default scrambling parameters • 848 Default service auto pass rules • 309 Default Service Auto Pass Rules settings • 309 Default Service Backup Settings • 944, 1003 Default service component tracking rules • 356 Default service loss trigger alarms • 1003 Default Settings • 453 Default Settings page • 856 Default Settings table • 456 Default SI settings • 456 Default SI Table Playout table • 411, 438, 456 Default table playout interval parameters • 438 Default time base selection mode • 238, 239, 241 Default tracking rules • 356 Default Tracking Rules table • 356 Default Transport Stream loss trigger alarms • 1009 Default TS Backup Settings • 927, 1009 4011746 Rev AG

Index

Default VLAN Settings • 275 Defining access criteria • 802 Dejitter Buffer Reset alarm • 975 Delay (ms) parameter • 64, 475, 557 Delay parameter • 890, 894 Delaying CYTSs • 1061 Delaying service components • 473 Delete command • 494, 497 Delete menu • 560 Deleting imported NIT information • 460 Deleting IPsec peers • 76 Deleting peconfigured service loss alarm triggers • 1002 Deleting PID sync delay groups • 477 Deleting security accounts • 20 Deleting service component tracking rules • 354 Deleting static ARP entries • 135 Deleting tracking rules • 354, 523 Deleting transrating groups • 577 Deny Splice Request If Insufficient Resources parameter • 97 Deprovisioning Failed message • 813 Deprovisioning OK message • 813 Deprovisioning succeeded message • 813 DES algorithm • 92 Descrambling • 729, 845 Descrambling Components Setting popup • 834 Descrambling licensing • 34 Descrambling mode • 855 Descrambling parameter • 484, 834 Descrambling parameters • 855, 858, 859 Descrambling services • 855 Descrambling setting • 834 Descrambling Settings • 482, 855, 857, 858, 859 Descrambling Settings table • 484, 834 Descrambling tab • 858, 859 Description parameter • 83 Destination has Static ARP • 147 Destination IP Unresolved alarm • 975 Destination Resolved ARP • 147 Destination Unresolved ARP • 147 Destinations Overview table • 148 Destinations page • 147, 148 Detailed Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table • 1121, 1137 Detailed Processing Service Status Overview table • 1018, 1026 Detailed RAW Video Stream Status Overview table • 1018, 1024, 1030 Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table • 1121, 1123, 1133 4011746 Rev AG

Detailed Service Status Overview table • 1018, 1023, 1029 Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table • 1121, 1135 Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table • 1119, 1121, 1126, 1130 Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table • 1121, 1127, 1131 Detailed TS Status Overview table • 1018, 1027 Details parameter • 891, 896 Detected Mode parameter • 168 Determining outgoing service PCR • 470 Determining the Caption Service Descriptor • 537 Deterministic remote re-multiplexing • 1057 devdcm.py script • 954 Device alarm settings • 994 Device backup • 950, 956, 969 Device backup settings • 962 Device Backup Settings table • 962, 964 Device Backup Unmuted Alarm • 976 Device bit rates • 1118 Device clock • 62 Device configuration • 49 Device Host ID table • 41 Device is in Service Mode alarm • 976 Device name • 50 Device Name parameter • 790 Device Not Operational Alarm Triggers table • 1015, 1017 Device Operational Failure alarm • 950, 976, 1015 Device operational failure alarm triggers • 1015, 1017 Device Reset Scrambling dialog • 822 Device Role parameter • 962, 1055 Device Status Overview table • 1018, 1031 Device time • 62 Device Trace Settings table • 1159 Differentiated Service QoS mode • 1098 Diffie-Hellman • 1180 Digital Audio service type • 449 Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 • 2 Digital Data service type • 449 Digital De-Emphasis parameter • 551 Digital program insertion • 645 Digital program insertion licensing • 29 Digital satellite news gathering • 846 Digital Television service type • 449 Digital transport formatter licensing • 30 1283

Index

DIGITAL_ OVERLAY license • 32, 601 DigitalRadio service type • 444 DigitalTV service type • 444 Disable command • 27 Disable Descrambling command • 858 Disable Mode parameter • 124, 127, 129, 131 Disable Scrambling command • 851 Disabled ASI port • 117 Disabled filtering • 124, 127 Disabled GbE port • 124 Disabled Mediaguard compact CA descriptor mode • 238, 239, 241, 242 Disabled mode • 285, 286, 288, 290, 294, 295, 297, 443, 880, 899, 906, 999, 1000, 1006, 1007, 1008 Disabled network PID insertion into PAT • 443 Disabled NIT in PAT mode • 456 Disabled revertive • 919, 920, 923 Disabled service loss trigger mode • 1003 Disabled synchronization typr • 62 Disabled TS loss trigger mode • 1009 Disabling alarm message reporting • 993 Disabling IPsec • 1206 Disabling login information • 27 Disabling scrambling • 818, 819 Display Login screen info text parameter • 26 Display mode • 178 Display Mode settings • 178, 215 Display Settings page • 178 Do not communicate with computers that do not support IPsec setting • 1187 Do Not Insert rule type • 766 Do Not Modify parameter • 459 Documentation • 12 Dolby digital audio • 543 Dolby Digital Channel Settings • 553 Dolby Digital Plus audio • 543 Dolby Digital Processing Settings • 550, 551 Dolby Surround EX Mode parameter • 554 Dolby Surround Mode parameter • 551 Don't Switch to Backup Source in Service Loss parameter • 944 Don't Switch to Backup Source in TS Loss parameter • 927 Down Mix Settings • 548, 549 Downgrading a license file • 36 Download Alarm History • 1032 Download command • 1032 Downloading logos • 610 Downloading MIBs • 1165 Downloading trace logs • 1163 1284

DPI • 645 DPI licensing • 29 Drop on SPTS desired action parameter • 215, 324 Drop TS on GbE Port desired action parameter • 215 DRT • 401 DSNG • 846 DTF Bandwidth Exceeded alarm • 976 DTF licensing • 30 DTF_CONCENTRATOR license • 30 DTF_SCRAMBLING license • 30 Dual Mono to Mono parameter • 548, 549 Dummy component references • 336 Dummy PCR • 315, 471 Dummy video component • 315 Duplicate Packets counter • 292, 882, 906, 910 Duration (s) parameter • 632 DVB • 398, 402, 406 DVB common scrambling algorithm • 734 DVB input standard • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 DVB mode • 402 DVB S2 BER Too High Major alarm • 976 DVB S2 BER Too High Minor alarm • 976 DVB S2 C/N Margin Too Low alarm • 976 DVB S2 Interface Configuration page • 168, 829 DVB S2 LNB Over-current alarm • 977 DVB S2 Multistream License Missing alarm • 977 DVB S2 Reception License Missing alarm • 977 DVB S2 RF Input Level Too High alarm • 977 DVB S2 RF Input Level Too Low alarm • 977 DVB S2 RF Input Lock Loss alarm • 977 DVB S2 RF port configuration • 162 DVB S2/CI Interface Card • 2, 3, 9, 162, 168 DVB Simulcrypt descrambling • 825 DVB Simulcrypt mode • 750, 751 DVB simulcrypt scrambling • 731 DVB_S2_CAM license • 34, 826 DVB_S2_MULTISTREAM license • 30, 162 DVB_S2_RECEPTION license • 30, 162 DVB_SCRAMBLING license • 34, 846 DVB-CSA specifications • 846 DvBMhp service type • 444 DVB-S mode • 164 DVBS2 Descrambling CAM page • 834 DVB-S2 front-end temperature too high alarm • 976 DVB-S2 Interface table • 166 DVB-S2 interfaces • 164 DVB-S2 statistics • 170 4011746 Rev AG

Index

DVB-S2 Statistics table • 170 DVBS2 Status popup • 168 DVB-S2/CI Interface Card • 162 Dynamic ARP packets • 139 Dynamic mode • 528 Dynamic Range Compression Mode parameter • 549 Dynamic Range Control (Line) parameter • 551 Dynamic Range Control (RF) parameter • 551

E EAS • 400, 600 EAS alert insertion feature • 600, 635 EAS alert message • 600 EAS Alerts parameter • 631, 637 EAS Name parameter • 639 EAS Proxies • 638 Eas Proxy Input Selection settings • 427 EAS Proxy Settings • 641 Easy Reader parameter • 538 EBIF • 651, 675 EBIF stream type • 344 EBU Tech 3292 • 846 ECM • 734, 739, 743 ECM CAS ID parameter • 344 ECM CAS ID tracking type • 353 ECM generator • 755 ECM group • 738, 816 ECM ID • 743, 747, 806, 816 ECM ID ECM PID source • 757 ECM ID Mode parameter • 806, 808, 816, 817 ECM ID parameter • 808 ECM Packet Identifier • 816 ECM PID • 743, 816 ECM PID component merge rule type • 334 ECM PID Lower Limit parameter • 757 ECM PID parameter • 344 ECM PID Source parameter • 757 ECM PID tracking type • 353 ECM PID Upper Limit parameter • 757 ECM stream • 738, 755 ECM_ID • 738, 806, 816 ECMG • 735, 743, 755 ECMG backup • 755 ECMG channel status message parameters • 762, 764 ECMG connection entries • 759, 760 ECMg Descriptor Rule table • 767, 768 ECMG descriptor rules • 765, 766, 767, 768 ECMg Detail page • 757, 759, 760 ECMG interface • 757, 762 4011746 Rev AG

ECMG Name parameter • 757 ECMg Proxy Settings Overview table • 757, 759, 760, 761, 762, 764, 766, 767, 768 ECMg Settings • 757, 759, 760, 761 ECMG specific parameters • 761 ECMG Type parameter • 757 ECMs service auto passing rule • 308 Edit ECMg Descriptor Rule settings • 767 Edit EMMg Descriptor Rule settings • 774 Edit Properties parameter • 1190 EIS • 735, 738, 743, 755, 776, 806, 811, 816 EIS interface connection parameters • 777 EIS interfaces • 776, 777, 778 EIS Name parameter • 776 EIS Proxy Settings table • 776, 777 EIS Type parameter • 776 EISS • 651 EISS output ES type • 337 EISS stream type • 344 EIT • 398, 400, 454 EIT - ETT (ATSC) filter • 427, 431 EIT (DVB) for filter • 409, 418, 427, 439 EIT actual present/following • 398 EIT actual schedule • 398 EIT other present/following • 398, 421, 424 EIT other schedule • 398 EIT Present/Following parameter • 444 EIT Schedule Flag parameter • 444 EIT Start PID parameter • 454, 456 EIT TS Configuration settings • 415, 418, 431 EIT TS settings table • 427 EIT_FILTERING license • 33, 418 EIT_FILTERING_ADVANCED license • 33, 418 EIT0 playout interval • 434 EIT1 playout interval • 434 EIT2 and 3 playout interval • 434 EIT4 up to 127 playout interval • 434 EITa p/f • 398, 406 EITa p/f playout interval • 434 EITa p/f sub table information • 418 EITa sch • 398, 406 EITa sch after 8 days • 434 EITa sch first 8 days playout interval • 434 EITo p/f • 398, 406, 421 EITo p/f playout interval • 434 EITo p/f sub table information • 421 EITo sch • 398, 406 EITo sch after 8 days playout interval • 434 EITo sch first 8 days playout interval • 434 1285

Index

Elementary stream level scrambling • 741 Elementary stream type • 381, 382, 383 Embedded Audio Input Loss alarm • 977 Embedded DCM publications • 12 Emergency Alert System • 400, 600 Emergency Alert System settings • 637 EMM • 246, 734, 737, 739, 769 EMM component parameters • 360 EMM components • 358, 360, 362, 363 EMM Components tab • 362, 363 EMM Generated table • 359 EMM PID Lower Limit parameter • 769 EMM PID Source parameter • 769 EMM PID Upper Limit parameter • 769 EMM Section Grouping parameter • 769 EMM stream • 769 EMMG • 737, 743, 769 EMMG descriptor rules • 773, 774, 775 EMMg Descriptor Rules table • 774, 775 EMMG Interfaces • 769, 772 EMMG Name parameter • 769 EMMg Proxy Settings Overview table • 769, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775 EMMG Settings • 769, 771 EMMG specific parameters • 771 EMMG to MUX interface • 358, 737 EMMS table • 360, 363 Enable Descrambling command • 857 Enable Hot Backup feature • 762 Enable Hot Backup parameter • 60, 764 Enable parameter • 81, 117, 124, 127, 129, 131, 156, 164, 174, 424, 470, 471, 528, 530, 546, 829, 932, 933, 934 Enable Scrambling command • 850 Enabled ASI port • 117 Enabled GbE port • 124 Enabled Mediaguard compact CA descriptor mode • 238, 239, 241, 242 Enabled mode • 443, 906, 1011 Enabled network PID insertion into PAT • 443 Enabled NIT in PAT mode • 456 Enabled parameter • 117, 173, 546, 919, 993, 994, 1012 Enabled revertive • 919, 920, 923 Enabled Status parameter • 124, 829 Enabled stuffing rate too low alarm • 275 Enabling alarm message reporting • 993 Enabling IPsec • 1206 Enabling scrambling • 818, 850 Encapsulated security payload header • 75 Encode parameters • 546 1286

Encoder Branch • 197 Encoder Dropout alarm • 977 Encoding Mode parameter • 540, 542 Encoding parameter • 526, 527 Encryption algorithm • 1187 End Debouncing (s) parameter • 994, 995 End to End Delay parameter • 105, 557 Ennabled payload bitrate too low alarm • 275 Enter the multicast IP addresses separated by a comma parameter • 142 Enter the source IP addresses separated by a comma parameter • 142 Entitlement control message • 734, 735, 743 Entitlement control message generator • 735, 743, 755 Entitlement control message identifier • 806, 816 Entitlement management message • 246, 734, 737, 769, 846 Entitlement management message generator • 737, 769 Error Concealment parameter • 549 Error Intervals (ms) settings • 995 Error performance • 163 Errored - Packets parameter • 170 Errored - Seconds parameter • 170 Errored - Severely parameter • 170 ES ECM CAS ID parameter • 344 ES ECM CAS ID tracking type • 353 ES ECM PID tracking type • 353 ES ECM PIDparameter • 344 ES ECMs service auto passing rule • 308 ES Output PID parameter • 353 ES PID component merge rule type • 334 ES PID parameter • 344, 347 ES PID tracking type • 353 ES Rate parameter • 528, 530, 546 ES service auto passing rule • 308 ES stream type overrule entries • 382, 383 ES Type Overrule table • 382, 383 ES Type parameter • 347 ESP • 75 ETM Location parameter • 449 ETM parameter • 449 ETM table • 450 ETR 290, 1st priority alarms • 972 ETT • 400, 454 ETT playout interval • 434 ETT Start PID parameter • 454, 456 ETT0 playout interval • 434 ETT1 playout interval • 434 ETT2 and 3 playout interval • 434 4011746 Rev AG

Index

ETT4 up to 127 playout interval • 434 ETT-V PID parameter • 454, 456 ETV Applications • 651, 675 ETV PIDs parameter • 676 Even parity • 847, 848, 855, 856 Event information scheduler • 735, 738, 743, 755, 776, 806, 811, 816 Event information table • 398, 400 Every 12 Hours sync interval • 66 Every 14 Days sync interval • 66 Every 31 Days sync interval • 66 Every 7 Days parameter • 66 Every Day sync interval • 66 Every Hour sync interval • 66 Exception List • 424 Exclude 1 1 Device Backup Settings parameter • 42 Exclude All GbE Settings parameter • 42 Exclude Basic GbE Settings parameter • 42 Exclude Device Name and Board Names parameter • 42 Exclude EIT, ETT and others filter • 427, 439 Exclude filter • 142 Exclude IGMP Settings parameter • 42 Exclude IPsec Settings parameter • 42 Exclude NTP's Drift File parameter • 42 Exclude Scrambler Configurator Settings parameter • 42 Exclude Security Settings parameter • 42 Exclude Settings Backup's Own Settings parameter • 42 Exclude Static Routes for Mainboard Settings parameter • 42 Export command • 1163 Export Device Settings to File parameter • 42 Export to File command • 461 Exporting configuration settings • 42 Exporting PSI • 462 Exporting SI • 461, 462 Extended bitstream information • 554 Extended BSI • 554 Extended BSI Bit Stream Mode parameter • 554 Extended BSI Settings table • 554 Extended coarse delay • 89 Extended GOP video quality algorithm • 89 Extended text tables • 400 External IP services • 83 External IP Services table • 83 External PSIG • 411 Extract command • 316

4011746 Rev AG

F Factory Reset Pins Are Triggered alarm • 977 Factory restart • 1169 Fade In (frames) parameter • 607, 609 Fade Out (frames) parameter • 607, 609 Fade settings • 615, 618 Fan Failure alarm • 978 FCS/CRC error counter • 151 FEC • 3, 9, 279, 871 FEC 1D mode • 285, 286, 288, 290, 294, 295, 880, 899 FEC 2D mode • 285, 286, 288, 290, 294, 295, 880, 899 FEC Code Rate parameter • 168 FEC Error Generation settings • 297, 899 FEC Errored Blocks - Clean parameter • 160 FEC Errored Blocks - Correctable parameter • 160 FEC Errored Blocks - Not Correctable parameter • 160 FEC errors • 297 FEC L/D Error alarm • 978 FEC latencies • 284 FEC licensing • 30 FEC overhead • 284 FEC packet • 280 FEC packet transportation • 283 FEC profiles • 280 FEC scheme limits • 871 FEC schemes • 283 FEC settings • 285, 286, 288, 290, 294, 295, 297, 299, 880, 899 FEC Settings tab • 294, 295, 880, 882, 899 FEC Settings table • 286, 294, 880, 882, 899 FEC statistics • 292 FEC Streams parameter • 288, 290, 299 FEC tab • 290, 299 FEC Temperature alarm • 978 FEC_COP3_CODEC license • 30 Field parameter • 538 Filter Action • 1187 Filter Action General Options • 1187 Filter Action Name • 1187 Filter Action tab • 1190 Filter Action wizard • 1187 Filter Actions list • 1187 Filter parameter • 874 Filtering parameter • 124, 127 Find Active Source • 224 Find Destinations • 225 1287

Index

Find Source • 224 Fine Delay parameter • 89, 92 First Input PID parameter • 373 First IP Address parameter • 139 First Output PID parameter • 373 First Source IP Address parameter • 142 First Subnet Mask parameter • 139 Fixed (Unique within System) ECM ID mode • 816, 817 Fixed (Unique within TS) ECM ID mode • 816, 817 Fixed ECM ID mode • 806, 808, 817 Fixed Individual Ports GbE port mode • 121, 123 Fixed Packets counter • 292, 882, 910 Flash Status dialog • 1146 Flashing software • 1146 Floating device backup • 958 Floating revertive mode • 938 FmRadio service type • 444 Follow Input for PSIP-EIT (and ETT) mode • 431, 456 Follow Input for PSIP-EIT mode • 431, 456 Follow Input Presence • 444, 449 Font library • 612 Font parameter • 615, 618 Fonts page • 613 Fonts table • 613 For all Applicable Rows command • 352 Forbidden PID Ranges parameters • 267, 268, 270 Forbidden PID Ranges popup • 268, 270, 275 Force Audio3 output standard mode • 249, 259 Force Output • 444, 449 Force to 0 MPEG priority bit mode • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 Force to 1 MPEG priority bit mode • 238, 239, 241, 242 Force Uplink output standard mode • 249, 259 Force Video output standard mode • 249, 259 Forced Name parameter • 468 Forced PCR time base selection mode • 235, 238, 239, 241 Forced SID parameter • 468 Format parameter • 528, 530, 874, 879, 894, 895 Forward error correction • 279, 871 Forward error correction licensing • 30 Fragments counter • 151 Frame Rate Delay parameter • 89, 92 Frame Rate parameter • 528, 531 Frames Received OK counters • 151 Frames Transmitted OK counters • 151 1288

Free CA Mode parameter • 444 Frequency (MHz) parameter • 156, 159 From Port 1 - Port 2 to Port 3 - Port 4 action • 145 From Port 1 to Port 3 action • 145 From Port 3 - Port 4 to Port 1 - Port 2 action • 145 From Port 3 to Port 1 action • 145 FTP option • 21 Full Link Disabled mode • 124, 127, 129

G Gateway parameter • 72, 137 Gateway Resolved ARP • 147 Gateway Unresolved ARP • 147 GbE Interface Card • 2, 3, 9, 121 GbE Interface Configuration page • 122, 123, 127, 131, 132, 149, 150, 151 GbE Multicast backup stream - type • 947 GbE Multicast backup TS type • 920 GbE Multicast backup type • 941 GbE Multicast input selection type • 470 GbE Multicast input type • 66, 273, 304, 326, 331, 338, 373 GbE Multicast parameter • 923 GbE Multicast socket type • 919 GbE Multicast source TS type • 421, 424 GbE Multicast type • 415, 418, 427, 938 GbE Name • 127 GbE port backup • 914 GbE port backup parameters • 915 GbE port configuration • 121 GbE port interface parameters • 121, 132 GbE port network settings • 127 GbE port pair settings • 129 GbE Port parameter • 72 GbE Port Settings table • 127 GbE port speed mode • 122 GbE Port Speed settings • 122 GbE Settings table • 131 GbE Statistics page • 151 GbE UDP boundary • 132 GbE UDP Boundary Setting • 132 GbE Unicast backup stream - type • 947 GbE Unicast backup TS - type • 920 GbE Unicast backup type • 923, 941 GbE Unicast input selection type • 470 GbE Unicast input type • 66, 273, 304, 326, 331, 338, 373 GbE Unicast socket type • 919 GbE Unicast source TS type • 421, 424 4011746 Rev AG

Index

GbE Unicast type • 415, 418, 427, 938 Gen Lock parameter • 109 General configuration • 177 General EIS type • 776 General PSIG type • 779 General purpose input output contacts • 80 General settings • 551 General tab • 1190 Generate Alarms parameter • 995 Generate All EITa p/f mode • 427 Generate All EITa sch mode • 427 Generate EIT and ETToutput mode • 431 Generate EIT output mode • 431 Generate EITa sch first 8 days mode • 427 Generate output mode • 413, 427, 431 Generate PSIP-EIT - All mode • 431, 456 Generate PSIP-EIT - First 12 hours mode • 431, 456 Generate PSIP-EIT - First 3 hours mode • 431, 456 Generate PSIP-EIT - First 6 hours mode • 431, 456 Generate PSIP-EIT - First Day mode • 431, 456 Generate PSIP-EIT - First week mode • 431, 456 Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - All mode • 431, 456 Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - First 12 hours mode • 431, 456 Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - First 3 hours mode • 431, 456 Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - First 6 hours mode • 431, 456 Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - First Day mode • 431, 456 Generate PSIP-EIT (and ETT) - First week mode • 431, 456 Generated EMMs table • 360, 363 Generating FEC errors • 297 Generating test messages • 994 Generation modes • 413 Generator SDI no stream mode • 173, 175 Genlocking • 107, 872 Global Alarm Settings table • 994, 995, 1013, 1014, 1015 Global counters • 151 Good Packets parameter • 297, 899 GOP - B-Pictures parameter • 532 GOP - Closed GOP parameter • 532 GOP - Hierarchical parameter • 532 GOP - Mode parameter • 532 GOP - Size parameter • 532 4011746 Rev AG

GOP Length (frames) parameter • 534, 535 GOP settings • 528, 532 Goto Rule tracking rule • 347 GPI_ENABLE license • 30 GPIO - service loss alarm trigger • 997, 999, 1000, 1003 GPIO contact licensing • 30 GPIO contacts • 80 GPIO page • 81 GPIO parameter • 999, 1000, 1003 GPS UTC Offset (s) parameter • 453 Guest account • 17 GW_10G_GBE license • 31, 122, 873 GW_3G_HD_SDI license • 31, 873 GW_FEC license • 31, 873 GW_HD_SDI license • 31, 873 GW_IP_STREAM license • 31, 873

H H.264 to MPEG-2 video conversion • 506 Hardware Configuration box • 50 Hardware key • 78 Hardware Key Inserted alarm • 78, 978 HD 1080i 25fps mode • 174 HD 1080i 29.97fps mode • 174 HD 1080i 30fps mode • 174 HD 1080p 25fps mode • 174 HD 1080p 29.97fps mode • 174 HD 1080p 30fps mode • 174 HD 720p 50fps mode • 174 HD 720p 59.94fps mode • 174 HD 720p 60fps mode • 174 HD Bitrate (Mbps) parameter • 526, 527 HD DigitalTv service type • 444 HD Frame Rates in Uncompresses Transport parameter • 107 HD NVOD Reference service type • 444 HD NVOD Time Shifted service type • 444 HD_AVC_SPLICING_EXTENSION license • 29 HD_AVC_TRANSCODE_EXTENSION license • 35, 508 HE-AAC audio • 540, 543 Headend IPs parameter • 1190 Headend IPsec Filter parameter • 1190 Headend IPsec Filter Properties dialog • 1187 Headend Policy Properties dialog • 1190 Heartbeat Network Interface parameter • 962 Heartbeat Protocol Error alarm • 978 Heartbeat Protocol Version Mismatch alarm • 978 1289

Index

Heartbeat UDP Port parameter • 962 Height, Width (px) parameters • 615, 618 Hex number format • 789, 816 Hidden parameter • 449 Hide Guide parameter • 449 Hierarchical parameter • 528, 532 High fine delay • 89 High profile • 531 Highlight Destination • 225 Hitless merge feature • 873, 905, 906 Hitless merge statistics • 906 Hitless Merge tab • 906 Hitless switchover • 928 Hitless Switchover table • 906 Hold Timeout (s) parameter • 934 Host ID • 36 Host ID parameter • 41 Hot Swap command • 110 HW Ver parameter • 829

I I/O type • 124 ID for dialog • 793 ID parameter • 270 Identification parameter • 528, 891, 896 Identify Me • 45 Identify Me command • 45 IDR Insertion settings • 528, 532 IGMP • 142 IGMP configuration • 145 IGMP Configuration page • 142, 145, 146 IGMP multicast groups • 142 IGMP packets • 139 IGMP Settings table • 142, 146 Ignore Password Policy parameter • 21 IIOP option • 21 IKE • 75, 1180 Illegal Encoder Version alarm • 978 Image legend • 14 Import Data From File command • 387 Import Data From File parameter • 387 Import SI Table settings • 459 Importing configuration settings • 42 Importing PMT descriptors • 387 Importing SI • 459 Inactive IP aliasing • 68, 148, 149 Inactive revertive • 914 Include filter • 142 Incoming components bit rates overview • 1123, 1127

1290

Incoming RTP stream related alarm details • 1024 Incoming RTP stream related alarms • 1023 Incoming RTP streams FEC settings • 880 Incoming SDI stream related alarm details • 1024 Incoming SDI stream related alarms • 1023 Incoming Service Bit Rate diagram • 591 Incoming service settings • 231, 232, 233 Incoming services bit rates • 1118, 1126 Incoming services bit rates overview • 1122 Incoming services related alarm details • 1023 Incoming services related alarms • 1021 Incoming streams • 878 Incoming Transport Stream bit rates • 1118 Incoming Transport Stream FEC settings • 290 Incoming Transport Stream settings • 235, 238, 241, 242 Incoming Transport Streams alarm details • 1021 Incoming transport streams alarms • 1020 Incoming Transport Streams bit rates overview • 1124 Increment Scheme parameter • 265 Indeterminate severity level • 993 Index Packet Discontinuity alarm • 978 Index Packet Interpreter Not Started alarm • 979 Index Packet Interpreter parameter • 235, 1061 Index Packet Interval Too High alarm • 979 Info icon • 14 Info parameter • 887 Information • 14 Information severity level • 993 Initial security configuration • 1231 Initiator • 1055 Inner Loop Descriptor Order Rules table • 393 Inner Loop Descriptor Removal Rules table • 393 Inner Loop Order type • 391, 393 Inner Loop Removal type • 389, 393 In-point • 646 Input - Backup link • 467 Input - Card parameter • 328, 334, 341, 347, 360, 378, 467 Input - Channel ID parameter • 360, 366 Input - Client ID parameter • 360, 366 Input - Data ID parameter • 360, 366 Input - EIT Present/Following parameter • 444 Input - EIT Schedule Flag parameter • 444 Input - Free CA Mode parameter • 444 Input - IP Address parameter • 326, 328, 334, 341, 347, 360, 378, 467 4011746 Rev AG

Index

Input - Name parameter • 328, 334, 444, 467 Input - ON ID parameter • 328, 334, 347, 360, 378, 467 Input - PID parameter • 341, 347, 378 Input - Port parameter • 328, 334, 341, 347, 360, 378, 467 Input - Present parameter • 328, 334 Input - Proxy Name parameter • 360, 366 Input - Running Status parameter • 444 Input - Service Provider Name parameter • 444 Input - Service Type parameter • 444 Input - SID parameter • 328, 334, 467 Input - Stream ID parameter • 360, 366 Input - Tag parameter • 347 Input - TS ID parameter • 328, 334, 347, 360, 378, 467 Input - Type parameter • 341, 347 Input - UDP Port parameter • 328, 334, 341, 347, 360, 378, 467, 919 Input - VCT parameter • 449 Input table • 426 Input bit rates tables • 1121, 1122 Input Board Type Delay parameter • 89, 92 Input Card parameter • 66, 273, 304, 326, 331, 338, 373, 519, 624 Input EMM table • 359 Input IP Address parameter • 66, 273, 304, 331, 338, 373, 919 Input Level (dBm) parameter • 156, 159, 160, 168 Input Name parameter • 326, 331, 519, 624 Input parameter • 255, 326, 415, 418, 427, 582 Input PID parameter • 331, 338, 353, 360, 373, 519, 624 Input PID Selection popup • 415, 418, 427 Input Port parameter • 66, 273, 304, 326, 331, 338, 373 Input Port Services page • 233, 1000, 1002 Input Port Signal page • 877 Input Port Streams tab • 874, 876, 877, 878, 879, 880, 882, 906 Input Port TS Backup page • 920, 923, 926 Input Port TS FEC page • 286, 288 Input Port TS Loss page • 1006 Input Port TS Settings page • 239 Input Rate Limit (Mbps) parameter • 114, 117 Input RAW Video Streams Status Overview table • 1018, 1023 Input RTP Stream Settings • 874, 876, 879 Input SDI Streams tab • 878 Input Selection - Card parameter • 470 4011746 Rev AG

Input Selection - IP Address parameter • 470 Input Selection - PID parameter • 470 Input Selection - Port parameter • 470 Input Selection - Type parameter • 470 Input Selection - UDP Port parameter • 470 Input Selection popup • 415, 418, 427 Input service settings • 500 Input Service Settings page • 232, 999 Input Service Status Overview table • 1018, 1021 Input Services table • 255, 303, 326, 582 Input Settings table • 156, 168 Input SI View page • 406, 461 Input SID parameter • 304 Input stage filter • 500 Input Standard parameter • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 Input Status page • 1020, 1021, 1023, 1024 Input Streams parameters • 887 Input tree bit rates • 1118 Input TS Default Settings • 242 Input TS popup • 66, 273, 338, 373 Input TS Settings page • 238, 285, 292, 919, 925, 1006 Input TS Status Overview table • 1018, 1020 Input TS table • 311, 582 Input type • 115, 124 Input Type parameter • 66, 273, 304, 326, 331, 338, 373 Input UDP Port parameter • 66, 273, 304, 326, 331, 373 Insert CA Descriptors in Imported CAT • 441 Insert command • 632 Insert parameter • 766 Insert PID Range parameter • 373 Insert Range command • 373 Insertion channel • 646 Insertion Channel Active alarm • 979 Insertion Channel popup • 658, 662 Insertion Interval (ms) parameter • 1063 Insertion to primary channel • 646 Installed parameter • 41 Installing a license file • 37 Installing CA certificates • 1223, 1234, 1238 Installing the slate generation tool • 316 Integrity algorithm • 1187 Interface alarm settings • 995 Interface card bit rates • 1118 Interface card slot cover plate • 3 Interface conversion • 248 Interface parameter • 639 1291

Index

Internal PSIG generator • 411 Internal PSIG Generator • 411, 456 Internet Group Multicast Protocol • 142 Internet key exchange • 75, 1180 Interval (ms) parameter • 436, 437, 438 Invalid Opcode counter • 151 Invalid Resolution alarm • 979 Invalid User Input table • 76 Invalid Video Format alarm • 979 IP Address + 1 and UDP Port + 1 increment scheme • 265 IP Address + 1 increment scheme • 265 IP Address dialog • 1196 IP Address parameter • 53, 57, 64, 69, 72, 76, 124, 127, 132, 134, 137, 147, 150, 241, 249, 259, 415, 418, 427, 500, 757, 759, 884, 885, 887, 923, 938, 1000, 1146 IP Address Range parameter • 1146 IP Alias - Mode parameter • 60, 68 IP Alias 10/100 Port table • 70 IP Alias GbE Port table • 70 IP Alias mode • 68, 149 IP Alias Port table • 150, 151 IP Alias table • 68, 69 IP aliasing feature • 68, 148, 951, 961 IP decapsulation • 870 IP encapsulation • 870 IP Filter Description and Mirrored property • 1184 IP Filter List dialog • 1184 IP Filter List tab • 1190 IP Filter Properties dialog • 1184 IP Gateway License Error alarm • 979 IP Gateway Reference Clock Input Loss alarm • 872, 979 IP Gateway type • 107, 109 IP List • 1184 IP Only filtering • 124, 127 IP parameter • 288, 304, 874, 879, 894, 895 IP Protocol Type • 1184 IP security • 75, 1180 IP Security Policies on Local Computer options • 1180 IP Security Policy Name • 1190 IP Security Policy wizard • 1190 IP services • 83 IP Services table • 83 IP Settings - TOS parameter • 270 IP Settings - TTL parameter • 270 IP Settings On parameter • 894, 895, 899 IP Statmux device backup • 969 1292

IP Switch Configurable parameter • 954 IP Traffic Destination • 1184 IP Traffic Security • 1187 IP Traffic Source • 1184 IP video gateway • 869 IP Video Gateway Card • 2, 3, 9, 107, 121, 172, 870 IP Video Gateway Card settings • 109 IP video gateway licensing • 31 IP video gateway statistics • 910 IP/ASI Gateway Monitor Ports table • 887 IP/ASI Gateway Routing table • 887 IP/ASI video gateway • 869 IPConfig • 83, 1231 IPG Statistics page • 911 IPsec • 1180 IPsec Connection • 1196 IPsec filter • 77 IPsec Management Console • 1180 IPsec packets • 75 IPsec parameter • 77 IPsec peers • 76 IPsec Policy • 1190 IPsec Settings table • 76, 77, 78 IPsec snap-in • 1180 IPsec Traffic Only IPsec filter • 77 IPv4 Network Settings table • 53 IPv6 Address parameter • 55 IPv6 addresses • 52 IPv6 Network Settings table • 55 Irdeto M_Crypt ECMG type • 757 ISI Codes parameter • 168 ISI parameter • 232, 233, 238, 241, 273, 304, 326, 331, 338, 373, 415, 418, 421, 424, 427, 470, 500, 658, 662, 667, 676, 692, 695, 703, 704, 709, 711, 716, 919, 920, 923, 938, 941, 1018

J JIT tree loading mode parameter • 215 Jitter (ms) parameter • 64 Jitter Tolerance (ms) parameter • 874, 879 Join command • 142 Join Multicast Group popup • 874 Join Multicast IP action • 142 Join Multicast IP Range action • 142 Join or Modify Multicast Group settings • 142 Joining a GbE port to a multicast group • 142 JPEG2000 Card • 3 JPEG2000 compressing • 107, 109 JPEG2000 compression settings • 891, 896 4011746 Rev AG

Index

JPEG2000 decompressing • 107, 109 JPEG2000 image coding • 870 JPEG2K format • 874, 879, 895 JPEG2K parameter • 109 JPEG2K Settings tab • 891, 892, 896 JPEG2K Summary table • 891, 892, 896, 897

K Keep Closed GOPs mode • 528 Keep the multicast join parameter • 145 Kerberos entry • 1190 Key exchange • 75 Key Exchange Security Methods dialog • 1190 Key Exchange Settings dialog • 1190 Key parameter • 41, 1196

L L parameter • 294, 295, 299, 899 LAN • 138 Lang. parameter • 347 Language parameter • 331, 519, 538, 624, 794 Last Input PID parameter • 373 Last Poll parameter • 64 Launching MMC • 1180 LAYERII_AUDIO_TRANSCODE license • 35, 508 Leave Checked Items command • 146 Leaving the multicast group membership of a GbE port • 146 Legend • 14 Legend page • 14 Length/Type out of range counter • 151 Level (db) parameter • 540, 542, 546 LFE Channel Enable parameter • 551 LFE Low Pass Filter parameter • 551 Libraries • 605 License file • 36, 37 License Installation Failure alarm • 39, 41, 979 License overview • 38 License Overview table • 41 License Version parameter • 41 Licenses page • 36, 37, 38 Licensing • 28, 156, 508, 601, 873 Line 21 parameter • 538 Link Loss - service loss alarm trigger • 997, 999, 1000, 1003 Link Loss - Transport Stream Loss alarm trigger • 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009 Link Loss alarm • 979 Link Loss and UDP Loss trigger alarm • 914 Link Loss trigger alarm • 914 4011746 Rev AG

Link Switched alarm • 980 Lip Sync parameter • 546 List PID type • 997, 999, 1000 LNC Band parameter • 168 LNC settings • 164 LO High Frequency (MHz) parameter • 164 LO Low Frequency (MHz) parameter • 164 Lo/Ro Center Mix Level parameter • 554 Lo/Ro Surround Mix Level parameter • 554 Load balancing • 755 Load Model From Device(s) command • 790 Load Model from Devices dialog • 790 Load sharing • 755 Local Area Network • 138 Local computer parameter • 1180 Local IP parameter • 83 Local Port parameter • 83 Local program insertion settings • 89, 92 Local Program Insertion Settings - Mode parameter • 89, 92 Local Time Offset Descriptor table • 447, 448 Locating passed services • 224, 225 Lock Status parameter • 168 Locked parameter • 156, 159 Log page • 813, 820 Log tab • 820 Logging off • 24 Logging on • 24 Login page • 11 Login page information • 26, 27 Logo assignment • 627 Logo field • 603 Logo Inserter • 599 Logo Inserter Overview table • 601, 603 Logo Inserter Service page • 627, 629, 631, 632, 634, 637 Logo Inserter Service tab page • 603 Logo Inserter type • 100 Logo insertion feature • 600, 627 Logo insertion licensing • 32 Logo Insertion Overview page • 601, 629 Logo Insertion table • 603, 627, 628, 629 Logo library • 605 Logo page • 609, 610, 611 Logo parameter • 627 Logo parameters • 615 Logo Problem alarm • 980 Logo settings • 615 Logo Settings table • 607, 609, 610, 611 Logo size • 611 Logo tab page • 607 1293

Index

Logo Video Problem alarm • 980 Long Name parameter • 449 Loop Count parameter • 607, 615, 618 Low fine delay • 89 Low memory alarm • 980 Lt/Rt Center Mix Level parameter • 554 Lt/Rt Surround Mix Level parameter • 554 Luxi • 612

M MAC Address parameter • 53, 124, 132, 134 MAC and IP filtering • 124, 127 MAC Only filtering • 124, 127 Main - Backup Delay (s) parameter • 918, 919, 920, 923, 937, 938, 941, 962 Main Backup Device Role Conflict alarm • 39, 980 Main command • 926 Main device role • 962 Main Dialog Normalization Level (dB) parameter • 553 MAIN license • 29 Main Peak Mixing Level (dB) parameter • 553 Main Production Info Exists parameter • 553 Main profile • 531 Main Room Type parameter • 553 Main Service branch • 211 Main Service Source table • 938 Main Socket Type parameter • 923 Main type • 328, 334 Maintenance page • 26, 27, 45, 82, 1167, 1171 Main-to-Backup transition • 949 Major severity level • 993 Malfunction alarm • 980 Manage Filter Actions tab • 1187 Manage IP filter lists and filter Actions dialog • 1184 Management Console • 1184, 1195 Management Port IP Addresses table • 53 Management port network settings • 56 Management ports • 52, 68, 72 Manual backup transition • 925, 926 Manual Banner Insertion settings • 603, 632, 634 Manual EAS alert insertion • 637 Manual restore action • 954, 964 Manual x backup mode • 914 Manuals table • 12 Master guide table • 400 Matching behavior • 344 Max Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter • 584, 587

1294

Max CPB Removal Delay (ms) parameter • 526, 527 Max Input Audio Rate (Kbps) parameter • 97 Max Input HD Rate (Mbps) parameter • 97 Max Input SD Rate (Mbps) parameter • 97 Max Number Of Audio parameter • 97 Max. Bandwidth parameter • 769, 779 Maximum Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter • 829 Maximum Bitrate (Mbps) parameter • 1110, 1111 Maximum Bitrate Descriptor Mode parameter • 557 Maximum Logo Size • 611 Maximum processing load • 95 MCT • 401 MD5 • 75, 1180, 1187 MDP Extension Interval (ms) parameter • 1064 MDP Multiplication Delay (ms) parameter • 1064 MDP Multiplication Factor parameter • 1064 Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor mode • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 MER (db) parameter • 160 MER Threshold (dB) parameter • 157 Merge Service into SPTS parameter • 324 Merged Comp type • 328, 334 Merged Components branch • 212 Merged link • 326, 328, 329, 331, 334, 336 Merged Service branch • 211 Merged Service Source table • 938 Merged Service type • 328, 334 Merged Services table • 328, 329, 331, 334, 336, 519, 624 Merging Components • 324, 330, 518, 623 Merging incoming services into outgoing services • 324, 326 Merging unreferenced components • 338, 340, 341, 342 Message parameter • 615, 618, 632, 637 Messages • 600 Metadata pass-through • 506 Metric • 928 MFP All Services rate control group • 569, 573, 584 MFP Card • 2, 3, 9, 104 MFP engine branch • 198 MFP Multiple SPTS rate control group • 569, 573, 587 MFP Selective Services rate control group • 569, 573, 584 MFP Service Components tab • 521, 523 4011746 Rev AG

Index

MFP Video table • 530, 531, 532 MFP_AAC_ENCODING license • 35, 508 MFP_AVC_HD_EXTENSION license • 35, 508, 564 MFP_AVC_SD_TR_EXTENSION license • 564 MFP_AVC_SD_TRANSRATE license • 35, 508, 564 MFP_AVC_TC_EXTENSION license • 35, 508 MFP_DOLBY_DIGITAL_AC3_ENCODING license • 35, 508 MFP_DOLBY_DIGITAL_PLUS_ENCODING license • 35, 508 MFP_MP2_HD_EXTENSION license • 35, 508 MFP_MP2_SD_TRANSRATE license • 35, 508, 564 MFP_MP2_TC_EXTENSION license • 35, 508 MFP_MPEG1_LII_ENCODING license • 35, 508 MFP_STATMUX license • 35, 508 MGT • 400 MGT playout interval • 434 MIBs • 1165 Microsoft Internet Explorer • 11 Min Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter • 584, 587 Minimum Bitrate (Mbps) parameter • 1110, 1111 Minor severity level • 993 MIP synchronization • 1055 MIP Synchronization Can’t Be Started alarm • 980 MIP Synchronization Communication Down alarm • 981 MIP Synchronization parameter • 1049 MIP Synchronization Settings • 1055 MIP_INSERTION license • 34 Mirror 1 on 2 port mirroring • 129, 131 Mirror 3 on 4 port mirroring • 129, 131 Mirror of Port Pair parameter • 129, 131 Mirror of Port parameter • 118 Mirrored. Match packets with the exact opposite source and destination addresses parameter • 1184 Missing FEC Stream(s) alarm • 982 Missing in PAT - service loss alarm trigger • 997, 999, 1000, 1003 Missing Packets counter • 292, 882, 906, 910 MMC • 1180, 1190 MMC main screen • 1180

4011746 Rev AG

Mode parameter • 68, 89, 122, 149, 155, 164, 168, 295, 297, 299, 402, 403, 404, 418, 427, 431, 443, 528, 532, 750, 751, 880, 899, 906, 1000, 1006, 1007 Modifying CVCT • 450 Modifying GPS UTC offset • 453 Modifying service component tracking rules • 353 Modifying STT • 453 Modifying tracking rules • 353 Modifying TVCT • 450 Modular concept • 2 Modulation Mode parameter • 449 Modules parameter • 1159 Monitor parameter • 887 Monitor port • 886 Monitored Stream parameters • 887 Monitoring Device parameter • 954 Mosaic service type • 444 MOT PIM • 398 MOT PNM • 398 Motorola PSI • 411 Motorola PSI parameter • 411, 456 Mozilla Firefox • 11 MPEG priority bit licensing • 31 MPEG Priority Bit mode parameter • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 MPEG processing • 2 MPEG/AVC Mismatch alarm • 982 MPEG-1 Audio type • 794 MPEG1 Layer II audio • 32, 478, 479, 480, 543 MPEG2 • 402 MPEG-2 Audio type • 794 Mpeg2 HD service type • 444 MPEG2 local program insertion settings mode • 89 MPEG2 mode • 402 MPEG-2 to H.264 video conversion • 506 MPEG-L2 decode settings • 548 MTR • 401 Multi Channel Specific settings • 551 Multi Stream port mode • 164 Multicast ARP • 147 Multicast column socket type • 288 Multicast frames counter • 151 Multicast main socket type • 923 Multicast socket type • 241, 288, 1000 Multicast type • 285, 286, 880 Multiple SPTS rate control group • 573, 587 Multiplexing • 229 Multi-TS transrating group • 573 1295

Index

Muxing • 229 My IP Address • 1184

N Nagra NagraVision ECMG type • 757 Name parameter • 50, 81, 83, 88, 115, 117, 119, 124, 127, 132, 156, 159, 164, 173, 232, 233, 317, 347, 386, 444, 500, 571, 573, 574, 575, 607, 609, 613, 615, 766, 773, 802, 804, 829, 884, 885, 887, 1049, 1184, 1190, 1196 Naming services • 525 Navigating Possibilities • 512, 603 Negotiate Security parameter • 1187 Netstat page • 83 Network connections • 83 Network ID parameter • 406 Network information table • 398 Network PID insertion into PAT • 443 Network PID insertion mode • 443 Network QoS settings • 1098 Network settings • 52 Network Settings table • 56, 72, 77 Network statistics • 83 Network Time Protocol • 62 New Authentication Method Properties dialog • 1190 New Connection Security Rule Wizard Authentication Method dialog • 1196 New Connection Security Rule Wizard Endpoints dialog • 1196 New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Name dialog • 1196 New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Profile dialog • 1196 New Connection Security Rule Wizard Requirements dialog • 1196 New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Rule Type dialog • 1196 New ECMg Descriptor Rule settings • 766 New EMMg Descriptor Rule settings • 773 New ES Type parameter • 382 New Filter Action • 1187 New Output PID parameter • 378 New Rule command • 1196 New Rule Properties dialog • 1190 NIT • 398 NIT actual • 398 NIT in PAT Mode • 456 NIT in PAT settings • 443 NIT other • 398 NITa • 398 1296

NITa playout interval • 434 NITo • 398, 406 NITo playout interval • 434 No access controlled • 449 No Ad Server Available alarm • 982 No AVC Encoder alarm • 982 No backup backup stream - type • 947 No Components to Scramble CP Extension alarm • 982 No CWG Connection Available alarm • 982 No DTF Concentrator License Available alarm • 982 No DTF Scrambling License Available alarm • 982 No ECMG Connection Available alarm • 982 No ECM's available CP Extension alarm • 983 No EMM resources available alarm • 983 No FEC License Available (Decoding) alarm • 983 No FEC License Available (Encoding) alarm • 983 No Input parameter • 312, 337, 470, 471 No IP SEC warning icon • 78 No MPEG2 Encoder alarm • 983 No PCR present alarm • 983 No Resources Available to Run Pool alarm • 983 No scramblers message • 812, 813 No Scrambling • 482, 753 No SFP Fitted alarm • 984 No Source IP action • 142 Non block aligned sending arrangement • 284, 899 Non revertive device backup • 958 None allowed banner • 631 NonRevertive revertive mode • 938 Non-service components • 371 Normal fine delay • 89 Normal Metric parameter • 931, 932, 933, 934 Normal playout mode • 607, 609 Not Applicable ARP • 147 Not Applicable routing • 147 Not Receiving Heartbeat Messages From Peer alarm • 984 Not Routable routing • 147 Notify CP Extension parameter • 762, 764 NTP • 62 NTP Alarm settings • 63 NTP Offset alarm • 63, 984 NTP Server Configuration settings • 63 NTP Server IP Address parameter • 63 4011746 Rev AG

Index

NTP Server time synchronization • 63 NTP Servers table • 63 NTP statistics • 64 NTP Statistics command • 64 NTP Statistics page • 64 NTP Statistics table • 64 NTP synchronization type • 63 Ntsc service type • 444 NULL • 75 Number format • 789, 816 Number parameter • 119, 132, 159 NumberFormat parameter • 789, 816 NVOD Reference service type • 444 NVOD Time Shifted service type • 444

O Occasional use television • 846 Odd parity • 847, 848, 855, 856 Offset (ms) parameter • 64 ON ID display mode • 178 ON ID parameter • 249, 259, 406, 424, 459, 500, 790, 792, 795 Online help • 12 Opacity (%) parameter • 607, 609, 615, 618 Open source licenses • v, 15 Opening trace log • 1160 Opening Upgrade-It tool • 1146 Operating system accounts • 21 Operating System Accounts table • 21, 22, 23 Operation modes • 846 Operational Temperature alarm • 984 Optimize Bitrate Budget command • 1112 Options parameter • 21 ORB trace level • 1160 ORB Trace Settings • 1160 Ordering PMT descriptors • 391 Original parameter • 551 OS accounts • 21 Ouput - VCT parameter • 449 Out (frames) parameter • 615, 618 Out of Band parameter • 449 Out of input service resources • 984 Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules table • 393 Outer Loop Descriptor Removal Rules table • 393 Outer Loop Order type • 391, 393 Outer Loop Removal type • 389, 393 Outgoing ASI stream settings • 891 Outgoing components bit rates overview • 1131, 1133

4011746 Rev AG

Outgoing RTP stream related alarm details • 1030 Outgoing RTP stream related alarms • 1030 Outgoing RTP stream settings • 894, 895 Outgoing SDI stream related alarm details • 1030 Outgoing SDI stream related alarms • 1030 Outgoing SDI Stream settings • 890 Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram • 591 Outgoing service bit rates • 1118 Outgoing service PCR • 470 Outgoing service related alarm details • 1029 Outgoing service related alarms • 1028 Outgoing service settings • 468 Outgoing services bit rates overview • 1130, 1132, 1135 Outgoing streams • 890 Outgoing Transport Stream bit rates • 1118 Outgoing Transport Stream FEC settings • 294, 295, 297, 299 Outgoing Transport Stream related alarm details • 1027 Outgoing Transport Stream related alarms • 1026 Outgoing Transport Stream settings • 259, 263, 265 Outgoing Transport Streams • 245, 246, 249, 251, 253, 254, 255, 256 Outgoing Transport Streams bit rates overview • 1128 Outout - EIT Present/Following parameter • 444 Out-point • 646 Output - EIT Schedule Flag parameter • 444 Output - ES Type parameter • 341 Output - Free CA Mode parameter • 444 Output - Mode parameter • 413, 415, 418, 427 Output - Name parameter • 341, 444, 467 Output - PID parameter • 347, 353, 439, 521, 523 Output - Running Status parameter • 444 Output - Service Provider Name parameter • 444 Output - Service Type • 444 Output - SID parameter • 341, 347, 353, 467, 521, 523 Output ASI Stream Settings table • 891 Output bit rates tables • 1121, 1128 Output channel • 646 Output channel parameters • 655 Output Custom PIDs page • 337, 338, 341, 342 Output Descrambling - Block CA Info parameter • 484

1297

Index

Output Descrambling - Descrambling parameter • 484 Output ES Type parameter • 337, 338 Output GbE Ports table • 255 Output Mode parameter • 117, 119, 427, 1064 Output parameter • 255, 326, 582 Output parameters • 528 Output PID - Current parameter • 347, 360, 366 Output PID - New parameter • 360, 362, 366, 367 Output PID parameter • 365, 373, 375, 424 Output Port Advanced page • 270 Output Port FEC page • 294, 295, 297 Output Port Mirroring parameter • 124, 127 Output Port RIP page • 931, 932 Output Port Streams page • 890, 891, 892, 896, 897, 899, 902, 947, 948 Output Port Table Playout page • 437 Output Port Transrating Detail page • 575 Output Port Transrating Graph page • 591, 592 Output Port Transrating page • 575 Output Port TS page • 249, 263 Output Protocol parameter • 249, 259, 261, 263 Output Rate Control Groups table • 574, 575, 582 Output Rate parameter • 249 Output RAW Video Streams Status Overview table • 1018, 1030 Output Router parameter • 954 Output Router Video Input parameters • 954 Output Router Video Layers parameter • 954 Output SDI Stream Settings table • 890 Output Selection settings • 471 Output Service Alternate Settings tab • 470 Output Service Backup page • 938, 943 Output Service branch • 209 Output Service Clips/Delay tab • 466 Output Service Components page • 375, 378, 424 Output Service DPI tab • 466 Output Service ETV page • 676 Output Service Routing page • 304, 306, 312, 313, 467, 494, 753 Output Service Routing tab • 466 Output Service Scrambling tab • 466, 484, 753, 850, 851 Output Service settings • 500 Output Service Settings tab • 466, 468, 491 Output Service Status Overview table • 1018, 1028 Output Service Transrating tab • 466 1298

Output Services table • 326 Output SI Components tab • 427, 431, 436, 439, 454, 461 Output SI Table tab • 438 Output SID parameter • 337, 338 Output stage filter • 500 Output standard mode • 402 Output Standard parameter • 249, 259 Output Standard tab • 403 Output Status page • 1026, 1027, 1028, 1029, 1030 Output Streaming parameter • 60, 124, 127, 129, 131 Output Streams parameters • 887 Output Transport Streams table • 303, 311, 365, 426 Output tree bit rates • 1118 Output TS Default Settings • 265, 275 Output TS page • 273, 347, 351, 497, 750, 847, 851, 855, 1011, 1064 Output TS Rate Control Detail page • 573, 574, 575 Output TS Status Overview table • 1018, 1026 Output type • 124 OUTV • 846 Overload protection • 564 Overrule AC Stop Delay parameter • 762 Overrule Max. Comp. Time parameter • 762 Overrule Max. Number of Streams parameter • 762 Overrule Min. CP Duration parameter • 762 Overrule Recommended CP Duration parameter • 776 Overrule Repetition Period parameter • 762 Overrule Start Delay parameter • 762 Overrule Stop Delay parameter • 762 Overrule Transition Start Delay parameter • 762 Overrule Transition Stop Delay parameter • 762 Overruling ECMG channel status message parameters • 762, 764 Overruling elementary stream type • 381, 382, 383 Overruling scrambling control configuration • 822, 823 Oversized frames counter • 151 Overwrite the Database Model parameter • 790

P Package Indexer Settings • 1063 Packet Format parameter • 117, 119 Packet ID EMM PID source • 769 4011746 Rev AG

Index

Packet Indexer ID parameter • 1063 Packet Reordering mode • 285, 286, 288, 290, 880 Packets Out of Range counter • 292, 882, 906, 910 Packets with CRC Error parameter • 123 Pal service type • 444 Palindrome playout mode • 607, 609 Parity parameter • 847, 848, 855, 856 Pass EMMs parameter • 273 Pass EMMs TS auto pass rule • 246, 273 Pass Services parameter • 273 Pass Services TS auto pass rule • 246, 273 Pass the TS Transparently parameter • 256 Pass Through transrating mode • 584, 587 Pass Unreferenced PIDs parameter • 273 Pass Unreferenced PIDs TS auto pass rule • 246, 273 Passed current service componnet status • 347 Passing CEAM sub table information • 418 Passing components • 321, 371, 373, 375 Passing EITa p/f sub table information • 418 Passing EITo p/f sub table information • 421 Passing EMM components • 358, 359 Passing individual services • 302, 303 Passing non-service components • 371 Passing private data components • 365 Passing PSI/SI/PSIP information • 415 Passing RRT sub table information • 418 Passing service components • 344 Passing services • 302, 303, 310, 311 Passing sub table information • 418, 426 Passing through all EIT other p/f tables • 424 Passing Transport Streams transparently • 256 Passing unreferenced components • 371, 373, 375 Password • 17 Password parameter • 19, 21, 24, 1055 Password policy • 17 Password policy rules • 23 Password Policy Settings • 23 PAT • 398 PAT Error - Transport Stream Loss alarm trigger • 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009 PAT Error alarm • 984 PAT Error parameter • 995 PAT playout interval • 434 Path Select parameter • 449 Pause frames counter • 151 Paused streaming state • 890, 891, 895 Pay TV • 733 4011746 Rev AG

Payload Bitrate Too Low alarm • 985, 1010 PCR • 470 PCR Continuity parameter • 89, 92 PCR In PIP Packets parameter • 534, 535 PCR Interval (ms) parameter • 534, 535, 557 PCR parameter • 344, 470, 471 PDG • 741 PDG to MUX interface • 365 Peer IP Address parameter • 962, 1055 Perceptual noise substitution • 550 Performance video quality algorithm • 89 Picture-in-picture creation licensing • 32 Picture-in-picture stream • 506 PID Bitrate Error - service loss alarm trigger • 997, 999, 1000, 1003 PID display mode • 178 PID Error - service loss alarm trigger • 997, 999, 1000, 1003 PID Error (Audio/Video) parameter • 995 PID Error (Data) parameter • 995 PID Error alarm • 985 PID multiplexing • 373 PID Multiplexing settings • 373 PID parameter • 382, 386, 406, 415, 418, 427, 459, 794 PID Sync Delay feature • 473 PID sync delay groups • 475, 477 PID Sync Delay table • 475, 477 PID Type parameter • 999, 1000 PID type service component pass rule • 352 PID_SYNC license • 33, 473 PIM • 398, 411 PIM playout interval • 434 PIP creation licensing • 32 PIP stream • 506, 534 PIP stream generation • 506 PIP Video Settings table • 512, 535, 560 PIP_TRANSCODE license • 32, 35, 508 PL Scrambling Seq Ind parameter • 164 Playout Mode parameter • 607, 609 PLL At Least 30s In Holdover • 985 PMT • 398, 406, 739, 743 PMT descriptor order rules • 391 PMT descriptor rules • 389, 391, 392 PMT Descriptor table • 388 PMT descriptors • 385 PMT Error - service loss alarm trigger • 997, 999, 1000, 1003 PMT Error alarm • 985 PMT Error parameter • 995 PMT playout interval • 434 1299

Index

PMT section exceeds 1K alarm • 985 PMT Settings table • 385 PMT tab • 393 PNM • 398, 411 PNM playout interval • 434 PNS • 550 PNS parameter • 540, 542 Polarization parameter • 164 Poll Int parameter • 64 Popup windows • 14 Port Already in Use - Bind Failed alarm • 985 Port backup • 914 Port backup parameters • 915 Port Bandwidth Exceeded alarm • 986 Port bit rates • 1118 Port branch • 186 Port Configuration • 113 Port Index parameter • 954 Port Mirroring parameter • 129, 131 Port Mode parameter • 123, 142, 164, 1095 Port Pair parameter • 139, 142 Port Pairs GbE port mode • 121, 123 Port parameter • 55, 69, 72, 137, 142, 147, 150, 156, 160, 304, 415, 418, 427, 500, 757, 759, 887, 919, 938 Port representation mode • 219 Power supply unit • 3 Power Up Activation parameter • 60 Power Up alarm • 986 PowerVu • 89, 401 Pre Shared key parameter • 76 Preconfigured service loss alarm triggers • 1000, 1002 Preconfigured Transport Stream entries • 241, 288, 923 Preconfiguring services • 304 Preconfiguring TS Loss Triggers • 1008 Predefined coarse delay • 89 Preferred Output PID parameter • 337 Preferred PID parameter • 471 Preferred Stereo Downmix Mode parameter • 554 Prefix Length parameter • 55, 72 Preshared keys • 1180, 1196 Primary channel • 646 Primary channel parameters • 655 Primary Heartbeat link settings • 962 Primary to insertion channel • 646 Principle • 9 Priority Bit Licensing • 31

1300

Priority parameter • 268, 270, 275, 584, 587, 757, 759, 1110, 1112 PRIORITY_BIT_ADAPTATION license • 31, 235, 238, 239, 241 Prioritycast • 931 Private Data [Hex] parameter • 766, 773 Private data components • 365, 366, 367, 369 Private data generator • 741 Private Data PIDs table • 366, 367, 369 Private data stream • 741 Private Data table • 365 private write community string • 57 Process parameter • 83 Processing bit rates • 1121 Processing load • 653 Processing possibilities • 509 Processing Service Bit Rates Overview table • 1121, 1137 Processing Service Status Overview table • 1018, 1025 Processing settings • 500, 549 Processing stage filter • 500 Processing Status page • 1025, 1026 Product parameter • 829 Profile parameter • 526, 528, 531 Program association table • 398 Program information message • 411 Program map table • 398, 739, 743 Program name message • 411 Program specific information • 398, 739, 779 Program switching licensing • 29 Program System Information Protocol • 400 Pro-MPEG Code of Practice (COP) #3 release2 • 280 PRO-MPEG forum • 280 Protocol parameter • 83, 265 Providing PSI/SI/PSIP • 411 Provisioning failed message • 813 Provisioning succeeded message • 813 Proxy ECMg page • 757, 759, 760, 761, 762, 764, 766, 767, 768 Proxy EIS page • 776, 777, 778 Proxy EMMg page • 769, 771, 772, 773, 774, 775 Proxy parameter • 427 Proxy PSIG page • 779, 780, 781 PS 1 Failure alarm • 986 PS 2 Failure alarm • 986 PSI • 397, 398, 406, 411, 461, 739, 779 PSI/SI generator • 739, 779 PSI/SI generator interface • 779, 780, 781 4011746 Rev AG

Index

PSI/SI/PSIP generation mode • 413 PSI/SI/PSIP licensing • 33 PSI/SI/PSIP Overview table • 1119 PSIG • 739, 779 PSIG information • 411 PSIG interface connection parameters • 780 PSIG Interfaces • 779, 780, 781 PSIG Name parameter • 779 PSIG Proxy Settings • 779, 780, 781 PSIG tables • 739 PSIG To MUX interface • 411 PSIG Type parameter • 779 PSIP • 397, 400, 406, 411, 449 PSIP- ETT playout interval • 434 PSIP-CVCT playout interval • 434 PSIP-EIT (and ETT) Generation parameter • 456 PSIP-EIT0 playout interval • 434 PSIP-EIT1 playout interval • 434 PSIP-EIT2 and 3 playout interval • 434 PSIP-EIT4 up to 127 playout interval • 434 PSIP-ETT0 playout interval • 434 PSIP-ETT1 playout interval • 434 PSIP-ETT2 and 3 playout interval • 434 PSIP-ETT4 up to 127 playout interval • 434 PSIP-MGT playout interval • 434 PSIP-RRT playout interval • 434 PSIP-STT playout interval • 434 PSIP-TVCT playout interval • 434 PSU • 3 PSU slot cover plate • 3 public read community string • 57 Publications • 12

Q QAM256 modulation mode • 449 QAM64 modulation mode • 449 QoS Mode parameter • 1098 Quality video quality algorithm • 89

R Range parameter • 431 Rate Control • 563 Rate Control comparison • 591 Rate Control examples • 594 Rate Control group bit rates • 1118 Rate Control Group Bit Rates Overview table • 1121, 1134 Rate Control Group branch • 204 Rate Control group parameters • 574 Rate control group population • 580, 584

4011746 Rev AG

Rate Control Group Settings • 571, 573, 574, 575, 578, 584, 587 Rate Control groups • 569, 571 Rate Control groups bit rates overview • 1134 Rate Limited Rate Control mode • 584, 587 Rate limiting • 564, 565 Rate Mode parameter • 528, 530, 584, 587 Rate parameter • 259, 261, 263 Rates mode • 155 Ratings region table • 400 RcsFls service type • 444 RcsMap service type • 444 RDCS • 1058, 1061 RDCS Data Delay (ms) parameter • 1064 RDCS Mode parameter • 1039 RDCS Output Port parameter • 1064 RDCS Settings • 1064 Reach parameter • 64 Read Community parameter • 59 Read Community string • 57, 59 Ready parameter • 829 Re-apply the Database Model at Startup parameter • 823 Reboot settings • 82, 1171 Rebooting the DCM • 82 Received Channel Error Message alarm • 986 Receiver settings • 164, 166 Receiver Status popup • 168 Reception Errors counters • 151 Re-compressing of services • 564 Re-compressing of Transport Streams • 564 redcm.py script • 951, 954 redcm_smx.py script • 969 Redundancy • 872, 913 Re-enter Password parameter • 19, 21 Ref ID parameter • 64 Ref Type parameter • 64 Region ID parameter • 406, 447 Reload button • 13 Remapping • 371 Remapping components • 321 Remapping EMM components • 362 Remapping private data components • 367 Remapping service components • 344 Remapping tables • 439 Remapping unreferenced components • 375 Remote IP parameter • 83 Remote Logo parameter • 607 Remote Port parameter • 83 Removal Warning in Tree parameter • 215 Remove all Services command • 495 1301

Index

Remove Checked Items command • 20, 58, 63, 70, 73, 76, 138, 141, 151, 306, 318, 329, 336, 342, 354, 383, 392, 448, 477, 497, 768, 772, 775, 778, 781, 876, 1002, 1017 Remove the multicast join parameter • 145 Removing Access Criteria Assignments • 809 Removing access criteria information • 805 Removing banners • 621 Removing CA certificates • 1242, 1244 Removing card operational failure triggers • 1013 Removing CAS • 803 Removing clips • 318 Removing component merge rules • 336 Removing components • 801 Removing Conditional Access System • 803 Removing device operational failure alarm triggers • 1017 Removing EAS proxies • 641 Removing ECMG connection entries • 760 Removing ECMG descriptor rules • 768 Removing ECMG interfaces • 762 Removing EIS interfaces • 778 Removing EMM components • 363 Removing EMMG descriptor rules • 775 Removing EMMG Interfaces • 772 Removing EMMs from a CI-CAM • 839 Removing encoders • 1102 Removing ES type overrule entries • 383 Removing fonts • 613 Removing IP aliases • 69, 70, 151 Removing logo assignments • 628 Removing logos • 611 Removing merged components • 342 Removing Merged Services • 329 Removing operating system accounts • 23 Removing OS accounts • 23 Removing outgoing services • 494, 495 Removing outgoing Transport Streams • 497 Removing PIP streams • 560 Removing PMT descriptor rules • 392 Removing PMT descriptors • 388, 389 Removing preconfigured services • 306 Removing preconfigured Transport Stream entries • 923 Removing private data components • 369 Removing PSIG Interfaces • 781 Removing RTP stream entries • 876 Removing services • 560, 799 Removing static routes entries • 73, 138

1302

Removing time offset descriptors from a TOT • 448 Removing Transport Streams • 799 Removing Trap destinations • 58 Removing unreferenced components • 379 Removing virtual services • 313 Removing VLAN port pairs • 141 Removing VSEs • 1101, 1113 Renaming a Card • 88 Reordered Packets counter • 292, 882, 906, 910 Representation mode • 219 Requested PID could not be allocated alarm • 986 Requests for Secure Communication • 1190 Required authentication for inbound and outbound connections setting • 1196 Reserved Bandwidth (Mbps) parameter • 1110, 1111 Reserved type • 794 Reset Board Bit Rates settings • 1138 Reset command • 161 Reset Counters settings • 161, 170, 911 Reset On Failure parameter • 829 Reset Scrambling command • 822 Resetting FEC Statistics • 161 Resetting IP video gateway statistics • 911 Resetting statistics • 170 Resolution parameter • 528, 531, 534, 535 Resource setup of a Transcoder Card • 100 Resource Setup of an MFP Card • 105 Resource Setup settings • 102, 109 Resource Setup table • 105 Resource usage • 556 Resource Usage table • 556 Restarting • 1169 Restarting bit rate measurement • 1138 Restore Mode parameter • 954 Restore Script parameter • 954, 969 Restoring communication • 821 Retry Communication for Bad Scramblers command • 821 Retype Pre Shared Key parameter • 76 Revert Delay (s) parameter • 914, 915 Revertive device backup • 958 Revertive parameter • 914, 915, 920, 923, 937, 938, 941, 962 Revertive revertive mode • 938 RF Input Level parameter • 168 RF port settings • 164, 166 RFC 1157 • 57 RGB color mode • 174 4011746 Rev AG

Index

RGB Cycling color mode • 174 RIP • 930 RIP Router parameter • 124 RIP Settings • 933 RIP Settings table • 932 RIP tab • 931, 933, 934 ROSA Element Manager • 950, 951, 969 ROSA EM • 950, 951, 969 ROSA EM scripts • 951, 969 Routable (Destination in LAN) routing • 147 Routable (via Gateway) routing • 147 Route Tag parameter • 931, 932, 933, 934 Routes Configuration page • 137, 138 Routes page • 72, 73 Routing ASI streams • 884 Routing generated SDI streams • 885 Routing information protocol • 930 Routing parameter • 147 Routing RTP streams • 884 Routing SDI streams • 884, 885 Routing services • 515, 622 Routing streams • 884 Routing tab • 304, 306, 312, 313, 328, 329, 331, 334, 519 Routings • 887 Row FEC Stream IP parameter • 285, 286, 288, 294, 295, 880, 899 RRT • 400, 406 RRT playout interval • 434 RRT sub table information • 418 RST • 398 RTP output protocol • 259, 261, 263 RTP packets • 870 RTP sequence error alarm • 986 RTP service backup • 947 RTP stream entries • 874, 876 RTP streams • 874, 879, 884 Running Status parameter • 444 Running status table • 398

S SA Specific EIS type • 776 SA Specific PSIG type • 779 Sacco-Vanzetti • 612 Same IP and UDP+2, UDP+4 FEC stream mode • 288, 290, 299 Same UDP and IP+1, IP+2 FEC stream mode • 288, 290, 299 Sat Frequency (GHz) parameter • 164 SBR parameter • 540, 542 SCG • 738, 743, 776 4011746 Rev AG

SCG Accept Delay parameter • 787 SCG error message • 813 SCG provisioning message • 738, 743, 806, 813, 816 SCG provisioning message update • 743 SCG status message • 813 Scramble only audio/video • 786, 787 Scramble only Audio/Video parameter • 786, 787 Scrambled Service - service loss alarm trigger • 997, 999, 1000, 1003 Scrambler properties • 786, 821 Scramblers corresponding with ON ID=X TS ID=Y dialog • 817 Scrambling • 729, 734, 753, 845 Scrambling allowed • 482, 753 Scrambling Configuration column • 811 Scrambling control • 811 Scrambling control configuration • 822, 823 Scrambling control group • 735, 738, 743, 776 Scrambling Control Group Accept Delay • 786, 787 Scrambling Control Group error message • 813 Scrambling Control Group provisioning messages • 813, 816 Scrambling Control Group status message • 813 Scrambling Control Task • 732, 811, 813, 815, 816, 817, 821 Scrambling event logging • 820 Scrambling levels • 741 Scrambling licensing • 34 Scrambling mode • 750, 751, 847 Scrambling not started alarm • 986 Scrambling parameter • 482, 753, 848, 850, 851 Scrambling services • 847 Scrambling settings • 89, 92, 482, 750, 821, 847 Scrambling Settings - Mode parameter • 89, 92, 847, 855 Scrambling Settings table • 482, 850, 851 Scrambling tab • 482, 850, 851 Scrambling-specific parameters • 755 Screen logos parameter • 631 Script configuration files • 1175 Script engine • 1175 Script library • 1175 Script log file • 1177 Script parameter • 954, 1175 Scripts table • 1175, 1176 SCS • 734, 735, 755 SCS Configurator • 732 SCS Configurator dialog • 771 1303

Index

SCS Settings • 787 SCTE18 protocol • 635 SCTE30 • 650 SCTE35 Cue insertion • 653 SD 525i 29.97fps mode • 174 SD 625i 25fps mode • 174 SD and HD SDI allowed video signal • 874, 878, 879 SD Bitrate (Mbps) parameter • 526, 527 SD DigitalTv service type • 444 SD NVOD Reference service type • 444 SD NVOD Time Shifted service type • 444 SD Profile parameter • 526, 527 SD SDI allowed video signal • 874, 878, 879 SD, HD and 3G allowed video signal • 874, 878, 879 SD/HD Mismatch alarm • 986 SD/HD parameter • 468 SD_AVC_SPLICING license • 29, 35 SD_AVC_TRANSCODE license • 35, 508 SDI branch • 193 SDI Generator Settings table • 174 SDI generators • 173 SDI Input Loss service backup trigger • 947 SDI Interface Configuration page • 109, 110, 173, 175 SDI no stream mode • 175 SDI No Stream Mode parameter • 173, 175 SDI port configuration • 172 SDI Port Settings table • 173 SDI service backup • 947 SDI stream • 884, 885 SDI stream settings • 878 SDI video streams • 870 SDT • 398, 444 SDT actual • 398 SDT other • 398 SDT parameter • 444 SDT settings • 444, 446 SDTa • 398 SDTa playout interval • 434 SDTo • 398, 406 SDTo playout interval • 434 SEAMLESS_ALTERNATES license • 29 Search for parameter • 223 Search In parameter • 223 Search popup • 223 Secam service type • 444 Second IP Address parameter • 139 Second Subnet Mask parameter • 139 Security • 17, 24 1304

Security accounts • 19, 20 Security Accounts table • 19, 20 Security Group parameter • 19, 20 Security method preference order list • 1190 Security Methods tab • 1187 Security overrule • 80 Select Backup Service popup • 938 Select Component Merge Rule parameter • 331, 519, 624 Select Computer or Domain dialog • 1180 Select Input PID popup • 470, 695 Select Merged Service popup • 326, 331, 519, 624, 711 Select Other service popup • 676 Select parameter • 892, 897 Selected Alternate Service Not Present alarm • 987 Sending Arrangement parameter • 294, 295, 899 Sending arrangements • 284 Serial digital interface video streams • 870 Serial No parameter • 829 Server-to-server setting • 1196 Service Audio Settings table • 512, 540, 542 Service Auto Pass Rules setting • 308 Service auto passing rules • 308, 309 Service backup • 936, 947 Service Backup Settings • 938 Service Backup Settings table • 941 Service Backup Switched alarm • 987 Service Backup table • 941 Service bit rates • 1118 Service Bit Rates Overview table • 1121, 1122, 1132 Service branch • 199 Service Component PMT page • 385, 387, 389, 391, 392 Service component settings • 347 Service Component STT page • 454 Service Component TOT page • 447, 448 Service component tracking rules • 350, 351, 352, 353, 354, 356 Service Component VCT page • 450, 452 Service Components Settings table • 347, 351, 475, 477 Service Components tab • 351, 352, 353, 354 Service delaying • 506 Service description table • 398 Service grooming • 499 Service Grooming table • 500 Service ID parameter • 793 Service in Backup (Service Loss) alarm • 987 4011746 Rev AG

Index

Service in Backup (TS Loss) alarm • 987 Service In The Clear alarm • 987 Service information • 398, 779 Service key • 735 Service level scrambling • 741 Service location descriptor • 452 Service Loss - Transport Stream Loss alarm trigger • 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009 Service Loss alarm • 987 Service Loss alarm backup trigger • 937 Service loss alarm trigger hierarchy • 997 Service Loss Alarm triggers • 997, 999, 1003 Service Loss at output alarm • 987 Service Loss Trigger Mode parameter • 1003 Service Loss Triggers • 941 Service Name parameter • 793, 796 Service Name Truncated in VCTalarm • 987 Service Not Descrambled alarm • 987 Service Overview table • 510, 512, 525, 560, 561, 601, 603, 627, 628, 629, 631, 632, 634 Service parameter • 406, 446, 450, 461 Service parameters • 465 Service properties • 796 Service Properties dialog • 796 Service Provider Name parameter • 444 Service Provider parameter • 793, 796 Service rate control parameters • 584 Service Redundancy • 509 Service Redundancy Loss alarm • 988 Service related transcode settings • 557 Service re-multiplexing • 301 Service representation mode • 220 Service Routing table • 306, 312, 313, 326, 329, 334, 336, 467, 494, 519 Service routings • 467 Service Settings table • 232, 233, 468, 492, 557, 999, 1002 Service Type parameter • 444, 449 Service Video Settings table • 512, 527 Services in tree • 223 Services list • 793, 796 Services table • 591 Services to Access Criteria list • 808, 809 Services Trees • 182 Session key perfect forward secrecy parameter • 1187 Session timeout • 27 Session word • 846 Session Word parameter • 847, 848, 855, 856 Sessions settings • 27

4011746 Rev AG

Set All EITa p/f to Transp Gen -Input mode • 418 Set All EITa p/f to Transparent Generated mode • 427 Set All EITa p/f to Transparent mode • 415 Set ECM ID for < > dialog • 808 Setting communication timeout parameters • 821 Setting Up the IPsec Connection • 1196 Setting up transport stream model • 789, 792 Setting up TS Model • 790, 792 Settings - Bitrate (kbps) parameter • 535 Settings - Closed Caption parameter • 535 Settings - GOP Length (frames) parameter • 535 Settings - PCR Interval (ms) parameter • 535 Settings - Resolution parameter • 535 Settings GbE UDP boundary • 132 Settings menu • 1146 Settings page • 83 Settings parameter • 560 Settings popup • 618 Settings tab • 471 Severity level • 993 SFN licensing • 34 SFN No valid GPS clock reference present alarm • 988 SHA1 • 75, 1180 Short Name parameter • 449 Short-cut menus • 13 Show All Imported Tables filter • 409, 427 Show All Other (DVB) filter • 409, 421, 424, 427, 439 Show by default parameter • 607, 609 Show Corresponding Scramblers command • 817 Shutting down the IP Video Gateway Card • 110 SI • 397, 398, 406, 411, 443, 461, 779 SI Components tab • 382, 383, 386, 388, 402, 409, 415, 418, 421, 424 SI Import Overview Table • 459, 460 SI Output Standard settings • 404 SI Output Standard table • 403 SI Table In Tree table • 406 SI Table In Tree table • 409 SI Table In Tree table • 418 SI Table Playout table • 436, 437 SI Table Settings table • 382, 383, 386, 388, 389, 391, 392, 409, 411, 415, 418, 427, 436, 439, 443, 446, 461, 462 SI Table tab • 404, 453, 456 SI Table time synchronization • 66 SI tables • 739 1305

Index

SID display mode • 178 SID List parameter • 424 SID parameter • 238, 239, 241, 304, 326, 331, 347, 406, 500, 938, 1000 SID-Ext parameter • 418, 427 Signal High Threshold (dBm) parameter • 157, 164 Signal Low Threshold (dBm) parameter • 157, 164 Signal Status - C/N Margin parameter • 170 Signal Status - Card parameter • 170 Signal Status - Level (dBm +/- 8) parameter • 170 Signal Status - Port parameter • 170 Signal Status - Status parameter • 170 Simple Network Management Protocol • 57 Simulcrypt • 731 Simulcrypt scrambling • 743 Simulcrypt synchronizer • 734, 735, 738, 743, 755, 776 Single burst mode • 297, 899 Single device backup • 957 Single device role • 962 Single frequency network licensing • 34 Single Program Transport Streams • 254 Single Stream port mode • 164 Size parameter • 528 Slate Generation Problem alarm • 988 Slate generator tool • 315, 316 Slate service licensing • 35 Slate services • 315 SLATE_GENERATION license • 35, 315 SlateGenerator.exe • 316 SlateGenerator_v2.exe • 316 Slot Details list • 1146 Smart PID type • 997, 999, 1000 Snap-In • 1181 SNMP • 57 SNMP page • 57, 58, 59 SNMP Trap destinations • 57, 58 SNMP Trap Destinations Settings • 57, 58 SNMP Trap format • 58 SNMP Trap settings • 58 Socket Type parameter • 241, 288, 874, 919, 1000 Software upgrade • 1141 Sort GbE TS in Tree by parameter • 215 Sort Services in Tree by parameter • 215 Source - IP Address parameter • 421, 901, 902 Source - UDP parameter • 901, 902 Source - UDP Port parameter • 421 1306

Source for Splicing branch • 214 Source ID parameter • 449 Source IP action • 142 Source IP address of TS changed alarm • 988 Source IP parameter • 267, 268, 270, 275, 874 Source IP Range action • 142 Source TS - Board parameter • 421, 424 Source TS - IP parameter • 424 Source TS - PID parameter • 424 Source TS - Port parameter • 421, 424 Source TS - Type parameter • 421, 424 Source TS - UDP parameter • 424 Source TS Selection popup • 421, 424 Source TS settings • 421, 424 Source UDP parameter • 267, 268, 270, 275 Source UDP Port parameter • 265 Sources for Program Switching branch • 210 Specific loop count • 607, 609 Specific mode • 999, 1000, 1006, 1007, 1008 Specific service loss trigger mode • 1003 Specific TS loss trigger mode • 1009 Specifying incoming RTP streams • 874 Spectrum Inversion parameter • 168 Speed (px/frames) parameter • 615, 618 Speed mode • 122 Splice Aborted On Video Loss alarm • 988 Splice request • 650 Splice Request Denied alarm • 988 Splice Window Accuracy parameter • 650 Splicing channels • 655 Splicing Event Triggered by AD Server • 650 SPLICING license • 29, 647 SPS IP Assignment Policies • 1097 SPTS • 254 Stage filter • 500 Standalone device backup • 956 Standalone device role • 962 Standalone tab • 1180 Standard + Mystro SNMP Trap format • 58 Standard ASI stream settings • 891 Standard coarse delay • 89 Standard ECMG type • 757 Standard parameter • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 Standard RTP stream settings • 894 Standard SNMP Trap format • 58 Start a Capture settings • 1167 Start delay • 743 Start IP Address parameter • 265 Start Multicast parameter • 142 Start PID EIT/ETT tables • 454 Start Scrambling command • 818 4011746 Rev AG

Index

Start Source IP parameter • 142 Start Streaming All Streams command • 909 Start Streaming all TS's command • 488 Start UDP Port parameter • 265 Starting descrambling • 857, 858 Starting logo insertion • 629 Starting scrambling • 813, 849, 850 Starting scripts • 1176 Starting streaming • 909 Starting the Scrambling Control Task • 815, 816 Starting UDP Port Number parameter • 1097 Stat Muxed rate control • 587 State parameter • 119, 132, 159 Static and Animated Logos allowed banner • 631 Static ARP table • 134 Static ARP table entries • 134 Static logos • 600 Static Logos allowed banner • 631 Static route entries • 72, 73, 137, 138 Static Route Settings table • 72, 73, 138 Static route table • 72, 136 Statistical re-multiplexing • 566 Statistics column • 292, 882, 906 Statmured rate mode • 584, 587 Statmux community • 1094 Statmux community population • 1100 Statmux Community settings • 1097 Statmux controller • 1091 Statmux Controller Lost Communication With a Pool Server alarm • 988 Statmux Encoders table • 1102 Statmux parameter • 1095 Statmux Pool branch • 196 Statmux Pools Branch • 196 Statmux Settings • 1096 Statmux Video Channels table • 1102, 1114 Status - New parameter • 347, 353 Status parameter • 168 Status Summary page • 1018, 1019, 1032 Stereo Down Mix Mode parameter • 548, 549 Still picture service licensing • 35 Still picture services • 315 Stop All EITa p/f mode • 427 Stop All EITa sch mode • 427 Stop All PSIP-EIT mode • 431, 456 Stop delay • 743 Stop output mode • 427, 431 Stop Scrambling command • 819 Stop Streaming All Streams command • 909 Stop Streaming all TS's command • 489 Stop Streaming command • 489, 491, 909 4011746 Rev AG

Stopped streaming • 249, 251, 254, 259, 487, 488, 491 Stopping banner insertion • 634 Stopping descrambling • 857, 858, 859 Stopping logo insertion • 629 Stopping scrambling • 813, 849, 851 Stopping scripts • 1177 Stopping streaming • 909 Stopping streaming of outgoing services • 491 Stopping the Scrambling Control Task • 816 Stopping Transport Streams • 489 Stratum parameter • 64 Stream combinations • 107 Stream ID EMM PID source • 769 Stream set up • 779 Stream Settings tab • 874, 895 Stream Type component merge rule type • 334 Stream Type parameter • 331, 344, 371, 519, 624 Stream Type popup • 340, 371 Stream Type tracking type • 353 Stream Type Value parameter • 331, 519, 624 Streaming parameter • 249, 251, 254, 259, 468, 491, 492 Streaming State parameter • 890, 891, 894, 895 Streamtype parameter • 340 Strong pairing enforcement • 786, 787 Strong Pairing Enforcement parameter • 786, 787 STT • 62, 66, 400, 453 STT playout interval • 434 Stuffing Rate Too Low alarm • 989, 1010 Sub table information • 418 Subnet Mask parameter • 53, 72, 124, 127, 132, 137 Sum of CBR TS parameter • 249 Super_Cas_ID • 738, 755 Supported animated logos • 605 Supported CA Systems parameter • 829 Supported static logos • 605 Surround 90 deg Phase Shift parameter • 551 Surround Channel Attenuation parameter • 551 Surround Mix Level parameter • 551 Switching off card not operational alarm generation • 1014 Switching off service auto passing rules • 308 Switching on service auto passing rules • 308 Symbol Rate (MSym/s) parameter • 164 Sync Byte Error - Transport Stream Loss alarm trigger • 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009 Sync Byte Error alarm • 989 Sync Interval parameter • 66 1307

Index

Sync Loss - Transport Stream Loss alarm trigger • 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009 Sync Loss alarm • 989 Sync now command • 66 Synchronization Type parameter • 62, 63, 66 Synchronizing the Scrambling Control Task • 816 System Settings • 50, 60, 77 System Settings page • 50, 60, 68, 69, 70, 76 System time table • 400

T Table on Input - ONID parameter • 421 Table on Input - PID parameter • 421 Table on Input - SID-Ext parameter • 421 Table on Input - Table ID parameter • 421 Table on Input - TSID parameter • 421 Table on Input settings • 421 Table on Output - ONID parameter • 421 Table on Output - PID parameter • 421 Table on Output - SID-Ext parameter • 421 Table on Output - TSID parameter • 421 Table on Output settings • 421 Table parameter • 406, 461 Table playout interval • 434, 436, 437, 438 Table playout interval parameters • 436, 437, 438 Table View page • 500, 504 Tag parameter • 386, 389, 391, 393 Tally parameter • 64 Target • 1055 Targets list • 1146 Task Configuration • 816 TC Interface Configuration page • 100, 102 TCP connection • 769, 776, 779 TCP Port parameter • 769, 776, 779 TCP protocol • 769 TDT • 62, 66, 398 TDT playout interval • 434 Teletext B(SD) parameter • 892, 897 Teletext service type • 444 Temporal noise shaping • 550 Temporary License Active alarm • 989 Terrestrial VCT • 400 Test Message alarm • 989 Test messages • 994 Text Crawl parameter • 639 Text only allowed banner • 631 Text settings • 615, 618 The Check for New Service ID upload scenario • 789 1308

The Clear & Reload TS Model upload scenario • 789 These IP addresses setting • 1196 This IP address or subnet parameter • 1196 This IP address or subnet setting • 1196 Threshold parameter • 275, 1011, 1012 Time and date table • 398 Time Base Selection mode parameter • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 Time offset descriptors • 446 Time offset table • 398 Time Sync using SI Table settings • 66 Time synchronization • 62, 63, 66, 651 Time Table Acquisition Timeout alarm • 989 Time Table parameter • 66 Time Table synchronization type • 66 Time Zone parameter • 447, 454 Time Zone Selection parameter • 62, 63, 66 Time Zone settings • 454 Timeout parameter • 27 Timing parameter • 743 TNS • 550 TNS parameter • 540, 542 Too Many Encoders in Pool alarm • 989 Too Many Encoders Total alarm • 989 Tool tip • 15 Toolbars • 15 Top Node • 184 ToS Custom parameter • 1098 ToS parameter • 1098 TOS parameter • 267, 268, 270, 275, 398, 901, 902 Tos/Cos (Precedence) QoS mode • 1098 TOT • 62, 66 TOT playout interval • 434 Total - Packets parameter • 170 Total Bit Rate parameter • 249, 259, 571, 573, 574, 575 Total Bytes received counter • 151 Total Bytes transmitted counter • 151 Total frames received counter • 151 Total frames transmitted counter • 151 TR All Services rate control group • 569, 573, 584 TR Multiple SPTS rate control group • 569, 573, 587 TR Selective Services rate control group • 569, 573, 584 Trace Level parameter • 1159 Trace log content • 1159 Trace logs • 1158 4011746 Rev AG

Index

Trace Logs table • 1160, 1165 Track Type parameter • 331, 519, 624 Tracking - Input PID parameter • 521, 523 Tracking - CAS ID parameter • 521, 523 Tracking - ES Output PID parameter • 521, 523 Tracking - Language parameter • 347, 353, 521, 523 Tracking - Stream Type parameter • 347, 353, 521, 523 Tracking - Stream Type Value parameter • 521, 523 Tracking - Tag parameter • 353, 521, 523 Tracking - Type parameter • 353, 521, 523 Tracking Rule parameter • 347 Tracking rules • 350, 351, 352, 353, 354, 356 Transcode - Allow AC3 parameter • 526, 527, 540, 542 Transcode - Allow HD parameter • 526, 527 Transcode - Bitrate (kbps) parameter • 526, 527, 540, 542 Transcode - Closed Caption parameter • 526, 527, 538 Transcode - Encoding parameter • 526, 527 Transcode - HD Bitrate (Mbps) parameter • 526, 527 Transcode - Level (dB) parameter • 540, 542 Transcode - Max CPB Removal Delay (ms) parameter • 526, 527 Transcode - PNS parameter • 540, 542 Transcode - Profile parameter • 527 Transcode - SBR parameter • 540, 542 Transcode - SD Bitrate (Mbps) parameter • 527 Transcode - SD Profile parameter • 526, 527 Transcode - TNS parameter • 540, 542 Transcode - Transport Packetization Mode parameter • 540, 542 Transcode Overview page • 510, 511, 525 Transcode parameter • 526, 540 Transcoded audio components • 540 Transcoded video components • 526 Transcoder Audio page • 512, 542 Transcoder Card • 2, 3, 9, 100 Transcoder Card calibration • 100 Transcoder input selection type • 470 Transcoder input type • 326, 331 Transcoder PIP tab • 534, 535 Transcoder PIP tab page • 512 Transcoder type • 100 Transcoder Video tab page • 512, 527 Transcoding • 505 Transcoding licensing • 35 4011746 Rev AG

Transcoding Problem alarm • 989 Transcoding process related alarm details • 1026 Transcoding process related alarms • 1025 Transition start delay • 743 Transition stop delay • 743 Transmission errors counters • 151 Transp. Gen. - Input output mode • 413, 418, 427 Transp. Gen. - PSIG output mode • 413, 427 Transparent access controlled • 449 Transparent hidden • 449 Transparent Lines X Field X parameter • 892, 897 Transparent loop through Transport Streams • 248, 256 Transparent modulation mode • 449 Transparent MPEG priority bit mode • 235, 238, 239, 241, 242 Transparent output mode • 413, 415, 427 Transparent output standard mode • 249, 259 Transparent service parameter • 449 Transparent service type • 444 Transport Packetization Mode parameter • 540, 542 Transport Stream auto pass rules • 246, 273 Transport stream backup • 917, 928 Transport Stream bit rate popup • 1119 Transport Stream bit rates • 1118 Transport Stream branch • 190 Transport Stream creation methods • 248 Transport stream delaying • 248, 278 Transport Stream Index Info page • 1162 Transport Stream loss alarm • 917 Transport Stream loss alarm triggers • 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009 Transport stream model • 789 Transport Stream properties • 259, 261, 263, 265, 267, 268, 270, 275, 795 Transport Stream Properties dialog • 795 Transport stream redundancy • 917, 928 Transport stream representation mode • 220 Transport streams in tree • 223 TransportStream – Services list • 811, 821 TransportStream Initialization Error message • 812 TransportStreams - Services tab • 790, 792, 793, 794, 795, 796, 799, 800, 801 TransportStreams list • 792, 793, 794, 795, 799, 800, 801, 808 TransportStreams tree • 792 Transrating - Delay Settings • 89, 92, 575 1309

Index

TRANSRATING license • 33, 564 Transrating licensing • 33 Transrating problem alarm • 990 Trap destinations • 57, 58 Trap format • 58 Tree Refresh Rate parameter • 215 Trees To Refresh parameter • 215 Trigger Alarm parameter • 914, 915 Trouble Shooting (covers SSH and telnet) option • 21 Troubleshooting Info table • 1162 Troubleshooting information • 1162 TS auto pass rules • 246, 273 TS Auto Pass Rules settings • 273 TS backup • 917, 928 TS Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter • 891 TS Bit Rates Overview table • 1121, 1124, 1128 TS Check TimeOut parameter • 821 TS Component Settings table • 375, 378, 379 TS Components tab • 366, 367, 369, 373, 375, 378, 379 TS contains packets from more than 2 input TS alarm • 990 TS creation methods • 248 TS Delay (ms) parameter • 89, 92 TS delay coarse delay • 89, 92 TS Delay parameter • 278 TS delaying • 248, 278 TS FEC table • 285, 292 TS ID display mode • 178 TS ID parameter • 249, 259, 406, 424, 459, 500, 790, 792, 795 TS IP parameter • 297, 899 TS Loss alarm • 917, 972 TS Loss and Service Loss Alarm Generation settings • 995, 1000 TS Loss settings • 1006, 1008 TS Loss table • 1006 TS Loss Trigger Mode • 1009 TS Loss Trigger on Service Loss parameter • 931, 932, 933 TS Out Loss alarm • 990 TS Output disabled alarm • 990 TS Overhead (Mbps) parameter • 573, 587 TS Ping TimeOut parameter • 821 TS properties • 795 TS Rates (Mbps) - Default parameter • 1112 TS Rates (Mbps) - Max parameter • 1112 TS Rates (Mbps) - Min parameter • 1112 TS Rates (Mbps) - Predicted parameter • 1112 TS Rates (Mbps) - Reserved parameter • 1112 1310

TS redundancy • 928, 930 TS Settings • 261 TS Settings table • 235, 238, 239, 249, 263, 571 TS SI Settings • 454 TS Sync Loss - service loss alarm trigger • 997, 999, 1003 TS Sync Loss alarm • 990 TS tab • 242, 261, 265, 308, 309, 356, 492, 751, 856 TS/Rate Control tab • 261, 571 TS-Service Backup tab • 927, 1003, 1009 TTL parameter • 267, 268, 270, 275, 901, 902, 1098 Tuner Frequency (MHz) parameter • 168 TVCT • 400, 449 TVCT playout interval • 434 TVCT Settings • 450 TVCT TS Settings • 452 Type parameter • 41, 83, 100, 107, 115, 117, 119, 124, 132, 159, 164, 285, 286, 304, 328, 334, 347, 360, 366, 389, 391, 393, 415, 418, 427, 571, 639, 766, 794, 879, 880, 938, 1049, 1146

U UDP Loss - service loss alarm trigger • 997, 999, 1000, 1003 UDP Loss - Transport Stream Loss alarm trigger • 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009 UDP Loss alarm • 990 UDP output protocol • 259, 261, 263 UDP parameter • 285, 286, 288, 294, 295, 297, 304, 500, 874, 879, 880, 887, 894, 895, 899, 923 UDP Port + 1 increment scheme • 265 UDP Port + 2 increment scheme • 265 UDP Port parameter • 241, 249, 259, 415, 418, 427, 769, 884, 885, 938, 1000 UDP protocol • 769 UDP Size parameter • 267, 268, 270, 275 UDP Stream Loss - service loss alarm trigger • 997, 999, 1000, 1003 UDP Stream Loss - Transport Stream Loss alarm trigger • 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1009 UDP Stream Loss alarm • 991 UDP Stream Loss service backup trigger • 947 Unable To Scramble Input TS In DTF Combined Transport Stream alarm • 991 Unassigning IPsec • 1195 Unbinding 3D Video Pairs • 904 Uncompressed format • 874, 879, 895 4011746 Rev AG

Index

Undersized frames counter • 151 Undo Loop Through command • 256 Unicast column socket type • 288 Unicast main socket type • 923 Unicast socket type • 241, 288, 1000 Unicast type • 285, 286, 880 Unreferenced components • 338, 371, 376, 378, 379 Unreferenced components settings • 378 Unreferenced Pid Error alarm • 991 Unreferenced Pids Maximum Number Reached alarm • 991 Unsolicited IGMP Message settings • 142 Update All GbE Multicast Backup TS settings • 920 Update All Rate Control Groups settings • 575 Update all TS settings • 263, 270, 295, 575, 932 Update command • 37, 575 Update Interval (s) parameter • 934 Update License File parameter • 37 Upgrade command • 1144 Upgrade Device setting • 1144 Upgrade-It dialog • 1146 Upgrading DCM software • 1141, 1146 Upgrading license file • 36 Upgrading software • 1141, 1146 Uploading clips • 317 Uploading fonts • 613 Uploading logos • 605, 607 Uploading TS model • 790 Upmixing • 543 Downmixing • 543 Usage parameter • 38, 41 Use Add Wizard parameter • 1184 Use Default parameter • 632, 637 Use Default Settings parameter • 249 Use this string (preshared key) parameter • 1190 User account • 17 User Account Control dialog • 1196 User Defined stream type • 331 User name • 17 User Name parameter • 19, 20, 24, 232, 525, 874, 878, 879, 890, 891, 894, 895 User Private type • 794 User Selected PCR PID Error alarm • 992 User Time parameter • 62 User Time setting • 62

V Valid Packets counter • 292, 882, 906, 910 Validation Key parameter • 41 4011746 Rev AG

VBI & Ancillary Data [Help] settings • 892, 897 VCT • 400 VCT parameter • 449 Version Info page • 41 Version information • 41 Version parameter • 142 Video (0x02) output ES type • 337 Video (0x80) output ES type • 337 Video / audio component combination • 102 Video Bit Rate Threshold (Kbps) parameter • 1003 Video Channels table • 1112, 1113 Video Format parameter • 97 Video Input Bandwidth Exceeded alarm • 992 Video Input Loss alarm • 992 Video Line Offset parameter • 874, 879 Video Offset Delay (ns) parameter • 874, 878, 879 Video parameter • 528, 530 Video Pixel Offset parameter • 874, 879 Video Processing Settings • 528, 531 Video Processing Settings table • 531 Video quality algorithm Optimization • 89, 92 Video Rate (Mbps) parameter • 891, 896 Video resolution downscaling • 506 Video settings • 892, 897 Video signal parameters • 877 Video transcoding • 506 Video X field • 512 View Bit Rate field • 512 Viewing PSI • 406 Viewing PSIP • 406 Viewing routings • 887 Viewing service grooming • 504 Viewing SI • 406 VII (SD) parameter • 892, 897 Virtual channel table • 400 Virtual Local Area Network • 138 Virtual service encoders • 1092 Virtual services • 312, 313 VITC (SD/HD) parameter • 892, 897 VLAN • 136, 138 VLAN - On parameter • 268, 270, 275, 902 VLAN Configuration page • 139, 141 VLAN Enabled parameter • 270 VLAN ID parameter • 139, 147, 267, 268, 270, 275, 874, 901, 902 VLAN Identifier parameter • 139, 147, 267, 268, 270, 275, 901, 902 VLAN IDs parameter • 142 VLAN port pairs • 139, 141 1311

Index

VLAN priority parameter • 267, 268, 270, 275, 901, 902 VLAN Settings - Enabled parameeter • 270 VLAN Settings - ID parameter • 270 VLAN Settings - Priority parameter • 270 VLAN Settings table • 139, 141 VLAN tagged frames counter • 151 VLAN tagging • 139 VSB Interface Configuration page • 156, 157 VSB Port Configuration page • 159 VSB Statistics page • 160 VSB16 modulation mode • 449 VSB8 modulation mode • 449 VSE Branch • 202 VSE Configuration Error alarm • 992 VSE Overview • 1114 VSE parameter • 1112 VSE statmux settings • 1112 VSEs • 1110 VSM (SD) parameter • 897

X-Y Position (px) parameter • 615, 618

Y Y Position (px) parameter • 607, 609 Yes access controlled • 449

W Warm restart • 1169 Warning severity level • 993 Warning to Apply Settings on Tab Change parameter • 215 Web browser toolbars • 15 Web browser user interface • 11, 17 Which computers are in Endpoint 1? settings • 1196 Which computers are in Endpoint 2? settings • 1196 Wide Aspect Ratio parameter • 538 Window (packets) parameter • 290, 906 Windows 2003 Server • 1180 Windows Firewall with Advanced Security • 1196 Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog • 1196, 1206 Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer dialog • 1206 Windows Vista • 1196 Windows XP • 1180 Worst Case processing load • 95 Write Community parameter • 59 Write Community string • 57, 59 Wrong SFP Fitted alarm • 992

X X Position (px) parameter • 607, 609 XBSI • 554 1312

4011746 Rev AG

Cisco Systems International BV

Haarlerbergweg 13-19

Amsterdam, The Netherlands www.Cisco.com

This document includes various trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. Please see the Trademarks section of this document for a list of the Cisco Systems, Inc., trademarks used in this document. All other trademarks mentioned in this document are the property of their respective owners. Product and service availability subject to change without notice. © 2012 Cisco and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved. April 2012 Printed in USA Part Number 4011746 Rev AG